16 Man Ug Ind570 en

IND570
User's Guide
Weighing Terminal
IND570 Weighing Terminal
Essential Services for Dependable Performance of Your IND570 Weighing Terminal

Congratulations on choosing the quality and precision of METTLER TOLEDO. Proper use of your new
equipment according to this Manual and regular calibration and maintenance by our factory-trained
service team ensures dependable and accurate operation, protecting your investment. Contact us
about a service agreement tailored to your needs and budget. Further information is available at
www.mt.com/service.
There are several important ways to ensure you maximize the performance of your investment:
1. Register your product: We invite you to register your product at www.mt.com/productregistration
so we can contact you about enhancements, updates and important notifications concerning
your product.
2. Contact METTLER TOLEDO for service: The value of a measurement is proportional to its accuracy
– an out of specification scale can diminish quality, reduce profits and increase liability. Timely
service from METTLER TOLEDO will ensure accuracy and optimize uptime and equipment life.
a. Installation, Configuration, Integration and Training: Our service representatives are factory-trained,
weighing equipment experts. We make certain that your weighing equipment is ready for production in
a cost effective and timely fashion and that personnel are trained for success.
b. Initial Calibration Documentation: The installation environment and application requirements are unique
for every industrial scale so performance must be tested and certified. Our calibration services and
certificates document accuracy to ensure production quality and provide a quality system record of
performance.
c. Periodic Calibration Maintenance: A Calibration Service Agreement provides on-going confidence in
your weighing process and documentation of compliance with requirements. We offer a variety of
service plans that are scheduled to meet your needs and designed to fit your budget.
d. GWP®: A risk-based approach for managing weighing equipment allows for control and improvement
of the entire measuring process, which ensures reproducible product quality and minimizes process
costs. GWP, the science-based standard for efficient life-cycle management of weighing equipment,
gives clear answers about how to specify, calibrate and ensure accuracy of weighing equipment,
independent of make or brand. GWP covers every relevant step in the equipment's life cycle.
© METTLER TOLEDO 2021
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose without the express written
permission of METTLER TOLEDO.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights: This documentation is furnished with Restricted Rights.
Copyright 2021 METTLER TOLEDO. This documentation contains proprietary information of METTLER
TOLEDO. It may not be copied in whole or in part without the express written consent of METTLER
TOLEDO.
COPYRIGHT
METTLER TOLEDO is a registered trademark of Mettler-Toledo, LLC. All other brand or product
®
names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
METTLER TOLEDO RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE REFINEMENTS OR CHANGES

WITHOUT NOTICE.
FCC Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and the Radio Interference Requirements of the
Canadian Department of Communications. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her expense.
Declaration of Conformity may be found at
http://glo.mt.com/us/en/home/search/compliance.html/compliance/.
Statement regarding harmful substances

We do not make direct use of harmful materials such as asbestos, radioactive substances or
arsenic compounds. However, we purchase components from third party suppliers, which may
contain some of these substances in very small quantities.
Warnings and Cautions
• READ this manual BEFORE operating or servicing this equipment. FOLLOW these instructions carefully.
• SAVE this manual for future reference.
WARNING
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST SHOCK HAZARD CONNECT THE TERMINAL TO PROPERLY GROUNDED
OUTLET ONLY. DO NOT REMOVE THE GROUND PRONG.
WARNING
WHEN THIS EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED AS A COMPONENT PART OF A SYSTEM, THE RESULTING DESIGN MUST BE
REVIEWED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION OF ALL
COMPONENTS IN THE SYSTEM AND THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS INVOLVED. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS
PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
NOT ALL VERSIONS OF THE IND570 ARE APPROVED FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (EXPLOSIVE) AREAS. REFER TO THE
PRODUCT DATA LABEL TO DETERMINE WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS APPROVED FOR USE IN AREAS CLASSED AS
HAZARDOUS DUE TO COMBUSTIBLE OR EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. TERMINALS THAT ARE NOT SO LABELED BY
THE FACTORY FOR DIVISION 2 OR EUROPEAN CATEGORY 3 MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IN DIVISION 2 OR ZONE
2/22 ENVIRONMENTS.
WARNING
ONLY THE COMPONENTS SPECIFIED ON THE IND570 DOCUMENTATION CAN BE USED IN THIS TERMINAL. ALL
EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS DETAILED IN THE
INSTALLATION MANUAL. INCORRECT OR SUBSTITUTE COMPONENTS AND/OR DEVIATION FROM THESE
INSTRUCTIONS CAN IMPAIR THE SAFETY OF THE TERMINAL AND COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
ONLY PERMIT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL TO SERVICE THE TERMINAL. EXERCISE CARE WHEN MAKING CHECKS,
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS THAT MUST BE MADE WITH POWER ON. FAILING TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS
CAN RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
CAUTION
BEFORE CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING ANY INTERNAL ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS OR INTERCONNECTING
WIRING BETWEEN ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT ALWAYS REMOVE POWER AND WAIT AT LEAST THIRTY (30)
SECONDS BEFORE ANY CONNECTIONS OR DISCONNECTIONS ARE MADE. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO OR DESTRUCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT AND/OR BODILY HARM.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
NOTICE
THE HARSH TERMINAL MUST BE INSTALLED NEAR AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET (WITHIN THE LENGTH OF THE INTEGRAL LINE CORD)
AND THE OUTLET MUST BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
NOTICE
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES.
Additional Warnings and Cautions for Version IND570xx

WARNING
KEEP THE TERMINAL AWAY FROM PROCESSES THAT GENERATE HIGH CHARGING POTENTIAL SUCH AS
ELECTROSTATIC COATING, RAPID TRANSFER OF NON-CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS, RAPID AIR JETS, AND HIGH
PRESSURE AEROSOLS.
WARNING
DO NOT INSTALL, DISCONNECT OR PERFORM ANY SERVICE ON THIS EQUIPMENT BEFORE POWER HAS BEEN
SWITCHED OFF AND THE AREA HAS BEEN SECURED AS NON-HAZARDOUS BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED TO DO SO
BY THE RESPONSIBLE PERSON ON-SITE.
WARNING
ONLY EX APPROVED PRODUCTS WITH APPROPRIATE EX PARAMETERS MAY BE CONNECTED TO METTLER TOLEDO
EX APPROVED TERMINALS.
WARNING
AVOID ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING DURING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.
WARNING
DO NOT USE DRY CLOTH TO CLEAN THE WEIGHING TERMINAL. ALWAYS USE A DAMP CLOTH TO CLEAN THE
TERMINAL GENTLY.
WARNING
USE THE WEIGHING TERMINAL ONLY WHEN ELECTROSTATIC PROCESSES LEADING TO PROPAGATION BRUSH
DISCHARGE IS IMPOSSIBLE.
WARNING
OPERATION IS ONLY PERMITTED WHEN OPERATIONAL AND PROCESS-RELATED ELECTROSTATIC CHARGES ARE
NOT PRESENT.
WARNING
WEAR SUITABLE CLOTHING. AVOID NYLON, POLYESTER OR OTHER SYNTHETIC MATERIALS THAT GENERATE AND
HOLD CHARGE. USE CONDUCTIVE FOOTWEAR AND FLOORING.
WARNING
AVOID PLASTIC COVERS OVER THE TERMINAL.
WARNING
EXTERNAL USB ADAPTOR (30139559) IS NOT CERTIFIED FOR USE WITH IND570XX, OR FOR USE IN DIVISION 2
OR ZONE 2/22 HAZARDOUS AREAS. USE ONLY IN NON-HAZARDOUS AREA.
WARNING
METTLER TOLEDO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT WITHIN A
DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 AREA. THE INSTALLER MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH ALL DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22
WIRING AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
WARNING
THE IND570xx TERMINAL IS NOT INTRINSICALLY SAFE LEVEL "a" OR "b"! DO NOT USE WITHIN AREAS CLASSIFIED
AS HAZARDOUS DIVISION 1 OR ZONE 0/1/20/21 BECAUSE OF COMBUSTIBLE OR EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES.
FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
THE IND570xx TERMINAL HAS A TEMPERATURE RATING OF T5 (100° C) FOR GAS AND A MAXIMUM SURFACE
TEMPERATURE RATING OF 85° C FOR DUST. IT MUST NOT BE USED IN AREAS WHERE THE AUTO IGNITION
TEMPERATURE OF THE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL IS BELOW THIS RATING.
WARNING
VERSIONS OF THE IND570 TERMINAL THAT ARE NOT FACTORY-LABELED AS DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 APPROVED
MUST NOT BE INSTALLED INTO A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 ENVIRONMENT.
WARNING
IN ORDER TO INSTALL THE IND570XX TERMINAL UTILIZING THE U.S./CANADIAN APPROVAL, METTLER TOLEDO
CONTROL DRAWING 30116036 MUST BE FOLLOWED WITHOUT EXCEPTION. IN ORDER TO INSTALL THE
CATEGORY 3 MARKED IND570XX TERMINAL UTILIZING THE EUROPEAN APPROVAL CERTIFICATE FM14ATEX0047X
AND ALL LOCAL REGULATIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED WITHOUT EXCEPTION. IN ORDER TO INSTALL THE IND570XX
TERMINAL UTILIZING THE IECEX APPROVAL, THE IECEX APPROVAL CERTIFICATE IECEX FMG 14.0022X AND ALL
LOCAL REGULATIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED WITHOUT EXCEPTION. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN BODILY
HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
THE IND570xx TERMINAL MUST BE INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED PER THE SPECIAL CONDITIONS LISTED IN
CHAPTER 2 OF THE VERSION IND570xx INSTALLATION MANUAL WITHOUT EXCEPTION. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD
RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
IF THE KEYBOARD, DISPLAY LENS OR ENCLOSURE IS DAMAGED ON A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 APPROVED
IND570xx TERMINAL THAT IS USED IN A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 AREA, THE DEFECTIVE COMPONENT MUST BE
REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. REMOVE POWER IMMEDIATELY AND DO NOT REAPPLY POWER UNTIL THE DISPLAY
LENS, KEYBOARD OR ENCLOSURE HAS BEEN REPLACED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. FAILURE TO DO SO
COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
THE INTERNAL DISCRETE I/O RELAY OPTION #30113540, OR #30113542 MUST NOT BE USED IN AN IND570xx
TERMINAL. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
WARNING
THE OPTIONAL WiFi MODULE (3049 AND 3049) MUST NOT BE USED IN AN IND570xx TERMINAL. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
USE ONLY METTLER TOLEDO PART NUMBER 30237707 BATTERY.
Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

In conformance with the European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) this device may not be disposed of in domestic waste. This also applies to countries outside the
EU, per their specific requirements.
Please dispose of this product in accordance with local regulations at the collecting point specified for
electrical and electronic equipment.
If you have any questions, please contact the responsible authority or the distributor from which you
purchased this device.
Should this device be passed on to other parties (for private or professional use), the content of this
regulation must also be related.
Thank you for your contribution to environmental protection.
Contents
1 Introduction .................................................................................. 1-1
1.1. IND570 Overview ......................................................................... 1-2
1.2. Specifications ............................................................................... 1-4
1.3. Environmental Protection ............................................................... 1-8
1.4. Inspection and Contents Checklist ................................................... 1-8
1.5. Model Identification ....................................................................... 1-9
1.6. Physical Dimensions ................................................................... 1-11
1.7. Main PCB .................................................................................. 1-14
1.8. Scale Types................................................................................ 1-15
1.9. Options...................................................................................... 1-17
1.10. Display and Keyboard ................................................................. 1-23
2 Operation ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1. Overview...................................................................................... 2-1
2.2. User Security ................................................................................ 2-1
2.3. Terminal Operation ........................................................................ 2-4
2.4. Understanding the HMI (Human Machine Interface) ........................... 2-4
2.5. Data Entry .................................................................................. 2-11
2.6. Home Screen.............................................................................. 2-15
2.7. Basic Functionality ...................................................................... 2-16
2.8. USB Host ................................................................................... 2-46
2.9. WiFi Operation ............................................................................ 2-50
2.10. Error Management, Diagnostic Information and Service Options ........ 2-51
3 Configuration ................................................................................ 3-1
3.1. Entering Setup Mode ..................................................................... 3-1
3.2. Exiting Setup Mode ....................................................................... 3-2
3.3. Setup Menu Tree ........................................................................... 3-2
3.4. Overview of Configuration .............................................................. 3-5
3.5. Scale ........................................................................................... 3-7
3.6. Application ................................................................................. 3-70
3.7. Terminal .................................................................................... 3-83
3.8. Communication .......................................................................... 3-98
3.9. Maintenance ............................................................................ 3-126
4 Applications ................................................................................. 4-1
4.1. Hands-off Operation: Automatic Tare and Automatic Print ................... 4-1
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 1

4.2. Print to USB.................................................................................. 4-4
4.3. Comparators: Configuration and Operation ....................................... 4-5
4.4. ID Prompting ................................................................................ 4-9
4.5. Information Recall ....................................................................... 4-13
Contents
4.6. Remote Terminal ......................................................................... 4-18

4.7. Simple Filling ............................................................................. 4-23
5 Service and Maintenance ............................................................... 5-1
5.1. Cleaning and General Maintenance ................................................. 5-1
5.2. Service ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.3. Screen Saver ................................................................................ 5-2
5.4. System Backup and Restore ........................................................... 5-3
5.5. Backup and Restore Using InSite™ SL .............................................. 5-7
5.6. Upgrading Firmware ...................................................................... 5-7
5.7. Restore Scale Data ........................................................................ 5-9
5.8. Leveling Guidance ...................................................................... 5-11
5.9. Problem Diagnosis and Troubleshooting ........................................ 5-12
5.10. Web Server – Analog, IDNet and SICSpro ....................................... 5-28
5.11. Web Server – POWERCELL ........................................................... 5-38
5.12. Master Reset .............................................................................. 5-46
5.13. Proactive Alarming and Alerting .................................................... 5-48
6 Parts and Accessories ................................................................... 6-1
6.1. Harsh Enclosure ........................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Panel-Mount Enclosure .................................................................. 6-4
6.3. Miscellaneous Parts ...................................................................... 6-5
6.4. Options and Accessories ................................................................ 6-6
6.5. Software Applications .................................................................. 6-14
A. Default Settings ............................................................................. A-1
A.1. Setup Defaults and Security Access ................................................. A-1
A.2. Softkeys Security Access .............................................................. A-15
A.3. Default Templates ....................................................................... A-19
B. Table and Log File Structure ........................................................... B-1
B.1. Alibi Memory ................................................................................ B-1
B.2. Memory Tables ............................................................................. B-2
B.3. Log Files ...................................................................................... B-8
B.4. Resetting Log Files ...................................................................... B-15
2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

C. Communications .......................................................................... C-1
C.1. Available Communication Interfaces ................................................ C-1
C.2. Logical (User Definable) Connections .............................................. C-6
C.3. Inputs .......................................................................................... C-7
C.4. Output Templates .......................................................................... C-9
C.5. Communication Outputs .............................................................. C-11
C.6. Continuous Output Mode.............................................................. C-13
C.7. Standard Interface Command Set (SICS) Protocol............................ C-19
C.8. Remote Discrete I/O (ARM100) ..................................................... C-32
C.9. Report Printing ............................................................................ C-33
C.10. Shared Data Access .................................................................... C-40
C.11. File Transfer ............................................................................... C-51
C.12. Remote Display .......................................................................... C-55
D. GEO Codes .................................................................................. D-1
D.1. Original Site Calibration ................................................................. D-1
D.2. New Site GEO Code Adjustment ...................................................... D-1
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 3

1 Introduction
DIV 2 AND ZONE 2/22 INSTALLATION
IF YOU WISH TO INSTALL AN IND570XX IN A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 AREA, REFER TO THE
DIVISION 2 AND ZONE 2/22 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AVAILABLE FOR DOWNLOAD AT
WWW.MT.COM/IND570. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED THERE COULD
The IND570 represents the latest in METTLER TOLEDO technology and is one of the most versatile
weighing terminals available today. Choose from conventional strain gauge or high-precision
electromagnetic force restoration weighing technologies. Specify direct PLC or PC communication
interfaces or digital I/O control. Combine these selections with the option of panel or
desk/wall/column-mounting, and the IND570 is the perfect match for nearly any industrial weighing
application, including:
• Vehicle Weighing • Silo and Hopper Weighing • Transaction Weighing

• Process Weighing • Basic Weighing • Filling and Blending
• Dosing • Tank Weighing • Over/Under Checkweighing
Enhance measurement or control applications with an ultra-fast A/D conversion rate of 366 Hz,
patented TraxDSP™ digital filtering technology, and an I/O bus update rate of 50 Hz with
conventional strain gauge load cells. The IND570 delivers precision measurement data from
milligrams to tons in a single cost effective package that easily integrates into existing systems.
The versatile IND570 excels in controlling vehicle and large vessel weighing, and simple filling and
dosing applications delivering best-in-class performance for fast, precise, accurate results in manual,
semi-automatic, or fully automatic operations. Utilize the control capabilities of the IND570 to
effectively manage project costs. Control up to 20 digital outputs through the IND570 without use of a
PLC.
For more advanced filling, the Fill-570 application enhances the IND570 terminal with a set of
capabilities designed to make repetitive filling and dispensing processes straightforward and reliable.
Without complex and costly programming, quickly configure the Fill-570 advanced filling software,
creating custom filling and dosing sequences along with blending applications for up to 6 materials
that cue operators and track process data, ultimately supporting efficiency, quality and safety.
Whether communicating weight data to a PLC or providing an easier way to perform terminal
configuration, the IND570 is easily customized to meet process requirements, adding costs only
where needed. In addition to a standard USB host and multi-function serial port, the IND570 has
three option slots that support PLC interfaces, network communication ports, and an array of digital
I/O choices.
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-1

1.1. IND570 Overview
1.1.1. Versions
Introduction
The IND570 is available in the following versions:
1.1.1.1. AC Powered Models (100-240 VAC)
• Harsh enclosure with conventional analog load cell, high-precision IDNet or SICSpro platforms, or
POWERCELL load cell connection
• Panel-mount enclosure with conventional analog load cell, high-precision IDNet or SICSpro
platforms, or POWERCELL load cell connection
1.1.1.2. 24VDC Powered Models
• Panel-mount enclosure with either conventional analog load cell, high-precision IDNet or SICSpro
load cell connection
1.1.2. Standard IND570 Features
• Basic weighing terminal for use in non-hazardous areas or Division 2 and Zone 2/22 areas
(IND570xx versions) Panel-mount or harsh environment desk/wall/column-mount enclosures
• Panel-mount or harsh environment desk/wall/column-mount enclosures
• Connection for one scale:
o Single analog load cell scale base
A network of up to 12 350-ohm load cells (8 for IND570xx)
o Single high-precision IDNet or SICSpro base
o A network of up to 14 POWERCELLs (6 for IND570xx) or a single PowerDeck platform
• Multiple range and multiple interval weighing
• 256 x 128 dot-matrix graphic display with 25 mm-high weight display
• Display, receipt and transmission of information in multiple languages
• USB host port for connection of external keyboard, USB memory device or barcode scanner. The
USB port is also used to connect the WiFi option
WARNING
EXTERNAL USB ADAPTOR (30139559) IS NOT CERTIFIED FOR USE WITH IND570XX, OR FOR USE
IN DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 HAZARDOUS AREAS. USE ONLY IN NON-HAZARDOUS AREA.
• One serial port (isolated in IND570 POWERCELL) for asynchronous, bidirectional communication
and print output via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485
• Second isolated serial port for RS-232 communication (IND570 POWERCELL only)
• Operation as a Remote Display for another METTLER TOLEDO terminal
• Real-time clock with battery backup
• Basic weighing functions including zero, tare, and printing
1-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

• Selectable over/under mode of operation for classifying
• Selectable material transfer mode of operation for simple filling or dosing
• Additional graphic display options include SmartTrac™, rate and discrete I/O status
• Graphical on-screen load-centering assistance (PowerDeck base only)
• ID mode for prompted transaction sequencing and data collection
• Tracking of material delivery rate
• Comparators – simple coincidence set points for comparison of weight or rate with absolute
target values or ranges
• Two standard memory tables for Tare and Target storage – 99 Tare records and 200 Target
records
• Unit switching between three different units, including a custom unit
• Alibi memory storage for up to 100,000 records
• Grand total and subtotal registers for accumulating weight
• Ten customizable print templates
• Report printing
• TraxDSP™ digital filtering for analog load cells
• TraxEMT™ performance monitoring and recording
• CalFree™ calibration without test weights
• Automatic load-cell addressing (POWERCELL only)
• Visual installation guidance for levelling a PowerDeck platform (POWERCELL only)
• Routine verification of system accuracy by utilizing Test Manager GWP® (Good Weighing
Practice)
• MinWeigh™ to eliminate measurement uncertainties
• Support for the following communication options:
 Ethernet TCP/IP
 Additional serial ports, COM2 and COM3
 Solid State or relay based discrete I/O interfaces
 Analog output
 ControlNet
 DeviceNet™
 EtherNet/IP
 Modbus TCP
 PROFIBUS® DP
 PROFINET®
 WiFi (dual band 2.4/5 GHz)

• Support for the following optional Application Software Modules:
Fill-570 Drive-570 COM-570 DYN-570
• Support for TaskExpert™ custom application development software

Introduction
1.2. Specifications
The IND570 terminal conforms to the specifications listed in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1: IND570 Specifications
IND570 Specifications
Enclosure Types Panel-mount stainless steel front panel with an aluminum frame
Harsh environment desk/wall/column-mount type 304 stainless steel enclosure
Dimensions (l × w × d) Panel Mount: 265 mm × 160 mm × 66.5 mm
(10.4 in. × 6.3 in. × 2.6 in.)
Harsh Environment: 265 mm × 148.4 mm × 163 mm
(10.4 in. × 5.8 in. × 6.4 in.)
Shipping Weight 3.2 kg (7 lb)
Environmental Protection Panel-mount front panel sealing is UL-approved and certified to IP65, type 4x and type 12
IND570 Harsh Environment model: UL-approved and certified to IP69K.
IND570xx: IP65.
Operating Environment All terminal types can be operated at temperatures ranging from −10° to 40° C (14° to 104° F)
at 10% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing
Hazardous Areas Only the IND570xx version is certified for use in environments classified as Division 2 or Zone
2/22 because of the combustible or explosive atmospheres in those areas.
AC Input Power Operates at 100–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 500 mA
(Harsh and panel-mount Panel-mount version provides a terminal strip for AC power connections.
models)
Harsh environment version includes a power cord configured for the country of use. The
IND570xx version provides conduit hubs and no power cord for Canadian and US approved
applications, and an open-ended power cord for ATEX and IECEx approved applications.
Note: When an IND570xx is installed in an area classified as Division 2 or Zone 2/22, special
AC wiring requirements must be met. Refer to document 30205321
DC Input Power Operates at 24 VDC, -15% - +20%, 1.25A
(Panel-mount models only; Provides a terminal strip for DC power connections
not for POWERCELL model)
24VDC input power option not available on the harsh models

Scale Types & Update Rates Analog load cells, up to twelve 350-ohm load cells (eight for IND570xx) (2 or 3 mV/V).
Update rate > 366 Hz.
or
IDNet High-Precision Line (+12V versions only, including T-Brick cell, M-Cell, Point-ADC).
Update rate determined by IDNet base.
or
SICSpro High-precision platforms that include Advanced Setup Mode. Refer to section 1.8.1.3
for details. Update rate approximately 90 Hz.
or
Up to 14 POWERCELL load cells for IND570, and up to 6 POWERCELL load cells for
IND570xx, or single PowerDeck platform. Update rate selectable up to 50 Hz.
Analog Load Cell Excitation 10 VDC
Voltage
Minimum Sensitivity 0.1 microvolts
Weight Display Displayed resolution of 100,000 counts for analog load cell scales.
Display resolution for high-precision IDNet and SICSpro bases is determined by the specific
base used.
Interface and Function Weight display: 10 Hz
Update Rates (max) – Internal discrete I/O: 50 Hz
Analog terminal versions External discrete I/O (ARM100): 25 Hz
PLC cyclic data: 25 Hz
SICS continuous (SIR): 20 Hz
MT Continuous Output: 20 Hz
Continuous Template (serial): 20 Hz (19.2-115.2Kbaud), 14 Hz (9600 baud)
Continuous Template (Eprint): 10 Hz
Update Rates (max) – IDNet Internal discrete I/O: 20 Hz
terminal versions External discrete I/O (ARM100): 20 Hz
SICSpro terminal versions External discrete I/O (ARM100): 25 Hz

POWERCELL terminal External discrete I/O (ARM100): 25 Hz
Introduction
versions
SICS continuous (SIR): 20 Hz (15 Hz when update rate is 15 Hz)
MT Continuous Output: 20 Hz (15 Hz when update rate is 15 Hz)
Continuous Template (serial): 20 Hz (19.2-115.2Kbaud), 14 Hz (9600 baud) (15 Hz when
update rate is 15 Hz)
Keypad 26 keys; 1.22-mm thick polyester overlay (PET) with polycarbonate display lens. IND570xx
version provides an additional 1-mm thick clear polyester overlay (PET) in front of the
polycarbonate display lens
Communication Standard Interfaces
Serial Port: COM1 (RS-232/RS-422/RS-485), 300 to 115,200 baud (isolated, in POWERCELL
models)
Serial Port: COM4 (POWERCELL models only) RS-232, 300 to 115,200 baud
USB Host Port: Type A connector, +5V at 100mA for connected devices (not certified for use in
hazardous areas)
Optional Interfaces
Ethernet Port: Ethernet 10 base-T / 100 base TX
COM2 serial port: RS-232, 300 to 115,200 baud
COM3 serial port: RS-232/RS-422/RS-485, 300 to 115,200 baud
WiFi (WLAN, dual band, 2.4 and 5 GHz)
Supported Protocols
USB Inputs: ASCII characters (barcode, keyboard), on-demand file import
USB Outputs: Demand output, Report printing, on-demand file export
Serial Inputs: ASCII characters, ASCII commands for CTPZ (Clear, Tare, Print, Zero), SICS (level
0 and level 1, some support for level 2 commands), Remote Display, Shared Data Server
access
Serial Outputs: Continuous and Demand outputs, SICS host protocol, report printing, interfaces
with external ARM100 Remote Input/Output modules. Optional COM-570 Application Software
available for legacy serial protocols.
Ethernet Inputs: ASCII commands for CTPZ (Clear, Tare, Print, Zero), SICS (level 0 and level 1,
some support for level 2 commands), Remote Display, Shared Data Server Access
Ethernet Outputs: Continuous and Demand Outputs, report printing
WiFi Inputs: Remote Display, SICS host protocol, Shared Data Server Access, FTP
WiFi Outputs: Demand output
PLC Interfaces
A single interface supported: Analog output, ControlNet, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP,
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET
WiFi Bands Dual-band, 2.4 and 5 GHz
WiFi Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
WiFi Output Power Max. 15 dBm
Transmission Range Up to 150 m (500 ft)

Max. Transfer Rates IEEE 802.11a/g: 54 Mbit/s
IEEE 802.11b: 11 Mbit/s
IEE 802.11n: 130 Mbit/s (MIMO), 65Mbit/s (SISO)
Antenna Internal
Connection USB 2.0 (bus-powered device)
Security WiFi Enterprise: WEP 64/128; WPA and WPA2; TKIP and AES/CCMP
hardware accelerator; LEAP, PEAP, EAP-TLS
Approvals Europe ETSI R&TTE, RED
US FCC/CFR 47 part 15 unlicensed modular
transmitter approval
Canada IC RSS
Japan MIC
Taiwan NCC
China SRCC
Turkey ETSI R&TTE, RED
Switzerland ETSI R&TTE, RED
Hong Kong [None required]
Approvals Weights and Measures
USA: NTEP Class II 100,000d; Class III/IIIL 10,000d; CoC #13-123
Canada: Class II 100,000d; Class III 10,000d; Class IIIHD, 20,000d; AM-5933
Europe: OIML R76 Class II approved divisions determined by platform; Class III and IIII
10,000e; T11060/TC8458. MID R61 (Automatic Gravimetric Filling Instrument);
T10610. MID R51 (Automatic Catchweigher); T10609.
Product Safety
UL, cUL, CE
Hazardous Area (IND570xx models only)
FM - US Class I,II Division 2 Groups C, D, F, G; Class III Division 1

Class I Zone 2 IIB T5
Zone 22 IIIC T85°C
-10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +40°C
FM – Canada Class I,II Division 2 Groups C, D, F, G; Class III Division 1
-10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +40°C
ATEX Zone 2 - II 3 G Ex ic nA [ic] IIB T5 Gc
Zone 22 - II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T85°C Dc
-10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +40°C
Zone 2 - Ex ic nA [ic] IIB T5 Gc
IECEx Zone 22 - Ex tc IIIC T85°C Dc
-10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +40°C
FM - US Cert. No.: FM17US0016X
FM - Canada Cert. No.: FM17CA0009X

ATEX Cert. No.: FM14ATEX0047X
IECEx Cert. No.: IECEx FMG 14.0022X

Introduction
1.3. Environmental Protection

WARNING
VERSIONS OF THE IND570 TERMINAL THAT ARE NOT FACTORY-LABELED AS DIVISION 2 OR ZONE
2/22 MUST NOT BE INSTALLED INTO A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 ENVIRONMENT.
WARNING
THE IND570xx TERMINAL IS NOT INTRINSICALLY SAFE LEVEL "a" OR "b"! DO NOT USE WITHIN
AREAS CLASSIFIED AS HAZARDOUS DIVISION 1 OR ZONE 0/1/20/21 BECAUSE OF COMBUSTIBLE
OR EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN
BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
When an approved version IND570xx is installed in an area classified as Division 2 or Zone 2/22,
special AC wiring requirements must be met. Refer to document 30205321, IND570xx Division 2,
Zone 2/22 Installation Guide.
1.4. Inspection and Contents Checklist

Verify the contents and inspect the package immediately upon delivery. If the shipping container is
damaged, check for internal damage and file a freight claim with the carrier if necessary. If the
container is not damaged, remove the IND570 terminal from its protective package, noting how it
was packed, and inspect each component for damage.
If shipping the terminal is required, it is best to use the original shipping container. The IND570
terminal must be packed correctly to ensure its safe transportation.
The package should include:
• IND570 terminal • Bag of parts for installation. Depending on terminal,

may include ferrites, grommets, rubber feet, sealing
• Safety warnings in multiple
gasket, etc.
languages
• Fixed angle mounting brackets • European Certificate of Conformance (Europe only)
(harsh models only)
• Bag of ATEX certified glands for IND570xx harsh versions with ATEX/IECEx approval

1.5. Model Identification
The IND570 model number is located on the data plate on the back of the terminal along with the
serial number and SCK (configuration number). Figure 1-1 shows the SCK for the standard IND570
and Figure 1-2 the SCK for the IND570xx version.
Figure 1-1: IND570 SCK Identification

Introduction
Figure 1-2: IND570xx SCK Identification

1.6. Physical Dimensions
1.6.1. Panel Mount Enclosures, IND570 and IND570xx
The physical dimensions of the Panel Mount IND570 and IND570xx enclosures are shown in Figure
1-3 in millimeters and [inches]. Figure 1-4 shows the dimensions of the cutout required for the Panel
Mount enclosure.
Figure 1-3: IND570 Panel Mount Enclosure Dimensions
Figure 1-4: IND570 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions

1.6.2. Harsh Environment Enclosures, IND570 and IND570xx
1.6.2.1. IND570
The dimensions of the harsh enclosure desk/wall-mount IND570 terminal are shown in Figure 1-5
Introduction
and Figure 1-7 in millimeters and [inches].
Figure 1-5: IND570 Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions
Figure 1-6: IND570 Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions with Fixed Angle Mounting Brackets, VESA
Mounting

Figure 1-7: IND570 Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions with Fixed Angle Mounting Brackets,
Original Mounting
1.6.2.2. IND570xx
The dimensions of the harsh enclosure desk/wall-mount IND570xx terminal are shown in Figure 1-8
and Figure 1-9 in millimeters and [inches].
Figure 1-8: Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions, IND570xx

Introduction
Figure 1-9: Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions with Fixed Angle Mounting Brackets for VESA
Mounting
1.7. Main PCB

The IND570 and IND570xx terminals’ main printed circuit board (PCB) provides the interface for
analog scales/load cell(s), SICSpro platforms, IDNet platforms or POWERCELL load cells/PowerDeck
platforms.
The main board also contains the USB Host port for connection of an external keyboard or barcode
scanner for data entry or a USB memory device that can be used for data collection, file transfer and
system backup. The USB port is also used to connect the WiFi option.
WARNING
A single standard serial port (COM1; isolated in the IND570 and IND570xx POWERCELL versions) is
located on the main board and provides RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 communication. The COM1
port is bidirectional and can be configured for various functions such as demand output, remote
display, SICS host communications, continuous output, ASCII command input (C, T, P, Z), ASCII
character input, report printing, totals printing, or connection to an ARM100 remote I/O module.
The IND570 and IND570xx POWERCELL versions also include an isolated COM4 port that provides
RS-232 communication.
The main board also contains an input from the AC (or DC) power supply, front panel keyboard
interface, and bus connectors for the option boards.
Current limiting for the IND570xx version is also located on the main board.

1.8. Scale Types
The IND570 supports three types of scale:
1.8.1.1. Analog Load Cell Scale
The IND570 main PCB includes an analog load cell interface. The terminal can drive up to twelve
350-ohm analog load cells (eight for IND570xx). The analog load cell interface is approved by ATEX,
cFMus, and IECEx for use in the IND570xx.
1.8.1.2. IDNet Scale Platform
The IND570 supports an IDNet scale through a PCB interface that connects to a unique bus on the
main board. This interface supports the newer T-brick style of high-precision base through the IDNet
scale card. The port provides the +12 volts and communication required to operate this newer style
base. The interface also supports M-Cell and Point-ADC. The older PIK module and PIK-brick cells
require +32 volts and are not supported by the IND570. The IDNet scale interface is approved for use
in the IND570xx version with ATEX and IECEx certification.
1.8.1.3. SICSpro Scale Platform
The IND570 supports a SICSpro platform through a PCB interface that connects to a unique bus on
the main board. This interface supports the high-precision platform types through the SICSpro scale
card. The port provides the +12 volts and communication required to operate these newer style
platforms.
The IND570 SICSpro interface supports only those SICSpro platforms that include the Advanced Setup
Mode (ASM).
Table 1-2 lists SICSpro high-precision platforms that support ASM and can interface with the IND570
and IND570xx terminals, as of December 2017. Please note that the SICSpro platform software may
need updated before successful communication will occur with the IND570. Details on updating the
platform software can be found in Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance.

Table 1-2: Supported SICSpro Platforms
Introduction
1.8.1.3.1. Cable-Free Floor Scale

A cable-free SICSpro floor scale option (ACW520) offers BlueTooth connectivity to the IND570 via a
module connected to the IND570 SICSpro’s M12 scale port. The module is provided with the Cable-
Free Floor Scale platform as part of the ACW520 option.
Only IND570 terminals running firmware 2.00.0086 or later are compatible with the ACW520
option.
1.8.1.4. POWERCELL Scale Platform
The main PCB on IND570 POWERCELL and IND570xx POWERCELL terminals includes a
POWERCELL load cell interface.
• The IND570 POWERCELL terminal can drive up to 14 POWERCELL PDX or GDD load cells, or up
to 14 SLB615D or SLC611D load cells.
• The IND570xx POWERCELL terminal can drive up to 6 POWERCELL PDX or GDD load cells, or up
to 6 SLB615D or SLC611D load cells.
• The POWERCELL interface on IND570 POWERCELL and IND570xx POWERCELL terminals also
supports a single PowerDeck platform, which consists of 4 POWERCELL load cells.
1.8.1.4.1. POWERCELL Network
The POWERCELL is typically found in vehicle scale applications. It operates on a digital
communications network using CANbus. The IND570 supports up to a maximum of 14 POWERCELL
cells (maximum of 6 POWERCELL cells in IND570xx) from its internal power supply. An external

power supply to power additional cells is not supported. If more than 14 cells are needed, the
IND780 PDX terminal must be used.
When used as part of a PDX cell network, the IND570 provides several diagnostic features such as
automated alerts and cell performance monitoring. These features help lower maintenance costs and
minimize downtime.
1.8.1.4.2. Isolated Serial Ports

The IND570 is designed for use in environments where the connecting cables may be exposed to
lightning surges. To help protect the terminal from damage, the COM1 and COM4 serial port on the
main board of the POWERCELL versions of IND570 and IND570xx are both electrically isolated. This
eliminates the difference in ground levels that can damage the interface circuitry.
1.8.1.5. PowerDeck Scale Platform
The POWERCELL-based PowerDeck platform provides an enhanced set of configuration and

operational capabilities:
• Save and Restore of original platform system parameters stored in each load cell of a PowerDeck
platform during initial factory configuration
• Visual Installation Guidance to assist technicians in leveling the platform during installation to
achieve original factory specified performance
• Off-center Load Assistance to guide operators during platform use
1.9. Options
The following hardware and software options are available for the IND570:
• Discrete I/O
- Internal, high-level and low-level discrete I/O
- Remote discrete I/O via ARM100 module
• COM2/COM3 Serial Ports
• Ethernet TCP/IP Port
• Programmable Logic Control (PLC) interfaces, including:
Analog Output ControlNet™ DeviceNet™ EtherNet/IP™
Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP PROFINET
• COM-570 application software

• Drive-570 application software
• DYN-570 application software
• Fill-570 application software
• TaskExpert™ custom application development software

• USB and Ethernet adapters that make these ports accessible on the exterior of the harsh
enclosure. These options are not certified for use on the IND570xx version
• WiFi (dual band 2.4/5 GHz) – internal, or remotely mounted
Introduction
• Positionable brackets for wall and column mounting of the harsh enclosure
• InSite SL Configuration Tool (PC based software for backup and restore)
1.9.1. Discrete I/O
The discrete I/O interface options include both internal and remote I/O. Only one internal discrete I/O
option board can be installed at any one time.
• An internal dry-contact relay DIO option is available with 5 inputs and 8 outputs. Each output will
switch up to 30 volts DC or 250 volts AC up to 1 amp of current. Voltages can be mixed on this
local discrete I/O option. The inputs are switch-selectable as either active (for simple pushbutton
control) or passive (for connection to PLCs or other devices that supply their own power for the
I/O). This option is not available for the IND570xx version.
• Another internal dry-contact relay DIO/serial port option is available with 2 inputs, 5 outputs and
the COM2 and COM3 serial ports. Each output will switch up to 30 volts DC or 250 volts AC up
to 1 amp of current. Voltages can be mixed on this local discrete I/O option. The inputs are
switch-selectable as either active (for simple pushbutton control) or passive (for connection to
PLCs or other devices that supply their own power for the I/O). This option is not available for the
IND570xx version.
• An internal solid state DIO option is available with 5 inputs and 8 outputs. Each output will switch
up to 30 volts up to 1 amp of current. Voltages can be mixed on this local discrete I/O option.
The inputs are switch-selectable as either active (for simple pushbutton control) or passive (for
connection to PLCs or other devices that supply their own power for the I/O).
• Another internal solid state DIO/serial port option is available with 2 inputs, 5 outputs and the
COM2 and COM3 serial ports. Each output will switch up to 30 volts DC up to 1 amp of current.
Voltages can be mixed on this local discrete I/O option. The inputs are switch-selectable as either
active (for simple pushbutton control) or passive (for connection to PLCs or other devices that
supply their own power for the I/O).
• Remote I/O function is supported by the ARM100 remote I/O module. ARM100 modules offer 4
inputs and 6 outputs. This module provides only dry-contact outputs. The ARM100’s inputs are
passive. An external 10 to 32 VDC power supply is required to operate the ARM100. Either the
COM1 or COM3 serial port is required for communication with an ARM100 module. A maximum
of 3 ARM100 modules can be connected.
The COM3 serial port is available on the COM2/COM3 option or the COM2/COM3/DIO
combination option.
• A maximum of 17 inputs and 26 outputs are supported (5 Inputs/8 Outputs local I/O option, and
three ARM100 remote I/O modules).
WARNING
THE INTERNAL DISCRETE I/O RELAY OPTION #30113540, OR #30113542 MUST NOT BE
USED IN AN IND570xx TERMINAL. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD

WARNING
INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL DISCRETE I/O OPTIONS WITH DRY CONTACT RELAYS MUST NOT BE
USED IN AREAS CLASSIFIED AS HAZARDOUS DUE TO THE PRESENCE OF COMBUSTIBLE OR
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN
BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
1.9.2. Ethernet Option

The Ethernet option provides a TCP/IP port that can be used to transmit demand templates,
continuous data, for direct access to data via a shared data server, to send email alerts and terminal
status information, and FTP transfer of tare and target tables and complete setup files. It also provides
a connection for backup and restore of the terminal’s configuration using the METTLER TOLEDO
InSite SL program.
The Ethernet port offers access to the IND570 Webserver via a customer’s local network.
If the Ethernet and the WiFi options are both installed, the WiFi option will be disabled. Only one
of these interfaces can be installed.
1.9.3. COM2/COM3 Serial Ports

Options for additional serial ports include a stand-alone COM2/COM3 option and COM2/COM3
bundled with discrete I/O. Only one option can be used at a time.
COM2 supports an RS-232 connection at communication rates from 300 to 115.2k baud.
COM3 supports an RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 connection at communication rates from 300 to
115.2k baud.
The serial/discrete I/O combination option includes 2 discrete inputs and 5 discrete outputs. Refer to
section 1.9.1 Discrete I/O,above, for details.
1.9.4. WiFi (dual band 2.4/5 GHz)

Two field installed option kits are available to add WiFi connectivity to the IND570. The kits convert
the USB port to WiFi using an "external" module. One kit is to be installed inside the harsh enclosure
(with antenna access through a plastic housing and the other is intended for remote mounting for
either the harsh or the panel enclosure.
The WiFi module does not reproduce the full functions of an IND570‘s wired Ethernet connection. The
WiFi options provide the following connection types:
• Demand output
• Remote display (full capability in the remote terminal only)
• SICS host
• FTP
• Shared data server access
If the Ethernet and the WiFi options are both installed, the WiFi option will be disabled. Only one
of these interfaces can be installed.

1.9.5. PLC Interfaces
The IND570 PLC interface options include Analog Output, ControlNet, DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, Modbus
TCP, PROFIBUS DP, and PROFINET. Only one PLC option can be used at a time.
Introduction
Additional details about each of these interfaces, the IND570 PLC Interface Manual, programming
examples and profiles, can be found at www.mt.com/IND570.
1.9.5.1. Analog Output
Analog Output refers to the representation of an internal system variable using a proportional electrical
signal. Analog Output can be used to transmit a measured value, such as the gross or net weight.
0-10 volt DC and 4-20 mA signals are provided. Only one signal can be used at a time.
1.9.5.2. ControlNet
The ControlNet option enables the IND570 terminal to communicate to ControlNet Programmable
Logic Controllers (PLCs) through direct connection to the ControlNet network.
Due to space constraints, the ControlNet interface option can only be used with panel-mount versions
of the IND570 terminals.
1.9.5.3. DeviceNet
The IND570 DeviceNet option enables the terminal to communicate to a DeviceNet network.
DeviceNet is an RS-485-based network using CAN chip technology. This network was created for bit
and byte-level devices. The network can be configured to run up to 500Kbits per second depending
on cabling and distances. Messages are limited to 8 un-fragmented bytes. Any larger message must
be broken up and sent in multiples. The IND570 implementation of DeviceNet does not support
fragmented messages – all messages are 8 bytes or shorter. The network is capable of 64 nodes
including the master, commonly called the scanner.
1.9.5.4. EtherNet/IP
This internally installed PCB module enables the IND570 terminal to communicate to EtherNet/IP
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) through direct connection to the EtherNet/IP network at either
10 or 100 MBPS speed. Both implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging) and explicit messaging
(message exchange) are supported by the IND570 software.
1.9.5.5. Modbus TCP
In IND570, the Modbus TCP is made available through the same internal PCB option that supports
the EtherNet/IP protocol. Modbus/TCP is used to establish master-slave/client-server communication
between intelligent devices. It is an open standard network protocol, widely used in the industrial
manufacturing environment. The ModbusTCP protocol takes the Modbus instruction set and wraps
TCP/IP around it.
1.9.5.6. PROFIBUS DP
The PROFIBUS option card enables the IND570 terminal to communicate to a PROFIBUS DP master
according to DIN 19 245 and programmable logic controllers such as Siemens S7 series. The
IND570 PROFIBUS communication solution consists of this internally installed PCB module and
software that resides in the IND570 terminal which implements the data exchange.

1.9.5.7. PROFINET
The PROFINET option card enables the IND570 terminal to communicate to a PROFINET master and
programmable logic controllers such as Siemens S7 series. The IND570 PROFINET communication
solution consists of this internally installed PCB module and software that resides in the IND570
terminal which implements the data exchange.
1.9.6. Application Software

The following application software modules can be added to the IND570 to provide additional
functionality for specific workplaces and weighing operations.
1.9.6.1. COM-570
The COM-570 option is a specialized software module solution focused on the needs of users
utilizing legacy communication protocols or that have special command requirements. COM-570
maintains all of the standard features and functions of the standard IND570 in addition to the specific
features and functions of the COM-570. It provides the following features and functions:
• Custom ASCII command template • PT6S3 Protocol • 8530 Host Protocol

• 8142 Host Protocol • SMA Protocol
Additional information is available in the COM-570 manual, which can be downloaded from
www.mt.com/IND570.
1.9.6.2. Drive-570
The Drive-570 option is a specialized application solution focused on simple Inbound-Outbound

vehicle weighing requirements. Some features of this software include:
• Two modes of operation: Temporary Tare ID Weighing and Permanent Tare ID Weighing
• Ability to store up to 100 Permanent Tare IDs
• Totalization of Permanent Tare IDs
• One-Step processing of Temporary IDs
• Reprint of previous transaction ticket
• Inbound Weight, Date and Time available on both inbound and outbound tickets
• Storage of up to 2000 transactions
• Support for all IND570 standard languages
Additional information is available in the Drive-570 manual, which can be downloaded from
www.mt.com/IND570.
1.9.6.3. DYN-570
The DYN-570 is a specialized application solution used for in-motion weighing of conveyor-born
packages. DYN-570 is compatible with analog load cell based weighing conveyors. DYN-570 is
available in two forms: DYN-570 Basic (ExpressWeigh®) and DYN-570 Advanced
(ExpressCheck®).

ExpressWeigh (DYN-570 Basic) is designed for random package weighing and allows for collection
of additional package data to combine with the package weight. ExpressCheck (DYN-570 Advanced)
is an in-motion check weighing application. It includes all of the functionality of the basic application,
and adds the ability to perform three-zone over/under checkweighing, using ID information stored in
Introduction
the Target Table.
Additional information is available in the Dyn-570 manual, which can be downloaded from
www.mt.com/IND570.
1.9.6.4. Fill-570
The Fill-570 is a special application that can be added to the IND570 terminal to provide additional
filling and dosing control. It provides control for the following filling sequences:
• Dose out to target • Fill to target • Blend (up to 6 materials)

• Dose out with an automatic • Fill with a dump to empty • Blend (up to 6 materials) with
refill of supply material(s) a dump to empty
Additional features of this software include:
• Specialized discrete I/O assignments for stand-alone control of filling and dosing systems
• Storage of formulas (multiple material blends)
• As-needed scaling of formulas
• Process statistics (maximum cycle time, out of tolerance count, etc.)
• Supply material conservation to support waste reduction
Additional information is available in the Fill-570 manual, which can be downloaded from
www.mt.com/IND570.
1.9.7. TaskExpert™
TaskExpert functionality provides a way to modify the standard capabilities of an IND570 so that it
more closely aligns with a customer’s specific application requirements. TaskExpert is a combination
of a programming visualization tool, an execution engine and the basic functionality of the terminal.
Modifications may be made to the standard sequences of operation and additional functionality may
be added to the basic operation of the terminal.
TaskExpert custom programs that were written for the IND560 terminal will function on the IND570.
The TaskExpert software development tool provides a converter function for this purpose.
1.9.8. InSite SL Configuration Tool

InSite™ SL is available to end users of IND570 terminals. The IND570 terminal can connect to a PC
running InSite SL via Ethernet or Serial to provide the following functions:
• Saving terminal configuration, data tables and information logs to a local PC

• Loading a saved configuration to other terminals performing similar applications
• Restoring to a ‘last known good state’ for service purposes

1.10. Display and Keyboard
Originally, the IND570 provided an organic LED (OLED) display. This has recently been changed to a
TFT LCD display. Both displays are 256 x 128 dot matrix graphic types.
An example of the IND570 front panel is shown in Figure 1-10.
WiFi signal
indication
Metrology line
System line Service icon
Weight and Numeric
application keypad
Tare indication Legend

display
Softkey labels
Navigation
Softkeys keys
Clear, Zero, Tare

and Print keys
Figure 1-10: IND570 Front Panel Layout
1.10.1. Display Layout

• A metrology line is designed to show the capacity and increment size information for the scale.
This line is always shown except when in the setup mode. If multiple ranges are selected, this
line will scroll through each of the available capacities and ranges. The metrology line can be
enabled/disabled in Setup.
• The WiFi signal graphic is located to the right of the metrology line and indicates if the WiFi
module is connected to a wireless access point or not and, if it is connected, how strong the
signal is. The symbols are:
Not connected Acceptable signal
Very weak signal Strong signal
Weak signal
• The system line is used to display system messages, messages sent remotely from a PLC, and
any asynchronous error messages.
• The Service Icon graphic is shown in the system line when specific service events are triggered in
the terminal. Details of what has triggered the Service Icon can be found by pressing the
INFORMATION RECALL softkey and then the SERVICE ICON softkey.
• The middle portion of the display is reserved for the weight display. If the auxiliary display is
enabled, this area of the display is shared between the weight display and the selection for
auxiliary display (Figure 1-11, Figure 1-12, Figure 1-13). Random data entry is also shown in
the bottom of this area.

Introduction
Figure 1-11: Small Material Transfer SmartTrac Enabled
o SmartTrac is one of the available options for the auxiliary display. If SmartTrac is disabled,
the weight display area can be shared with the Rate display (Figure 1-12) or DIO status
display (Figure 1-13Figure 1-13).
Figure 1-12: Rate Display
Figure 1-13: DIO Status Display
• The Tare display is designed to show the current Tare value and type (pushbutton or preset). The
Tare display can be separately enabled and disabled in Setup.
• The Legend display area provides the user with current operational information such as center of
zero status, gross or net mode, etc.
• The very bottom of the physical display area is reserved for showing the graphic labels (icons) for
the softkeys. Display positions for up to five softkey icons are provided. Chapter 2, Operation,
provides more detailed information about all home screen softkeys, in the Softkeys and Icons
section.
• To the right of the softkey icon area, space is reserved for MORE UP ( ) or MORE DOWN ( )
symbols. If present, these indicate additional softkey selections are available by pressing the UP
or DOWN navigation keys. Up to 15 softkeys, presented in three sets of five, can be programmed
for the home position, depending upon the weighing options and terminal functions enabled. The

softkey setup and key mapping capabilities of the terminal determine the row and position of
each softkey.
1.10.2. Front Panel Keys
Four dedicated scale function keys are located below the five softkeys. These provide the interface to
zero and tare the scale, clear a tare or data entry, and to initiate a print.
The terminal’s 12-key alphanumeric keypad is used to enter data and commands. The alphanumeric
keys are located on the upper-right side of the terminal front panel. Refer to Chapter 2, Operation, for
additional details about the entry of alphanumeric data.
Five navigation keys are located below the alphanumeric keypad. These keys enable the operator to
navigate through setup options in the menu tree and within setup and application screens.

2 Operation
2.1. Overview
This chapter provides information about navigation, basic features and functions, user notifications,
easy file transfer and report generation using the IND570 terminal.
Specific operation of each IND570 terminal depends on enabled functions and parameters that are
configured in setup. Individual setup parameters are described in Chapter 3, Configuration.
Configuration and operation of some of the more complex terminal applications are further detailed in
Chapter 4, Applications.
2.2. User Security

It is often required that equipment access or use be limited according to the security clearance of the
user. These limitations may be due to legal regulations or to customer preference. Some installations
operate in a “trusted” environment, where security is managed within the scope of the operation
perimeter and no additional security is required from the weighing terminal. The opposite extreme
may be found in highly regulated industries where every operation must be recorded and authorized
by signature or login.
The IND570 supports four levels of user security that rely on appropriate username/password
entry for access to setup and terminal functions accessible from the home screen. Refer to
Appendix A Default Settings, to determine security levels assigned to specific setup parameters
and home screen functions.
Administrator An Administrator has unlimited access to all areas of the operating and setup system.
Multiple Administrator accounts can be defined; however, the Primary Administrator
account can be changed but never deleted.
At the factory, the terminal is configured with a Primary Administrator account with a
username of admin. The factory default password is null (no password). This account’s
username cannot be changed, but a password can be added or modified. As configured at
the factory, the terminal requires no login or password entry to access setup mode.
Even if additional username/password combinations are created, all functions of the
terminal are available to all users until a password is programmed for the Primary
Administrator account.
Maintenance Access can be limited by assigning this security level to a user.
Supervisor Access can be limited by assigning this security level to a user.
Operator One default operator account with a username of anonymous and password null (no
password) is provided. Sites with validation requirements might create many operator
accounts, each with a username and password entry requirement.

When the Metrology switch (SW1-1) is turned “on” (refer to section 1.2.2) and a region approval is
selected in setup, all users with Administrator rights are reduced to the Maintenance level. This is
done to protect metrologically significant parameters that cannot be changed when the terminal is
approved.
Operation
When setting a password for a user, be sure to remember it and protect it from access by
unauthorized personnel. If the password is changed or forgotten, access to the setup menu and
some terminal functions will be lost. To regain access and functionality, a master reset of the
terminal must be performed. This will reset all username and passwords, but also remove any
custom configuration.
2.2.1. Accessing Setup and Terminal Functions

When a password has been programmed for the Primary Administrator username (refer to Chapter 3,
the Terminal | Users section), a security challenge is presented when attempting to access and modify
setup selections (Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1: Security Challenge – Notification of Invalid Rights
To save time when security is enabled, the first thing a user should do when entering setup to view or
make modifications to configuration is navigate to the Login branch at the very top of the setup menu
tree and enter a valid username/password combination.
Figure 1-2: Login Branch in Setup Menu Tree
The user can enter any username/password stored in the User table. Successful entry will grant
security access at the level associated with the entered account. While in setup, a user can move to a
higher level of security clearance by entering a new username/password associated with a higher
security clearance level at the Login branch. The security login expires upon exit of setup.
Outside setup, a similar security challenge may be presented to the user when attempting to access
select operations via softkeys on the home page and runtime screens (Figure 1-3). Users are first
notified that a security login is required. They are then taken directly to a login screen. The user can
enter any username/password stored in the User table. Successful entry will grant security access at
the level associated with the entered user account.
The security login expires upon exit of the selected operation.
2-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

Figure 1-3: Operation Access Security Notification and Login
2.2.2. Metrology Switch

If the metrology switch (SW1-1) is placed in the approved (ON) position, access to the Scale branch
of setup and to other metrologically significant areas is not permitted. The metrology switch can be
used to prevent Administrator level users from accessing metrology features even if the region
approval is “None”.
Selecting a specific region approval and setting the Metrology switch to ON alters some scale
functions:
If the approval is Canada, the terminal’s functions are changed as follows:
1. The keyboard tare command carries out a rounded tare.

2. The center of zero division is 0.2d. The default value for non-approved mode is 0.25d.
If the approval is OIML, then the power up zero range is +/- 10% and pushbutton zero range is
+/-2%. For non-approved mode, this range can be selected by the user.
If the approval is Argentina, the terminal’s functions are changed as follows:
3. Access to the setup screens is prohibited while the metrology switch is engaged. If an attempt is
made to access the setup menu, a message is displayed that says “Access denied. Scale is
Approved.”
4. All shared data server write ability via COM1 (serial) and Ethernet is disabled. Information can
still be read from shared data, but writing to shared data is not possible.
5. The FTP server (both serial and Ethernet) can only read files from the terminal. It cannot write
anything to the terminal. Shared data field nf0101 will automatically be set to 2.
6. If SICS is selected as an assignment for a port, all SICS commands must be disabled. When a
SICS command is received, an “EL” response is returned.
7. A preset tare from the front panel, from the tare table, received serially (for example 1.00T via the
CTPZ input assignment) or received from a PLC, can only be accepted if there is no motion on the
scale. If motion is detected, the terminal should wait for the programmed stability timeout period
and, if the motion continues, discard the request. The preset tare feature will therefore operate just
like the semi-automatic tare feature.
If the approval is Australia, the terminal's functions are changed as follows:
8. The Power-up Delay setting for analog scale types found at Scale | Type is not available.
If the approval is Korea, the terminal's functions are changed as follows:

9. The selection of non-SI units is not permitted. The only units available for selection are kilograms
(kg), tons and grams.
If the approval is Thailand, and the Application setting at Scale | Type | Application is Vehicle, the
following changes are implemented in the terminal:
Operation
10. Under Zero Blanking is disabled. The terminal will display negative weight values instead of
underload symbols.
11. Activation of the screen saver is disabled.
12. COM1 serial port interface selection is restricted to RS-232.
Access to the metrology switch may be sealed in conformity with local regulations in “legal-for-trade”
applications. Figure 1-4 shows the location of the metrology switch.
Figure 1-4: Metrology Switch Location
Refer to the PCB Switch Settings section in the IND570 Installation Manual, for further information
about SW1-1 and SW1-2 switch settings.
After setting the terminal to approved, and before exiting setup, SW1-1 should be switched to ON
while the terminal is powered up. Take care when setting the switch in the powered terminal.
2.3. Terminal Operation

Key names and commands are identified in this manual by upper- and lower-case letters. Key
names, such as ENTER, are in all upper-case letters, and commands, such as “select,” are in lower-
case (unless they begin a sentence, in which case the first initial is upper-case). For example:
“Press START...” means to press the START softkey .

“Select an option...” means to use the UP or DOWN navigation keys to highlight a setting, then
press ENTER.
2.4. Understanding the HMI (Human Machine

Interface)
Navigate within applications and configure the IND570 using:

• Navigation keys • Scale function keys
• Softkeys • Shared Numeric and Alpha keys
The locations of these keys and the display screen area are shown in Figure 1-5.
Alphanumeric
keypad
Weight and application area

Legend Area
Softkey labels
Navigation
Softkey buttons keys
Clear, Zero, Tare

and Print keys
Figure 1-5: Key Locations and Display Screen
2.4.1. Navigation Keys

Navigation keys (see Figure 1-5) enable navigation within the setup menu tree, setup screens, and
application screens.
2.4.1.1. UP and DOWN Navigation Keys
These move the focus up or down to different setup options within the menu tree (focus is indicated
by highlighted text), to different fields within a setup page, and to switch to another page of available
softkeys. The UP and DOWN navigation keys are also used to move to a next or previous page when
a scroll bar indicates that two or three pages are used for configuration fields associated with a
specific parameter. The example in Figure 1-6 shows a configuration parameter that requires three
pages to display all of the associated configuration fields. The scroll bars indicate which page of the
three is displayed.

Scroll bar
indicating
page 1 of 3
Operation
Scroll bar
indicating
page 2 of 3
Scroll bar
indicating
page 3 of 3
Figure 1-6: Example of Scroll Bars, Indicating Three Pages of Configuration Fields
Press the DOWN navigation key to move from page 1 to 2 or from page 2 to 3. Press the UP
navigation key to move from page 3 to 2 or page 2 to 1.
2.4.1.2. LEFT and RIGHT Navigation Keys
These keys are used to:
• Expand (RIGHT navigation key) the setup options in the menu tree
• Collapse (LEFT navigation key) the setup options in the menu tree
• Move the cursor position to a specific character in text areas
• Enable left and right scrolling to view all information available on a screen
2.4.1.3. ENTER Key
The ENTER key is used to:
• Open the setup page for viewing and editing setup parameters
• Move the focus from a field label to a setup value for that field
• Accept new values entered in a field and move the focus to the next field label
2.4.2. Softkeys and Icons
Five softkey buttons (Figure 1-5) are located along the bottom of the display screen. A graphic icon
that identifies a softkey’s function is displayed directly above each softkey. Five softkey identifiers or
labels can be displayed at one time. IND570 supports up to a total of 15 possible softkey functions,
displayed on three separate rows. A MORE DOWN symbol displayed on the lower-right corner of
the screen (to the far right of the softkey icons) indicates that more softkey selections are available.
Press the DOWN navigation key to display additional softkey screens, and UP to display the previous
softkey screen.
Chapter 3, Configuration, Terminal | Softkeys provides further detail on the configuration and
customization of softkeys.
Softkeys and application displays use graphic icons for identification. Table 1-1 lists these icons and
their functions, categorized according to their use/s within the HMI.

Refer to Appendix B, Default Settings, for additional details on the security levels for these softkey
associated functions.
Table 1-1: Icons and Functions
Icon Function Icon Function
Information Recall Options
Recall information Weight Recall
Metrology Recall TaskExpert™ Checksum
System Information Recall Print
Service Information Recall Terminal Status
Load Cell Detail (POWERCELL version Reset Counters (POWERCELL

only) version only)
Connected Devices Recall Email
Transmit Email Bluetooth Information Recall
WiFi Information Recall
Softkey Menu and Setup
More Softkey Selections (scroll

Enter Setup Menu
rows up and down)
Calibration Icons
CalFree Calibration Capture Zero
Capture Span Step Calibration
Service Mode (access the IDNet service

Start Calibration Test
mode)
Run Calibration Test Test Weight Information
Skip (skips failed Calibration Test step

Test Information
and continues with the test)
Load cell address (POWERCELL version

only)

GWP® Icons
Start (Any user is valid, but user
Operation
GWP Test Access name must be entered to initiate

test)
Test Weight Information Test Information
Skip (skips failed GWP Test step and

Clear Test Weights
continues with the test)
Table, Memory and Function Access
Target Memory (access the target

Tare Memory (access the tare table)
table)
Alibi Memory Active Target
Search (begin the search of a

View Table (access a table to view or
table for a record or group of
retrieve a record)
records)
Tare (captures live scale weight into the

Comparators
tare record – Tare Table edit only)
Reports (recall and print reports for Alibi Clear Tare and Target Table n &
Memory, Tare Table, or Target Table) Totals
Transaction Counter Reset Counter
Time & Date Print
Customized Print Triggers 1, 2

Repeat Print
and 3
Totals Recall Clear Subtotal
USB File Transfer (refer to section

Clear All 0 for details on security
surrounding USB file transfer)
ID (initiates a programmed transactional POWERCELL Performance Log
sequence). ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4 (Triggers a manual record:
available. POWERCELL version only)
Editing
Clear All Exit (return to previous screen)
Delete Insert

Edit Validate Entry/Transaction (OK)
Escape (exit without storing) Copy
Display Icons
Times 10 Display (expands the displayed SmartTrac (turns SmartTrac

weight by 10)* display off and on)
MinWeigh Unit Switching
Backlight Adjustment
Special Control
Target Control Start
Pause Stop/Abort
No Clear Total
Reset
Task Selection Icons (only used with TaskExpert™ is installed)
Task List – Displays list of assigned Task 2 – Starts TaskExpert

TaskExpert applications application designated as Task 2
Task 1 – Starts TaskExpert application Task 3 – Starts TaskExpert

designated as Task 1 application designated as Task 3
* Note that for IDNet platforms in the approved mode, in order for the x10 function to operate properly, the
Update Rate must be set at 20. Values of 5 or 10 for the update rate will result in longer display of the
expanded weight value, which is not permitted.

2.4.3. Scale Function Keys
The scale function keys, indicated in Figure 1-5, are:
ZERO When the scale platform or weighbridge is empty, the terminal should indicate
Operation
zero. The gross zero reference is recorded during calibration. Press the ZERO
scale function key to capture a new gross zero reference point if pushbutton zero
is enabled in configuration and the weight is within the zero range.
TARE Tare is the weight of an empty container. Tare is normally used to determine the
net weight of the contents of a container. Press the TARE scale function key when
an empty container is on the scale. The terminal then displays a zero net weight.
As the container is loaded, the terminal then displays the net weight of the
contents. Pushbutton tare must be enabled to use this key in this manner.
When the empty weight of the container is a known value, enter the tare weight
using the numeric keys and then press the TARE scale function key. The terminal
will display the net weight of the contents of the container. Keyboard tare must be
enabled in order to use this key in this manner. Is the secondary Tare display is
enabled, the tare value and type of tare will show in the lower left of the display
(Figure 1-5).
CLEAR When in the net weight mode, press CLEAR to clear the current tare value; the
display will revert to the gross weight value. CLEAR operates regardless of
motion on the scale. Note that once the tare value has been cleared, it cannot be
recalled. The complete tare process as described above must be performed.
When in alphanumeric entry mode, CLEAR functions like a backspace key.
Position the cursor at the end of data to be deleted and press the CLEAR key.
Press the CLEAR key once for each character to be deleted. When first entering a
data entry box, the previous entry will be in focus. Pressing CLEAR at this point
will clear the entire previous entry.
PRINT Press the PRINT scale function key to initiate a demand output of an assigned
print template. A serial, USB or Ethernet print connection must be configured to
link a template to the selected serial, USB or Ethernet port. When a print
command is issued, Printing appears in the system line for 3 seconds (Figure
1-14).

2.4.4. Alphanumeric Keys
When data entry is required, use the terminal’s 12-key alphanumeric keypad (see Figure 1-7) to
enter letters, numbers and special characters.
1?!:,
Shift Key * # + - and

additional
punctuation
Zero and space characters
Figure 1-7: Alphanumeric Keypad Layout
Position the cursor in the field (see Navigation Keys) and press the alphanumeric keys to enter the
appropriate data. Press the DECIMAL key to enter decimal points where necessary. A setup parameter,
at Terminal | Region | Language, changes this decimal input to a comma.
During data entry, the CLEAR key functions like a backspace key (see Figure 1-5). Position the cursor
at the end of data to be deleted and press the CLEAR key once for each character to be deleted. When
a data entry box is first selected, the entire data string will be in focus. Pressing CLEAR at this point
will clear the entire previous entry.
The ESCAPE and EXIT softkeys exit the data entry process without accepting any of the new
data typed. Any data that was in the entry field before the new entry was initiated will remain there.
Once desired alphanumeric characters have been entered in appropriate fields on the screen, press
the ENTER key to accept the entries.
2.5. Data Entry

When data entry is possible, an entry mode graphic will appear at the top right of the terminal
display, as shown in Figure 1-8. The entry mode graphic represents one of several possible entry
modes as listed in Table 1-2.
Figure 1-8: Data Entry Mode Type

Table 1-2: Data Entry Modes
Graphic Entry Mode

Numeric Entry
Operation
Upper Case Alpha Entry

Lower Case Alpha Entry
The SHIFT key on the keypad (refer to Figure 1-7) is used to change between the available entry
modes. The modes available depend on the type of entry field selected.
2.5.1. Data Entry Modes

2.5.1.1. Numeric Entry
In this mode, only the numeric value shown on the key pressed is entered. Multiple presses of the
numeric key will result in multiple entries of the same number. The decimal point is also available.
2.5.1.2. Upper- and Lower-Case Alpha Entry
In these modes, the first character shown under the large number on the key pressed is entered
(either a capital or lower case letter, except for the "1" key and the "." key). Each key supports
multiple characters. To enter the second character shown on the key, press the key a second time
before the timeout period. To enter the third character shown on the key, press the key one more time
before the timeout period. If the key is pressed again before the timeout, it will show the next character
(for the "1" and "." keys) or wrap back around to the first character. The space key (located on the
"0" number key) is also accessed in these modes.
When a language other than English is selected in terminal setup, various unique characters for the
selected language will become available when their respective key is pressed.
2.5.2. Special Symbols and Punctuation Entry

Two of the keys provide access to punctuation and other special characters and symbols. Due to the
number of characters associated with “.” and “1” keys, these keys function differently than the other
alphanumeric keys. When in the upper case or lower case letter entry mode,
pressing the "1" key or the "." key will generate a pop-up screen with the first character in focus
(Figure 1-9, Figure 1-10, Table 1-3).

Figure 1-9: “.” Key Characters
Figure 1-10: “1” Key Characters
Navigate (UP, DOWN, RIGHT, LEFT) until the desired character is in focus, and press ENTER.
Table 1-3 shows available symbols and special characters and their access key. If an incorrect
character is entered, the CLEAR key will delete the character from the data entry box.
To exit without selecting a character, press the left softkey. The far left softkey functions as an ESCAPE
or EXIT softkey key when no softkey is actually displayed.
Table 1-3: English & Global Special Symbols and Characters
Mode Key English & Global Keyboard Settings
1 ?!,:;'"()/\|[]`{}¡¿$€£¢¥
. *#+-±×÷<=>@&%°«»µ©®^_~²³
2.5.3. Global Character Entry

If Keypad Selection (in setup at Terminal | Region | Language) is set to Global, all the international
characters will be added to the end of the standard alpha character rotation for the associated key.
For example, when Global is selected, all the international versions of the letter "e" that are supported
in the ISO8859-15 character set are added to the end of the character selections on the "d e f" key
after the letter "f". Table 1-4 shows which keys support which characters, and the sequence in which
they appear.
Note that no additional characters are associated with the "5" key.
Russian Cyrillic characters are not supported through the shared alphanumeric keypad.

Table 1-4: Global Characters
Mode Key English Global

2 ABC ABCÀÁÄÂÃÅÆÇ
Operation
3 DEF DEFÈÉËÊ
4 GHI GHIÌÍÏÎ
5 JKL JKL
6 MNO MNOÑÒÓÖÔÕŒ
7 PQRS PQRSŠ
8 TUV TUVØÙÚÜÛ
9 WXYZ WXYZÝŸŽ
2 abc abcàáäâãåæç
3 def defðèéëê
4 ghi ghIìíïî
5 jkl jkl
6 mno mnoñòóöôõœ
7 pqrs pqrsßš
8 tuv tuvøùúüû
9 wxyz wxyzýÿž
2.5.3.1. Russian Characters
The 12-key alphanumeric keypad cannot support Cyrillic characters of the Russian language. In this
case, softkeys function as alpha keys (see Figure 1-11) that are used to enter these unique
alphabetic characters. The softkeys that support Cyrillic characters are automatically displayed when
focus is moved into a data entry box that supports alpha entry. Each softkey contains 1-7 Cyrillic
characters (Figure 1-12).
Character sets
above associated
softkeys
Figure 1-11: Cyrillic Characters via Softkeys

Figure 1-12: Additional Rows of Cyrillic Characters
To enter a character, use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move to the row of softkeys that shows the
group including the desired character. The presence of the MORE UP / MORE DOWN symbols to the
right of the softkeys indicates that additional sets of characters are available. Once the correct row is
showing, press the softkey under the group of characters which includes the desired character.
At this point, the characters above the softkey will change to show one character per softkey (Figure
1-13).
Figure 1-13: One Character Per Softkey
Now, press the softkey that corresponds to the desired character. Also note that the MORE DOWN
symbol is shown at the right of the softkeys. Press the DOWN navigation key to view the second row
of characters. This group will include an ESCAPE softkey (Figure 1-12). If the wrong group of
characters was selected, use this softkey to return to the character set selection screen.
Repeat this process until all Cyrillic characters have been entered. The CLEAR key can be used to
delete unwanted characters in the entry box. The ESCAPE softkey on the symbol group of
softkeys ends the data entry process without accepting any of the new data typed. Data in the entry
field will revert to whatever was in the entry box before the new entry was initiated.
Once all desired characters have been entered in appropriate fields on the screen, press the ENTER
key to accept the entries.
2.6. Home Screen

The Home screen is the only screen that provides operator access to the programmable softkeys.
Figure 1-14 shows a sample screen with a message showing in the system line.
Metrology line
System line
Weight and
Application area
SmartTrac shown in
auxiliary display
MORE DOWN symbol

Softkey indicating more Softkey
icons selections
Figure 1-14: Default Home Screen, System Line with Print Message Displayed

The appearance of the Home Screen will vary depending on the terminals’ configuration, but it can
include*:
Metrology Line Displays capacity and increment settings and WiFi signal strength, if the WiFi option is
installed
Operation
System Line Displays system messages, application data and the service icon
Weight and Displays weight, units, tare and other application-specific weighing data
Application Area
Service Icon Indicates that a service specific event has occurred in the terminal
Softkey Icons Displays the icons for the active softkey functions. The appearance of a MORE DOWN
symbol or a MORE UP symbol indicates that more softkey selections are available
* Not all possible Home screen functions and display items are listed.
2.7. Basic Functionality

This section provides information about the IND570 basic functionality. Additional areas of
functionality specific to application software available for the IND570 are addressed in the specific
application manuals. Basic functions addressed in this section include:
• Zero • Tare • Unit Switching

• Expand by 10 • Print • Totalization
• Remote Display • CalFree™ • MinWeigh
• Calibration & GWP Tests • Calibration Management • Test Manager GWP®
• Time and Date • ID • Target Comparison
• SmartTrac™ • Comparators • Alibi Memory
• Table Searches • Reports • Information Recall
• Email • USB Host
WARNING
For details on activating some of the more complex functions of IND570, please refer to Chapter 3,
Configuration and Chapter 4, Applications.
2.7.1. Zero
The Zero function is used to set or reset the initial zero reference point of the IND570. There are three
types of zero setting modes:
• Automatic Zero Maintenance

• Power-Up
• Pushbutton

2.7.1.1. Automatic Zero Maintenance
Automatic Zero Maintenance (AZM) enables the IND570 to compensate for the buildup of small
amounts of weight and track itself back to the center of zero. Within the AZM operating range
(programmable from 0.00 to 10.00 divisions), when the terminal is in a no motion condition, it
makes small adjustments to the current zero reading to drive the weight reading toward the true
center-of-zero. When the weight is outside of the programmed AZM range, this feature is not
functional.
2.7.1.2. Power-Up Zero
Power-Up Zero enables the IND570 terminal to capture a new zero reference point after power is
applied. If the terminal detects motion during a power-up zero capture function, it will continue to
check for a no-motion condition until zero is captured.
Power-up zero can be disabled or enabled, and the acceptable range above and below calibrated
zero configured. The range is programmable from 0% to 100% of capacity and can include a
positive range and also a range below calibrated zero.
2.7.1.3. Pushbutton Zero
The pushbutton (semi-automatic) zero function can be accomplished by:
• Pressing the ZERO scale function key

• Programming a discrete input for zero and then activating this discrete input
• PLC command to the IND570
• Serial command (SICS or CTPZ protocols)
• A custom application
The range for all types of semi-automatic zero is selectable (0% to 100%) plus or minus from either
the calibrated zero point (if power-up zero is disabled) or from the initial zero setting point (if power-
up zero is enabled).
Remote initiation of the semi-automatic Zero command is possible via a discrete input, an ASCII ‘Z’
command sent serially (CPTZ and SICS), a command initiated by the PLC interface, or from an
application.
2.7.1.4. Timed Zero
The Timed Zero function works to monitor the weighing system to ensure that the scale sees the
center of zero at stability within a certain time. This function has been implemented to satisfy
requirements of the MID R51 approval for automatic catch weighing equipment.
The timed zero function is a combination of internal timer, display messages and a discrete output
alarm. Once timed zero is enabled, an internal timer is initialized. If the scale sees the center of zero
with no motion, the timer resets and the sequence begins again. If the scale does not see zero before
the timer expires, the IND570 will turn on the "Zero Requested" discrete output and displays a "Zero
Required” message in the system line.
After this, the timing sequence begins again. If the scale sees the center of zero with no motion, the
discrete output is turned OFF, the timer resets and the sequence starts over again. If the timeout

expires first, the IND570 will turn OFF the "Zero Requested" discrete output for 200ms then turn it
back ON and display the "Zero Required” message again in the system line.
After this, the timing sequence begins again. If the timer expires a third time without resetting, the
IND570 will:
Operation
• Turn OFF the "Zero Requested" discrete output for 200ms then turn it back ON
• Display the "Zero Required” message again in the system line
• Show dashes in the weight display to indicate invalid data
• Activate the System Error Alarm discrete output
• Set the Data Valid bit within the PLC cyclic data as invalid
• Change Status Word B of the Continuous Output data stream to indicate Zero Not Captured
At this point, the scale must see the center of zero at stability or it will remain disabled. After seeing
center of zero at stability (a ZERO command may be required), all data outputs will return to valid
status, the weight display will reappear, the Zero Requested discrete output will turn OFF and the
System Error Alarm output will return to OFF status.
It is recommended to leave Timed Zero disabled (its default setting) unless the
application/installation requires MID R51 approval.
2.7.2. Tare
Tare is the weight of an empty container. A tare value is subtracted from the gross weight
measurement, providing a net weight (material without the container). The tare function can also be
used to track the net amount of material being added to or removed from a vessel or container. In this
second case, the weight of the material in the container is included with the tare weight of the
container as tare. The display then reflects the net amount being added to or removed from the
vessel.
The IND570 display area can be configured in setup to display the active Tare value (see Figure 1-5
and Figure 1-14). Depending on the Tare type, the numeric Tare value may display with a T label or
a PT label.
Tare types and associated operations available on the IND570 include Pushbutton Tare, Keyboard
Tare (Preset Tare), Net Sign Correction, Auto Tare and Clear Tare.
2.7.2.1. Pushbutton Tare
Pushbutton tare can be configured in setup as enabled or disabled. When disabled, the TARE scale
function key cannot be used to obtain a tare.
If enabled, pressing the pushbutton TARE scale function key initiates a semi-automatic tare. The
IND570 will attempt to perform a tare process. If successful, the display changes to a zero net weight
indication and the previous weight on the scale is stored as the tare value. The net mode will be
indicated on the display. If the Tare display is enabled, the pushbutton tare value will be shown with
a T label.
Several conditions could prevent the pushbutton tare function from working:

Motion Pushbutton tare cannot be taken when the scale is in motion. If motion is
detected when a pushbutton tare command is received, the IND570 will wait up
to three seconds (default value) for a no-motion condition. If a stable (no-
motion) weight condition occurs before the three second timeout (default value)
expires, the pushbutton tare command is executed. If there is still motion at the
end of timeout period, the command is aborted and a “Tare Failed–Motion” error
displays.
Pushbutton If pushbutton tare is configured as disabled, the TARE scale function key will not
Tare Disabled initiate a semi-automatic tare.
Negative Gross Any pushbutton tare attempted when the gross weight is at or below zero is
Weight ignored and a “Tare Failed–Below Zero” error displays. Ensure that the gross
weight is above zero for Tare to be possible.
2.7.2.2. Keyboard Tare
A keyboard tare, also called a preset tare, is a numeric tare value that is entered manually through the
numeric keypad, received serially or via Ethernet from a peripheral device, or retrieved from the Tare
Table memory. The preset tare value cannot exceed the capacity of the scale. A manually entered Tare
value is interpreted to have the same units as the current displayed value. Motion does not impact the
entry of preset tare values.
Keyboard tare can be configured in setup as enabled or disabled. When disabled, the numeric
keypad and the TARE scale function key cannot be used to obtain a tare.
To enter a preset tare value manually, use the numeric keypad or external to enter the tare value (data
entered will display just above the softkeys with a “Data:” label) and press the TARE scale function
key .
If configured in setup, remote equipment can enter a preset tare value using a serial command or PLC
command (refer to Chapter 3, Communication | Connections, Communication | PLC and Appendix C,
Communications for further information).
If the preset tare is successful, the display changes to a net weight indication, and the entered preset
tare value is stored as the tare value in the active tare register. If Tare display is enabled, the
pushbutton tare value will be shown with a PT label (Figure 1-5).
Several conditions could inhibit the preset tare function:
Keyboard Tare If keyboard tare is disabled in setup, the numeric keypad and the TARE scale
Disabled function key cannot be used to obtain a tare.
Over-Capacity Preset tare is not allowed when the weight display indicates over capacity or
or Under-Zero under zero conditions. Any preset tare attempted when the scale is over capacity
Conditions is ignored and a “Tare Failed–Over Capacity” error displays. Any preset tare
attempted when the weight display indicates a blanked under zero condition is
ignored and a “Tare Failed–Below Zero” error displays.
Preset tare can be entered in free format. If the entered value does not match the displayed weight
decimal point location or display interval, the entered tare value is rounded to the nearest display
interval and the decimal point adjusted to match the gross weight. The rounding method is that 0.5 or

more of a display interval (d) is increased to the next display interval and 0.49 or less of a display
interval is decreased to the next lower display interval.
When entering a preset tare value less than 1.0, the operator can enter the data without the leading
zero (left of the decimal point), but all subsequent display, storage, or printing of this value will
Operation
include the leading zero. For example, a preset tare entry of .05 will display as 0.05.
If a preset tare has already been established and another preset tare is entered, the second preset tare
replaces the previous value (it does not add to the previous value). The replacement tare can be
larger or smaller than the original tare value.
2.7.2.3. Special Tare Operation in Multi-Interval Scale Applications
When the IND570 is configured for multi-interval operation (refer to section 3.5.1.2.2 in
Configuration), the IND570 only permits a pushbutton tare to be taken in interval # 1. A preset tare,
including the recall of a stored tare from the Tare Table (refer to section 1.7.2.4) must be a value in
interval # 1 as well. If a tare is attempted with a weight value found in interval 2 or 3, a “Tare Failed –
Over Range” error is given.
Because of the way the IND570 manages the tare, it is required that the final weighing system
has a label displayed that indicates the maximum tare value within the capacity of interval # 1: T
= nnn, where nnn is the capacity of interval 1.
The requirements for this marking are as follows:
• Required only for OIML approved terminals that are programmed for multi-interval (not multiple
range).
• The descriptive markings shall be indelible and of a size, shape and clarity allowing easy
reading.
• It shall be located in a clearly visible place on a sticker fixed permanently to the instrument.
• In case the sticker is not destroyed when removed, a means of securing shall be provided, e.g. a
control mark that can be applied.
2.7.2.4. Tare Table
The IND570 terminal contains a tare table with 99 records for storing tare weights that can be quickly
recalled by the operator, instead of manually entering them for each transaction. This is especially
useful when certain tare values are used repeatedly.
A 20-character description can be included for each record. This description can be used to help
distinguish one tare record from another. Each tare record in the tare table also contains a totalization
field. When totalization is enabled for the tare table, each time a transaction is completed using a
specific tare ID/record, either the gross or net weight value (as selected in setup) will be added to the
record totalization field and the corresponding counter within the tare record will be incremented by
one.
A printed report of the records and totalization in the Tare Table is available. Appendix B, Table and
Log File Structure provides additional details about the tare table.
2.7.2.5. Loading Records from the Tare Table
The TARE MEMORY softkey can be used in two ways to activate records from the Tare Table.

Quick Access to When the ID of the Tare Table record to be used is known, use the Quick
Records Recall method. Enter the ID using the numeric keypad and then press the
TARE MEMORY softkey to load the record into the active Tare
register/memory. If the record is available, the data is loaded. If the record is
not found, an “ID not found” error displays.
List Selection When the ID of the Tare Table record is unknown, use the List Selection
method. To use the List Selection mode:
1. Press the TARE MEMORY softkey without any preceding data entry.
The Tare Search screen displays.
2. Enter any search restrictions required or leave selections as they are to
retrieve all records.
3. Press the SEARCH softkey to view the selected records in the table.
4. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the list until the
desired record is highlighted.
5. Press the OK softkey to load the selected record from the list.
6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the weighing operation
screen without loading the record.
2.7.2.6. Net Sign Correction
Net sign correction enables the terminal to be used for both shipping (inbound empty) and receiving
(inbound loaded) operations. Net sign correction can be either disabled or enabled on the IND570.
Refer to the Tare Types section, in Chapter 3, Configuration, for further information about disabling
and enabling net sign correction.
If net sign correction is disabled in setup, any stored weight value in the tare register is assumed to
be a tare regardless of the gross weight present on the scale at the time of the final transaction and
net values can be negative.
If net sign correction is enabled, the terminal will switch the gross weight and tare weight fields when
necessary, so that the larger weight is the gross weight, the smaller weight is the tare weight, and the
difference is always a positive net weight. Net sign correction affects the display, stored data, weight
recall, and printed data.
Net sign correction will operate with pushbutton tare, preset tare, or stored tare records. An example of
weight values with and without net sign correction is shown in Table 1-5. In this example, the tare
register value is 53 kg and the live weight on the scale is 16 kg.
Table 1-5: Weight Values With and Without Net Sign Correction
Net Sign Correction

Printed and Displayed Disabled Enabled
Gross 16 kg 53 kg
Tare 53 kg 16 kg
Net −37 kg 37 kg

When net sign correction is enabled, the tare weight field on the home screen and the weight
recall screen will be labeled with the letter “M” to indicate “Memory” instead of “T” or “PT” (Figure
1-15).
Operation
Figure 1-15: Tare Displays with Net Sign Correction Enabled
2.7.2.7. Auto Tare
The IND570 can be configured so that tare is automatically taken (auto tare) after the weight on the
scale exceeds a programmed tare threshold weight. Auto tare can be configured in setup as enabled
or disabled. When auto tare is enabled, the display changes to a zero net weight indication after the
weight exceeds the threshold value. The previous weight on the scale is stored in the tare register as
the tare value. Auto tare operations involve:
Tare Threshold When weight on the scale platform exceeds the tare threshold value, the
Weight terminal automatically tares.
Reset Threshold The reset threshold weight must be less than the tare threshold weight.
Weight When the weight on the scale platform falls below the reset threshold value,
such as when a load has been removed, the terminal automatically resets
the auto tare trigger.
Motion Check A motion check is provided to control the re-arming of the auto tare function.
If disabled, the auto tare trigger will be reset as soon as the weight falls
below the reset value. If enabled, the weight must settle to no-motion below
the reset threshold before the next auto tare can be initiated.
Several conditions could prevent the auto tare function from working:
Motion Auto tare cannot be taken when the scale is in motion. If motion is detected
after the weight on the scale exceeds a preset tare threshold weight, the
IND570 will wait for a no-motion condition. If a stable (no motion) weight
condition occurs within three seconds, the auto tare command is executed.
Auto Tare Disabled Auto tare can be configured in setup as enabled or disabled.
2.7.2.8. Clearing Tare
Tare values can be cleared manually or automatically.
2.7.2.8.1. Manual Clear
Manually clear tare values by pressing the CLEAR function key when the IND570 is in the net
mode and has completed the weighing operation. Motion on the scale will not impact a manual
clear.

2.7.2.8.2. Auto Clear
The IND570 can be configured to clear tare automatically when the weight returns to a value below a
programmable threshold, or when a print command is issued. Once the tare is cleared, the display
returns to the gross weighing mode.
Auto clear is disabled or enabled in setup. If auto clear is enabled the following parameters,
configured in setup, affect the auto clear operation:
Clear Threshold The clear threshold weight is the gross weight value below which the
Weight IND570 will automatically clear a tare after settling to a value above this
threshold value.
Motion Check A motion check is provided to control the automatic clearing of tare. If the
motion check is disabled, the tare value is cleared as soon as the weight
drops below the threshold weight (auto clear threshold), regardless of the
motion status.
If the motion check is enabled, after meeting the requirements for weight
value above and then below the threshold weight (auto clear threshold), the
IND570 waits for a no motion condition before automatically clearing the
tare.
Clear After Print If enabled, tare is automatically cleared and the scale returned to the gross
mode after data has been transmitted by pressing the PRINT scale function
key or from a remote source.
Clear With Zero If enabled, pressing the ZERO scale function key will first clear the tare
then issue a zero command.
Refer to the Scale | Tare | Auto Clear section of Chapter 3, Configuration for further information about
configuring auto clear.
2.7.3. Printing
The print function (demand output) can be initiated by:
• Pressing the PRINT function key

• Pressing a custom print trigger softkeys
• Through the automatic print function.
Demand output of data may also be initiated as part of a particular sequence of operation or special
application software.
A Printing system message (visible in Figure 1-14) appears for 3 seconds when the terminal is
carrying out a demand output command.
2.7.3.1. Enabling Printing
To execute a print successfully, a serial, USB or Ethernet connection must be configured with a
Demand Output assignment and linked to a template and trigger associated with the selected serial,
USB or Ethernet port. If a print command fails because a Demand Output assignment is not
programmed on any port, the synchronous error message “Print Failed-No Demand Output” is
displayed.

2.7.3.2. Print Interlock
Print Interlock is designed to enforce a single demand output per transaction. Print Interlock can be
disabled or enabled. If enabled, the print command is ignored until the measured gross weight
exceeds the print interlock threshold. After the first print command is executed, subsequent print
Operation
commands are ignored until the gross weight indication falls below the print interlock reset threshold.
If a print command is blocked by print Interlock, a synchronous “Print Not Ready” error is generated.
2.7.3.3. Automatic Print
Automatic initiation of a demand output occurs after the gross weight exceeds the minimum threshold
and there is no motion on the scale. After initiation, the gross weight must return below the reset
threshold before the next automatic print can occur.
Automatic print may be disabled or enabled. Automatic print can be triggered and reset by weight
exceeding set thresholds or by weight deviation from a previously stable reading.
2.7.3.4. Repeat Print
The Repeat Print softkey permits the data output of the most recent demand output to be printed
again with a DUPLICATE header or footer to distinguish it from the original print.
To enable the Repeat Print function, simply add the Repeat Print softkey to the Home Page.
Pressing this softkey will initiate a repeat print of the last Demand Output connection listed in the
assignments found in Setup at Communication | Connections.
The repeat output template can be flagged with a “DUPLICATE” header or footer to indicate that the
data in the output template was generated as a repeat of a previous communication.
2.7.3.5. Custom Print Trigger
The three custom print triggers available in the IND570 can be used to print specific
output templates when activated. These custom print triggers will NOT trigger Alibi logging,
totalization or transaction counter update. It is recommended that custom print triggers only be used
to transmit output templates that do not contain metrologically sensitive data (weight data). However,
the user is not blocked from doing so.
2.7.3.6. Report Printing
To print any of the IND570’s standard reports, either through the REPORTS softkey or from within
an application, a serial, USB or Ethernet connection must be configured with a Report assignment. If
a report print fails because a Reports assignment is not programmed on any port, the synchronous
error message “No Reports Connection” is displayed.
2.7.4. Totalization
It is frequently useful for the user of weighing equipment to know how many weighing transactions
have been processed and how much material was processed during a particular period of time. Often
there is also a need to subdivide this information according to material or item number, customer
account, etc. The IND570 supports several methods for tracking the number of transactions and
processed material. Totalization can occur in the general scale totals register, within the Tare Table
and within the Target Table. Refer to Application | Operation | Totalization in Chapter 3, Configuration
for more details on totalization within the Tare Table and Target Table.

2.7.4.1. Transaction Counter
A Transaction Counter tracks the total number of transactions processed by the IND570. A transaction
occurs when the scale PRINT function is executed directly from the front panel or any of the available
remote means (discrete input, PLC or SICS command, etc.) The custom print triggers or duplicate
prints do not impact the Transaction Counter.
The Transaction Counter softkey can be programmed on the home screen. If Counter Reset is
enabled, the transaction counter can be reset to zero through this softkey. The next value for
Transaction Counter can be also be cleared or edited in the Terminal branch of setup.
2.7.4.2. Grand Total and Subtotal
The IND570 terminal provides totalization in both grand total (GT) and subtotal (ST) registers. The
total amount of weight processed each time a transaction has completed (PRINT function has been
executed) is accumulated in these registers. Each register also has a unique transaction counter. The
counters record the number of transactions that have been totalized/accumulated in each register.
2.7.4.3. Totals Recall
The Totals Recall softkey , available for assignment to the home screen, displays the sub-total and
grand-total transaction counters and total weight for the terminal. Press the CLEAR SUBTOTAL softkey
to clear the sub-total amounts. Press the CLEAR softkey to clear both the grand-total and
sub-total amounts. Press the PRINT softkey to print a report of the totals.
If either Clear Total or Clear Subtotal After Print is enabled in setup, these values will clear after
printing. If security is enabled, Supervisor level log-in or higher to execute this PRINT.
2.7.5. Unit Switching

In order to support locations and applications that utilize multiple measurement units, the IND570
supports unit switching. The UNIT SWITCHING softkey enables switching between primary units
(the main unit of measure) and alternate units (second or third units).
When the UNIT SWITCHING softkey is pressed, the display changes from the primary unit to the
secondary unit. When this softkey is pressed again the display switches to the third unit (if one has
been programmed), or returns to the primary unit. Each subsequent time the UNIT SWITCHING softkey
is pressed the IND570 continues to switch the unit through the same sequence.
When units are switched, the units value changes to the correspondingly selected units, and the
conversion of the display value occurs. The display division changes to an equivalent weight value in
the switched unit (for example, from 0.02 lb to 0.01 kg) and the decimal location switches to
accommodate the conversion.
When switching units, the capacity of the converted units is dictated by the original number of
divisions established in the capacity and increments area of setup. In some situations, this may
reduce the capacity of the terminal when converting to second or third units.
2.7.6. Expand By 10
The EXPAND BY 10 softkey is used to increase the selected weight display resolution by one
additional digit. For example, a weight display of 40.96 could increase by one additional digit to

display as 40.958. The Expand By Ten mode is indicated on the display by x10, which displays in
the Legend area of the display (Figure 1-5). When the EXPAND BY TEN softkey is pressed
again, the display reverts to the normal display of weight.
If the terminal is programmed as approved with the metrology switch (SW1-1) ON, the Expand By
Operation
Ten mode is displayed for five seconds then automatically returns to normal resolution. Printing is
disabled when the weight is expanded and the terminal is programmed as approved.
2.7.7. Loading Alert (PowerDeck platforms only)

For accurate weighing, loads should be placed so that their center of gravity is near the geometric
center of the platform's load cell arrangement. This is particularly important in cases where the
platform is flush with the floor, and it is possible for part of the load to overhand the platform and be
supported by the floor, reducing the measured weight.
When a PowerDeck platform is connected to the IND570, an additional operational feature is

available to assist a user in centering the load on the platform. Once enabled and configured in
Setup, whenever the center of gravity of the load is outside of the user configured "OK" Zone, a
Loading Alert screen is shown.
The Loading Alert displays as a rectangle representing the scale base, keyed with load cell numbers 1
through 4. If an off-center condition is detected, a dot appears to indicate the quadrant experiencing
the most extreme deviation. In this case, the operator should visibly inspect the load to make sure it
is completely on the platform and if not, take steps to properly center the load or container for which a
weight is to be captured.
Figure 1-16: Terminal with PowerDeck Platform, Displaying Off-Center Load Indication

Figure 1-17: Loading Alert Display
2.7.8. Remote Display

When properly configured, the IND570 can function as a remote terminal for another IND570 terminal
or for another METTLER TOLEDO product capable of transmitting METTLER TOLEDO Continuous
Output (see Figure 1-18). If the remote IND570 will be used to issue simple C, T, P, Z commands to
another terminal (referred to as the Primary terminal), the Primary must be able to accept Command
Inputs (CPTZ). Remote Terminal communication in the IND570 is supported over WiFi, Ethernet and
serial interfaces. Refer to Chapter 4, Applications, for details on configuring IND570 for use as a
remote terminal.
Figure 1-18: Remote Display Function via Serial Communication
2.7.9. External Keyboard Mapping

For information about language-specific keyboard layouts, please refer to the Available
Communication Interfaces section of Appendix D, Communications.
2.7.10. Calibration Management

Routine verification of a system’s weighing accuracy is strongly recommended. IND570 provides a
method to routinely schedule maintenance and testing to guarantee the continued accuracy of a
weighing system over time. Calibration Management considers the usage pattern of the equipment to
prompt for routine testing or to schedule a service call for certified system calibration testing,
supporting proactive rather than reactive maintenance.

2.7.10.1. Service and Testing Triggers
A weighing system degrades over time and wears with use. For systems with sporadic heavy use, the
number of weighments should determine the test interval while a system that is either lightly used or
used in a highly regular fashion might benefit from a time interval as the test trigger.
Operation
The IND570 offers both an elapsed time interval trigger and a weighment counter trigger for scale
calibration. The exact amount of time or number of weighments between service testing depends on
the site specific circumstances, customer expectations, and perhaps on local legal metrology
requirements.
2.7.10.2. Service and Testing Notification
Notification to the user occurs once a calibration service interval has been exceeded. IND570
supports a variety of notification schemes, including:
• System line messages on the terminal display

• Disabling of the scale
• Service Icon indicator on terminal display
• Email alerts
The method of clearing or resetting the notification depends on the type of notification. Additional
details regarding the setup of Calibration Management, including triggers and notifications can be
found in the Maintenance | Configure/View | Calibration Management section of Chapter 3,
Configuration.
2.7.10.3. Calibration Test
IND570 provides a programmable Calibration Test sequence designed to lead the tester through a set
of predetermined steps that will compare the current terminal calibration with known test weights. A
full description of the default calibration test along with modification instructions can be found in
Maintenance | Configure/View | Calibration Test section of Chapter 3, Configuration.
2.7.10.3.1. Performing a Calibration Test
The test is accessed by pressing the CALIBRATION TEST softkey on the home page. A screen
appears, in which the name of the tester must be recorded. Depending on setup selections, the serial
number and capacity of each of the test weights to be used in the test can be entered manually or
confirmed against pre-entered information. This provides a traceable record for the calibration test.
The calibration test is started by pressing the START softkey . A display is shown that provides the
active scale weight, the target and tolerance weight values, and two lines of instructions (as to where
to place the weights). When the tester completes these instructions, he or she presses the OK softkey
and the terminal compares the actual weight on the scale to the programmed target weight for
this step. If the comparison passes, the test continues to the next step. If it fails, a message displays
that indicates a failure. After acknowledging the error, the tester can abort the test, retest the failed
step, or skip the failed step.
At the end of the complete test, a test report can be printed that contains all the data of the calibration
test. If the GWP Log is enabled (refer to the Maintenance section in Chapter 3, Configuration), a
calibration test pass/fail result is recorded, providing a data record that can be utilized in compliance

efforts. If the Maintenance Log is enabled, additional details on the calibration test are also recorded
there.
2.7.11. Test Manager GWP®

GWP (Good Weighing Practice) is a science-based global standard for efficient lifecycle management
of weighing systems comprised of five important stages of a weighing instrument’s lifecycle:
evaluation, selection, installation, calibration and routine operation. GWP Verification is a service
product offered by METTLER TOLEDO to help customers realize the full potential of their weighing
systems.
The IND570 integrates GWP Verification with the embedded Test Manager GWP. This is a way to
store and routinely execute testing procedures recommended by the GWP Verification service. Test
Manager GWP considers the usage pattern of the equipment and prompts either for routine testing, or
to schedule a service call for certified testing or system adjustment. This supports proactive rather
than reactive maintenance.
2.7.11.1. Routine Testing Triggers
A weighing system wears with use and its performance may degrade over time therefore it is
necessary to confirm that the performance still meets the customer's process requirements. For
systems in heavy use, the number of weighing cycles should be used to determine the test interval; in
contrast, a system that is either lightly, or routinely used, a time interval should be used as the test
trigger.
The IND570 offers both a weight cycle counter, and an elapsed time interval trigger for each
individual GWP test.
The IND570 offers both an elapsed time interval trigger and a weighment counter trigger for each
individual GWP test. The exact amount of time or number of weighments between routine testing
depends on the site-specific circumstances and customer expectations, and may also be affected by
local legal metrology requirements. In the case of GWP testing, the testing interval is determined as a
part of the GWP Verification service.
2.7.11.2. Routine Testing Notification
Notification to the user occurs once a GWP test interval has been exceeded. IND570 supports a
variety of notification schemes, including:
• System line messages

• Disabling the scale
• Service Icon indicator on the terminal’s display
• Email alerts
The method used to clear or reset the notification depends on the type of notification. Additional
details regarding Test Manager GWP setup, including triggers and notifications, can be found in the
Maintenance | Configure/View | GWP Management section of Chapter 3, Configuration.
2.7.11.3. GWP Tests
IND570 provides three default GWP tests – one each for Sensitivity, Eccentricity and Repeatability.
These default tests are based on GWP standard test procedures and are designed to lead the tester

through a set of predetermined steps that will compare current terminal performance against known
test weights and acceptable performance tolerances. Full descriptions of the default GWP tests and
instruction on modifying these tests can be found in the Maintenance | Configure/View | GWP Tests
section of Chapter 3, Configuration.
Operation
2.7.11.3.1. Performing a GWP Test

GWP Sensitivity, Eccentricity and Repeatability tests are accessed by pressing the GWP softkey
on the home page. A screen will appear listing all enabled GWP tests. Tests can be selected and
initiated from this screen. The tester’s name must always be entered before a test can be initiated.
Depending on setup selections, the serial number and capacity of each of the test weights to be used
in the test can be entered manually or confirmed against pre-entered information. This provides a
traceable record for each GWP test that is performed.
The selected GWP test is started by pressing the START softkey . A display is shown that provides
the active scale weight, the weight target and control limits (test tolerances) values, and two lines of
instructions. Additional information regarding the selected test can be viewed by pressing the
INFORMATION softkey. As the tester completes each step in the programmed instructions, he or she
presses the OK softkey and the terminal compares the actual weight on the scale to the
programmed target weight and control limit for this step. If the comparison passes, the test continues
to the next step. If it fails, a message displays that indicates a failure. After acknowledging the error,
the tester can abort the test, retest this step, or skip this step knowing that it failed.
At the end of the complete test, a test report can be printed that contains all the in-process data
associated with the GWP test. If the GWP Log is enabled (refer to section 3.9.1.4., GWP Log, in
Chapter 3, Configuration), a record of the GWP test final result is recorded in the log. If the
Maintenance Log is enabled, additional details on the GWP test are also recorded there. These logs
can serve to support compliance efforts.
2.7.12. MinWeigh
MinWeigh is a METTLER TOLEDO brand for Minimum Weight. The IND570 allow you to set a
minimum weight threshold value whereby the terminal will evaluate if the object is too small to be
accurately weighed based on the performance of the scale and the customer's process tolerance. In
other words, the operator should ideally choose a scale with a lower capacity and a weighing range
that more closely matches the accuracy requirements.
In many regions of the world, the minimum weight value is specified by regulations; however a GWP
recommendation will determine this value based on the customer's process weighing requirements
because in many cases this the minimum weight value may be higher than the minimum value
specified by legal authorities, based on the process accuracy required by the customer. A GWP
Verification is used to confirm this value.
When the MinWeigh function is enabled, the MINWEIGH softkey on the home screen can be
pressed to initiate the normal operation of the MinWeigh function. The MinWeigh function compares
the current net weight with the programmed MinWeigh value. If the current net weight is greater than
or equal to MinWeigh, all equipment functions behave normally. If the absolute value of the net
weight is less than MinWeigh, the weight display includes a flashing MinWeigh symbol to the left
of the weight. If the user attempts to record the weight while in this condition, the printout will include
an asterisk (∗) to indicate that the transmitted weight is not valid.

For specific step-by-step instructions on how to set up MinWeigh, refer to the Scale | MinWeigh
section in Chapter 3, Configuration.
2.7.13. CalFree™
The IND570 terminal provides a method to calibrate a scale without using test weights. This is based
on manual entry of capacity and performance data from the load cell or load cell platform. This
method of calibration can be used for initial check-out and testing of systems or when a large
structure is used as the weighing vessel and it is not possible to apply test weights to the structure.
METTLER TOLEDO strongly recommends that test weights be used whenever possible as this
provides the most accurate method of calibration and adjustment. Contact your local METTLER
TOLEDO authorized service provider for more information on calibration of IND570.
2.7.14. Time and Date

Time and date are used for reporting, error and transaction log timestamps, and triggering service
events. The TIME & DATE softkey enables access to the Set Time & Date screen, where the user
can set the time and date, including the hours, minutes, day, month, and year. When the time is set,
seconds are set to 0.
Although the format for the time and date can be selected according to local preferences, the use of a
timestamp in log files is not selectable. Timestamp formats are always fixed as:
Date: YYYY/MM/DD (for example, July 20, 2016 becomes the fixed format date 2016/07/20)
Time: HH:MM:SS stored in 24 hour format (for example, 10:01:22 PM becomes the fixed format
time 22:01:22)
2.7.15. ID
The ID function provides a way to collect specific transaction information during a weighing
application. Information such as operator, material, purchase order, batch number and similar data
can be manually entered through the terminal’s alphanumeric keypad, an external keyboard or a
barcode scanner. The ID function can also be used to ensure that a specific sequence of operation is
carried out the same way every time.
The IND570 provides four different ID sequences: ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4. As many as 30 steps can
be programmed in each ID. Some step assignments set up an on-screen message to the user to
perform a particular action. Other step assignments cause the terminal to automatically carry out a
specific function, such as a Tare. ID assignments are shown below:
Alphanumeric Allows user to enter freeform data
Clear Tare Automatically clears any stored Tare value and returns the scale to gross
mode
Numeric Allows user to enter data in numeric format only
Print Automatically initiates a print. A print connection must be configured in the

terminal for the print to execute successfully.
Selection List Allows the user to select an entry from a pre-programmed dropped down

list created within the ID. Up to six selections can be programmed.
Tare – Auto Automatically executes a Tare
Tare – Preset Prompts the user to enter a Tare value. User is required to press ENTER to
Operation
accept the Tare.
ID2, ID3 and ID4 can only be triggered manually by an individual softkey. ID1 can be triggered in
one of two ways:
Softkey (Manually) Using the ID1 softkey
Automatically By threshold and reset weight readings from the scale
If ID1, ID2, ID3 or ID4 is triggered by softkey, it can be programmed to loop, repeating the sequence
until either the EXIT softkey is pressed or an ESC softkey is pressed while an alphanumeric
entry field is selected.
When ID1 is set to function automatically, the sequence starts when a weight is placed on the scale
that exceeds a programmed threshold value. When all the steps have been performed and the weight
is removed, the reading from the scale falls below a reset value. At this point the terminal is ready to
begin the next sequence associated with ID1.
For additional details on ID mode configuration, refer to section 3.6.2.4., ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4, in
Chapter 3, Configuration.
2.7.16. Target Comparison

Target comparison is used to compare either the gross or net weight on the scale to a predetermined
target value. This feature can be useful in both automatic and manual processes. As an example, an
automatic filling system could provide a Start signal to the IND570 and the IND570 could control the
feeder system to manage the filling a container to a desired target weight.
An example of a manual process could be a checkweighing station where an operator is checking net
weight of packages. The IND570 can use its target comparison feature to provide a graphic Over - OK
- Under indication to help the operator determine if the weight of each package is acceptable or not
compared to a programmed target weight.
Target (setpoint) comparison is most often used in two types of applications:
Material Transfer Requires that a control device (external to the IND570) deactivate when a
target value is achieved
Over/Under Classify a load placed on the scale platform as above or below the target
value or within the target tolerance range
For analog load cell scales, the IND570 target comparison rate (the rate at which the IND570
compares the live scale weight to the desired target value) is 50 comparisons per second. The target
comparison rate for high precision IDNet bases depends on the weighing module in the base.
Refer to the Application | Memory | Target Table and Application | Operation | Target sections in Chapter
3, Configuration for further information about configuring parameters for target comparison

operations. Chapter 4, Applications, provides additional step by step instructions for implementing
and enhancing material transfer and simple, static checkweighing in IND570.
2.7.16.1. Material Transfer Applications
If the target comparison of the IND570 will be used to control the flow of material, the application can
be classified as a Material Transfer application. These types of applications are usually automated,
but can also be manual. A single or two-speed feeding system is used to either add weight to or
remove weight from the scale. The terminal monitors the change in weight and compares it to a
previously entered target and other control parameters.
The following definitions explain some terms used in Material Transfer applications:
Material The target comparison mode that provides control for delivering a measured amount of
Transfer Mode material from one container or vessel to another. The transfer can apply to material
entering (filling or weigh-in) or leaving a container or vessel (dosing or weigh-out).
Target The target is the weight value that is the end goal of the material transfer process. If a
container should be filled with 10 kg of material, the target value is 10 kg.
Tolerance The weight range above and below the target value that will be acceptable as an “in
tolerance” target comparison. The tolerance can either be entered as a weight deviation
from the target or a percentage deviation from the target depending upon the setup
selection.
NOTE: When using the basic IND570 firmware in material transfer mode, there are
no discrete outputs that will indicate an under- or over-tolerance status during a
material transfer cycle. The available Over Zone and Under Zone discrete output
assignments are only active when weighing in over/under mode.
If a tolerance status discrete output is required for a material transfer application, the
optional Fill-570 application software has an Out of Tolerance discrete output
assignment available.
Spill The amount of material that will be added (on a weigh-in) or removed (on a weigh-out)
from the scale after the final feed is turned off. In a weigh-in process, this is the material
in suspension that will still fall onto the scale after the feed output is turned off. IND570
subtracts the spill value from the target value to determine the feed output cutoff point.
Coincidence A coincidence output is always active and does not require a start or stop signal. If the
Outputs weight on the scale is below the target minus the spill value, the outputs are “on”. If the
weight is above the target minus the spill value, the outputs are “off”. This type of output
typically requires logic external to the IND570 to provide the required control for feeding
systems.
Latched Latched outputs turn off at the target weight minus the spill value and remain off
Outputs (regardless of additional weight changes) until a “start” signal is received. Latched
outputs do not usually require external logic to perform standard weigh-in or weigh-out
sequences. IND570 can handle much of a weigh-in or weigh-out process when latched
outputs are used.
Concurrent This describes one mode of operation of the feed outputs in a 2-speed feeding system. If
Outputs the output type is programmed as concurrent, the both the fast feed and feed outputs are
active at the beginning of a target comparison, and will continue to operate until the
weight reaches the target minus the spill value minus the fine feed value. At this point, the
fast feed output will turn off and the feed output will remain on until the weight reaches the
target minus spill value.

Independent This describes one mode of operation of the feed output in a 2-speed feeding system. If
Outputs the output type is programmed as independent, the feed output does not turn on until the
fast feed output turns off. Only one feeder speed is active at a time. It is the opposite of
concurrent outputs.
Operation
Fast Feed This refers to the physical output assignment connection that is used for the faster feed in
Output a 2-speed feeding system. This output is not used in a single speed feeding system.
Feed Output This refers to the physical output connection that is used for the slower feed in a 2-speed
feeding system. This is the only feed output used in a single speed feeding system.
Fine Feed The value entered for the amount of material that will be fed in the slower rate of feed in a
2-speed feeding system. This value and the spill value are subtracted from the target to
determine the point that the fast feed output turns off.
Start When using latched targets, the default condition is with the latch set or in the “off”
condition. To turn any outputs “on”, a start signal is required. This could be the START
softkey , a discrete input programmed as Target Start/Resume, or via the TARGET
CONTROL softkey .
Pause A pause function is provided in target comparison control in case a target comparison
must be temporarily paused. This can be done by pressing the PAUSE softkey under
the TARGET CONTROL softkey or by triggering a discrete input programmed as
Target Pause/Abort. When paused, power is removed from the Feed and Fast Feed (if
used) discrete outputs. After a target comparison has been paused, the process can either
be resumed or aborted.
Resume After a target comparison process has been paused, it may be resumed by pressing the
RESUME softkey or by triggering a discrete input programmed as Target
Start/Resume. When a target comparison is resumed, it continues to use the original
target values.
Abort After a target comparison process has been paused, it can be totally stopped by pressing
the ABORT softkey under the TARGET CONTROL softkey or by triggering a Target
Pause/Abort discrete input. If abort is selected, the target comparison process is aborted.
2.7.16.1.1. Target Control

Two different levels of target control are provided by the terminal for the Material Transfer mode.
Latching outputs must be enabled to utilize either type of automated control.
For simple applications or applications that are more automated and require minimal operator input,
only the START softkey is needed to begin the target comparison process. No other control is
provided by the user. The comparison runs to completion then the latch sets the outputs as FALSE
until the START softkey is pressed the next time.
For those applications where more operator control is expected for an occasional pause or to abort a
comparison process, the TARGET CONTROL softkey is used. Pressing the TARGET CONTROL
softkey provides a dedicated display for the target comparison with the comparison status and
appropriate softkeys shown. Possible status modes are “Ready”, “Running” or “Paused”. The
appropriate control softkeys include START , PAUSE and ABORT . An example of each
target control display is shown in Figure 1-19, Figure 1-20 and Figure 1-21.

START
softkey
Figure 1-19: Example of Ready State in Target Control
PAUSE
softkey
Figure 1-20: Example of Running State in Target Control
RESUME
(START)
softkey
ABORT
(STOP)
softkey
Figure 1-21: Example of Paused State in Target Control
2.7.16.2. Over/Under Applications
If the target comparison of the IND570 will be used to statically checkweigh the weight of an item or
product, the application can be classified as an Over/Under application. These types of applications
are usually manual processes but can also be automated. The SmartTrac display indicates the
classification of the weight placed on the scale and discrete I/O can be used to trigger external
equipment such as indication lights or reject switches. The terminal compares the current weight to a
previously entered target with tolerance values or zone limits and indicates the results. The following
definitions will explain some terms used in Over/Under applications:
Over/Under The target comparison mode that provides three zone classifications for weight
Mode placed on the scale. The classification can be Under if the weight is below the
target minus the -tolerance, OK if within the tolerance range or Over if the weight
is above the target plus the +tolerance.
Zones The IND570 provides 3 different classifications or “zones” in the Over/Under
mode. The zones are Under, OK and Over.

Over Limit If a tolerance mode of “Weight Value” is selected in setup, the IND570 does not
require the entry of a target value. In this mode, only the upper and lower limits
for the OK zone are entered. When programmed for this mode, the over limit
value is the maximum weight that will be classified as OK. Any weight above
Operation
than this value will be classified as Over.

Under Limit If a tolerance mode of “Weight Value” is selected in setup, the IND570 does not
require the entry of a target value. In this mode, only the upper and lower limits
for the OK zone are entered. When programmed for this mode, the under limit
value is the minimum weight that will be classified as OK. Any weight below than
this value will be classified as Under.
Target The target is the ideal weight value for the product being tested. If a container
should weigh exactly 10 kg, the target value is 10 kg.
Tolerance The weight range above and below the target value that will be acceptable as
“OK” in the target comparison. The tolerance can either be entered as a weight
deviation from the target, a percentage deviation from the target or as absolute
weight (zone edges) depending upon setup.
2.7.17. Target Entry

To enter target comparison parameters, either directly edit the active records or load them with data
from a record in the Target Table.
2.7.17.1. Direct Editing of Active Records
To edit the active record directly:
1. Press the TARGET softkey . (Refer to section 3.7.6, Softkeys, of Chapter 3, Configuration, for
information about how to setup softkey display.) The Active Values screen displays.
2. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the fields available for editing.
3. Press the ENTER key to select a field to edit.
4. Depending whether the mode is material transfer or over/under, and the type of tolerance
selected, the active target record will show different fields to edit. Use the navigation and
alphanumeric keys to enter values for all of the fields as needed.
Over/Under
Material Transfer Weight Deviation or % of Target Weight Value
(Either Tolerance Type) Tolerance Type Tolerance Type
Target Target Over Limit
Spill + Tolerance Under Limit
Fine Feed - Tolerance
+ Tolerance
- Tolerance
5. Press the OK softkey to accept the edits to the active record.

6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the weighing operation screen without saving the
active record edits.

NOTE: Target units in the active record are limited to units selected as primary, secondary or third
units. Refer to the Scale | Capacity & Increment | Primary Units and Scale | Units sections in
Chapter 3, Configuration for details on unit selection.
2.7.17.2. Loading Records from the Target Table
The TARGET MEMORY softkey can be used in two ways to load records from the Target Table.
Quick Access Use the Quick Recall mode when the ID of the Target Table record to be loaded is
to Records known. Use the numeric keypad to enter the ID and then press the TARGET
MEMORY softkey to load the record. If the record is available, the data is
loaded. If the record is not found, an “ID not found” error displays.
List Selection Use the List Selection mode when the ID of the Target Table record is unknown.
To use the List Selection mode:
1. Press the TARGET MEMORY softkey without any preceding data entry. The
Target Search screen displays.
2. Enter any search restrictions required or leave selections as they are to
retrieve all records.
3. Press the SEARCH softkey to view the selected records in the table.
4. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the list until the
desired record is highlighted.
5. Press the OK softkey to load the selected record from the list.
6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the weighing operation screen
without loading the record.
2.7.17.3. Target Units
If second and/or third units are established in the IND570, target records that utilize either second or
third units can be retrieved from the Target Table into Active Target status. The IND570 will convert the
retrieved record into active units when the record is recalled. Pressing the TARGET softkey will
show the original units as recalled from the Target Table.
If an attempt is made to retrieve a record from the Target Table that does not use primary, second or
third units, a “Units Mis-match” error will display indicating that record recall was unsuccessful.
2.7.18. SmartTrac™
SmartTrac is a graphic visualization of the weight on the scale, either gross or net weight. SmartTrac
on the IND570 uses a bar graph visualization type for Material Transfer mode and a three-zone
graphic for Over/Under mode.
Regardless of the weighing mode, there are three different sizes of SmartTrac that can be selected.

2.7.18.1. Material Transfer Mode
The material transfer SmartTrac display may be configured in setup as Small, Medium or Large. Each
size provides different target and weight information on the display. Figure 1-22 shows the small
size, Figure 1-23 shows the medium size, and Figure 1-24 shows the large size.
Operation
Weight display
SmartTrac
indicating weight
on target
Figure 1-22: Material Transfer SmartTrac, Small
Weight display
SmartTrac
Vernier scale
Target weight
Figure 1-23: Material Transfer SmartTrac, Medium
No weight display
SmartTrac
Lower Upper tolerance

tolerance value value
Target weight
Figure 1-24: Material Transfer SmartTrac, Large
While the bar graph display appears to be one continuous display, it can actually be broken into four
separate zones. Figure 1-25 illustrates these.
Figure 1-25: SmartTrac Bar Graph Display Zones

2.7.18.1.1. Under Tolerance
The Under Tolerance Zone (A) represents the amount of material from 10% of the target value to the
target minus the negative tolerance value. The bar graph begins to fill the A zone when more than
10% of the target has been added. Until the weight on the scale reaches the 10% point, no fill is
shown.
2.7.18.1.2. Acceptable Under Tolerance
Zone B represents the zone of acceptable tolerance below the target value.
2.7.18.1.3. On Target
When the measured value exactly equals the target value an unfilled triangle indication displays.
2.7.18.1.4. Acceptable Over Tolerance
Zone C represents the zone of acceptable tolerance above the target value.
2.7.18.1.5. Over Tolerance
Zone D represents the zone of unacceptable tolerance above the target value. If the measured value is
large enough that the number of display columns in the bar graph required for display exceeds the
number available, the bar graph saturates and further increases in the measured value do not affect
it.
NOTE: When using the basic IND570 firmware in material transfer mode, there are no discrete
outputs that will indicate an under- or over-tolerance status during a material transfer cycle. The
available Over Zone and Under Zone discrete output assignments are only active when weighing
in over/under mode.
If a tolerance status discrete output is required for a material transfer application, the optional Fill-
570 application software has an Out of Tolerance discrete output assignment available.
2.7.18.1.6. Rate of Bar Graph Fill

In a material transfer operation, material is weighed into a vessel on the scale (or dosed out of a
vessel on the scale) until the measured weight is within an acceptable tolerance limit. Typically,
material is added quickly when the container is closer to empty and more slowly as the measured
weight on the scale approaches the desired target value. This is especially true in manual filling and
batching operations. To help maintain a good dynamic range in both regions (closer to zero and near

to target), the rate at which the material transfer SmartTrac fills in is different for the various sections
of the bar graph.
In most material transfer applications, sections A and D will appear to fill in at much slower rate than
sections B and C. This is because sections A and D usually represent a much larger weight range,
Operation
where sections B and C typically represent only a few increments. The overall proportion of bar graph
fill rate to weight gain is much higher in sections A and D.
When the bar graph fill reaches section B, the SmartTrac will appear to move very rapidly toward the
target. This is an important concept to understand for proper operator training. The operator must
understand that when SmartTrac is used during a manual filling process, the rate of material addition
to the scale must slow down as the graph approaches section B, or the target and upper tolerance
values will quickly be exceeded.
Vernier
To further help an operator judge the final value more accurately during a manual fill, a vernier is
present at the top of the material transfer SmartTrac. This vernier is a small, auxiliary display used
with the main SmartTrac display to show the weight gain (or loss) in finer increments than the fixed
SmartTrac. It appears as a vertical line at the top edge of bar graph (Figure 1-22, Figure 1-25),
moving left to right. In section B, the vernier travels left to right at 1/3 of the rate of the bar graph, and
its rate/weight proportion remains constant while it is displayed.
Testing has shown that if an operator refers to the vernier during a manual filling process, the
opportunity to meet the target value within tolerances is much greater, since the main SmartTrac bar
graph typically becomes more sensitive to the addition of weight when it is within the tolerance zone.
2.7.18.2. Over/Under Mode
There are three sizes of Over/Under SmartTrac selectable in setup. Each size provides different target
and weight information on the display. Figure 1-26 shows the small size, Figure 1-27 shows the
medium size, and Figure 1-28 shows the large size.
Note that Figure 1-26 shows a composite display with under, OK and over graphics displayed
simultaneously. This is not normal operation.
Weight display
SmartTrac
Figure 1-26: Over/Under Display, Small

Weight display
Target description
SmartTrac
Figure 1-27: Over/Under Display, Medium
Target description
SmartTrac
Upper tolerance value
Lower tolerance value
Figure 1-28: Over/Under Display, Large
2.7.18.2.1. Less than 10% of Target

Until the weight on the scale reaches 10% of the target value, the Under symbol is shown as a
dashed line symbol ( or ) and the discrete outputs are disabled. The Under zone
symbol becomes solid and the discrete outputs become active when the weight on the scale is
greater than 10% of the target weight.
2.7.18.2.2. Under Zone

The Under zone is shown at left in Figure 1-26, and in Figure 1-27. This zone classification is shown
when the weight on the scale is greater than 10% of the target but less than the target value minus
the -tolerance value (i.e., the highest value in section A of the graph, Figure 1-25). If a discrete output
has been assigned to the Under Zone, this output will be “on” when the weight is in this zone.
2.7.18.2.3. OK Zone
When the weight on the scale is between the target minus the -tolerance and the target plus the
+tolerance (i.e, within sections B and C, Figure 1-25), the OK symbol is shown. This symbol is the
same for all sizes of SmartTrac. It is shown at center in Figure 1-26. If a discrete output has been
assigned as Tolerance - OK, that output will be “on” when the weight is in this zone.
2.7.18.2.4. Over Zone

The Over zone is shown at right (section D) in Figure 1-26, and in Figure 1-28. This zone
classification is shown when the weight on the scale is greater than the target value plus the
+tolerance value. If a discrete output has been assigned as Over Zone, this output will be “on” when
the weight is in this zone.

2.7.19. Comparators
The five Comparators in IND570 are simple, non-latching setpoints used to compare the active
weight (or rate) value with to an absolute target (or rate) value or a defined weight range. The source
for the comparison can be the Gross Weight, Displayed Weight, Absolute Displayed Weight, Rate, or
Operation
Absolute Rate.
Comparators are controlled either by coincidence (either below or above an absolute target value) or
by comparison with a range. The Active setting within Comparator setup determines the control mode
in which a Comparator operates. When the Active setting is <, <=, =, >= or >, the selected source
(weight or rate) is compared to a single target value. When the Active value is >_ _< (within a range)
or _<>_ (outside a range), the selected source (weight or rate) is compared to a range defined by
(low) Limit and High Limit values.
The COMPARATOR softkey permits direct viewing of the Comparators from the home screen. This
view screen displays each Comparator’s ID, Description, Limit, Unit, High Limit (if applicable) and
Active operator. Only the limit value/s can be edited via the COMPARATOR softkey. To edit parameters
other than limits, the Comparator configuration screen must be accessed in setup.
Figure 1-29: Comparator Configuration Screens
To access a comparator’s limit editing page directly from the home screen, press the COMPARATOR
softkey , use the UP/DOWN keys to select the desired Comparator from the list, and press the
EDIT softkey . If the ID of the Comparator is known, press the ID number of the Comparator, then
the Comparator softkey. This will quick recall the specified comparator’s limit editing page.
2.7.19.1. Comparators and Discrete Outputs
Comparators are intended to be used with discrete outputs. The function of a comparator is to trigger
a discrete output based on the parameters of the comparator. Each comparator in the IND570 has an
assignable discrete output that will activate when the comparator’s settings are met. Refer to Chapter
4, Applications, for more information on the setup and use of comparators with discrete I/O.
2.7.19.2. Target Value Comparators
The assigned discrete output for a Target Value (coincidence) comparator will be triggered when the
selected source is TRUE in regards to the selection in the comparator’s Active setting.
2.7.19.2.1. Example
The Source is Rate. The Active operator is <= (less than or equal to) and the Limit is 100 kg/min. The
output will be ON when the rate is under 100 kg/min and will turn OFF when the measured value
reaches 100 kg/min.

Refer to the section 3.5.7, Rate in Chapter 3, Configuration for more information on programming the
Rate feature.
2.7.19.3. Range Comparators
In the case of a Range mode Comparator, the assigned output will be triggered when the selected
source is TRUE in regards to the Active setting(s). The Limit setting establishes the lower of the two
values that define the range. The High Limit setting defines the upper value of the range.
2.7.19.3.1. Example
The Source is Gross Weight. The Active operator is >_ _< (within a range). The Limit is 300 kg and
the High Limit is 800 kg. The output will be ON when the measured gross weight is between 300 and
800 kg. If the weight falls below 300 kg or exceeds 800 kg, the output will turn OFF.
2.7.19.3.2. Example
The Source is Gross Weight. The Active operator is _><_ (outside a range). The Limit is 200 lb and
the High Limit is 400 lb. The output will be ON when the measured gross weight is 200 lbs or less
and 400 lbs or higher. If the gross weight measures between 201 lb and 799 lb, the output will turn
OFF.
2.7.20. Alibi Memory Direct Access

The Alibi Memory stores individual transaction data that can be retrieved for verification purposes.
Information stored in the Alibi Memory includes:
• Transaction counter value

• Date and time of transaction
• Gross, net, and tare weights including units of measure
2.7.20.1. Viewing and Printing Alibi Memory
1. Press the Alibi softkey if programmed as one of the home position softkeys or press the
REPORTS softkey if programmed as one of the home position softkeys then select Alibi
Memory from the selection box.
2. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Alibi Search View screen displays.
3. Use the selection boxes and data entry fields to enter specific search information to limit the
search, or do not enter any search limits to view all Alibi Memory Table information.
4. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Alibi Search View screen displays the search results.
Records are ordered by date and time with the most recent record shown last.
5. Press the PRINT softkey on this screen to print the entire selected Alibi Memory Table.
Alibi Memory can also be exported from the terminal through the USB softkey. Refer to section 0 for
additional details.
2.7.21. Table and Log Searches

A search function can be used to look up specific information in any of the IND570 tables and logs.
This table search function can be accessed using various methods, including the TARE TABLE softkey
, TARGET TABLE softkey , ALIBI softkey , REPORTS softkey , and from within setup.

2.7.21.1. Searching a Table or Log
1. Access the table to be viewed using the appropriate method. Refer to Appendix B, Table and Log
File Structure, for more information about specific tables and log files.
Operation
2. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Search View screen displays.
3. Use the selection and data entry boxes to enter specific search information to limit the search, or
enter * (the “wild-card” character) to view all table information.
4. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Search View screen displays with the search results.
2.7.22. Reports
Several standard reports may be generated, viewed, and printed from database tables. Reports
include:
• Alibi Memory
• Tare Table
• Target Table
The REPORTS softkey must be displayed on the home screen in order to generate table reports.
Otherwise, table reports can only be generated from within setup. In addition, a serial, Ethernet or USB
port must be configured with its Assignment as Reports for report printing to be enabled.
2.7.22.1. Generating a Report
1. Press the REPORTS softkey . The Reports screen displays (Figure 1-30).
TYPE selection box
VIEW TABLE CLEAR TOTALS

softkey softkey
PRINT softkey
EXIT softkey
Figure 1-30: Reports Screen
2. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select the desired type of database table report in the
selection box.
3. The CLEAR TOTALS softkey displays when the Tare Table or Target Table is selected.. Press
the CLEAR TOTALS softkey to clear the totals in the selected table. A warning displays that
requires verification that the user wants to clear the table totals.
4. Press the PRINT softkey on this screen to print the entire selected report.
5. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the home screen.
6. To select and print a sub-set of records from a table, press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The
Search Screen for the selected report type displays (see Figure 1-31).

Search Field
selection box
Comparison
selection box
SEARCH
softkey
Figure 1-31: Search Screen (Tare Table)
7. Press the SEARCH softkey to view all data in the table. Only fields enabled in setup display
in tables.
8. To limit the data:
a. Use the Search Field selection box to select a desired search field (for example, search fields
for the Tare table include Description, ID, n, Tare, and Total).
b. Use the Comparison selection box to select how the data will be limited (less than (<), less
than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), greater than (>), or not
equal to (<>) are available in the selection box).
c. Use the numeric keypad to enter the limiting factor in the text box (the * character is the “wild-
card” character and returns all results).
d. Press the SEARCH softkey to view the limited data in the table. Search result records are
always listed in order by ID (lowest to highest ID numbers). Use the arrow keys to scroll left
and right to view additional columns.
e. Figure 1-32 is an example of search results for a Tare Table, with two views showing all
available columns of data.
Figure 1-32: Tare Table Search Results
2.7.23. SICSpro Cable-Free Floor Scale Sleep States

In order to extend battery life, when a Cable-Free Floor Scale (CFS) platform is not used for a period of
time defined in the platform’s Advanced Setup Mode (ASM), the Bluetooth module will enter a sleep
state, the platform will no longer transmit weight data to the terminal, and the terminal will display
dashes in place of a weight. An alternating message will appear below the system line – “Platform is
asleep” and “Add weight to wake up.”
To wake the scale, the platform must be given a sudden, firm jolt – simply placing weight on the
scale is not sufficient. Once awake, the platform may require some time to start transmitting a stable

weight. During this period, the terminal will display dashes instead of a weight, and the message
“Scale is warming up” will appear below the system line. Once the scale is ready, the terminal will
receive weight data and the home screen display will return to normal.
Operation
2.8. USB Host

IND570 provides a standard USB port classified as 2.0 Full Speed (12 Mbps/1.5 Mbps) host HID
class and mass storage class. The USB port has an A type receptacle and provides +5V at a
maximum of 500mA for connected devices.
WARNING
EXTERNAL USB ADAPTOR (30139559) IS NOT CERTIFIED FOR USE WITH IND570XX, OR FOR USE IN
DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 HAZARDOUS AREAS. USE ONLY IN NON-HAZARDOUS AREA.
Only FAT and FAT32 USB flash drive formats are supported
The maximum supported USB flash drive size is 32 GB
Multiple devices can be connected simultaneously through an external USB hub
Direct connection from IND570 to a printer or PC for data transfer is not supported.
The USB host port provides for the following functions:
• Connection to an external QWERTY keyboard, USB stick, bar code reader, or WiFi module
• Direct input of (barcode) scanned into various IND570 applications (e.g. ID fields). Refer to
section D.1.3.1 for a list of barcode scanners which are known to be compatible
• Collection and storage of data for print templates and demand outputs
• File transfer between IND570 and a USB memory device
• Connection of a WiFi module for wireless network connectivity
• Flashing new firmware
• Backup and restore of terminal configuration and calibration
• Loading custom TaskExpert application files
2.8.1. USB Host Port – Default Settings
The USB Host port, standard on the IND570 mainboard, can be used for data input from an external
keyboard or barcode scanner, or to transfer select files to and from the terminal. By default, the USB
port is disabled. Access to the USB port must be enabled in setup before the IND570 will recognize
the presence and type of connected USB device.
Press the ENTER SETUP softkey and navigate to Communication | Access/Security | USB to enable
use of the USB Host port. If user security in not yet enabled, no user login is required to enable the
USB port. Once the port has been enabled, a USB device will be automatically recognized for use with
the IND570 when it is connected.

2.8.2. USB Host Port Connection
When a mass storage device (a USB memory stick) is connected to IND570, the terminal
automatically identifies the device type and determines that its purpose is data storage. The amount
of time it takes for a memory device to be recognized depends on its size. The larger the memory, the
longer recognition takes.
When an external keyboard or barcode scanner is connected to IND570, the user must identify its
function ().
Figure 1-33: USB Device Identification Prompt
If the function is ‘keyboard’, the incoming data will be handled as an unbroken data string. If the
function is not identified as ‘keyboard’, then the incoming data will be sent through the Input Template
data parser where leading and trailing characters may be eliminated from the data string. When
incoming data is sent to the data parser, it can also be assigned a specific function, for example
selection of a table record ID. Refer to the Communication | Templates | Input section of Chapter 3,
Configuration, for additional details on the Input Template data parser.
2.8.3. USB File Transfer

In order to improve ease and functionality when importing and exporting files to and from the
terminal, a USB file transfer function can be accessed by pressing the USB softkey ().
When the softkey is pressed, the user is presented with a choice – either to write a file to a USB
memory device, or to read a file from a USB memory device. Once the action is selected, the file type
can be chosen. The file transfer is executed by pressing the START softkey .

Operation
USB File Transfer

softkey
Action
selection box
File selection
box
START softkey
Figure 1-34: USB File Transfer Function and File Selection Screens
Table 1-6 lists the files that can be transferred using the USB softkey . The maximum file size
that can be transferred via USB is 4 GB.
Table 1-6: Files Available For Transfer via USB Softkey
File Type Export* Import* File Format

Action Log (only available with Fill-570 application software) Yes No .csv
Alibi Memory Yes No .csv
Calibration Test and Weight Information Yes Yes .txt
Change Log Yes No .csv
Error Log Yes No .csv
GWP Log Yes No .csv
GWP Tests with Weight Information Yes Yes .txt
Terminal Status Yes No .txt
Maintenance Log Yes No .csv
POWERCELL Performance Log Yes No .csv
Pac Statistics Yes No .txt
(only available when supporting application software is enabled in terminal)
Service Information Report Yes No .txt

Tare Table Yes Yes .csv
Target Table Yes Yes .csv
Tables A0, A3 – A9 Yes Yes .csv
If the file already exists in the terminal (on an import) or on the USB memory device (on an export), a
warning is displayed. The user must choose either to overwrite the existing file or to abort the process.

To ensure proper function of the terminal, before an imported file is saved into terminal memory, the
file is checked for data integrity. If there are issues with the file (e.g. too many fields, invalid #, type of
characters or file size) a pop-up error message is displayed and the file import is aborted
automatically.
If a read or write error occurs during the USB file exchange, a synchronous error (pop-up message) is
displayed, notifying the user of the error.
2.8.4. Printing to USB

To execute a successful print to USB, the USB connection must be configured with a Demand Output
assignment and linked to a print template and trigger associated with the USB port (refer to Appendix
C, Communications).
When a print template is sent to a USB flash drive for the first time, the IND570 will automatically
create a file structure on the root directory of the USB device. The top level filename is “IND570”.
Within the IND570 folder are folders for individual terminals. The unique serial number of each
terminal is used as the filename. Figure 1-35 shows the file structure created by the IND570 during a
full backup. Folders under the serial number folder will only be created as they are populated by the
IND570 during data transfer/capture.
Terminal Serial
Numbers
Figure 1-35: USB File Structure
When a USB port is configured to receive a Demand Output (print), a .txt file with the name of the
template being printed is created to collect the data from each print that is executed. The maximum
size of the template text file created and stored on a USB flash drive is limited to 5 MB, or the
available free space on the USB flash drive, whichever is smaller.
An appropriate warning is shown either in the system line or as a pop-up message when the text file
is 75% full. A second warning is shown when the .txt file is 90% and reminds the operator that the
file must be emptied soon. If the .txt file exceeds 5MB, new records will not be recorded into the .txt
file and a pop-up message informing that the text file is full is provided. The user must now
remove/delete the .txt file from the USB and reinstall the USB flash drive to print additional records.

2.9. WiFi Operation
The optional WiFi module available for the IND570 communicates through the USB port of the
terminal and provides a WiFi connection that meets IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n standards. Two versions are
Operation
available. One is intended to be installed in the harsh IND570 enclosure and protrudes out the rear
panel through a semi-transparent watertight cover. The other version is intended to be mounted
remotely using its 1.3m/4.2ft USB cable. The remote version includes a mounting bracket and
protective housing.
Figure 1-36: WiFi Module Options
The WiFi connection is dual-band, supporting both 2.4 and 5 GHz, and is fully powered by the +5V
on the USB port. The best available security protocol (WEP 64/128, WPA, WPA2, TKIP and
AES/CCMP, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-TLS) is automatically selected during the initialization process. In ideal
environments, the module can communicate at distances up to 150 meters (500 feet).
A multi-color LED on the module indicates its status and when connected, the signal strength is
shown at the right of the metrology line on the IND570 terminal display.
When the optional WiFi module is installed, wireless access is provided for the communication
methods described in the following sections.
2.9.1. Shared Data Server

The shared data server is the default function for the WiFi option, which provides access to the shared
data server as long as no assignment is configured for the WiFi port. If a connection has been
assigned to the WiFi port, the shared data server will no longer available via WiFi.
Refer to section C.10., Shared Data Server, for details about communication to the shared data server
through the WiFi port.
2.9.2. Demand Output

Operation of the demand output of the WiFi port us similar to operation of the EPRINT port for
Ethernet. A device on the network can register for the data and receive template data per the
connection assignment. The external device must open a connection to the selected WiFi port at the
WiFi IP address in order to register. After registering, when a demand output is triggered, the selected
template data will be available to the external device.

2.9.3. Remote Display
An IND570 configured as a remote display to a primary terminal can be connected to a wireless
access point with the WiFi option. In this configuration, when the CLEAR, TARE, PRINT and ZERO keys
on the remote display are pressed, the corresponding ASCII character (C, T, P and Z) will be
transmitted to the primary terminal.
In this application, continuous weight data from the primary terminal is received via WiFi and
displayed on the remote display.
Refer to section 4.6.4., Configuration Utilizing WiFi Communication, for details about configuring the
WiFi port for use as a remote display assignment.
2.9.4. SICS
When the WiFi port connection is assigned to SICS, the port will provide bi-directional communication
to a host using SICS commands and responses.
Refer to section C.7., Standard Interface Command Set (SICS) Protocol, for details about
communicating with the IND570 using SICS interface on the WiFi port.
2.9.5. FTP
Files can be sent to or retrieved from the terminal at any time via FTP, using port 21 of the WiFi port.
The WiFi FTP function behaves like the FTP function on the Ethernet port.
Refer to section C.11., File Transfer, for details about sending files to and receiving files from the
IND570 via the WiFi port.
Some FTP programs (for example FileZilla), cannot be used with the WiFi option for file transfer
because they make two simultaneous connections and the IND570 WiFi module supports only
one connection.
2.10. Error Management, Diagnostic Information and

Service Options
2.10.1. Error Classification
Two classes of errors are detected in the IND570 terminal – synchronous and asynchronous.
2.10.1.1. Synchronous Errors
Synchronous errors are those errors that occur as a direct result of a user interaction with the terminal.
An example of a synchronous error is attempting to execute a Zero command when the weight on the
scale is out of pushbutton zero range. IND570 will display a pop-up message window, helping the
user see an immediate cause and effect from his actions. An example of a synchronous error
message window is shown in Figure 1-37.

Operation
Figure 1-37: Synchronous Error Pop-up Message
In order to proceed with operation after a synchronous error window is displayed, the ENTER key
must be pressed to acknowledge the error condition. The ENTER acknowledgement can be initiated
on the terminal keypad, external keyboard ENTER key or a discrete input assigned as ENTER. No
other user functions are allowed until the synchronous error is acknowledged.
2.10.1.2. Asynchronous Errors
Asynchronous errors are system errors that do not occur as a direct result of user interaction with the
terminal. When an asynchronous error occurs, the user is alerted by a temporary message in the
system line of the display. Examples of asynchronous errors include PLC and Remote Discrete I/O
communication errors (see Figure 1-38).
Figure 1-38: Asynchronous Error System Line Message
2.10.1.3. Dual Classification Errors
Some terminal errors can have dual classification, as either synchronous (when triggered by user
action) or asynchronous (when initiated by a PLC interface or remote discrete input). A failed Zero
command is an example of the type of error that can be dual classified.
2.10.2. Error Log

IND570 provides an Error Log which records the details of system errors. As a general rule,
asynchronous errors are recorded while synchronous errors are not. Each error record includes:
• Date and time of the error.

• An error code generated with each error instance to give information about the cause of the error.
• An associated text message for inclusion in reports or email alerts.
Refer to the Maintenance | Configure/View | Error Log section Chapter 3, Configuration and Appendix B,
Tables and Log File Structure, for more information on the IND570 Error Log.

2.10.3. Information Recall
Press the INFORMATION RECALL softkey to access the recall screen. Several softkeys appear,
each providing access to specific terminal information.
Figure 1-39: Information Recall View
2.10.3.1. Weight Recall
Press the WEIGHT RECALL softkey to display the active Gross, Tare, and Net weight readings for
the scale.
2.10.3.2. System Information
Pressing the SYSTEM INFORMATION softkey displays system information, including the terminal
model (version) and serial number, Terminal ID #1, Terminal ID #2, Terminal ID #3 and installed
software and hardware information. The terminal identification information is entered in setup. Refer to
section 3.7.1, Device, in Chapter 3, Configuration, for more information about entering terminal
identification information. Installed hardware and software fields are automatically populated.
Figure 1-40: System Information View
This system information can be printed with the PRINT softkey via any connection with a Reports
assignment.
2.10.3.2.1. WiFi Recall

If the WiFi option is installed in the IND570, a WiFi RECALL softkey will be shown. This softkey
provides access to view various data from the WiFi system including SSID, operating channel, type of
security used, signal strength, IP address, MAC of the WiFi module, identifying name of the WiFi
module, module S/N, module firmware version and BSSID.

Operation
Figure 1-41: WiFi Recall Screens
The signal strength (RSSI) value is active when viewing the recall screen and can quickly indicate the
current signal strength from the wireless access point (WAP).
2.10.3.2.2. Connected Devices Recall

A record of all equipment involved in a weighing system installation can be helpful when
troubleshooting the system. The CONNECTED DEVICES softkey displays peripheral device
information that has been manually entered by the service provider or user. Refer to the Terminal |
Device section in Chapter 3, Configuration for more information about entering peripheral device
information into the Connected Devices list.
2.10.3.2.3. Bluetooth Information Recall

When a SICSpro Cable-Free Floor Scale (CFS) is connected to the IND570, an additional softkey, with
a Bluetooth icon , is available in the System Info Recall screen. Press this softkey to display
information about the CFS platform.
Figure 1-42: BLUETOOTH INFO RECALL Screens
A message about the CFS platform may display when this screen is accessed – for example,
“Platform battery low.” Press ENTER to confirm and dismiss this message, and to view the
BLUETOOTH INFO RECALL screen.
Figure 1-43: Battery Warning Message
A key function of the BLUETOOTH INFO RECALL screen is to give an indication of signal strength and
battery condition. Two conditions will cause the system to display a warning:

Warning Explanation
Platform battery low The battery has approximately 12 days of life remaining, at 8
hours per day usage. The battery is not rechargeable, and
must be replaced when depleted.
Warning – Platform battery voltage very low An urgent message: The battery has approximately 5 days of
life left at 8 hours per day usage. This message will be
shown as a pop-up over the home screen once every four
hours, and must be acknowledged and dismissed by
pressing ENTER. It will also display when the terminal is first
powered up, and when the platform wakes from sleep.
The remaining battery life is extended when the platform enters its deep sleep mode, or if it is
used for less than 8 hours per day.
2.10.3.3. Metrology Recall
The METROLOGY RECALL softkey displays the terminal metrology control number (MCN), whether
the terminal is programmed as approved or not, along with the last calibration date and time. On the
high-precision IDNet version, the Ident Code (calibration tracking) is also displayed.
2.10.3.3.1. TaskExpert™ Checksum

If TaskExpert is installed the IND570, the TASKEXPERT CHECKSUM softkey will appear on the
Metrology Recall screen. The TaskExpert Checksum softkey displays the terminal calculated
checksum for the custom application that has been loaded into the terminal. This calculated
checksum is compared to the checksum embedded in the TaskExpert application. A match must
occur for the application to run.
2.10.4. Service Icon

The service icon is shown on the terminal display when system events or system errors occur
that require the attention of a service provider (see Figure 1-5). To view information regarding the
trigger of the service icon, press the INFORMATION RECALL softkey, then press the SERVICE ICON
softkey .
The Service Information Recall softkey displays current system details that a user can pass on
to a service provider to assist in troubleshooting and repair activities. System information displayed
depends on terminal setup and activated terminal functions, but can include calibration and GWP
status, recent service and error alerts, and service provider contact information (Figure 1-44).

Operation
Figure 1-44: Service Information Recall View
The PRINT softkey will transmit this service information via any communication connection with
a Reports assignment. Refer to the Communication | Connections in Chapter 3, Configuration for
details on assigning data output ports. The SEND EMAIL softkey on the Service Information
Recall screen sends a manual email notification to any recipient programmed with “Service” as an
email alarm setting. Refer to the Communication | Email and Communication | Network sections in
Chapter 3, Configuration, for more information about enabling email alerts.
The service icon it will be automatically cleared if the circumstances that triggered the service icon are
corrected or it can be manually cleared from the terminal display of the IND570 (refer to the
Maintenance | Run | Diagnostics | Reset Service Icon section in Chapter 3, Configuration).

2.10.4.1.1. Terminal Status View
The TERMINAL STATUS softkey takes the user to the Terminal Status Report screens, where
additional system performance details are available (Figure 1-45).
Figure 1-45: Terminal Status Screens
The Terminal Status feature provides the status of certain predetermined terminal functions and
systems. The information fields displayed in the Terminal Status screen are populated when the
TERMINAL STATUS softkey is pressed (Figure 1-44), so the data is always current when viewed or
printed. The POWERCELL version included additional load cell information not shown here.
If security is enabled, access to Terminal Status is limited to Maintenance level or higher.
The PRINT softkey on the Terminal Status view will transmit a comprehensive report via any
communication connection with a Reports assignment. Information displayed on the following
terminal screens is included in the Terminal Status report:
• System Information Recall
• Connected Devices table

• Service Information Recall
• Terminal Status
Refer to the Reports section of Appendix C, Communications for more information regarding the
content and structure of all Reports.
2.10.5. Automatic Email Alerts

When the Ethernet communication option is installed, IND570 provides an email function to
automatically alert recipients when certain system events occur in the weighing system. Details on
enabling the email function can be found in the Communication | Network | Email Alert section in

In the event the IND570 loses connection to the network, email sent from the IND570 during the
disconnected period is placed into a queue. When network connection is reestablished, the
IND570 transmits any queued email.
The IND570 supports four categories of email alerts: Information, Warning, Failure and Service. When
Operation
any of these alerts are triggered, all recipients that have been set up to receive a particular category of
email alert are sent an email in a predefined format, containing details about the event as well as
information about the transmitting device.
Table 5-18 (in Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance) lists the categories of system events that will
trigger an automatic email alert.
2.10.5.1. Manual Call for Service via Email
In addition to the Automatic Alerts, a manual call for service is also supported. A manual Service Alert
can be triggered by pressing the SEND EMAIL softkey at the bottom of the Service Info Recall
page (Figure 1-44). When the SEND EMAIL softkey is pressed, the user is provided an entry
box on a new page to type in any additional user observations before actually sending the email.
From this screen, pressing the EMAIL softkey triggers the transmission of an email to any
recipients registered for Service level alerts.

3 Configuration
This chapter provides information about how to configure the IND570 terminal’s operating system. It
describes access to the setup mode, where functions can be enabled, disabled, or defined by entering
parameter values in specific setup screens.
3.1. Entering Setup Mode

The configuration of the IND570 terminal is accessed through the SETUP softkey .
Most of the setup menu is viewable by any user at any time. If user security has been enabled and a
user is attempting to enter setup for the purpose of modifying terminal configuration, the user should
first navigate to the Login branch at the very top of the setup menu (Figure 3-2) and enter a valid user
name and password combination (Figure 3-1). Entry of a valid username and password
combination will grant access to the user at the security level associated with the login.
Refer to the User Security section in Chapter 2, Operation, and section 3.7.5, Users, below, for further
information about password setup and security levels.
Data entry mode
Username entry box
Password entry box
Figure 3-1: Login Screen
3.1.1. To Enter a Username

1. Press the ENTER key to access the Username entry box. The current data entry mode is identified
at the right of the top line (see Figure 3-1).
Refer to Data Entry in Chapter 2, Operation for details on entering alphanumeric characters.
2. Use the keypad or external keyboard to enter the username in the username entry box. This field
is case sensitive.
3. Press the ENTER key.

3.1.2. To Enter a Password
1. With focus on the Password field label, press the ENTER key and focus moves to the Password
entry box.
Configuration
2. Use the keypad or external keyboard to enter the password in the password entry box. This field is
case sensitive. Note that asterisks are shown instead of the actual character entered.
3. Press the ENTER key.
4. After both the Username and Password have been entered, press the OK softkey . If the
username and password are correct, the terminal goes into setup mode. Once the terminal is in
setup mode, the setup menu tree displays.
3.2. Exiting Setup Mode

To exit the setup mode, select Home from the setup menu tree and press ENTER. The default weighing
operation screen displays.
As a quick alternative, press the far left softkey whenever the menu tree is displayed to exit the
menu tree. If no other function is indicated on the far left softkey, it will typically function as an
EXIT softkey .
3.3. Setup Menu Tree

Each line of the setup menu tree is referred to as a branch (see Figure 3-2). Some branches have
additional sub-branches that become visible when the view of the main branch is expanded. If a
branch has sub-branches, the collapsed symbol (⊞) initially displays in front of the branch name.
After the branch view has been expanded, the expanded symbol (⊟) displays in front of the branch
name and the additional branches become visible. Any branch that is not expandable is called a leaf
node.
The first branch of the menu tree shown with focus is the Scale branch (Figure 3-2).

Figure 3-2: Setup Menu Tree Example
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move focus through the branches of the setup menu tree.
Press the RIGHT navigation key to expand a branch and the LEFT navigation key to collapse a
branch. When the focus is on a sub-branch, focus can quickly be moved back to the main branch by
pressing the LEFT navigation key.
When a leaf node (singular, non-expandable) branch such as Device or Display is in focus, press
the ENTER key to display the setup screen for that function.
3.3.1. Setup Screens

Setup screens enable access to data fields where parameters can be viewed, entered, or modified to
configure the terminal to meet specific application function needs.
3.3.1.1. Navigation
Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move through the field labels displayed on each setup
screen, and to move to a second or third setup screen when more than one screen is used for
configuration fields associated with a specific parameter (indicated by the presence of a scroll bar).
The shaded portion of the scroll bar (see Figure 3-3) indicates which screen is displayed.

Field label
with focus
Scroll bar indicating

first setup screen
Configuration
Scroll bar indicating

second setup screen
Figure 3-3: Examples of Setup Screens (Format Time & Date)
3.3.1.2. Data Entry
Press the ENTER key to move the focus from the field label to either the selection box or data entry
box where data is to be entered or edited (see Figure 3-4).
Selection box
with focus
Figure 3-4: Setup Screen
If the field values are presented in a selection box, the current selection will have focus when the
ENTER key is pressed.
3.3.1.2.1. To change the field value in a selection box

1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the list and place the focus on the
value to be selected.
Note that when viewing the last field in a selection box, pressing the DOWN navigation key again
will move the focus to the top of the selection list. When viewing the first field in a selection list,
pressing the UP navigation key will move focus to the last selection.
2. Press the ENTER key to accept the selection as the value for the field. The selection displays as
the value for the field and the focus moves to the next field label.
If the field value is for a data entry box and alpha/numeric character entry is possible, the data entry
mode will appear in the upper right of the display (Figure 3-1).

3.3.1.2.2. To change the field value using alpha/numeric characters
1. When a data entry box is first entered, the previous data (if present) is in focus. To replace
previous data, use the alpha/numeric keypad to enter the desired value.
OR
Press the LEFT and RIGHT navigation keys to move the cursor into position if the value needs to be
edited from a specific point rather than replaced. Position the cursor at the end of the data to be
deleted and press the C key once for each character to be deleted.
2. Press the ENTER key to accept the entered alpha/numeric characters for the field. The entry
displays as the value for the field and the focus moves to the next field label.
To exit a setup screen, press the EXIT softkey , which is in the first softkey position. The setup
menu tree displays with the focus on the branch for the setup screen that was exited.
3.4. Overview of Configuration

The setup menu tree can be expanded to show every branch and leaf node in the terminal’s
configuration. Use the navigation keys to select the desired setup screen.
There are five major branches in the setup menu:
Scale
Application
Terminal
Communication
Maintenance
Details for each branch are provided throughout this chapter. Figure 3-5 shows the setup menu tree
with all possible branches expanded.

Configuration
Figure 3-5: The IND570 Menu Tree with All Branches Except Scale Expanded
The presence of setup menu braches will depend on installed options and, in some cases,
configuration selections made in other areas of setup. For example, the TaskExpert branch is only
available if the optional TaskExpert software module has been installed into the IND570.

3.5. Scale
If the metrology switch is in the approved position (SW1-1 = ON), changes to protected
parameters in the Scale branch are not permitted.
The Scale branch provides the following access to the configuration of the connected scale:
Leaf nodes that are marked with an asterisk (*) above will have different parameters depending
on the connected scale type.
Each type of scale in the IND570 offers different parameters in the Scale branch. To simplify the scale
programming process, each scale type is described in a separate section in this chapter. Refer to the
correct section for the type of scale used.
• Analog Section 3.5.1, below

• IDNet Section 3.5.2, on page 3-23
• SICSpro Section 3.5.3, on page 3-33
• POWERCELL Section 3.5.4, on page 3-41
• Remote Section 3.5.5, on page 3-63
A Reset is present at the end of the branch to enable a limited reset to the factory default settings for
the Scale branch parameters. Refer to Appendix A, Default Settings, for details.
3.5.1. Scale – Analog

3.5.1.1. Type
The Scale Type screen permits a name to be assigned to the scale,

displays the scale PCB type in the terminal (or allows the IND570 to
be configured as a remote display for another terminal), provides a
selection list for the Approval mode, and allows entry of the
approval class and interval for the metrology line. The EXIT softkey
will return the display to the menu tree.
3.5.1.1.1. Name
The Name field enables entry of the scale identification. Enter the
scale name (an alpha-numeric string of up to 20 characters) in the
Name entry box.
3.5.1.1.2. Scale Type

The Scale Type field indicates which type of scale this terminal supports and allows selection of
Remote Display mode. If Remote is selected, the approval, class and verified interval options will not
be available. Choices are:
Analog [default for analog version], Remote
Refer to Chapter 4, Applications, for specific instructions on configuring the terminal for use as a
remote display.

3.5.1.1.3. Approval
Approval refers to the metrological (weights and measures) approval configuration for the specific
scale. The selection list includes:
Configuration
None [default], USA, OIML, Canada, Australia, Argentina, Thailand, Korea
If the approval is configured as USA, OIML, Canada, Australia, Thailand or Korea and the metrology
security switch, SW1-1, is set to ON, access to the Scale setup parameters in the menu tree will be
limited to view only.
If the approval is configured as Argentina and the metrology security switch, SW1-1, is set to ON,
access to the entire setup menu is prohibited. If an attempt is made to access the setup menu, an on-
screen message will display stating “Access denied. Scale is Approved.”
If an approval is selected but SW1-1 is not ON, it will not be possible to leave setup, and a message
will appear: "Switch UNSECURED".
3.5.1.1.4. Class
The Class field selection is shown if an analog scale terminal is selected as approved. This selection
must match the Weights and Measures approval class when the terminal is used in an approved
mode. The Class information is included in the data shown in the metrological line at the top of the
display. The selections are:
II, III [default], III HD, III L, IIII
3.5.1.1.5. Verified Interval

This parameter is shown only when the terminal has been programmed as Approved and Class has
been selected as II. The Verified Interval indicates if the approved increment size is equal to the
displayed increment size or if it is 10 times the displayed increment size. This information is included
in the data shown in the metrological line at the top of the display.
e=d [default], e=10d

3.5.1.1.6. Power Up Delay
The Power Up Delay supports approval to the most stringent performance requirements of the
European MID. This parameter only appears when the Approval on an analog scale has been set as
"OIML". Settings for Power Up Delay include:
Disabled [default], Enabled
When Enabled, operation of the terminal is prohibited (except for setup access) until 5 minutes have
expired. A process timer is provided in the terminal system line, and updates every 3 seconds (Figure
3-6).
It is strongly recommended to leave Power Up Delay disabled (default condition) unless the
application/installation requires MID R61 approval for automatic gravimetric filling.

Figure 3-6: Power Up Delay Shown in System Line
3.5.1.2. Capacity & Increment
Use the Capacity and Increment setup screen to select primary units, set the number of ranges or
intervals, program the capacity and increments sizes, and the blanking over capacity value.
When Remote is selected as the scale type, the capacity and increment size are available. These
parameters are used to determine the size of the digits used in the weight display and should be
entered based on the values from the master terminal.
3.5.1.2.1. Primary Units

Set the primary units from the selection box choices, which include:
grams (g), kilograms (kg) [default], pounds (lb), tonnes (t), tons (ton)
3.5.1.2.2. # Ranges/Intervals
Select the multi-interval or multiple range mode and set the number of ranges or intervals from the
selections:
1 [default], 2 intervals, 2 ranges, 3 intervals, 3 ranges
>|1|< - Range/Interval 1 Values
Specify the capacity and then the increment size for range or interval 1.
When more than one range is selected, these parameters provide entry of the capacity and then the
increment size for the second range or interval.
When three ranges or intervals are selected, these parameters provide entry of the capacity and then
the increment size for the third range or interval.
3.5.1.2.3. Blank Over Capacity

Blanking of the display is used to indicate an over-capacity condition. Set the blank over capacity for
the number of display increments that the terminal is permitted to go over capacity. For example, if
capacity is set at 500 kg by 0.1 kg increments and the blank over capacity setting is 5 d, the
terminal can display weights up to 500.5 kg. At weights over 500.5, dashed lines will display
instead of a weight and demand data output is inhibited.

3.5.1.3. Calibration
The Calibration screens enable entry of a geo code adjustment value, the base serial number,
calibration units, linearity adjustment, and analog gain jumper setting. This screen also provides
access to the Service Mode of an IDNet scale. The Calibration branch is not accessible when the
Configuration
terminal is programmed as a Remote Display scale type.
3.5.1.3.1. Geo Code

Enter the geo code for the appropriate geo adjustment value for the current geographical location. Geo
codes are numbered 0–31. Refer to Appendix D, Geo Codes to find the appropriate Geo Code for the
installation location.
3.5.1.3.2. Base Serial Number

If appropriate, enter the connected scale base serial number in this field. An entry of up to 14
characters is possible.
3.5.1.3.3. Calibration Units

Calibration units are the same as the primary units selections, which include:
3.5.1.3.4. Linearity Adjustment

Select the linearity adjustment from the selection box. Selections are as follows:
Disabled [default] Use only zero and one span point
3 point Use zero, midpoint, and highpoint
4 point Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, and highpoint
5 point Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, mid-highpoint, and highpoint
3.5.1.3.5. Analog Gain Jumper

The analog gain jumper setting on the Main PCB can be either 2 mV/V or 3 mV/V. The terminal is
shipped from the factory in the 3 mv/V setting. In order for the CalFree feature to operate properly, the
selected parameter must indicate the physical position of the jumper on the Main board. Refer to the
PCB Jumper Positions section in the IND570 Installation Manual, for more about the jumper location.
The jumper settings are:
2 mv/V Jumper installed on both pins
3 mv/V [default] Jumper installed on just one pin
If this parameter is not set correctly, the CalFree calibration feature will not be accurate.
3.5.1.3.6. Calibration Softkeys

The softkeys shown on the last Calibration setup screen are used for calibration procedures.
Capture Zero
Capture Span

Step Calibration
CalFree
Capture Zero
The CAPTURE ZERO softkey triggers an independent operation to reset the zero condition of the
scale.
To capture zero
1. Press the CAPTURE ZERO softkey .
2. A message displays that directs the user to empty the scale and press the START softkey . The
raw counts are displayed in a box at the lower right corner of the display.
3. Empty the scale and press the START softkey . The status of the capture zero operation
displays.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to abort the zero process and return the display to the previous
screen.
4. When the operation is complete, a final status message displays that verifies the completion of
the zero capture operation.
If motion is present during the zero capture process, the terminal will process the dynamic weight
readings then display a warning message indicating dynamic weight values were used. This
message provides choices of No and Yes to either reject or accept the dynamic weight
calibration. Move focus to the desired action then press the ENTER key.
5. If the zero span operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Capture Zero OK”
displays. If the capture zero operation was not successful, an error message that reads “Zero
Failure” displays. If the zero fails, repeat the zero capture procedures. If the zero continues to fail,
contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Calibration screen.
Capture Span
The CAPTURE SPAN softkey initiates a sequence to capture span that can be performed
independently of capturing zero.
To capture span:
1. Press the CAPTURE SPAN softkey . The Capture Span setup screen displays.
2. Enter the weight for test load 1 and all other test loads if linearity has been enabled. Each test
load value must be larger than the previously entered test load value. Press the ENTER key.
3. Prompts to "Place test load” then “Press START" are shown. The raw counts are displayed in a
box at the lower right corner of the display.
4. Place test load weight 1 on the scale.

5. Press the START softkey . The status of the weight capture operation displays. When the
operation is complete, a status message displays that verifies the completion of the weight
capture.
If needed, press the ESCAPE softkey to abort the calibration process and return the display to
Configuration
the previous screen.
6. After the first calibration step has completed, the menu will either display a prompt for the next
calibration weight to be added (if 2, 3, or 4 test load steps are enabled by the linearity
adjustment parameter) or will show a successful or failed calibration sequence.
If motion is present during the span capture process, the terminal will process the dynamic
weight readings then display a warning message indicating dynamic weight values were used.
This message provides choices of No and Yes to either reject or accept the dynamic weight
calibration. Move focus to the desired action and press the ENTER key.
7. Repeat steps 4-5 for test loads 2, 3, and 4 if enabled by linearity adjustment.
8. If the capture span operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Capture Span
OK” displays. If the capture span operation was not successful, an error message that reads
“Calibration Failure” displays. If the calibration fails, repeat the capture span procedures. If the
calibration continues to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
Step Calibration
The STEP CALIBRATION softkey initiates a procedure that enables a “build-up” calibration for tanks
and hoppers. For step calibration, the same amount of test weight is added for each step of the
calibration procedure.
To perform a step calibration
1. Press the STEP CALIBRATION softkey . The Step Calibration setup screen displays.
2. Enter the target weight for the test load (the same amount of test load weight is used in each
step).
3. Press the START softkey . The Step Calibration screen displays. This screen shows an active
(live) weight display (using the current span factor), the intended target weight as entered on the
previous screen, and the next step for the operator “Add test weight.”
4. Add test weight to the tank/hopper as prompted by the display. Each time test weight is added to
the scale, the active display shows the weight.
5. When the full amount of test weight has been added, press the OK softkey . The test load is
captured and span factors are saved. During the time the weight is captured and the new span
factor is being calculated, the display “Add test weight” changes to “Capturing span.” The display
then changes to the next prompt “Remove test weight then fill to target.”
6. Remove the test weight. The active display returns to zero.
7. Fill the tank/hopper with a substitute material up to near the target weight. It does not have to be
the exact target weight.

8. Press the OK softkey . The target weight value recalculates to show the substitute material
weight plus the initial intended target weight. The display changes to the next prompt “Add test
weight.”
9. Add test weight to the tank/hopper. The active display shows the weight.
10. Press the OK softkey . If the actual weight does not equal the target, a new span factor
calculates and the display changes to “Capturing span.” The active weight display changes to
match the target weight value. The display changes to the next prompt “Remove test weight then
fill to target.”
11. Remove the test weight. The active display returns to the previous weight that displayed for the
last test load.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 until an appropriate number of calibration steps have been completed
for the specific application.
13. Press the EXIT softkey at any step in the procedure to stop the step calibration process and
return to the Calibration screen.
CalFree
The CALFREE softkey provides access to the span calculation screen for calibration of a scale
without test weights. Before beginning the CalFree procedure, make sure the correct value for the
Analog Gain Jumper has been entered. An incorrect value for this setting will cause errors in the
CalFree calculation.
To perform calibration of span using CalFree
1. Press the CALFREE softkey . The CalFree screen displays.

2. Enter the load cell capacity then press the ENTER key.
The total load cell capacity should be entered here. For example, for a tank with three 5000 kg
cells, cell capacity would be 3 x 5000 kg or 15000 kg.
3. Enter the rated load cell output value then press the ENTER key.
If multiple load cells are used, the average output of all cells should be entered here. The average
output is determined by adding the output values of all cells together and dividing the sum by the
number of cells.
4. Enter an estimated preload value in the associated field. Estimated preload is an optional entry.
During calculation, the terminal tests for analog/digital (A/D) converter input saturation at full
scale capacity. Estimated preload is included in this calculation if entered in this field. If the
preload is unknown, leave this field blank.
This preload value is used only to determine overload conditions and is not used as a zero
reference point. The zero reference point must be captured using the normal zero calibration
procedure.
5. Press the OK softkey . The span is calculated using the parameters entered.
6. If the calibration operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Calibration OK”
displays. If the calibration operation was not successful, an error message that reads “Calibration

Failure” displays. If the calibration fails, repeat the CalFree procedure. If the calibration continues
to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
Configuration
3.5.1.3.7. Analog Saturation Test

During the calibration process, the IND570 will determine if there is a potential for analog section
saturation. The IND570 will compare the available number of counts with the captured span to
confirm that the desired capacity is achievable. If the potential exists to saturate the analog section
before system capacity is reached, the IND570 will display a warning message and recommendation
that the system be recalibrated with a new, lower, capacity.
Figure 3-7: Analog Saturation Warning
This message functions only as a recommendation to recalibrate. After the warning message is
acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key, the user is presented with the “Capture Span OK” screen
and the BACK softkey. Service personnel should then carry out the following:
Confirm that the analog gain jumper on the main board is set correctly for the actual load cell output,
either 2mV/V or 3mV/V (refer to the IND570 Installation Manual, for jumper positions).
If the analog gain jumper is correctly set, the scale should be recalibrated with a lower capacity.
Potential analog section saturation does not force a failure in calibration.
IMPORTANT: It is critical that service personnel follow the recommendation to recalibrate or

confirm that the analog output jumper is properly positioned on the main board. Analog section
saturation will result in a ‘freeze’ of the display, where the display is no longer showing increases
in weight, creating the possibility of overfills and spills during the weighing process.
3.5.1.4. Zero
This section provides access to Auto Zero Maintenance (AZM) settings, under zero blanking, power-
up zero, and pushbutton zero parameters.
3.5.1.4.1. AZM & Display

AZM (Automatic Zero Maintenance) is a means of tracking zero when the scale is empty. AZM
compensates for conditions such as terminal or load cell drift or slow debris buildup on a scale
platform.
Auto Zero
Use the Auto Zero parameter to select the auto zero maintenance parameter. The choices include:
Disabled, Gross [default], Gross and Net

Auto Zero Range
Set the auto zero range for the number of divisions (d) around the current zero setting in which auto
zero will operate.
Under Zero Blanking
Blanking of the display is used to indicate an under-zero condition when the weight on the scale falls
below the current zero reference. Set the under zero blanking for the number of divisions (d) that the
terminal is permitted to go under zero before blanking.
A value of 99 disables blanking under zero and the terminal will display a weight as far under
zero as possible.
Power Up
This step determines if at power up, the terminal will restart with the most recent zero reference point it
had before power down or if it will reset to the calibrated zero reference. A Power Up setting of Restart
enables the terminal to reuse the most recent zero reference weight after a power cycle so it returns to
the same, previously displayed gross weight value. If reset is selected, the last zero calibration value
will be used as the zero reference point. The choices are:
Reset, Restart [default]
Timed Zero
When enabled, the Timed Zero function monitors the weighing system to ensure that the system sees
the center of zero condition at stability within a certain pre-determined time or the scale is disabled.
The following choices are available for enabling the Timed Zero function:
Disabled [default], 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes
It is strongly recommended to leave Timed Zero disabled (default condition) unless the
application/installation requires MID R51 approval for automatic catchweighing equipment.
3.5.1.4.2. Ranges
Use the settings on the Ranges screen to enable or disable Power Up Zero capture and Pushbutton
Zero and to set the ranges around the original zero condition for the scale for applying these
functions.
Power Up Zero
If Power Up Zero is enabled, the terminal tries to capture zero upon power up and a range within
which zero will be captured is shown and is programmable. If Power Up Zero is disabled, the initial
zero reference at power up will revert to the most recent zero reference point or to calibrated zero
based on the Power Up selection on the AZM & Display screen. The selections are:
Power Up Zero Range
If Power Up Zero is enabled, –Range and +Range fields will display for setting the range around the
original calibrated zero of the scale within which Power Up Zero can be applied. The range units are
percent.

For example, if the +Range setting for Power Up Zero is set at 2%, Power Up Zero will only occur
when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% of scale capacity above the original calibrated
zero reference. If the –Range setting for pushbutton zero is set at 2%, Power Up Zero will only occur
when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% of scale capacity below the original calibrated
Configuration
zero reference.
If Power Up Zero capture is enabled and the weight on the scale is outside of the zero capture
range, the display will indicate EEE until the weight is adjusted to be within this range and zero is
captured.
Pushbutton Zero
If Pushbutton Zero is enabled, the keypad ZERO pushbutton will operate to capture new zero reference
points. The choices for pushbutton zero are:
Disabled, Enabled [default]
If Pushbutton Zero is Disabled, execution of a remote zero is still possible via SICS, CPTZ, SMA
commands from a PC, a discrete input or from PLC commands. To set the zero range for these
remote zero functions, first enable the Pushbutton Zero, select the pushbutton zero range and then
disable the Pushbutton Zero.
Pushbutton Zero Range
If Pushbutton Zero is enabled, –Range and +Range fields will display for setting the range around the
original calibrated zero of the scale within which Pushbutton Zero can be applied. The range units are
percent.
For example, if the +Range setting for Pushbutton Zero is set at 2%, Pushbutton Zero can only be
used when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% above the original calibrated zero
reference. If the –Range setting for Pushbutton Zero is set at 2%, the Pushbutton Zero can only be
used when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% below the original calibrated zero
reference.
3.5.1.5. Tare
Tare is used to subtract the weight of an empty container from the gross weight on the scale to
determine the net weight of the contents. Tare is inhibited if the scale is in motion. This branch
provides access to program the tare types, auto tare and auto clear tare parameters.
3.5.1.5.1. Tare Types

Use the Tare Types setup screen to enable or disable pushbutton tare, keyboard tare, and net sign
correction.
Pushbutton Tare
When pushbutton tare is enabled, the front panel tare key can be pressed when an empty
container is on the scale to determine tare. The terminal displays a zero weight and net mode. When
the container is loaded and placed back on the scale, the terminal displays the net weight of the
contents. The selections include:

If Pushbutton Tare is Disabled, execution of a remote Tare is still possible via SICS, CPTZ, and SMA
commands from a PC, a discrete input, or using PLC commands.
Keyboard Tare
When keyboard tare is enabled, the known value for the empty weight of a container (tare) can be
entered manually (preset tare). The terminal will then display the net weight of the contents of the
container. Keyboard tares are automatically rounded to the closest display division. Choices are:
Net Sign Correction
Net sign correction enables the IND570 terminal to be used for both shipping (inbound empty) and
receiving (inbound loaded) operations. If net sign correction is enabled, the terminal will switch the
gross and tare weight fields on the printed ticket, if necessary, so that the larger weight is the gross
weight, the smaller weight is the tare weight, and the difference is always a positive net weight. Net
sign correction affects the printed data output, the recalled weight display and the displayed weight.
Continuous data output will continue to show a negative net weight value. The choices for Net Sign
Correction are:
Net sign correction will operate with pushbutton tare, preset tare, or tare records stored in the Tare
Table. An example of weight values with and without net sign correction is shown in Table 3-1. In
this example, the tare register value is 53 kg and the live weight on the scale is 16 kg.
Net Sign Correction

Gross 16 kg 53 kg
Tare 53 kg 16 kg
Net − 37 kg 37 kg
When net sign correction is enabled, the tare weight field in the recall display will be labeled with
the letter “M” to indicate “Memory” instead of “T” or “PT”.
3.5.1.5.2. Auto Tare

Use the Auto Tare screen to enable or disable automatic tare and to set the tare and reset threshold
weights, and enable or disable motion check.
Auto Tare
When auto tare is enabled, the tare weight is taken automatically when a container above the
threshold weight is on the scale and settles to no-motion. Selections are:
Tare Threshold Weight
When weight on the scale platform exceeds the programmed tare threshold value and settles to no-
motion, the terminal automatically tares.

Reset Threshold Weight
The reset threshold weight must be less than the tare threshold weight. When the weight on the scale
platform falls below the reset threshold value, such as when a load has been removed, the terminal
automatically resets the auto tare trigger, depending upon the programming of motion checking.
Configuration
Motion Check
When enabled, the scale must detect a non-motion condition below the reset value to reset the auto
tare trigger. The choices are:

Use the Auto Clear screen to program auto clear tare, clear after print, to set the clear threshold
weight, and enable or disable motion checking for auto clearing of tare.
Auto Clear Tare
To clear tare automatically when the scale returns to below the threshold weight, enable the auto clear
tare setting. Selections include:
Clear Threshold Weight
The Clear Threshold Weight parameter is shown only when Auto Clear Tare is enabled. When the
gross scale weight exceeds then falls below the programmed clear threshold weight value, the
terminal automatically clears tare and returns to gross mode.
Motion Check
The Motion Check field displays only when Auto Clear Tare is enabled. Enable the motion check
setting to prevent auto clear from occurring when the scale is in motion. The choices are:
Clear After Print
To clear tare automatically after printing, enable the clear after print setting. Possible settings include:
Clear With Zero
To clear tare automatically when capturing zero from the net mode, enable the clear with zero setting.
Choices are:
Power Up
A Power Up setting of Restart enables the terminal to reuse the last tare weight after a power cycle. If
Reset is selected, the terminal returns to gross mode upon power up and the last tare weight after the
power cycle is cleared. Selections are:
Restart [default], Reset

3.5.1.6. Units
This setup screen enables the selection of a second and a third unit and determines which unit is
used at power up. If printing of two units is required, establish Third Units. Both Primary and Third
units can be printed simultaneously in an output template.
3.5.1.6.1. Second Unit

Use the Second Unit selection box to select a second weighing unit. Only one custom unit is possible.
Available weighing units include:
None [default], Custom, pennyweight (dwt), grams (g), kilograms (kg), pounds (lb), pounds-
ounces (lb-oz), ounces (oz), troy ounces (ozt), tonnes (t), tons (ton)
3.5.1.6.2. Third Unit

Use the Third Unit selection box to select a third weighing unit. Possible weighing units are:
3.5.1.6.3. Power Up
Power up units defines the units the terminal defaults to after power up.
Primary Units The terminal restarts in primary units
Restart [default] The terminal restarts with whichever units were last displayed before the
power cycle
3.5.1.6.4. Custom Factor

This parameter is shown only if a Custom unit is selected. Enter a multiplication factor for the custom
unit in this field, such as 0.592 or 1.019. The primary unit is multiplied by the custom factor to
obtain the custom value.
3.5.1.6.5. Custom Name

This parameter is shown only if a Custom unit is selected. Use the alpha keys to enter the name for
the custom unit. Up to 12 characters may be entered. The terminal displays the first three letters of the
custom name in the units area of the display when custom units are in use.
3.5.1.6.6. Custom Increment

This parameter is shown only if a Custom unit is selected. Enter a custom increment in this field, such
as 0.1 or 0.5. This step controls both the decimal position and the increment size of the custom unit
value.
3.5.1.7. Rate
A Rate, expressed as change in primary or secondary weight units per time unit, may be programmed
for display on the IND570 and/or used in controlling discrete outputs – for example as the source for
a Comparator (refer to section 3.6.2.2.1, and the Comparators: Configuration and Operation section
of Chapter 4, Applications, for more details).

The Rate display is selectable for display in the auxiliary display area below the weight display.
Refer to section 3.7.2.4, Terminal | Display | Auxiliary Display, for more information on using the
auxiliary display.
If the weight information in the terminal becomes invalid, the Rate display will show 0.000. The
Configuration
following Rate parameters can be configured:
3.5.1.7.1. Weight Units

Weight Units define which weight unit will be used for the rate calculation.
None [default] Rate function is disabled
Primary Primary weight units are used
Secondary Secondary weight units are used. A secondary unit must be enabled for this
choice to be shown.
3.5.1.7.2. Time Units

Time Units determine what time reference will be used for the rate value. Choices include:
Seconds [default], Minutes, Hours
3.5.1.7.3. Measurement Period

The Measurement Period value sets the frequency of weight measurements. Choices are:
0.5 seconds, 1 second [default], 5 seconds
3.5.1.7.4. Output Average

Output from the rate function is set by a computed rolling average of measurements. This possible
range of values is 1 to 99 seconds, with a default value of 5. The Output Average value should be
sufficiently larger than the Measurement Period to allow the terminal to take multiple measurements
for each average.
3.5.1.8. Filter
The analog version IND570 terminal has a low-pass, multi-pole vibration filter that can be set for
several conditions when using analog load cells. The heavier the filtering, the slower the display
settling time will be. This screen is not accessible when Remote is selected as the scale type.
3.5.1.8.1. Low Pass Frequency

Low pass frequency is the frequency above which all disturbances are filtered out. The lower the
frequency, the better the disturbance rejection, but the longer the settling time required for the scale.
Values from 0.2 to 9.9 are possible but values below 1.0 should not be used due to the extremely
long settling time. The default value is 2.0 Hz.
3.5.1.8.2. Low Pass # of Poles

The number of poles determines the slope of the filtering cutoff. For most applications, a slope value
of 8 is acceptable; however, decreasing this number will improve settling time slightly. Choices are:
2, 4, 6, 8 [default]

3.5.1.8.3. Notch Filter Frequency
The notch filter allows selection of one specific frequency above the low pass filter value that can also
be filtered out. This enables setting the low pass filter lower to filter out all but one frequency (that the
notch filter will handle) and obtain a faster settling time. Values from 0 (Disabled) to 99 are possible
with a default value of 30 Hz.
3.5.1.8.4. Stability Filter

The stability filter works in conjunction with the standard low pass filter to provide a more stable final
weight reading. The setup choices include
The stability filter should only be used in transaction weighing applications, since the nonlinear
action of the filter switching may cause inaccurate cutoffs in batching or filling applications.
3.5.1.9. Stability
The IND570 terminal includes a stability detector (weight in motion). The Stability setup screen
enables setting a motion range, no-motion interval and timeout period.
3.5.1.9.1. Motion Range

Sets the motion range to the weight value (in divisions) that the weight is permitted to fluctuate and
still have a no-motion condition. Values from 0.1 to 99.9 are possible with the default value being
1.0 d.
3.5.1.9.2. No-motion Interval

The no motion interval defines the amount of time (seconds) that the scale weight must be within the
motion range to have a no-motion condition. Values from 0.0 (motion detection disabled) to 2.0 are
possible, the default value being 0.3 seconds. A shorter interval means that a no-motion condition is
more likely, but may make weight measurement less precise.
3.5.1.9.3. Timeout
Defines the period (in seconds) after which the terminal stops attempting to perform a function that
requires a no-motion condition (such as a zero, tare or print command) and aborts the function. This
timeout is used regardless of the source of the command such as the keypad, discrete input, PLC or
SICS. Values from 0 to 99 are possible with the default value being 3 seconds. A smaller value
means that less time will be used to check for no-motion before aborting a command. When a value
of 0 is entered, there must be no-motion when a command is given or it will fail immediately. A value
of 99 is a special condition which permits the terminal to wait indefinitely for a no-motion condition -
a command would never be aborted.
3.5.1.10. Log or Print
The Log or Print setup branch is where the thresholds to control how and when a demand data output
is triggered. Normal demand mode printing occurs whenever a print request is made, providing there
is no motion on the scale and the weight is above gross zero (a negative gross weight will not be
printed).
The weight values entered are the gross weight values in primary units. Gross weight in primary units
is used regardless of whether the IND570 is in Gross or Net mode and regardless of the units that are
displayed.

3.5.1.10.1. Minimum Weight
The minimum weight setting is the threshold below which log or print functions will not initiate.
Primary units are displayed for this field.
Configuration
3.5.1.10.2. Interlock
Interlock prevents repeat logging and printing. When enabled, this interlock requires that the live
weight reading be reset according to the Reset On parameter setting (see below). The live weight
must then settle to a weight greater than the Minimum Weight value (see above) before responding to
the next log or print request. Choices are:
3.5.1.10.3. Automatic
This parameter triggers an automatic log and print request every time the weight on the scale settles
to a positive value that is larger than the entered Threshold Weight value (see below). After the initial
log or print, the automatic trigger must reset per the Reset On parameter setting (see below) before
the next automatic log and print can occur. The possible selections for this parameter are:
If Automatic is set to Disabled, the Threshold Weight field does not appear.
3.5.1.10.4. Reset On
The reset of Interlock and Automatic printing or logging can be based on weight threshold or weight
deviation values. Select the desired operating mode and enter the weight value in the “Reset On” field.
The choices include:
Deviation The weight must change more than this absolute value for the Interlock and
Automatic print to reset
Return [default] The weight must return to below this value for the Interlock and Automatic print
to reset
If both Interlock and Automatic settings are disabled, the Reset On field does not display.
If Reset On is set to Deviation, The Threshold Weight and Motion Check fields do not display.
3.5.1.10.5. Threshold Weight

The Threshold Weight is the value above which an Automatic logging or printing of data can/will be
triggered. Threshold Weight does not appear if Automatic is set to Disabled or if Reset On is set to
Deviation.
3.5.1.10.6. Motion Check

Enable the motion check setting to prevent interlock and automatic log and print functions from
resetting when the scale is in motion below the “Reset On” return point. Motion Check does not
appear if Reset ON is set to Deviation. Choices are:

3.5.1.11. MinWeigh
If the current net weight is greater than or equal to the MinWeigh value, all terminal functions behave
normally. If the absolute value of the net weight is less than MinWeigh, the weight display includes a
flashing MinWeigh symbol to the left of the weight. If the user attempts to record the weight while in
this condition, the printout will include an asterisk (∗).
3.5.1.11.1. MinWeigh
This selects the operating mode of the MinWeigh feature. Choices include:
Disabled [default] The MinWeigh feature will not operate.

Calculated The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be calculated based
on measurement values entered.
Direct Entry The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be directly entered by
hand.
3.5.1.11.2. Calculated Mode

When Calculated is selected, the user is prompted to enter the uncertainty U0, c factor, tolerance
percent, and safety factor in data entry boxes. The new MinWeigh value is then computed using these
values. The MinWeigh value can be viewed but not directly edited in this mode. Where:
Uncertainty U0 Uncertainty in measurement as the applied load approaches 0. U0 is computed differently

in each country and is entered in Primary units of measure.
Uncertainty c Uncertainty factor related to the portion of uncertainty in measurement that is proportional
to the applied load.
Tolerance Tolerance in percent, which reflects the tolerances required for the specific process and
facility. The range is 0.1%–99.9%.
Safety Factor To calculate the minimum weight the safety factor is usually SF = 1. However, if the
customer would like to recalculate this number for purposes of more closely matching a
GWP Recommendation this value will generally be specified by the customer starting at
2. The integer value range is 1–10 and is used to determine the exclusion range.
3.5.1.11.3. Direct Entry Mode

For Direct Entry of a MinWeigh value, user enters the desired value for MinWeigh directly in the
MinWeigh data entry box. The MinWeigh value is entered in Primary units of measure.
3.5.1.12. Reset
Refer to section 3.5.6 on page 3-69.
3.5.2. Scale – IDNet

Metrological and some environmental parameters are accessed and
stored in the load cell for the IDNet interface. So the Scale branch has
a reduced set of parameters. Access to the setup in the IDNet load cell
is called the Service Mode and is accessible from a softkey on the
Calibration screen.

3.5.2.1. Type
The Scale Type screen permits a name to be assigned to the scale, displays the scale PCB type in the
terminal (or allows the IND570 to be configured as a remote display for another terminal), provides a
view of the Approval mode, and allows entry of the approval class and interval for the metrology line.
Configuration
The EXIT softkey will return the display to the menu tree.
3.5.2.1.1. Name
The Name field enables entry of the scale identification. Enter the scale name (an alpha-numeric
string of up to 20 characters) in the Name entry box.

Remote Display mode. Choices are:
IDNet [default for IDNet version], Remote
remote display.
3.5.2.1.3. Class
Class is shown if the base has been programmed as Approved. This selection must match the
Weights and Measures approval class. The Class information is included in the data shown in the
metrological line at the top of the display. The selections are:

This parameter is shown only when the scale is Approved and Class has been selected as II. The
Verified Interval indicates if the approved increment size is equal to the displayed increment size or if
it is 10 times the displayed increment size. This information is included in the data shown in the
metrological line at the top of the display.

Use the Capacity and Increment setup screen to view primary units and expand x10 mode.

View the primary units as programmed in the base, which include:
grams (g), kilograms (kg), pounds (lb)
3.5.2.2.2. X10 Always

X10 Always locks the IDNet base into a higher resolution weight display. If the X10 Always mode is
enabled, the high resolution weight data from the IDNet base displays at all times and the EXPAND
BY 10 softkey (if configured to display) is inactivated. Selections include:

The weight unit displayed is the weight unit that the IDNet scale base was calibrated in (the Primary
Unit) and cannot be switched to another weight unit.
The Calibration screens enable entry of the base serial number and provide access to the Service
Mode of an IDNet scale.

3.5.2.3.2. Service Mode (Softkey 5)

This screen displays a single box that shows messages from the IDNet base up to 16 characters.
When either the (Yes) or (No) softkey is pressed, the terminal sends the respective response
to the scale base and the next message to be displayed is transmitted back to the terminal from the
base. This sequence remains constant during the complete service mode communication sequence.
After the last communication from the scale base has been completed, the display returns to the
Calibration screen.
3.5.2.4. Zero
This section provides access to Auto Zero Maintenance (AZM) settings, power-up zero, and timed
zero parameters.

platform.
Auto Zero
Power Up
the same, previously displayed gross weight value. If reset is selected, the last zero calibration value
Timed Zero

Configuration
3.5.2.4.2. Ranges
Use the settings on the Ranges screen to enable or disable the Pushbutton Zero function.
Pushbutton Zero
3.5.2.5. Tare

Use the Tare Types setup screen to enable or disable pushbutton tare, keyboard tare, net sign
correction.
Pushbutton Tare
Keyboard Tare
Net Sign Correction

Correction are:
Net Sign Correction

Gross 16 kg 53 kg
Tare 53 kg 16 kg
Net − 37 kg 37 kg
Terminal Tare
When Terminal Tare is Disabled, all Tare commands received by the IND570 via SICS, CTPZ, PLC or
keypad will be passed through to the IDNet base for execution. The base will calculate the tare and
net weight values and pass this information back to the IND570. When Terminal Tare is enabled, tare
and net weight values are calculated in the terminal and not in the high precision IDNet base. The
selections include:
When Terminal Tare is Enabled, the stability timeout value will be set to 3 seconds (default), but can
be set to any value between 0 and 99 in the setup menu at Scale > Stability. A value of “99” instructs
the terminal to wait indefinitely for a stable condition – a Tare command would never be aborted due
to motion.
When Terminal Tare is Disabled, the stability timeout value defaults to “99”, and cannot be modified.
The terminal will not display or transmit Net status, Net weight or Tare weight until it receives this
information from the scale base. Only when the IDNet base responds will the terminal display and
transmit the tare value and Net status to the PC/PLC.
Terminal Tare should be Disabled for approved (legal-for-trade) systems.


Auto Tare
Configuration
Motion Check

Auto Clear Tare
Motion Check
Clear After Print

Clear With Zero
Choices are:
Power Up
3.5.2.6. Units


3.5.2.6.3. Power Up
Restart [default] The terminal restarts with whichever units were last displayed before the power cycle.



value.
Configuration
3.5.2.7. Rate
auxiliary display.


choice to be shown.


for each average.
3.5.2.8. Filter
The IDNet version IND570 terminal provides choices for vibration and the type of weighing
process.This screen is not accessible when Remote is selected as the scale type. From Rev 03 3.5.8
3.5.2.8.1. Vibration
Use the Vibration selection box to select a condition setting that reflects the platform's specific
location’s conditions. This setting is then sent to the laod cell and stored there. Selections include:

Ideal Conditions The weighing platform operates very quickly. However, it is very sensitive. This
setting is suitable for a very calm and stable weighing location.
Average Conditions This is the factory default setting and is suitable for most normal environments.
[default]
Extreme Conditions The base reacts to changes in weight more slowly but is much more stable in
unstable environments.
3.5.2.8.2. Weighing Process

Use the Weighing Process selection box to select the specific weighing process in use on the
platform. This setting is then sent to the load cell and stored there. Selections include:
Fine Filling Used when liquid or fine powders are being weighed
Universal Weighing For solid materials coarse filling or checkweighing

[default]
Static Weighing For solid materials and weighing under extreme conditions such as strong
vibrations
Dynamic Weighing For weighing products that will not be fully stable or still during the weighing
process
3.5.2.9. Stability
For IDNet bases, a stability measure and timeout period may be set.
3.5.2.9.1. Stability
Stability settings for IDNet load cells are configured by selecting a number setting of 0 (disabled), 1
(fast display, good repeatability), 2 (slower display, better repeatability), 3 (slower display, better
repeatability), or 4 (very slow display, very good repeatability) in the Stability selection box.
3.5.2.9.2. Timeout
printed).
displayed.

Primary units are displayed for this field. Enter the required value in primary weight units.
Configuration
3.5.2.10.4. Reset On
to reset

Deviation.


3.5.2.11. MinWeigh

Calculated The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be
calculated based on measurement values entered.
Direct Entry The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be directly
entered by hand.

Uncertainty U0 Uncertainty in measurement as the applied load approaches 0. U0 is computed

differently in each country and is entered in Primary units of measure.
Uncertainty c Uncertainty factor related to the portion of uncertainty in measurement that is

proportional to the applied load.
customer would like to recalculate this number for purposes of more closely matching
a GWP Recommendation this value will generally be specified by the customer
starting at 2. The integer value range is 1–10 and is used to determine the exclusion
range.

3.5.2.12. Reset
3.5.3. Scale – SICSpro

Metrological and some environmental parameters are accessed and
stored in the load cell for the SICSpro interface. So, the Scale branch
has a reduced set of parameters. Access to the setup in the SICSpro
load cell is called the Advanced Setup Mode and is accessible from a
branch in the Scale block.

The IND570 terminal is only compatible with SICSpro platforms that include ASM.
Refer to Chapter 1, Introduction, for a list of compatible SICSpro platforms.
3.5.3.1. Type
Configuration
The Scale Type screen permits a name to be assigned to the scale, displays the scale PCB type in the
terminal (or allows the IND570 to be configured as a remote display for another terminal), provides a
view of the Approval mode, approval class and interval for the metrology line. The EXIT softkey
will return the display to the menu tree.
3.5.3.1.1. Name
The Name field enables entry of the scale identification. Enter the scale name (an alpha-numeric

Remote Display mode. Choices are:
SICSpro [default], Remote
remote display.
SICSpro Cable-Free Floor Scale
Figure 3-8: IND570 with Bluetooth Module
If a Bluetooth module is connected to the terminal’s SICSpro scale port, a Bluetooth softkey will
appear in the fourth softkey position of the Scale Type screen. Press this softkey to access the
Bluetooth screen. If a Cable-Free Floor Scale (CFS) is already paired with terminal, its MAC address
will be displayed. A SCAN softkey will appear in the third softkey position. The SCAN softkey is
used to search for available CFS scales. Pressing it will display a “Waiting” message, and then open
the BLUETOOTH VIEW screen. When the list of scales is displayed, a connected scale’s MAC address
will appear with an exclamation mark (!) after it. Any CFS listed with an asterisk (*) after its name is
in its fast pairing wait state, and can be selected for pairing. Select the CFS to pair then click OK.
Bluetooth Information Recall
For details about the information available in the System Information Recall screens accessible from
the home screen, refer to Chapter 2, Operation, section 2.9.3.

3.5.3.1.3. Platform Serial Number
The platform serial number is shown as entered in the Advanced Setup Mode (ASM) of the load cell.
3.5.3.1.4. Approval
The approval region of the system as programmed in the ASM of the load cell is shown. This
information is included in the data shown in the metrological line at the top of the display.
A SICSpro Cable-Free Floor Scale has the same approval options as any connected SICSpro
scale.
3.5.3.1.5. Class
Class is shown if the base has been programmed as Approved. This is a display-only value as
programmed in the ASM of the load cell. This information is included in the data shown in the
metrological line at the top of the display.

This parameter is shown only when the scale is Approved and Class has been selected as II. The
Verified Interval is programmed in the ASM of the load cell and indicates if the approved increment
size is equal to the displayed increment size or if it is 10 times the displayed increment size. This
information is included in the data shown in the metrological line at the top of the display.
3.5.3.2. Advanced Setup Mode
The Advanced Setup Mode provides access to program settings in the load cell. Refer to the manual
of the SICSpro platform being connected for details of the setup steps included in ASM. Figure 3-9
provides an overview of the current ASM menu structure.
The ASM menu can only display in English.
Figure 3-9: Advance Setup Mode Basic Menu Structure
3.5.3.3. Zero
This section provides access to Timed Zero settings.

3.5.3.3.1. Timed Zero
Configuration
3.5.3.4. Units

None [default], Custom, pennyweight (dwt), grams (g), kilograms (kg), pounds (lb),
pounds-ounces (lb-oz), ounces (oz), troy ounces (ozt), tonnes (t), tons (ton)

3.5.3.4.3. Power Up
power cycle



value.
3.5.3.5. Rate
auxiliary display.

choice to be shown.



for each average.
3.5.3.6. Stability
For SICSpro bases, a timeout period may be set.
3.5.3.6.1. Timeout

Configuration
printed).
displayed.

Primary units are displayed for this field. Enter the required value in primary weight units.
3.5.3.7.4. Reset On
to reset


Deviation.

3.5.3.8. MinWeigh
3.5.3.8.1. MinWeigh

hand.



Tolerance Tolerance in percent, which reflects the tolerances required for the specific process
and facility. The range is 0.1%–99.9%.
customer would like to recalculate this number for purposes of more closely
matching a GWP Recommendation this value will generally be specified by the
customer starting at 2. The integer value range is 1–10 and is used to determine the
exclusion range.

Configuration
3.5.3.9. Reset

3.5.4. Scale – POWERCELL
3.5.4.1. Type
The Scale Type screen permits a name to be assigned to the scale,

displays the scale PCB type in the terminal (or allows the IND570 to be
configured as a remote display for another terminal), provides a
selection list for the Approval mode, and allows entry of the approval
class and interval for the metrology line. The EXIT softkey will return
the display to the menu tree.
3.5.4.1.1. Name
The Name field enables entry of the scale identification. Enter the scale
name (an alpha-numeric string of up to 20 characters) in the Name
entry box.

The Scale Type field indicates which type of scale this terminal supports
and allows selection of Remote Display mode. If Remote is selected, the approval, class and verified
interval options will not be available. Choices are:
POWERCELL [default for POWERCELL version], Remote
remote display.
3.5.4.1.3. Application
The application field identifies in what type of application the terminal will be used. Depending upon
this choice, some parameters may be not available for programming. Choices are:
Vehicle [default], Tank/Hopper, Floor Scale
3.5.4.1.4. Approval
Approval refers to the metrological (weights and measures) approval configuration for the specific
scale. The selection list includes:
None [default], USA, OIML, Canada, Australia, Argentina, Thailand, Korea
If the approval is configured as USA, OIML, Canada, Australia, Thailand or Korea and the metrology
security switch, SW1-1, is set to ON, access to the Scale setup parameters in the menu tree will be
limited to view only.
If the approval is configured as Argentina and the metrology security switch, SW1-1, is set to ON,
access to the entire setup menu is prohibited. If an attempt is made to access the setup menu, an on-
screen message will display stating “Access denied. Scale is Approved.”
If an approval is selected but SW1-1 is not ON, it will not be possible to leave setup, and a message
will appear: "Switch UNSECURED".

3.5.4.1.5. # of Load Cells
Enter the quantity of POWERCELL load cells in the scale network. Values from 1 to 14 are valid. The
default value is 8.
Configuration
3.5.4.1.6. Class
The Class field selection is shown if a POWERCELL scale terminal is selected as approved. This
selection must match the Weights and Measures approval class when the terminal is used in an
approved mode. The Class information is included in the data shown in the metrological line at the
top of the display. The selections are:

This parameter is shown only when the terminal has been programmed as Approved and Class has
been selected as II. The Verified Interval indicates if the approved increment size is equal to the
displayed increment size or if it is 10 times the displayed increment size. This information is included
in the data shown in the metrological line at the top of the display.
3.5.4.1.8. Readdressing Permitted

This option appears only when Application (section 3.5.4.1.3) is set to Vehicle, and Approval
(section 3.5.4.1.4) is not None.
Because factory calibration values are loaded into each POWERCELL PDX load cell during
production, these load cells have been approved for replacement without requiring recertification of a
vehicle scale. However, in some regions local authorities will still not allow replacement of a PDX
load cell without breaking the metrology seal in order to perform a full calibration test.
Options are:
Enabled The load cell replacement steps (section 3.5.4.2) are available and PDX cell
[default] replacement can be performed without breaking the metrology seal.
Disabled A PDX cell cannot be replaced without breaking the metrology seal, and the
scale must be recertified.
3.5.4.1.9. Update Rate
The update rate field determines how fast the POWERCELL network polls the load cells for weight
data. This value will be limited based on the number of load cells in the network as shown in Table
3-3. Choices include 15 [default], 25, 40 or 50.
Table 3-3: Update Rate Selections
Number of Cells Possible Update Rates

1-6 15, 25, 40, 50
7 – 10 15, 25, 40
11 - 14 15, 25
This value also determines the speed of the target control when using the material transfer mode.

3.5.4.2. Load Cells
This branch is used to address the POWERCELL load cells and perform a shift adjustment. There are
two different methods provided to address the load cells. Refer to Table 3-4 as a guide as to which
one to use.
Table 3-4: Addressing Method

Cell Address
Description
Method
Single Cell This procedure would typically be used during the replacement of a cell, off-site testing or
Addressing pre-installation when there is only one cell connected in the network. It could also be used
to discover a single connected cell’s serial number and node address. During an actual
on-site installation when many load cells are already connected in the network, or when
installing a new scale, the Manual procedure should be used.
Manual Typically, this procedure is used when installing a new scale with load cells that have the
Address factory default node address. The serial number and location of each cell must be known.
3.5.4.2.1. Single Cell Address

Single cell addressing can be performed manually or automatically at power-up, as required. In either
case, the procedure cannot be performed if the terminal is in Weights and Measures Approved mode.
Single Cell Address – Manual
Use the Single Cell Address step to set the node address of a load cell identified by its serial number.
This procedure would typically be used during the replacement of a cell. It can be used with just one
cell connected or with an entire network connected.
Follow this procedure to perform a single cell address:
1. The initial screen prompts for the connection of the load cell.
2. Make sure the cell that needs to be addressed is connected and press the START softkey to
begin the process. The display indicates that load cell discovery process has begun, and a
message appears briefly:
/Discovering cells/
The addressing operation can be aborted by pressing the ABORT softkey during the discovery
process. The EXIT softkey will then take you back to the setup menu tree.
3. After the first load cell is detected, that cell’s serial number and current node address are
displayed as shown in Figure 3-10. If no cell is found the display will indicate Search Failed.
Figure 3-10: Single Cell Address Discovery Display

4. If more than one load cell is connected in the network when this discovery process is executed,
the terminal will display the serial number and node address of the first cell it discovers. Before
reassigning the node address of the cell that was found, make sure that the serial number
matches that of the cell to be addressed. If it is not the desired cell, then identify the one to be
Configuration
addressed by entering its serial number.
5. To quit the addressing process or return to the Single Cell Address Start screen, press the ESCAPE
softkey . Otherwise, enter the required address in the Node entry box and press the OK
softkey to start the addressing process.
6. The display indicates that addressing is in progress by briefly displaying a message of

Addressing Load Cell.
7. After the load cell has been successfully assigned a new address, a message of Addressing
Completed will be shown.
8. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Single Cell Address Start screen.
9. Repeat these steps to address another cell, or press the EXIT softkey to return to the setup
menu tree.
Single Cell Address – Automatic
This automatic feature, which checks the load cell network on start-up, is available for all types and
sizes of POWERCELL network. If a load cell is found to be missing – i.e., it has stopped
communicating – the terminal searches the network for a cell with the factory default node address.
If the default address is not found, the procedure is aborted and the terminal continues with its power-
up sequence. In this case, the replacement cell must be addressed manually, as described
immediately above.
If a cell is found with the default address, the terminal prompts Replace POWERCELL n with new
POWERCELL?, where n is the node number.
Answer Yes to perform the addressing procedure, which assumes the new cell should have the same
node number as the missing cell. The replacement cell uses all the existing operating parameters of
the previous cell.
An on-screen progress display indicates that addressing is taking place. Once it is complete, the
system adds a maintenance log entry indicating the change, and continues with its normal power-up
sequence.
3.5.4.2.2. Manual Address

Use the Manual Address step to program the node address of every load cell connected in a network.
Typically, this procedure is used when installing a new scale with load cells that have the factory
default node address of 125. To address the cells manually, follow this procedure:
1. Before starting the addressing process, record the serial number of each cell and where each cell
is arranged on the scale. Determine which node address should be assigned to each of the cells.
2. The initial screen displays a message indicating that the process will take several minutes.

3. Make sure all the cells are connected to the network and press the START softkey to begin the
process.
The display will indicate that the process has started by display a message of /Discovering cells/
During the discovery process, the display will indicate how many cells have been discovered. The
discovery process will continue even after the programmed number of cells has been discovered to
make sure "extra" cells are not connected.
The addressing operation can be aborted by pressing the ABORT softkey during the discovery
process. The EXIT softkey will then take you back to the setup menu tree.
4. During the procedure, the terminal will automatically assign a unique node address to each of the
cells discovered. The addresses are assigned arbitrarily by the terminal. After the process is
complete, a Load Cell View table is displayed, indicating the serial number and node address for
each cell (Figure 3-11).
Figure 3-11: Manual Address Load Cell View Screen
5. Review the list of serial numbers and location created in Step 1. If the node address preset by the
terminal is not appropriate for a particular serial number, select the serial number and press the
EDIT softkey .
6. After pressing the EDIT softkey , the Load Cell Edit screen will appear as shown in Figure
3-12.
Figure 3-12: Manual Address Load Cell Edit Screen
7. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the previous screen if no changes are required. To
change the node address, enter the required address in the Node entry box, press ENTER then
press the OK softkey to start the addressing process.
8. The display indicates that addressing is in progress by showing the message Addressing Load
Cell.
9. After the address has been successfully changed, a message of Addressing Completed is
displayed.
If the node address entered by the user is an existing address already assigned to another load

cell, the terminal will complete the addressing as requested, and will reassign the original
address of the selected cell to the other load cell. This resolves any potential conflicts by
swapping the addresses between the cells.
10. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Manual Address View screen.
Configuration
11. Repeat steps 6 – 10 to address another cell, or press the EXIT softkey to return to the setup
menu tree.
12. To print the details shown on the Manual Address View screen, press the PRINT softkey and
the data will be sent to any port with a Reports connection.
To address a newly added cell into the network, simply press the NEW softkey from the Load
Cells View screen. Enter the cell’s serial number and the required node address into the entry
boxes shown in the Load Cell New screen (Figure 3-13) then press the OK softkey to
complete the new cell addressing.
Figure 3-13: Manual Address Load Cell New Screen
3.5.4.2.3. Shift Adjust

Small mismatches in mechanical and electronic gain of the load sensing paths can cause the same
test weight to produce slightly different readings, depending on the location of the test weight on the
scale. The IND570 provides two types of adjustment – adjustment by individual cells or adjustment
by pairs of cells.
The Shift Adjust by Cell or Pair parameter is preset to Cell and cannot be changed when a single load
cell is used.
Adjust by Cell
Adjustment by Cell adds a factor to each load cell output to compensate for the slight differences
between them. The scale will then output the same weight value regardless of the physical location of
the weight on the scale.
Adjust by Pair
Adjustment by Pair ensures a constant reading from the scale regardless of where the load is placed
on the long axis between pairs of cells – for instance, in vehicle weighing applications.
Before beginning the shift adjustment procedure, select whether the adjustment will be done by cell or
by pair. The procedure for shift adjusting by pair of cells is listed below. The procedure for shift
adjusting by individual cell follows the same sequence, but cells are read and adjusted one at a time.
The procedure for shift adjusting by pair of cells is:
1. In the Adjust By selection list, select Pair.

2. Press the START softkey .
3. The display shows the reserved space on the first two lines for the number of counts for each cell
but they are blank to start. The display shows an Empty Scale prompt. Empty the scale then press
the START softkey .
4. The display will indicate that the initial reading is taking place by showing the message Getting
Counts.
5. After the initial zero reading is complete, the screen will then display the counts from each of the
cells in the first pair to be adjusted. Follow the on-screen prompting of Place test Weight on Cell 1
& 2 (or the addresses of the current cell pair being adjusted).
6. Place the test load on the platform, centered between cell 1 and cell 2 (or the addresses of the
current cell pair being adjusted) then press the START softkey .
7. An on-screen message will indicate that the terminal is getting shift adjust counts. The Cell
Counts lines will change to reflect the new readings from the load cells, and then the prompt will
show Place test Weight on Cell 3 & 4 (or the addresses of the next cell pair).
8. Move the test load from the previous pair of cells to the next pair keeping the load centered on the
platform. Press START to continue.
9. The Cell Count lines will change to reflect the new readings.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until all cell pairs have been adjusted. An on-screen message of Adjust
OK will then be displayed.
11. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the setup menu tree.
3.5.4.2.4. Shift Adjust Cell / Pair
This procedure allows you to quickly adjust the shift values for a single pair or single cell after a cell
has been replaced on the scale. A complete shift adjust (previous setup branch) is more accurate
and should be used if more than one POWERCELL cell has been replaced on the scale.
The Shift Adjust Cell/Pair branch is not accessible when only a single load cell is used.
Based on the selection made in the Shift Adjust > Shift By parameter, the terminal allows adjustment
by either Cell or Pair. The following example describes the procedure when adjusting by cell. The
adjustment by pair follows the same procedure except the terminal will prompt for weight to be placed
above a pair of cells instead of a single cell.
To adjust a specific cell (example of Cell 3)
1. The on-screen prompt shows Empty Scale. Press Start to continue.

2. Select Adjust Cell 3 from the list and press the START softkey to begin.
3. The display will indicate that the initial reading is taking place by showing the message Getting
Counts.
4. After the initial zero reading is complete, the screen will then display the counts from the cell to be
adjusted. Follow the on-screen prompting of Place test Weight on Cell 3 (or the addresses of the
current cell being adjusted). Press the START softkey .
If the last addressed cell or pair on the scale is selected for Shift Adjust, the previous cell or pair is
read first prior to the selected cell or pair.

5. An on-screen message will indicate that the terminal is getting shift adjust counts. The cell counts
lines will change to reflect the new reading from the load cell, and then the prompt will show
Place test Weight on Cell 4 (or the address of the next cell).
6. Move the test load from the current cell to the next prompted cell then press START to
Configuration
continue.
7. The display will indicate that the cell is being read by showing the message Getting Counts.
8. After the process is complete, the display will show Adjust OK. Press the EXIT softkey to return
to the setup menu tree.
Use the Capacity and Increment setup screen to select primary units, set the number of ranges or
intervals, program the capacity and increments sizes, and the blanking over capacity value.

selections:

Blanking of the display is used to indicate an over-capacity condition. Set the blank over capacity for
the number of display increments that the terminal is permitted to go over capacity. For example, if
capacity is set at 500 kg by 0.1 kg increments and the blank over capacity setting is 5 d, the
terminal can display weights up to 500.5 kg. At weights over 500.5, dashed lines will display
instead of a weight and demand data output is inhibited.

The Calibration screens enable entry of a geo code adjustment value, the base serial number,
calibration units, and linearity adjustment. The Calibration branch is not accessible when the terminal
is programmed as a Remote Display scale type.
3.5.4.4.1. Geo Code

Enter the geo code for the appropriate geo adjustment value for the current geographical location. Geo
codes are numbered 0–31. Refer to Appendix D, Geo Codes to find the appropriate Geo Code for the
installation location.

3.5.4.4.3. Calibration Units

Select the weight unit to be used to calibrate the scale. Calibration units are the same as the primary
units selections, which include:
3.5.4.4.4. Linearity Adjustment

Select the linearity adjustment from the selection box. Selections are as follows:
Disabled [default] Use only zero and one span point

3 point Use zero, midpoint, and highpoint
4 point Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, and highpoint
5 point Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, mid-highpoint, and highpoint
3 point with Hysteresis Use zero, midpoint, and highpoint, then unload to midpoint
4 point with Hysteresis Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, and highpoint, then unload to midpoint, and
lowpoint
5 point with Hysteresis Use zero, lowpoint, midpoint, mid-highpoint, highpoint, then unload to
mid-highpoint, midpoint, and lowpoint
Linearity adjustment with hysteresis compensates for differences in load cell output from an adding
weight condition to a removing weight condition. The mechanical behavior of load cells and
platforms create a slight difference in the load cell output depending if the weight is being added or
removed from the platform. Using linearity adjustment with hysteresis compensates for this difference.
To perform a 3, 4, or 5 point linearity adjustment with Hysteresis:
displays.

screen.
Configuration
5. If the zero span operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Capture Zero OK”
displays. If the capture zero operation was not successful, an error message that reads “Zero
8. Enter the weight to be used for test load #1 and all other test loads (Test load #2 for 3 point with
Hysteresis; Test load #2 and #3 for 4 point with Hysteresis; Test load #2, #3, and #4 for 5 point
with Hysteresis). Each test load value must be larger than the previously entered test load value.
Press the ENTER key.
9. Prompts "Place test load” then “Press START" are shown. The raw counts are displayed in a box
at the lower right corner of the display.
Ensure the scale is loaded to the test load value by always adding weights. It is not acceptable to
load beyond the test load value then remove weight to reach the desired test load value.
capture.
calibration weight to be loaded to or will show a successful or failed calibration sequence.
13. Follow the prompts on the display and add or remove test weights as shown.
14. Repeat steps 10-11 for any remaining linearity calibration weights.
15. After the linearity adjustments are completed, the terminal will prompt to remove weights to a
certain test weight value.

When unloading the scale, ensure the scale is always unloaded to the test load value. It is not
acceptable to remove weights to below the test weight value and then add weights to reach to test
weight value.
16. Remove test weights to reach to prompted test load weight.
capture.
18. Repeat steps 16-17 for any remaining hysteresis calibration weights.
20. A tip message that reads "Capture load cell data for diagnostics? This will take several minutes"
displays. It is recommended that this data be captured for future diagnostic work. With focus on
"Yes", press the ENTER key.
21. The data gathering process will take a few minutes. When complete, the display will indicate the
data collection was successful.

3.5.4.4.5. Calibration Softkeys
The softkeys shown on the last Calibration setup screen are used for calibration procedures.
Capture Zero
Capture Span
Step Calibration
CalFree
Capture Zero
The CAPTURE ZERO softkey triggers an independent operation to reset the zero condition of the
scale.
To capture zero
displays.
screen.

Configuration
5. If the zero adjustment operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Capture Zero
OK” displays. If the capture zero operation was not successful, an error message that reads “Zero
Capture Span
The CAPTURE SPAN softkey initiates a sequence to capture span that can be performed
independently of capturing zero.
To capture span:
2. Enter the weight for test load 1 and all other test loads if linearity has been enabled. Each test
load value must be larger than the previously entered test load value. Press the ENTER key.
3. Prompts to "Place test load” then “Press START" are shown. The raw counts are displayed in a
box at the lower right corner of the display.
capture.
calibration weight to be added (if 2, 3, or 4 test load steps are enabled by the linearity
adjustment parameter) or will show a successful or failed calibration sequence.
7. Repeat steps 4-5 for test loads 2, 3, and 4 if enabled by linearity adjustment.

Step Calibration
The STEP CALIBRATION softkey initiates a procedure that enables a “build-up” calibration for tanks
and hoppers. For step calibration, the same amount of test weight is added for each step of the
calibration procedure.
To perform a step calibration
1. Press the STEP CALIBRATION softkey . The Step Calibration setup screen displays.
2. Enter the target weight for the test load (the same amount of test load weight is used in each
step).
3. Press the START softkey . The Step Calibration screen displays. This screen shows an active
(live) weight display (using the current span factor), the intended target weight as entered on the
previous screen, and the next step for the operator “Add test weight.”
4. Add test weight to the tank/hopper as prompted by the display. Each time test weight is added to
the scale, the active display shows the weight.
5. When the full amount of test weight has been added, press the OK softkey . The test load is
captured and span factors are saved. During the time the weight is captured and the new span
factor is being calculated, the display “Add test weight” changes to “Capturing span.” The display
then changes to the next prompt “Remove test weight then fill to target.”
6. Remove the test weight. The active display returns to zero.
7. Fill the tank/hopper with a substitute material up to near the target weight. It does not have to be
the exact target weight.
8. Press the OK softkey . The target weight value recalculates to show the substitute material
weight plus the initial intended target weight. The display changes to the next prompt “Add test
weight.”
9. Add test weight to the tank/hopper. The active display shows the weight.
10. Press the OK softkey . If the actual weight does not equal the target, a new span factor
calculates and the display changes to “Capturing span.” The active weight display changes to
match the target weight value. The display changes to the next prompt “Remove test weight then
fill to target.”
11. Remove the test weight. The active display returns to the previous weight that displayed for the
last test load.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 until an appropriate number of calibration steps have been completed
for the specific application.
13. Press the EXIT softkey at any step in the procedure to stop the step calibration process and
return to the Calibration screen.
CalFree
The CALFREE softkey provides access to the span calculation screen for calibration of a scale
without test weights.
To perform calibration of span using CalFree

1. Press the CALFREE softkey . The CalFree screen displays.
2. Enter an estimated preload value in the associated field. Estimated preload is an optional entry.
During calculation, the terminal tests for over capacity conditions. Estimated preload is included
in this calculation if entered in this field. If the preload is unknown, leave this field blank.
Configuration
This preload value is used only to determine overload conditions and is not used as a zero
reference point. The zero reference point must be captured using the normal zero calibration
procedure.
3. Press the OK softkey . The span is calculated using the parameters entered and the calibration
values stored in the POWERCELL load cells.
4. If the calibration operation was successful, a verification message that reads “Calibration OK”
displays. If the calibration operation was not successful, an error message that reads “Calibration
Failure” displays. If the calibration fails, repeat the CalFree procedure. If the calibration continues
to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
3.5.4.5. Zero
This section provides access to Auto Zero Maintenance (AZM) settings, under zero blanking, power-
up zero, and pushbutton zero parameters.

platform.
Auto Zero
Disabled, Gross [default], Gross and Net
Auto Zero Range
Set the auto zero range for the number of divisions (d) around the current zero setting in which auto
zero will operate. Values from 0.0 to 9.9 are possible with 3 as the default.
Under Zero Blanking
Blanking of the display is used to indicate an under-zero condition when the weight on the scale falls
below the current zero reference. Set the under zero blanking for the number of divisions (d) that the
terminal is permitted to go under zero before blanking. Values from 0 to 99 are possible with 5 as the
default.
A value of 99 disables blanking under zero and the terminal will display a weight as far under
zero as possible.
Power Up

the same, previously displayed gross weight value. If Reset is selected, the last zero calibration value
Timed Zero
3.5.4.5.2. Ranges
Use the settings on the Ranges screen to enable or disable Power Up Zero capture and Pushbutton
Zero and to set the ranges around the original zero condition for the scale for applying these
functions.
Power Up Zero
If Power Up Zero is enabled, the terminal tries to capture zero upon power up and a range within
which zero will be captured is shown and is programmable. If Power Up Zero is disabled, the initial
zero reference at power up will revert to the most recent zero reference point or to calibrated zero
based on the Power Up selection on the AZM & Display screen. The selections are:
Power Up Zero Range
If Power Up Zero is enabled, –Range and +Range fields will display for setting the range around the
original calibrated zero of the scale within which Power Up Zero can be applied. The range units are
percent.
For example, if the +Range setting for Power Up Zero is set at 2%, Power Up Zero will only occur
when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% of scale capacity above the original calibrated
zero reference. If the –Range setting for pushbutton zero is set at 2%, Power Up Zero will only occur
when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% of scale capacity below the original calibrated
zero reference.
If Power Up Zero capture is enabled and the weight on the scale is outside of the zero capture
range, weighing on the scale is disabled and the display will indicate EEE until the weight is
adjusted to be within this range and zero is captured.
Pushbutton Zero

Configuration
Pushbutton Zero Range
If Pushbutton Zero is enabled, –Range and +Range fields will display for setting the range around the
original calibrated zero of the scale within which Pushbutton Zero can be applied. The range units are
percent.
For example, if the +Range setting for Pushbutton Zero is set at 2%, Pushbutton Zero can only be
used when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% above the original calibrated zero
reference. If the –Range setting for Pushbutton Zero is set at 2%, the Pushbutton Zero can only be
used when the weight reading on the scale is less than 2% below the original calibrated zero
reference.
3.5.4.6. Tare

Use the Tare Types setup screen to enable or disable pushbutton tare, keyboard tare, and net sign
correction.
Pushbutton Tare
Keyboard Tare
Net Sign Correction

Correction are:
Net Sign Correction

Gross 16 kg 53 kg
Tare 53 kg 16 kg
Net − 37 kg 37 kg

Auto Tare
Motion Check


Auto Clear Tare
Configuration
Motion Check
Clear After Print
Clear With Zero
Choices are:
Power Up
3.5.4.7. Units


3.5.4.7.3. Power Up
power cycle



value.
3.5.4.8. Rate
auxiliary display.

choice to be shown.


Configuration


for each average.
3.5.4.9. Filter
The ND570 terminal has a low-pass, multi-pole vibration filter that can be set for several conditions .
The heavier the filtering, the slower the display settling time will be. This screen is not accessible
when Remote is selected as the scale type.
3.5.4.9.1. Low Pass Frequency

Low pass frequency is the frequency above which all disturbances are filtered out. The lower the
frequency, the better the disturbance rejection, but the longer the settling time required for the scale.
Values from 0.2 to 9.9 are possible but values below 1.0 should not be used due to the extremely
long settling time. The default value is 2.0 Hz.
3.5.4.9.2. Low Pass # of Poles

The number of poles determines the slope of the filtering cutoff. For most applications, a slope value
of 8 is acceptable; however, decreasing this number will improve settling time slightly. Choices are:
2, 4, 6, 8 [default]
3.5.4.9.3. Notch Filter Frequency

The notch filter allows selection of one specific frequency above the low pass filter value that can also
be filtered out. This enables setting the low pass filter lower to filter out all but one frequency (that the
notch filter will handle) and obtain a faster settling time. Values from 0 (Disabled) to 99 are possible
with a default value of 30 Hz.
3.5.4.9.4. Stability Filter

The stability filter works in conjunction with the standard low pass filter to provide a more stable final
weight reading. The setup choices include
The stability filter should only be used in transaction weighing applications, since the nonlinear
action of the filter switching may cause inaccurate cutoffs in batching or filling applications.

3.5.4.10. Stability
The IND570 terminal includes a stability detector (weight in motion). The Stability setup screen
enables setting a motion range, no-motion interval and timeout period.
3.5.4.10.1. Motion Range

Sets the motion range (in divisions) that the weight is permitted to fluctuate and still have a no-
motion condition. Values from 0.1 to 99.9 are possible with the default value being 1.0 d.
3.5.4.10.2. No-motion Interval

The no motion interval defines the amount of time (seconds) that the scale weight must be within the
motion range setting to have a no-motion condition. Values from 0.0 (motion detection disabled) to
2.0 are possible, the default value being 0.3 seconds. A shorter interval means that a no-motion
condition is more likely, but may make weight measurement less precise.
3.5.4.10.3. Timeout
printed).
displayed.

Primary units are displayed for this field.

Configuration
3.5.4.11.4. Reset On
to reset

Deviation.

3.5.4.12. MinWeigh

Calculated The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be
calculated based on measurement values entered.
Direct Entry The MinWeigh feature will operate and the MinWeigh value will be directly

entered by hand.



customer would like to recalculate this number for purposes of more closely matching
a GWP Recommendation this value will generally be specified by the customer
starting at 2. The integer value range is 1–10 and is used to determine the exclusion
range.

3.5.4.13. Reset
3.5.5. Scale – Remote Display

Many of the setup parameters not used when remote display is selected as the scale type are still
shown in the menu tree. Only the parameters that affect remote display functionality are listed here.
Parameters not listed have no effect on the remote display operation.
3.5.5.1. Type
The Scale Type screen permits a name to be assigned to the remote display and allows the IND570
to be configured as a remote display for another terminal. The EXIT softkey will return the display
to the menu tree.
3.5.5.1.1. Name
The Name field enables entry of the remote display identification. Enter the name (an alpha-numeric

Remote Display mode. The choice will be either the scale type supported by the PCB present in the
terminal or Remote Display. For example:
Analog, IDNet, SICSpro, POWERCELL, Remote

remote display.

Configuration

selections:

The Blank Over Capacity parameter is not used when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
The Calibration screens are not available when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.4. Zero
Although the Zero screens are available when Remote Display is selected as the scale type, most
parameters are not used.

None of the AZM & Display screens are functional when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.4.2. Ranges
Use the settings on the Ranges screen to enable or disable Pushbutton Zero from the remote display.

3.5.5.4.3. Power Up Zero
The Power Up Zero parameter is not used when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.4.4. Power Up Zero Range

The Power Up Zero Range parameter is not used when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.4.5. Pushbutton Zero

commands from a PC, a discrete input or from PLC commands.
3.5.5.4.6. Pushbutton Zero Range

The Pushbutton Zero Range parameter is not used when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.5. Tare

Use the Tare Types setup screen to enable or disable pushbutton tare, keyboard tare and net sign
correction. (solo en celdas de carga IDNet).
Pushbutton Tare
When pushbutton tare is enabled, the front panel tare key can be pressed to send a tare
command to the master terminal. The master terminal will then determine if the tare can be applied or
not. The selections include:
Keyboard Tare
entered manually (preset tare) and sent to the master terminal. The master terminal will then
determine if the preset tare can be applied or not. Choices are:
Net Sign Correction
Net sign correction enables the Remote Display to be used for both shipping (inbound empty) and
receiving (inbound loaded) operations. If net sign correction is enabled, the remote display will
switch the gross and tare weight fields on the printed ticket, if necessary, so that the larger weight is
the gross weight, the smaller weight is the tare weight, and the difference is always a positive net

weight. Net sign correction affects the printed data output, the recalled weight display and the
displayed weight. Continuous data output will continue to show a negative net weight value. The
choices for Net Sign Correction are:

Configuration
Table of the master terminal. An example of weight values with and without net sign correction is
shown in Table 3-6. In this example, the tare register value is 53 kg and the live weight on the scale
is 16 kg.
Net Sign Correction

Gross 16 kg 53 kg
Tare 53 kg 16 kg
Net − 37 kg 37 kg

When the scale type is set to Remote Display, all auto tare screens are disabled.
3.5.5.5.3. Auto Clear Tare

None of the Auto Clear Tare screens are functional when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.6. Units
None of the Units screens are functional when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.7. Rate
auxiliary display.


choice to be shown.



for each average.
3.5.5.8. Filter
None of the Filter screens are functional when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
3.5.5.9. Stability
None of the Stability screens are functional when Remote Display is selected as the scale type.
is triggered. A print request at the remote display causes the "P" command to be sent to the master
terminal. The master terminal may then print (if it has a local print connection) and the master
terminal will also set the print bit in the continuous output to the remote display to indicate to the
remote display that it should print if it has a demand connection. Normal demand mode printing
occurs whenever a print request is made, providing there is no motion on the scale and the weight is
above gross zero (a negative gross weight will not be printed).
displayed.

Primary units are displayed for this field. If the weight is below this value, a print request will not be
sent to the master terminal.


Configuration
3.5.5.10.4. Reset On
Deviation The weight must change more than this absolute value for the Interlock and Automatic
print to reset
Return [default] The weight must return to below this value for the Interlock and Automatic print to reset

Deviation.

3.5.5.11. MinWeigh
If the current net weight is greater than or equal to the MinWeigh value, all remote display functions
behave normally. If the absolute value of the net weight is less than MinWeigh, the weight display
includes a flashing MinWeigh symbol to the left of the weight. If the user attempts to record the
weight while in this condition, the printout will include an asterisk (∗).

hand.



customer would like to recalculate this number for purposes of more closely matching a
GWP Recommendation this value will generally be specified by the customer starting at
2. The integer value range is 1–10 and is used to determine the exclusion range.

3.5.5.12. Reset
Refer to section 3.5.6, below.
3.5.6. Reset
The Reset screen enables Scale branch setup values to be reset to factory default settings.
To initiate a reset, press the OK softkey . If the reset was successful, a verification message that
reads “Reset Successful” displays. If the reset was not successful, an error message that reads “Reset
Failure” displays. If the reset fails, try to initiate the reset again. If the reset continues to fail, contact a
local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without resetting.
Scale Reset does NOT include the reset of metrologically significant parameters – scale type,
approval, weight units, capacity, increment, or calibration data. This data is reset only by
performing a Master Reset with switch 2-1 in its ON position, or a Reset function in the IDNet or
SICSpro load cell.

3.6. Application
Use application setup screens to configure the setup parameters shown
Configuration
below:
3.6.1. Memory
The memory branch of setup provides access to parameters for Alibi
memory, the Tare and Target tables and the Message table.
3.6.1.1. Alibi
The Alibi memory table stores basic transaction information that is not
user-definable. Alibi memory is configured as a “ring” buffer that
overwrites the oldest record when it reaches its memory limit. Alibi
memory can hold approximately 100,000 transactions before it reaches
its limit and begins overwriting old transactions. The selections are:
Disabled [default], Alibi Memory, Action Log (only when Fill-570 is installed)
More detailed information about Alibi memory can be found in Chapter 2, Operation, and in Appendix
B, Table and Log File Structure.
If the IND570 terminal has been programmed as “approved”, Alibi memory enabling or disabling
is only accessible if the security switch (SW1-1) is in the OFF position.
To clear the Alibi memory table, disable the Alibi memory, exit the Alibi setup screen, and
then enable Alibi again.
3.6.1.1.1. To View Alibi Memory Records

1. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Alibi Search screen displays.
2. Use the selection boxes and associated fields to enter specific search information to limit the
search, or enter * (the “find all” character) to view all information. A maximum of two search
fields are provided.
3. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Alibi Search View screen displays with the search
results. Records are ordered by time, with the oldest shown first.
4. Press the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT navigation keys to scroll up and down and across the
screen in order to view all data and all records listed.
3.6.1.1.2. To Print Alibi Memory Records
1. Press the PRINT softkey to print the list.
2. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Alibi Search Screen.
3.6.1.2. Tare Table
The Tare Table displays stored tare records, including an ID, description, tare weight value and unit,
the number of transactions in which the tare was used and the accumulated weight of all transactions
using the tare ID.

More detailed information about the tare table memory can be found in Chapter 2, Operation, and in
Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure.
Use the Tare Table setup screen to enable or disable description and to configure totalization. Press
the CLEAR softkey to reset the table.
3.6.1.2.1. Description
Description is an alphanumeric string that describes the Tare Table entry. Use the Description
selection box to enable or disable Description in the Tare Table structure. Choices are:
3.6.1.2.2. Totalization
Totalization is a field that tracks the total weight for all transactions involving each tare in the table.
The possible selections are:
None [default], Displayed Weight, Gross Weight
3.6.1.2.3. Tare Table Records

Depending on the selections made in setup, Tare Table records can include the following fields:
ID Identification number for the active record

Description Descriptive identification for the active record
Tare Weight Desired preset tare value
Tare Units Units of measure for the tare (tare record units can be any available primary unit)
n Number of transactions in which the tare record has been used.
Total Accumulated weight of all transactions using the tare ID
To View Tare Table Records
1. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey The Tare Search screen displays.
search, or enter * (the “find all” character) to view all Tare Table information.
3. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Tare Search View screen displays with the search
results. Only records with non-null tare values display. Records are ordered by ID, with the lowest
ID number shown first.
To Modify or Add Tare Table Records
1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) a record in the table.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for editing a record or press the NEW softkey
to open the setup screen to create a new table record.
3. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move the focus to the field name to be edited or
inserted.

4. Press the ENTER key to select a field value to edit or insert. The alpha keys display.
5. Use the alpha keys and the numeric keypad to edit or enter the desired value.
6. When the tare entry field is highlighted, press the TARE softkey to capture the current live
Configuration
scale weight and unit.

7. Press the OK softkey to accept the modifications or additions to the Tare Table.
8. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Tare Search View screen without saving
modifications or additions.
9. Press the DELETE softkey to delete a tare record in the list.
10. Press the PRINT softkey to print the list. Login must be at supervisor level or above to print
the table.
11. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Tare Search Screen.
3.6.1.3. Message Table
The Message Table displays stored text messages and corresponding ID numbers that can be used in
print templates. Only message records with non-null values display.
Press the CLEAR softkey to clear the entire table.
To View, Edit, Delete or Print Message Table Records
search, or do not enter any search limits to view all Message Table information.
2. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Message Search View screen displays with the search
results. Records are ordered by ID, with the lowest ID number shown first.
3. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll up and down the screen in order to view all
data and all records listed.
4. Modify or add Message Table information by editing, inserting, or deleting information as
described previously under Tare Table.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Search Screen.
3.6.1.4. Target Table
Target comparison can be used in two types of applications: material transfer and over/under.
Material Transfer mode is used in filling and dosing applications. Over/Under mode is used in
checkweighing applications to quickly classify a load placed on the scale platform as OK or above or
below a target value. Target comparison is disabled in the terminal until a target table Mode is
selected.
Use the Target Table setup screen to select the mode, tolerance type, and output type for use in target
comparison.
Press the CLEAR softkey to reset the entire target table. Log-in must be at supervisor level or
0above to clear the table.

Additional information about the target table can be found in Chapter 2, Operation, and in Appendix B,
Table and Log File Structure.
3.6.1.4.1. Mode
Use the Mode selection box to select the type of application for target comparison. Selections include:
None [default], Material Transfer, Over/Under

3.6.1.4.2. Tolerance Type
Use the Tolerance Type selection box to select the type of tolerance to be used for target comparison.
The choices are:
Target Deviation [default] Positive tolerance and negative tolerance values can be entered as a
deviation weight value in the same units as the target
% of Target Positive tolerance and negative tolerance values can be entered as a
percent of the target value
Weight Value (Over/Under only) No absolute target value is defined; the under limit and over limit
values are used as zone edges for OK to define the acceptable range
3.6.1.4.3. Output Type

The Output Type field is available only when the Material Transfer mode is selected. Use the Output
Type selection box to select the type of two-speed output to be used in the target application.
Selections include:
Concurrent [default] Both Feed and Fast Feed outputs operate at the same time
Independent One output operates at a time (Fast Feed then Feed)
Totalization is a field that tracks the total weight for all transactions involving each target in the table.
The possible selections are:
None [default], Displayed Weight
3.6.1.4.5. Target Table Records

Depending on the selected Mode, Target Table records can include the following fields:
ID Identification number for the active record

Description Descriptive identification for the active record
Target Weight Desired measured value for a weighment
Target Units Units of measure for the target weight (the target record units and the comparison
units can be a combination of primary, second or third units)
Spill Amount of material delivered after the control device is signaled to stop (material
transfer mode only)
Positive Tolerance Highest acceptable tolerance above a target value
Negative Tolerance Lowest acceptable tolerance below a target value
Fine Feed For two-speed applications, the fine feed value is the amount of material delivered at
the slower speed (material transfer mode only)

n Number of transactions in which the target record was used
Total Accumulated weight of all transactions using the target ID
To View, Edit, Delete or Print Target Table Records

Configuration
1. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey The Target Search screen displays.
search, or do not enter any search limits to view all Target Table records.
Search fields that display in the Search Field selection box vary depending on the selections
made on the Target Table setup screen.
3. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Target Search View screen displays with the search
results. Only records with non-null values display. Records are ordered by ID, with the lowest ID
number shown first.
5. Target Table records include different information, depending on the selections made on the
Target Table setup screen. For example, Over Limit and Under Limit data displays only when the
Over/Under mode is selected with Weight Value tolerance type.
6. Modify or add Target Table information by editing, inserting, or deleting information as described
previously under Tare Table.
8. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Search Screen.
3.6.2. Operation
Operation setup screens include Target, Comparators, Totalization and ID1 through ID4.
3.6.2.1. Target
Use this setup screen to select which live measurement data (source) to use as the weight input for
target comparison and to determine the discrete output operation in Over/Under mode and Material
Transfer mode.
3.6.2.1.1. Source
Select which source to use as input for target comparison. Choices include:
Displayed Weight [default], Gross Weight.

This parameter is shown only if target mode is set to Over/Under (refer to section 3.6.1.4.1,
Application | Memory | Target Table | Mode). If Motion Check is enabled, the discrete outputs for Over,
Under and OK are only activated when a no-motion condition is detected. Selections for this
parameter include:

3.6.2.1.3. Latching
This parameter is shown only if target mode is set to Material Transfer (refer to section 3.6.1.4.1,
Application | Memory | Target Table | Mode). When output latching is enabled, the target comparison
outputs (for example, the Feed output) remain latched (OFF) after the output switching threshold is
exceeded until the latch is reset by the next start input (softkey or discrete input). Setup choices are:
If latching is disabled, the outputs will operate as coincidence-type outputs: the target comparison
outputs will be ON until the live weight passes the output switching threshold. The output will then
turn OFF. The output will turn ON again immediately when the live weight drops below the output
switching threshold. Unlatched outputs are acceptable for applications such as tank level
measurement, but potentially dangerous for filling applications. Refer to Chapter 4, Applications,
for more information on using coincidence-type and latched outputs.
3.6.2.2. Comparators
The Comparators screen permits the configuration of simple comparators controlled either by
comparison to a limit value or by comparison with a range, and used as an assignment for discrete
outputs. The source for comparison can be the Gross Weight, Displayed Weight, Rate or assigned by
a custom TaskExpert application.
This screen displays all five Comparators, and contains columns for ID, Description, Source, Limit,
Unit, High Limit, and Active condition. From here, it is possible to EDIT a Comparator, DELETE
one , or CLEAR all Comparators.
Once parameters have been set in the Comparator Edit screen, they can be saved by pressing OK
, or discarded by pressing ESCAPE . In either case, the view returns to the Comparators screen.
3.6.2.2.1. Source
If None or Application is selected as the source, no other parameter fields are displayed. If a weight
field is selected as the Source, the weight unit will be primary units. If Rate is selected as the Source,
then the unit will be the same as selected for Rate in the Scale > Rate branch. The choices for Source
include:
None [default] Comparator disabled

Application Comparator controlled by a TaskExpert program
ABS – Displayed Weight Comparator triggered on the absolute value of the displayed weight (no
consideration for whether the value is positive or negative)
ABS – Rate Comparator triggered on the absolute value of the rate (no consideration for
whether the value is positive or negative)
Displayed Weight Comparator triggered on the displayed weight
Gross Weight Comparator triggered on the gross weight
Rate Comparator triggered on the rate
3.6.2.2.2. Active
The Active setting determines how the source field will be compared to the limit value or the range
between the limit and high limit values.

< [default] Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is less than the limit
<= Comparator will be “ON” when the source value is less than or equal to the limit
= Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is equal to the limit
Configuration
>= Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is greater than or equal to the limit
> Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is greater than the limit
<> Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is not equal to the limit
_< >_ Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is outside the range of the limit and the
high limit
>_ _< Comparator will be "ON" when the source value is within the range of the limit and the
high limit
The description is an alphanumeric string that is used to identify the type and purpose of the
comparator. This string appears, together with the automatically assigned ID number (1-5), in the list
that displays when the Comparator softkey is pressed. The maximum length is 20 characters.
3.6.2.2.4. Limit
The Limit either sets the comparison value to which the actual source value is compared, or the lower
comparison value for the range to which the currently measured source value is compared.
3.6.2.2.5. High Limit

The High Limit is available only for Range mode, and sets the upper comparison value for the range
to which the currently measured source value is compared. Its value must be higher than the Limit. If
a lower value is entered, the terminal will show an Invalid Value message when the OK softkey is
pressed.
3.6.2.3. Totalization
The IND570 terminal provides totalization in both grand total (GT) and subtotal (ST) registers and
counters. The counters record the number of transactions for which a totalization was done and the
registers track the totalization of weight each time a PRINT is triggered.
Counters have a limit of 1,500,000 and registers will accumulate up to 11 digits of weight including
any decimal places to the right of the decimal point. For example, a scale programmed for 500 x 0.1
kg will accumulate weight values up to 9999999999.9 (11 total digits). If either of these limits is
exceeded, an error message will display and the totals must be reset before additional weights or
counts will be added.
Use the Totalization setup screen to select parameters for totalization operations, including which
source to use as input for totalization, settings for grand totals and subtotals, and to enable or disable
the conversion of second or third unit weights for totalization.
3.6.2.3.1. Mode
Select which source to use as input for totalization comparison. A selection of None disables
totalization. Possible selections are:
None [default], Displayed Weight, Gross Weight

3.6.2.3.2. Clear GT on Print
The Grand Total (GT) can be configured to clear automatically after printing the Totals report. If Clear
GT on Print is enabled, the subtotal also clears automatically after printing the Totals report. The
choices for this parameter are:
3.6.2.3.3. Subtotal
The Subtotal (ST) register can be separately disabled while the Grand Total register continues to
accumulate weights. Choices are:
3.6.2.3.4. Clear ST on Print

Clearing the subtotal on print and not clearing the grand total on print allows the subtotal register to
totalize sub-sets of weighments and to be reset while the grand total continues to track the grand total
of weight. Selections for this are:
3.6.2.3.5. Convert Weight

The total registers always store weights in primary units. If Convert Weight is disabled, scale weights
other than primary units are not accumulated. If Convert Weight is enabled, then the weight is
converted to primary units, and then accumulated. The selections are:
3.6.2.4. ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4
ID prompting allows the terminal to be configured so that it leads an operator through a specific
series of actions, such as entering data, setting a tare value, or sending a print output. This is useful
for tasks that must be repeated in precise sequence, and in which specific kinds of input are needed
at various steps in the process. Each sequence can consist of up to 30 steps. All IDs can be started
manually, by pressing a softkey, or (in the case of ID1 only) automatically, when the weight on the
scale passes a programmed threshold. IDs can be programmed to run through the sequence one
time or to loop continuously.
3.6.2.4.1. ID Mode
This step determines what will trigger the start of the specific ID sequence. ID1 has an extra choice of
Automatic to trigger automatically when the weight on the scale exceeds a programmable threshold
value. ID2, ID3 and ID4 can only be triggered by softkey. Selections are:
None [default], Automatic (ID1 only), Softkey
3.6.2.4.2. Looping
This step is available when the ID Mode is selected as Softkey. If enabled, the ID sequence will
continuously cycle until the EXIT softkey is pressed. The selections for Looping are:

3.6.2.4.3. Threshold
This step is available only if Automatic Mode is selected for ID1. The ID1 sequence starts when a
weight above the Threshold weight value is placed on the scale. The weight must fall below the
programmed reset weight value (refer to the description below) before it will automatically trigger
Configuration
again.
3.6.2.4.4. Reset
This step is available only if Automatic Mode is selected for ID1. The automatic start trigger rearms
after the weight falls below the Reset weight value.
3.6.2.4.5. Configuring ID Sequence Steps

Once the Mode Parameters have been set, ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4 sequence steps can be viewed,
created, edited or deleted by pressing the VIEW TABLE softkey .
1. The ID Search screen displays, permitting the search results to be filtered by # (step number),
Type, Length or Prompt.
2. Either select a field to search and enter a comparative operator (<, <=, =, >=, >, <>) and
alphanumeric information in the Data fields; or leave the wildcard asterisk (*) in the Data field to
view all existing steps.
3. Press the START SEARCH softkey to display the ID View screen. From here, ID steps can be
edited , created , erased and printed .
4. The ID Edit screen is accessed by pressing the NEW softkey or the EDIT softkey . The parameters
that can be set for each step depend on the Type of step selected are shown in Table 3-7.
The # (step number) is automatically assigned. It determines the order in which the steps will
execute. Steps may be inserted into an existing sequence by selecting an entry and pressing the
NEW softkey to define a new step. The newly created step will appear in the sequence before
the selected entry, and all subsequent # values will increase by one. To move a step in the
sequence, it must be deleted and re-entered in the appropriate position.
Table 3-7: Types of ID Steps
Type Parameters Options

Enter up to 30 characters as the text or prompt for the step to display on-
Prompt
screen during the ID sequence.
Enter numeric value (0 - 40) to constrain the length of the response input
after the prompt.
If length of 0 is entered, the prompt is shown without an entry field. The
Length step is then displayed as an instruction in the sequence. In this case,
ENTER must be pressed to move to the next step. During entry, once the
Alphanumeric,
length value is met, the terminal will not accept further input; incorrect
Numeric
entries can be deleted using the CLEAR key.
Permits the entered response (e.g., Operator’s name) to be retained from
one cycle to the next.
Disabled - the next time the step displays it contains the data entered
Clear Data
during the previous cycle. Pressing ENTER accepts the value and moves
to the next step or any entry will overwrite the previous data.
Enabled - the entry field will be blank when viewed the next time.

Type Parameters Options
Clear Tare
Print Tare – None The selected function will be executed automatically
Auto
Prompt Refer to Prompt, above
# of Selections The number of choices in the selection box can be set from 2 to 6.
Selection List Disabled - retains the previous selection as the beginning point for the next
cycle.
Clear Data
Enabled – the selection list will restart at the first selection on the next
cycle
Prompt Refer to Prompt, above
Tare – Preset Length Refer to Length, above
Clear Data Refer to Clear Data in Alphanumeric and Numeric, above
As many as 30 steps can be created for each ID. However, each ID sequence can have only one
Selection list step.
Once parameters have been set in the ID Edit screen, they can be saved by pressing OK , or
discarded by pressing ESCAPE . In either case, the view returns to the ID View screen.
5. The ID sequence can be printed from the ID View screen using the PRINT softkey . A Reports
connection is required for successful printing (for more details refer to section 3.8.5,
Communication | Connections, and the Basic Functionality | Printing | Report Printing section of
Chapter 2, Operation, and Appendix C, Communication | Reports). Return to the setup menu tree
by pressing the EXIT softkey .
3.6.2.5. Loading Alert (POWERCELL only)
The IND570 and IND570xx terminals provide visual guidance to assist users in centering the load to
be weighed on a PowerDeck platform. Placing the load's center of gravity near the geometric center of
the platform's load cell arrangement provides for optimal weighing results. Once enabled, a Loading
Alert screen will display any time an off-center load condition is detected.
The Loading Alert displays as a rectangle representing the scale base, with each load cell keyed with
a number 1 through 4. A dot appears within the quadrant experiencing the most extreme weight
deviation. This is a live screen and the dot will update position as the load is adjusted on the
platform. Once triggered, the Loading Alert must be manually acknowledged by the user or the user
must adjust the load so that the load's center of gravity is detected within the OK Zone. The Loading
Alert will reset when the weight on the platform drops below the configured Threshold Weight value.
No other terminal functions are impacted while the Loading Alert screen is active. All configured
communications, discrete inputs and outputs, and terminal functions such as Tare and Print can be
executed.
3.6.2.5.1. Loading Alert

When Loading Alert is enabled, the terminal will monitor for the center of gravity of any load that
passes the configured Threshold Weight. The choices for this parameter are:

If Loading Alert is Disabled, no additional setup selections are provided.

The Threshold Weight is the weight above which the Loading Alert is triggered. When the weight on
Configuration
the platform falls below the Threshold Weight, such as when a load has been removed, the terminal
automatically resets the Loading Alert.
200 is the default value.
3.6.2.5.3. OK Zone
The OK Zone defines an area around a platform's geometric center of gravity. When the center of
gravity of a load is measured outside the OK Zone, the Loading Alert is triggered.
The OK Zone must be a whole number between 5 and 50. The default value is 30%.
3.6.2.5.4. Platform Size

Input the length and width of the connected PowerDeck platform. These values are used to calculate
the geometric center of the platform's load cell arrangement. Selectable units are mm [default] and
inches.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree.
3.6.3. Discrete I/O

These screens provide access to the assignments for discrete inputs and discrete outputs.
3.6.3.1. Inputs
The Discrete Inputs screen displays discrete input assignments, including the input assignment
address, polarity, and function. Only records with non-null values display.
To clear the entire table, press the CLEAR softkey , then press OK to confirm the action. Press
the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll up and down the screen in order to view all of the
possible discrete input assignments.
3.6.3.1.1. To add or modify discrete inputs

1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) a discrete input.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for editing an existing input assignment or
press the NEW softkey to open the setup screen to create a new input assignment.
3. Enter the Input Assignment address. The input address is shown as [x.y.z] where x indicates the
input location, y indicates the slot address of the I/O option, and z indicates the input position.
The input address digits are:
• Location – The first digit represents whether the I/O is local (0) or remote (1–3).
• Slot Address – The second digit will always be a 1 for the IND570 internal I/O and a 0 for the
remote I/O (ARM 100).
• Position – The third digit refers to the position (1–5) of the discrete input option (internal or
remote) that is being assigned to a function.
Valid address numbers are:

I/O Module Valid Addresses
Local 2in/5out 0.1.1, 0.1.2
Local 5in/8out 0.1.1, 0.1.2, 0.1.3, 0.1.4, 0.1.5
Remote #1 1.0.1, 1.0.2, 1.0.3, 1.0.4
Remote #2 2.0.1, 2.0.2, 2.0.3, 2.0.4
Remote #3 3.0.1, 3.0.2, 3.0.3, 3.0.4
Examples:
Address 0.1.1 = Local discrete board, position 1.

Address 1.0.3 = Remote address #1, position 3.
1. The inputs can be programmed to accept either a + True or –True polarity level as “ON”. When
input polarity is + True, the input will be “ON” when there is voltage detected. When input polarity
is - True, the input will be “ON” when there is no voltage detected. Use the Polarity selection box
to select + True or – True.
2. Use the Assignment selection box to select an input assignment. Selections are:
None [default] Enter SmartTrac Trigger 3
Blank Display* ID1 Tare Unit Switching
Clear System Error Alarm ID2 Target Pause/Abort** Unit - Primary
Clear Tare ID3 Target Start/Resume** Unit - Second
Disable Keypad* ID4 Trigger 1 Unit - Third
Disable Setup Print Trigger 2 Zero
* Blank Display and Disable Keypad are designed to be activated by a simple press-and-hold
or key and lock mechanism
** Discrete input assignment only available when weighing in Material Transfer mode
3. Press the OK softkey to accept the entry.

4. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Discrete Inputs screen without saving.
5. Press the DELETE softkey to delete an input assignment.
3.6.3.2. Outputs
The Discrete Outputs screen displays discrete output assignments, including the output assignment
address and function. Only records with non-null values display.
To clear the entire table, press the CLEAR softkey , then press OK to confirm the action. Press
the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll up and down the screen in order to view all of the
possible discrete output assignments.
To modify, add, or delete discrete outputs, follow the same procedures described for inputs. Valid
address numbers are:

I/O Module Valid Addresses
Local 2in/5out 0.1.1, 0.1.2, 0.1.3, 0.1.4, 0.1.5
Local 5in/8out 0.1.1, 0.1.2, 0.1.3, 0.1.4, 0.1.5, 0.1.6, 0.1.7, 0.1.8
Configuration
Remote #1 1.0.1, 1.0.2, 1.0.3, 1.0.4, 1.0.5, 1.0.6
Remote #2 2.0.1, 2.0.2, 2.0.3, 2.0.4, 2.0.5, 2.0.6
Remote #3 3.0.1, 3.0.2, 3.0.3, 3.0.4, 3.0.5, 3.0.6
Examples:
Address 0.1.1 = Local discrete board, position 1.

Address 1.0.3 = Remote address #1, position 3.
The selections for output assignments are:
None [default] Comparator 4 Net Tolerance - OK

Center of Zero Comparator 5 Over Capacity Under Zero
Comparator 1 Fast Feed* Over Zone** Under Zone**
Comparator 2 Feed* System Error Alarm Zero Requested
Comparator 3 Motion System OK
* Discrete output assignment only available when weighing in Material Transfer mode
** Discrete output assignment only available when weighing in Over/Under mode
3.6.4. PAC
When an application software module (PAC) is installed in the IND570, this area of the setup menu
tree includes screens used to configure the PAC. Refer to the User’s Guide for each specific application
pac for details on configuration of the software.
3.6.5. TaskExpert
A custom TaskExpert program that has been loaded into the IND570 can be enabled from this screen.
It is also used to access custom setup screens defined by the TaskExpert application.
These TaskExpert setup screens are not accessible unless the TaskExpert function is enabled in
the terminal. TaskExpert is enabled in the terminal by installing the TaskExpert Application
Software key.
3.6.5.1. Start
The TaskExpert Start screen allows you to list your TaskExpert programs and associate each of them
to a Task number. Each task can be set to run automatically at terminal power up, automatically after
exiting Setup, or started manually using the Task List , Task 1, Task 2 or Task 3 softkeys.
Press the CLEAR softkey to reset the table.

3.6.5.1.1. To modify the TaskExpert Start list
1. Use the arrow keys to select the existing task to be edited or deleted. With the record selected:
2. Press the EDIT softkey to modify a record. Note that the Task number cannot be modified.
3. Press the DELETE softkey to delete a record.
4. To create a new task press the NEW softkey . The TASK EXPERT EDIT screen will display.
5. The Task Number will be assigned automatically. Enter the name of the TaskExpert file in the File
Name field.
6. Set Auto Start to Enabled or Disabled. If Enabled is selected, the task will run each time the
indicator is powered up or when Setup is exited.
7. Set Manual Start to Enabled or Disabled. This will cause the program to run when manually
selected and started.
8. Press to save changes or to exit without saving.
3.6.5.2. Custom Setup
The Custom Setup menu is defined by the TaskExpert application. For details, refer to the TaskExpert
Reference Manual, provided with TaskExpert.
3.6.6. Reset
The Reset function returns most configuration settings in the Application branch to their factory
defaults.
reads “Reset Successful” displays If the reset was not successful, an error message that reads “Reset
Application > Reset does NOT include the reset of information stored in Alibi Memory or tables.
This data can only be reset by executing the Reset All function found at Maintenance > Reset All.
3.7. Terminal
The configuration screens for the Terminal branch of setup are
shown below. If user security is enabled, Login must be at
Maintenance level or above to access most parameters in the
Terminal branch. A Supervisor can set the time and date.
3.7.1. Device
The Device setup screen enables the entry of three terminal IDs
and the terminal serial number.
3.7.1.1. Terminal ID #1, ID #2, ID#3
Up to three terminal identifiers can be entered on the Device setup

screen. When the Terminal ID text box is selected, the softkeys become alpha keys. Use the alpha
keys to enter up to three terminal IDs. Press the ENTER key to accept the ID entered. These ID fields
display in the information recall when the SYSTEM INFORMATION softkey is pressed after the
RECALL softkey . These IDs are also included in the Service Information Recall report and Terminal
Configuration
Status Report.
3.7.1.2. Serial Number
The Serial Number text box is used to enter the serial number of the IND570 terminal.
The terminal serial number displays in the information recall when the SYSTEM INFORMATION softkey
is pressed after the RECALL softkey . The serial number is populated at the factory during
manufacturing. The serial number is not cleared when a Master Reset is carried out on the terminal
(refer to Chapter 4, Service and Maintenance).
If the serial number requires re-entry (for example, if the main pcb is changed), use the alphanumeric
keys to enter the terminal’s serial number. The factory assigned serial number is located on the back
of the terminal.
3.7.1.3. Connected Devices
The Connected Devices softkey provides access to a list where information on devices connected to
the terminal can be stored/viewed. This list must be populated manually during the installation. Once
populated, it can be viewed from this location within setup or with the Connected Devices softkey
which displays when the SYSTEM INFORMATION softkey is pressed after the RECALL softkey
is pressed on the home screen.
The fields for each connected device record include Description, Model and Note.
3.7.1.3.1. To Add or Modify Connected Device Records
1. Press the Connected Devices softkey at the bottom of the Device screen.
2. Press the NEW softkey to create a new record.
3. To edit an existing record, press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) a record
in the list then press the EDIT softkey to open the edit screen.
inserted.
5. Press the ENTER key to select a field value to edit or insert.
6. Use the alphanumeric keypad to edit or enter the desired value.
7. Press the OK softkey to accept the modifications or additions.
8. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Connected Devices screen without saving
9. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Device screen.
To Delete or Clear Connected Device Records
10. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move the focus to the record to be deleted. Press the
DELETE softkey to delete this record from the list.

11. Press the CLEAR softkey to clear all records from the list.
12. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Device screen.
3.7.2. Display
Use the Display setup screen to configure settings for Backlight Timeout (LCD only), the Screensaver,
Tare Display, Auxiliary Display and Metrology Line. A backlight adjustment softkey is also
available on this page.
3.7.2.1. Backlight Timeout (LCD Display Only)
The display backlight (only available with the LCD display) can be set to turn off after a specific
period of terminal inactivity, set in minutes.
3.7.2.2. Screensaver
The screensaver can be activated to show a graphic or a small display of the live scale weight. The
selections are:
Graphic, Weight [default]
A second field determines the number of minutes (from 0 to 99 – default of 15) that must elapse with
no scale motion and no keypad activity before the screensaver is shown. A setting of “0” in this
number of minutes field will disable the screensaver.
During runtime, if motion is detected on the scale or any key is pressed, the screen saver
automatically stops and its timer is reset. The keystroke used to exit the screen saver mode is ignored
for all other purposes.
If the scale is programmed as "approved", the screensaver will only operate when the scale is at
gross zero.
3.7.2.2.1. Changing the Screen Saver Graphic

The graphic used by the IND570 as a screen saver can be changed by downloading a replacement
file to the terminal.
Screen Saver Graphic Specification
The screen saver graphic is a monochrome bitmap file that should measure no more than 128 pixels
wide by 44 pixels high. The graphic must have a white boarder at least one pixel wide at the left,
right and top. The maximum size of the bitmap file cannot exceed 1.5 KB. The bitmap must be
named saver.bmp for correct use in the IND570.
Note: Bitmap files must be black and white in order to display correctly on the terminal screen.

Configuration
Figure 3-14: Screen Saver Graphic
Installing New Graphic
The screen saver graphic can be installed on the IND570 by making a serial file transfer or by using
an ftp connection to the terminal via Ethernet, logging on as an administrator (with write privileges),
and copying the file to ram:\saver.bmp. Refer to the FTP section of Appendix C, Communications, for
further details.
3.7.2.3. Tare Display
This setting determines whether the tare display is shown on the home screen when the largest size
weight display is shown. The tare display is not available when Auxiliary display is enabled. Display
options for the tare display include:
Disabled The tare value will not be shown in the weight display
Active [default] The tare value is shown on the largest weight display only when a tare has
been taken. In the gross mode, no tare value is shown.
Always There is a reserved space on the largest weight display for the current tare
value. In the gross mode, the tare is shown as zero.
3.7.2.4. Auxiliary Display
A SmartTrac™, Rate or Discrete I/O status display can be displayed on the home screen in addition to
the weight. The weight display changes size to accommodate the auxiliary display selection.
The choices for Auxiliary Display are:
Disabled [default], DI/O Status, Rate, SmartTrac–Small, SmartTrac–Medium, SmartTrac–Large.
When Rate or DI/O Status is selected for the auxiliary display, the weight display is shown in half size
and the auxiliary display is shown below the weight. The number of DI/O inputs and outputs shown
will match the number of inputs and outputs of the internal I/O option installed in the terminal.
SmartTrac™ refers to a graphical visualization used to represent measured values. The display is
either a bar graph (if material transfer is selected as the target mode) or an over/under display (if
over/under is selected as the target mode). SmartTrac graphics also vary in terms of the amount of
data displayed. While the SmartTrac graphic remains constant in size, the “small” setting includes
minimal information, while the “large” setting displays the description as well as the target and
tolerance values. Refer to the SmartTrac section in Chapter 2, Operation, for examples of the different
SmartTrac graphics.

The SmartTrac selections will only be shown if target table Mode has been selected as either Material
Transfer or Over/Under.
For the SmartTrac to display on the home screen when the SmartTrac softkey is pressed,
auxiliary display must be programmed as SmartTrac and an active target must be programmed. If
both of these conditions are not met, “Function Disabled” will be shown when the SmartTrac softkey
is pressed.
3.7.2.4.1. SmartTrac Size

SmartTrac refers to a graphical display visualization used to represent measured values. The display
is either a bar graph (if material transfer is selected as the target mode) or an over/under display (if
over/under is selected as the target mode).
The graphical display varies in terms of the amount of data displayed. While the SmartTrac graphic
remains constant in size, the “small” setting includes minimal information, while the “large” setting
displays the description as well as the target and limit values.
Examples of different sizes of SmartTrac displays are as follows:
Material Transfer Mode Over/Under Mode
Small
Medium
Large
Figure 3-15: SmartTrac Display Sizes, Material Transfer and Over/Under Modes
3.7.2.5. Metrology Line
A metrology line that displays programmed capacity and increment information or Max/Min/e
information can be enabled. The selections are:
Disabled, Cap/d [default], Max/Min/e

This metrology line may serve to meet the metrological display requirements of various regions in the
world. In case the metrology date line is not accepted by an agency, it can be disabled and a label
with the required information may be installed near the display. Refer to the IND570 Installation
Manual, for more details.
Configuration
3.7.2.6. Backlight Adjustment
If an LCD-type display is detected, a Backlight Adjustment softkey appears in position 3. Press

this softkey to display the backlight adjustment screen.
Figure 3-16: Backlight Adjustment Screen
Press the Darker and Brighter softkeys to adjust the backlight.
3.7.3. Region
The region setup screens enable configuration of the time and date, the language for messages, the
gross weight symbol used on the display and whether a comma or decimal will be used in weight
values transmitted or printed from the terminal.
3.7.3.1. Format Time & Date
Selection boxes on this setup screen enable formatting of the time and date and the date field
separator character.
3.7.3.1.1. Time Format

Possible selections are:
12:MM 12-hour clock with hour and minutes displayed

12:MM:SS 12-hour clock with hour, minutes, and seconds displayed
24:MM 24-hour clock with hour and minutes displayed
24:MM:SS [default] 24-hour clock with hour, minutes, and seconds displayed
3.7.3.1.2. Date Format

Possible selections are:

DD MM YY Two-digit day, month, year
DD MMM YYYY [default] Two-digit day, three-character month, four-digit year
MM DD YY Two-digit month, day, year
MMM DD YYYY Three-character month, two-digit day, four-digit year
YY MM DD Two-digit year, month, day
YYYY MMM DD Four-digit year, three-character month, two-digit day
3.7.3.1.3. Date Field Separator

Possible choices include:
None, / (slash) [default], - (dash), . (period), (space)
3.7.3.2. Set Time & Date
Enter the hour, minutes, day, month, and year on this setup screen’s text fields and selection boxes.
The terminal automatically adjusts the date for a leap year, and a battery backup maintains the time
and date settings in the event of a power outage.
When needed, the time must be manually adjusted for daylight savings time. The IND570 does not
make this adjustment automatically.
3.7.3.2.1. Hour
Use the numeric keypad to enter the hour in the Hour field text box. If the time format is set to 12:MM
or 12:MM:SS on the Format Time & Date setup, AM [default] or PM must be selected.
3.7.3.2.2. Minutes
Use the numeric keypad to enter the minutes in the Minutes field text box.
3.7.3.2.3. Day
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day in the Day field text box.
3.7.3.2.4. Month
Use the Month selection box to select the month.
3.7.3.2.5. Year
Use the numeric keypad to enter the year in the Year field text box.
3.7.3.3. Language
Use the Language setup screen to specify the language, gross weight legend and decimal/comma
character for the terminal.
3.7.3.3.1. Display Messages

Use the Display Messages selection box to select the language for messages that display on the
terminal. Choices are:
English [default], French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Chinese, Custom

3.7.3.3.2. Keypad Selection
Use the Keypad Selection box to select the language for the keypad alpha characters that are
available on the terminal. Choices are:
Configuration
English [default], Global, Russian
If Russian is selected, Cyrillic characters will be available via the softkeys. The global characters will
continue to be available via the numeric keys.
3.7.3.3.3. External Keyboard

Use this parameter to select the language for the external USB keyboard if one will be used. The
language choices are:
English [default], French, German, Italian, Spanish
3.7.3.3.4. Comma/Decimal
Use this parameter to indicate if a comma or decimal point will be used for weight values in demand
data outputs. Choices are:
Comma, Decimal point [default]
3.7.3.3.5. Gross Legend

This parameter determines what character or characters will be shown on the display to indicate a
gross weight field. Typical characters are "G" for gross [default] or "B" for bruto/brutto. A maximum of
three characters can be entered.
3.7.4. Transaction Counter

Use the Transaction Counter setup screens to configure transaction counter operations.
The transaction counter is a seven-digit register that tracks the total transactions that are completed
on the terminal with a demand print output. When the value reaches 1,500,000, the next transaction
causes a roll-over to 0000001. Access to this feature is granted through the setup menu or the
Transaction Counter softkey which can be added to the home page (refer to section 3.7.6).
Use the Transaction Counter setup screen to configure transaction counter operations.
Use the Transaction Counter selection box to enable or disable the transaction counter. Choices are:
3.7.4.2. Counter Reset
This step is shown only if the Transaction Counter has been enabled. Use the Counter Reset selection
box to permit manual reset of the counter or manual entry of a starting number. Choices are:

3.7.4.3. Next Transaction
The value for the counter for the next transaction displays in the Next Transaction field. If Counter
Reset is enabled, a value between 1 and 1,500,000 can be manually entered here. The counter can
also be reset to 0000001 by pressing the RESET softkey on this page or from the home page
through the Transaction Counter.
3.7.5. Users
Security access to the IND570 is divided into four user groups: Operator, Supervisor, Maintenance
and Administrator. By default, the IND570 terminal is pre-configured with two usernames: “admin”
and “anonymous”. The two default usernames cannot be deleted, but passwords may be entered for
them.
By default, neither of these usernames has a password. Without passwords, security is disabled and
there are no security challenges when attempting to make changes to configuration or access
functions through softkeys. Without a password on the default “admin” account, all features are
accessible to every user.
As soon as a password is entered on the default “admin” username, user security is enabled in the
terminal and a login will be required before changes can be made in setup and before certain softkey
functions can be executed. Up to a maximum of 20 users can be stored in the terminal. A minimum
of one and a maximum of 12 characters can be entered for both the Username and the Password.
Refer to the User Security section of Chapter 2, Operation and Appendix A, Default Settings , for
additional information on user security.
3.7.5.1. To Enter a New Username and Password
1. Press the NEW softkey to access the User Edit screen.

2. Enter the desired username in the Username field.
3. Use the Access selection box to assign the appropriate access level to the user. The following
access levels are available:
Administrator An Administrator level has access to all setup parameters. Turning the
"Legal for Trade" switch (SW1-1) ON will reduce all Administrator level
users to Maintenance level.
Maintenance Next lower level of access.
Supervisor Next lower level of access.
Operator Lowest level of access.
4. Enter the desired password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
5. Press the OK softkey to accept the username and password as entered.
6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without saving the username and password.
Passwords are case-sensitive.
All numbers and all characters available in the alphanumeric keys are valid for use in passwords.
Be sure to store a record of user passwords in a safe place. Without a correct password for an
administrator level account, full access to the setup menu will not be possible.

3.7.5.2. To Modify and/or Enter A Password for a Username
1. Move focus to the username to be edited.

2. Press the EDIT softkey to access the User Edit screen.
Configuration
3. Press the DOWN navigation key to view the second screen, which displays the Password and
Confirm Password fields.
5. Press the OK softkey to accept the password as entered.
6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without saving the password.
3.7.5.3. To Delete a User or Clear All Users
1. Press the DELETE softkey to delete a username from the table on the Users screen.
Usernames "admin" and "anonymous" cannot be deleted.
2. To restore the factory default setting (by deleting all users except the “Admin” and “Anonymous”
users and restoring the passwords to null), press the CLEAR softkey and then to confirm
the action.
3.7.6. Softkeys
Add or rearrange the display of softkeys on the main weighing screen by configuring parameters on
the softkey setup screen.
Adding a softkey to the home pages of the terminal does not automatically enable the softkey
function. Most functions associated with softkeys must also be enabled in setup. For instance, adding
the UNITS SWITCHING softkey does not automatically enable units switching – a second or third
unit must also be enabled in the Scale branch of setup. If a softkey has been added in setup but does
not appear on the home page, check that the setup parameters for that function have been enabled.
If an entire row of softkeys is blank, then that row will not be made available at the home screen.
For example, if softkey positions 1–5 have softkeys programmed and positions 11–15 have
softkeys programmed but softkey positions 6–10 are blank, the second row of softkeys will not
be shown from the home screen.
The following softkeys are available for assignment to the home page:
For a comprehensive list of all available softkey icons with descriptions, refer to Chapter 2,
Operation.
None Recall Info* Task 3**

Alibi Repeat Print Task List**
Backlight Adjustment Reports Time & Date
Calibration Test Setup* Totalization
Comparators SmartTrac Transaction Counter
GWP Test Tare Table Trigger 1
ID1 Target Trigger 2

ID2 Target Control Trigger 3
ID3 Target Start Unit Switching
ID4 Target Table USB
MinWeigh Task 1** x10 Display
PWCL Performance Log*** Task 2**
* Cannot be removed from home screen.

** Only available when TaskExpert™ is installed.
*** Only available in POWERCELL versions.
3.7.6.1. Editing Softkeys
When the softkeys setup screen opens, focus is on the softkey position number “1” located above the
first icon (see Figure 3-17).
Softkey position
with focus
Softkey
assignment
Figure 3-17: Softkeys Setup Screen
The focus can be moved by pressing the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT navigation keys. As a different
softkey position gains the focus, its assignment is shown in text toward the bottom of the screen.
For example, in Figure 3-17 focus in on softkey position number 1, which is assigned the UNIT
SWITCHING softkey . Press the RIGHT navigation key twice to move focus to softkey position 3.
The assignment value changes to the REPORTS softkey .
Two softkeys, INFORMATION RECALL and SETUP , must always be present. As a default, they
are located together in positions 9 and 10. These keys can be moved by first creating a copy of the
softkey in a new position and then deleting the softkey from the original position. The original
assignment cannot be removed until the new position has been created.
Press the UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT navigation keys to navigate among the softkey position
numbers until the required softkey number is in focus. Softkeys can be added, removed, and
positioned using the softkeys:
Changes the softkey in the selected position to another softkey or to none, which leaves
Edit the softkey position blank. Editing a blank position does not move the position of
following softkeys.
Inserts a softkey into a selected position. All other softkeys located at or after that
New
position increase position number by one.

Deletes a softkey in a selected position. All other softkeys located at or after that
Delete
position decrease position number by one.
Clears all softkey assignments except INFORMATION RECALL and SETUP

Clear
softkeys. These will be shown in positions 1 and 2 respectively.
Configuration
3.7.6.1.1. Inserting Softkeys

When a softkey is inserted, all softkeys in positions after the selection insertion point will be
shifted one space to the right.
To Insert a Softkey
1. Use the navigation keys to move the focus to the position number where the softkey is to be
inserted.
2. Press the INSERT softkey . The Softkey Edit screen displays. The softkey position selected is
shown on the screen along with Assignment selection box.
3. Press the ENTER key to select the assignment selection box.
4. Use the UP or DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the selections until focus is on the desired
assignment.
5. Press the ENTER key to select the assignment. If None is selected for the assignment, the softkey
assignment is reserved as a blank space.
If all 15 softkey positions are full and a new softkey is added, all positions after the inserted
position will move one position to the right and the softkey in position 15 will be lost. The only
exception to this is if the RECALL or SETUP softkeys are in position 15, the softkey immediately
before these special softkeys will be lost.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Softkeys Setup Screen. The new softkey will display on
the Softkey setup screen in the position where it was inserted and all following softkeys will be
moved one position to the right.
3.7.6.1.2. Editing Softkeys
The edit function allows one softkey assignment to be replaced with another. Use this function to
replace a blank assignment with another softkey assignment, without moving any other softkey
positions.
To Edit a Softkey
1. Use the navigation keys to move the focus to the position number of the softkey to be edited.
2. Press the EDIT softkey . The Softkey Edit screen (Figure 3-18) displays. The softkey position
number selected for editing is shown on the screen, together with the softkey’s current assignment
– or None, if no softkey is assigned.

Softkey position
selected for editing
Current softkey
assignment
Figure 3-18: Softkey Edit Screen
3. Press the ENTER key to select the assignment selection box.

4. Use the UP or DOWN navigation keys to scroll through the selections until focus is on the desired
assignment.
5. Press the ENTER key to select the assignment. If None is selected for the assignment, the softkey
assignment is reserved as a blank space.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Softkeys Setup Screen.
There is no limit on the number of positions that can have the same softkey assignment. For
example, a softkey can be assigned to a position in each of the three available rows, so that it is
always visible and available for use.
3.7.6.1.3. Deleting Softkeys

When a softkey assignment is deleted, all softkeys to the right of the deleted key will move one
position to their left.
To Delete a Softkey
1. Use the navigation keys to move the focus to the position number of the softkey to be deleted.
2. Press the DELETE softkey . The softkey will disappear from the Softkey setup screen, and all
following softkeys will be moved one position to the left.
Remember that there must always be one instance each of the RECALL and SETUP softkeys. The
original softkey cannot be deleted until a new position has been created.
3.7.6.1.4. Clearing All Softkeys
To clear all softkey assignments except INFORMATION RECALL and SETUP , press the CLEAR
softkey . A screen will display requesting confirmation of the action. Press the OK softkey to
continue, or the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Softkeys setup screen.
3.7.6.2. Customizing Softkeys
All the softkeys available for assignment to the home screen can be replaced with customized bitmap
images.
The bitmaps must measure no more than 48 pixels wide by 24 pixels high. Each graphic must have
a white border at least one pixel wide at left, right and top – see Figure 3-19.
Note: Bitmap files must be black and white in order to display correctly on the terminal screen.

Configuration
Figure 3-19: Softkey Graphic Dimensions
Graphics may be uploaded to the Flash2:\ folder of the IND570 terminal using an ftp connection via
Ethernet, or through a serial port. Refer to Appendix D, Communications, for details on the file transfer
procedure.
New bitmap graphics must have the same filename as the graphic they replace. Table 3-8 lists the
softkey graphics that can be replaced with customized images.
Table 3-8: Bitmap Graphic Filenames
Softkey Default Image Graphic File Name

Alibi alibi.bmp
Backlight Adjustment contrast.bmp
Calibration Test cal_test.bmp
Comparators comprtr.bmp
GWP GWP.bmp
ID1 ID1.bmp
ID2 ID2.bmp
ID3 ID3.bmp
ID4 ID4.bmp
MinWeigh minweigh.bmp
Recall Info recall.bmp
Repeat Print rpt_prnt.bmp
Reports reports.bmp
Setup setup.bmp
SmartTrac sm_trac.bmp
Tare Table tare_mem.bmp
Target target.bmp
Target Control control.bmp

Softkey Default Image Graphic File Name
Target Start start.bmp
Target Table targ_mem.bmp
Task List tasklist.bmp
Task 1, Task 2, Task 3 task1.bmp, task2.bmp, task3.bmp

Trigger 1 trigger1.bmp
Time & Date timedate.bmp
Totals Recall tot_mem.bmp
Transaction Counter reset.bmp
Unit Switching select.bmp

USB usb.bmp
X10 Display x10.bmp
3.7.7. Reset
The Reset setup screen resets setup values to factory default settings for the Terminal branch of setup.
reads “Reset Successful” displays. If the reset was not successful, an error message that reads “Reset

3.8. Communication
Configuration of the following functions is managed in the Communication
Configuration
block of setup.
3.8.1. Access/Security
By default, access to the IND570 through the Ethernet and USB ports is
limited. Selections made in the Access/Security parameters determine the
level of access to files and data that will be allowed.
3.8.1.1. Ethernet
Access to the terminal Shared Data Server, Web Server and FTP function are
selected at this branch of setup.
3.8.1.1.1. Shared Data Server

This setting determines access to the Shared Data Server over an Ethernet
connection. Choices are:
Read/Write [default], Read Only, Disabled
3.8.1.1.2. Web Server

Web Server access must be set equal with or below the access level selected for the Shared Data
Server. Choices are:
Disabled [default], Read/Write, Read Only
3.8.1.1.3. FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

Choices are:
Disabled, Read/Write [default], Read Only
3.8.1.2. USB
Connected USB device function and access to the USB file transfer function are selected here. USB
devices will not be recognized when connected until the following functions are enabled.
WARNING
3.8.1.2.1. Keyboard and Scanner

Choices are:
3.8.1.2.2. Memory Stick

Choices are:

Write Only [default], Disabled, Read/Write
3.8.2. Templates
The input template function allows the IND570 to receive a string input (such as from a bar code
scanner) and use it as data entry for a TaskExpert application, an ID data collection field, preset Tare
weight, or selection of a stored Tare ID or Target ID. When the Fill-570 Application Software is
installed, the input template can also be used for selection of the target for Weigh-In or Weigh-out.
The IND570 terminal supports ten output templates (1,000 bytes in size) that can be used to define
the format of on demand or continuous data outputs.
The template Strings setup supports creation and storage of character strings that are frequently used
in templates. Creating and storing frequently used character strings decreases the time it takes to
create output templates through the terminal HMI.
3.8.3. Input
Use the Input Template to strip unneeded characters from an incoming string of data and identify only
the specific data needed for a function. Input template setup parameters include the following.
3.8.3.1.1. Preamble Length

Defines how many characters are skipped at the beginning of an input string before the desired data
is identified. Values from 0 to 255 can be entered.
3.8.3.1.2. Data Length
Defines the length of the data to be extracted from the incoming string. All characters beginning after
the preamble through the data length selection are used as the input. Values from 1 to 40 are
accepted.
3.8.3.1.3. Postamble Length
Defines the number of characters (before but not including the termination character) that will be
stripped off the end of the incoming data string. When using an input that is always the same fixed
length, this field remains blank. Values from 0 to 255 are accepted.
All characters after the preamble length to the termination character minus the postamble length are
used as the input data string.
3.8.3.1.4. Termination Character
Used to signal the end of the string input. The termination character can be any ASCII control
character. Selections for Termination Character include:
None EOT BS FF DLE DC4 CAN FS
SOH ENQ HT CR [default] DC1 NAK EM GS
STX ACK LF SO DC2 SYN SUB RS
ETX BEL VT SI DC3 ETB ESC US

If None is selected, the entry is terminated after a three-second timeout. There is also a three-
second timeout feature that tracks the amount of time between incoming characters. Even if a
terminal character is selected, if three seconds elapses between character receipt, the string is
considered terminated.
Configuration
3.8.3.1.5. Assignment
This parameter determines how the input data should be used. Choices are:
Application Data is available in Shared Data for use by a custom TaskExpert program
ID Response 1 Input populates the first response to the ID1 sequence

Data that would normally be entered using the alphanumeric keypad may be
Keypad scanned in with this setting
Tare [default] Enters data as a preset tare value
Tare ID Uses incoming value as an ID lookup in the tare table
Target ID Uses incoming value as an ID lookup in the target table
Target Weigh-in Uses incoming value as an ID lookup in the target table and assigns it as the Active
Weigh-in target (Fill-570 feature only)
Target Weigh-out Uses incoming value as an ID lookup in the target table and assigns it as the Active
Weigh-out target (Fill-570 feature only)
3.8.3.2. Output
The Output Template setup screen enables configuration of the output data formats and the location of
the "Duplicate" text for the Repeat Print function.
3.8.3.2.1. Template
Select the template number to be viewed, modified, copied or cleared in the selection box. Choices
include:
Template 1 [default] to Template 10
3.8.3.2.2. Repeat Print Field

To add the “DUPLICATE” designation to a repeat print of an output template. Choices are:
Disabled The text "DUPLICATE" will not be added to a repeat print
Footer The text "DUPLICATE" is added as a new last line in the template format for a repeat print
Header The text "DUPLICATE" is added as a new first line in the template format for a repeat print
3.8.3.2.3. Copy a Template:

1. To copy one template as the beginning point for another template, press the COPY softkey .
2. A new screen is shown to select the template to be copied from and the template to be copied to.
3. Make the appropriate choices in the selection boxes then press the OK softkey to perform
the copy.
4. Pressing the ESCAPE softkey will exit without making a copy.
3.8.3.2.4. Clear a Template:
1. Select the template to be cleared in the Template selection box.

2. Press the CLEAR softkey to clear all elements from the selected template.
3. A warning screen displays as a precaution. Press the OK softkey to clear or press the
ESCAPE softkey to exit without making any changes.
3.8.3.2.5. View, Edit, or Print a Template
Press the VIEW TABLE softkey to access the selected template’s view screen, which lists each
element configured for the template and includes action softkeys.
Each element is defined by the data type, actual data, justification and length. Elements may be
edited, added (inserted), or deleted individually. A leading zero fill function is available for certain
fields.
Editing
1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select an entry to edit.

2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for the record where edits can be made. The
element number cannot be edited.
3. Select the element type from the Type selection box. Four element types are available:
CR/LF Combination carriage return and line feed used to terminate a line.
SDName Name of a Shared Data Variable from the terminal that includes the data for
the template
Special Character Insert a control character into the template.
String A string of characters to print
4. Press ENTER to confirm the element type selection. Depending on which type is selected,
additional configuration options will appear.
5. Press the OK softkey to return to the template setup screen when editing of the element is
complete.
6. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the template setup screen without saving the element
edits.
3.8.3.2.6. Template Editing Options
Table 3-9 lists the editable fields that appear for each Element Type and Format selection. Fields that
are not available are indicated with a dash (–).
Table 3-9: Template Element Editing Options
Element Type Data Repeat Count Format Length Leading Zero Fill
CR/LF − Blank** − − −
Default − −
Blank*
SDNAME (Refer to Table − Centered, Left Blank** −
3-10)
Right Blank** Enabled/Disabled
Special Character ASCII character list − − − −
String Blank* Blank** Default − −

Element Type Data Repeat Count Format Length Leading Zero Fill
Center, Left, Right Blank** −
* Alphanumeric entry field
Configuration
** Numeric entry field
Repeat Count
A numeric value that sets the number of times the Data will repeat. For example, if the string data
entered is an asterisk (*), a repeat count value of 20 would produce a row of 20 asterisks:
********************.
Format & Length
The Format & Length options are Default, Centered, Left, and Right. These describe the justification of
the data within the length of the field.
The Default value is fixed, and Length cannot be defined here.
For SD name and String data, the Centered, Left and Right formats are accompanied by a Length
field. After choosing the format, focus moves to the Length entry box. This value determines how long
the element will be – the data will be positioned within a string of the length entered. Refer to the
Notes on Format & Length, below.
Leading Zero Fill
In the case of Right-formatted SDName data, Leading Zero fill may be enabled or disabled. Normally,
Leading Zero Fill will be disabled, which means spaces will be used to fill in leading non-significant
data. If enabled, Leading Zero Fill will fill in any leading spaces of the data with zeroes. The following
examples of 4 characters in output data defined as 8 characters long show the use of Leading Zero
Fill:
Leading Zero Fill disabled:

Leading Zero Fill enabled:
Notes on Format & Length
If data for an element includes more characters than the value entered for Length, the output data will
be cut off. For example, if the number of characters entered under format on the Output Template Edit
Screen is six, and data for a string that contains eight characters is entered, only six of the characters
from the data string will print. If data for a string that contains four characters is entered, all of the
characters from the data string will print.
The characters and alignment of the printed data are defined by the selected format:
Example 8-character string of ABCDEFGH in a 6-character element:
Center: Left: Right:
B C D E F G A B C D E F C D E F G H

Prints the middle six Prints the first six Prints the last six
characters from an eight- characters from an eight- characters from an eight-
character string – drops character string – drops character string – drops the
first and last characters. the last two characters. first two characters.
Example 4-character string of ABCD in a 6-character element:
A B C D A B C D A B C D
Space Space Spaces Spaces
Prints all four characters Prints all four characters Prints all four characters
from a four-character string from a four-character from a four-character string
in a centered position, string in a left-justified in a right-justified position,
leaving a space at the position, leaving two leaving two spaces at the
beginning and a space at spaces at the end. beginning.
the end.
In Table 3-10, where dashes appear in the SDName (e.g. sd--08), this means that there are more
than one instance of the share data variable. The instance number appears in place of the dashes
(e.g. sd0308, for the third comparator’s target comparison operator). For a full list of Shared Data
fields, please refer to the IND570 Terminal Shared Data Reference (document # 64058660),
available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.
Table 3-10: Example Shared Data Names for Use in Templates
IND570 Data Field SDName Length

(A/N = alphanumeric)
Terminal
Scale ID cs0103 20 A/N
Base Serial Number ce0138 13 A/N
Terminal Serial Number xs0105 13 A/N
Terminal ID#1 xs0106 20 A/N
Current Date xd0103 11 A/N
Current Time xd0104 11 A/N
Transaction Counter Value xp0101 9 A/N
Grand Total Value tz0101 12 A/N
Grand Total Count tz0102 9 A/N
Subtotal Value tz0103 12 A/N
Subtotal Count tz0104 9 A/N
ID1 Prompts 1-30 pr0131-pr0160 30 A/N
ID1 Prompt Responses 1-30 pa0101-pa0130 51 A/N


Configuration

Message 01, 02, etc. aw0101, 0102,… 100 A/N
Templates 1 - 10 *
pt0101− pt0110 As programmed
Template Strings 1–20 pt0111 − pt0130 51 A/N
Targets
Target Description sp0101 20 A/N
Target Value sp0105 12 A/N
Target Units sp0120 3 A/N
Fine Feed sp0110 12 A/N
Spill Value sp0109 12 A/N
+ Tolerance Value (weight) sp0111 12 A/N
− Tolerance Value (weight) sp0112 12 A/N
+ Tolerance Value (%) sp0114 12 A/N
− Tolerance Value (%) sp0115 12 A/N
Comparator names 1-5 sd--01 21 A/N
Comparator target coincidence
sd--05 12 A/N
values 1 – 5
Comparator target comparison
sd--08 5 A/N
operators 1-5
Comparator second weight range
sd--09 12 A/N
values 1-5
Comparator second weight range
sd--10 5 A/N
comparison operators 1-5
Weights
Scale Mode (Gross/Net) ws0101 1 A/N (G or N)
Tare Source Description ws0109 2 A/N “T<space>”, or “PT”
Displayed Tare Wt. ws0110 12 A/N
Displayed Gross Wt. wt0101 12 A/N
Displayed Net Wt. wt0102 12 A/N
Displayed Wt. Units wt0103 3 A/N
3 Weight Unit Gross Weight
rd
wt0104 13 A/N
3 Weight Unit Net Weight
rd
wt0105 13 A/N
3rd Units wt0106 3 A/N
Displayed Rate wt0108 13 A/N
Rate Time Units cs0107 1 A/N

Rate Weight Units cs0108 1 A/N

Custom Unit Name cs0112 12 A/N
Custom Unit Conversion Factor cs0113 12 A/N
Calculated Weight** ws0132 1 A/N
* Using a template field code within another template will insert the entire template into the new template.
** Used in multi-interval scales to indicate that the gross weight is calculated, and mathematically
incorrect. In a multi-interval scale, the resolution of increments differs for each interval – for example, 0
– 5 kg, 0.0005, >5 kg, 0.001; thus, the sum of the tare and net weights will not precisely equal the
gross weight. The ws0132 variable should be added to the template, and appears as a letter “C” after
the weight unit – e.g. “5.304 kg C”.
Printing Multiple Weight Units
Note that if a third weight unit is defined, it can be named in a template so that it appears in the
output data together with the displayed unit. However, if the third unit is currently displayed on the
terminal, it will appear twice in the data output. Therefore, if the output is to include both primary and
3rd weight units, ensure that the primary unit data is displayed when the data output is initiated.
Secondary Units are not available for multiple unit printing.
Inserting
Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a location in the list of elements to insert a new
template element. Press the NEW softkey to open the setup screen to create a new record.
Configure the parameters as described under Editing. All following elements are moved down one
position.
Deleting
Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select an element to delete. Press the DELETE softkey
to delete the element.
Test Printing
Press the TEST PRINT softkey to perform a test print of the template being configured.
3.8.3.2.7. Strings
The Template Strings setup screen defines strings of characters that are frequently used in output
template messages. Template strings can be viewed, edited, created, deleted, or printed.
Viewing Template Strings
1. Use the Search Field selection box to select ID or String and enter information in the Data field to
limit the search, or do not enter any search limits to view all template strings.
2. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The String Search View screen displays the search results.
Only records with non-null values display. Records are ordered by ID, with the lowest ID number
shown first.

3. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll up and down the screen in order to view all
strings listed.
Editing
Configuration
Note that not all keyboard characters are available when entering information using the IND570
keypad. However, characters such as the “|” (pipe) can be included in a template created using the
InSite™ CSL software. They will be recognized by the IND570 when the template is downloaded, will
display correctly, and will be included in the template when it is printed.
1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) the string record to be edited.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the record for editing. The edit screen will be shown with focus
on the “Text” label. This is the only editable field on the screen. The ID number cannot be
changed.
3. Press ENTER to access the text field.
4. Use the alphanumeric keypad to edit the string. A string can be a maximum of 50 characters.
5. Press ENTER when complete.
6. Press the OK softkey to accept the edited record and return to the String Search View screen.
7. Press the ESC softkey to return to the String Search View screen without accepting the
changes to the string.
Creating
1. Press the NEW softkey to create a new record. An edit screen will be shown with “ID” and
“Text” labels.
2. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select the field to enter.
3. Press ENTER to access the field. When entering the ID field, the value shown is the first unused
ID.
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter an ID number from 1 to 20.
5. Press ENTER when complete. If the ID entered already exists, an error display will be shown. The
error must be acknowledged and a new ID entered.
6. If the TEXT field is entered, use the alphanumeric keypad to edit the text string.
7. Press ENTER when complete.
8. Press the OK softkey to accept the new record and return to the String Search View screen.
9. Press the ESC softkey to return to the String Search View screen without accepting the new
record.
Deleting
Press the DELETE softkey to delete a template string from the list.
Printing

11. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the String Search Screen. Press the EXIT softkey again
to return to the menu tree.
3.8.4. Reports
The reports setup screens enable configuration of the structure of tare and target table reports that are
generated by the IND570 terminal. When the Fill-570 is installed in the terminal, the Formula Table
report structure can also be configured.
3.8.4.1. Format
Format
Use the selection box for the Format field to select the width of all the Tare and Target table reports.
The choices are:
Narrow (40) [default] 40 character-wide reports

Wide (80) 80 character-wide reports
Header
The Header field specifies the number of blank lines (CR/LF) to be placed at the start of each report.
Values from 0 to 99 are accepted with 2 as the default.
3.8.4.1.1. Title
The Title selection box enables a default title line to be printed at the top of the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.1.2. Record Separator

A repeated character may be selected as a separator between printed records in the report. This step
selects the character to be used. The character choices in the selection box are:
None [default], * (asterisks), - (dashes), = (equals), CR/FL (blank line)
For example, if * (asterisks) is selected, the resulting line separator will appear as follows:
*************************************************************************
3.8.4.1.3. Footer
The Footer field specifies the number of blank lines (CR/LF) to be placed at the end of each report.
Values from 1 to 99 are accepted with a default value of 5.
3.8.4.2. Tare Table
Use this setup screen to select which fields in the Tare Table will print when a Tare Table Report is
printed. More details are provided in the Reports section of Appendix C, Communications. The ID field
is always printed; it cannot be disabled.
3.8.4.2.1. Tare
Selects if the tare value will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:

Selects if the description will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:

Configuration
3.8.4.2.3. n
Selects if the totalization counter will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.2.4. Total
Selects if the total for each tare ID will be printed in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.3. Target Table
Use this setup screen to select which fields in the Target Table will print when a Target Table Report is
printed. More details are provided in the Reports section of Appendix C, Communications. The ID field
is always printed; it cannot be disabled. Fields that display and can be enabled or disabled vary
depending on how the Target Table is configured (refer to section 3.6.1.4 , Application | Memory |
Target Table).
If no Target mode is selected at Application > Memory > Target Table, the Target Table report
setup cannot be accessed.
Selects if the description will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.3.2. Target
Selects if the target value will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.3.3. +/- Tolerances

Selects if the tolerance values will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.3.4. Spill
Selects if the spill value will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:
3.8.4.3.5. Fine Feed

Selects if the fine feed value will be printed or not in the report. Choices are:

3.8.5. Connections
The connections setup screen shows the physical port connections that have been programmed for
the terminal. This includes the standard USB and COM1serial port, the optional COM2 and COM3
serial ports, the COM4 serial port (POWERCELL versions only), the optional WiFi port, and the
optional Ethernet port which supports multiple connections including the Eprint and Print Client ports.
The optional ports are only available if the required option board has been installed. The USB port is a
selectable output port which allows files to be written to an attached USB memory device.
The Connections screen lists what type of communication will occur over each programmed port. If
no connections are programmed, no data transfer will be available on the COM ports, USB port or
Ethernet ports.
3.8.5.1. Editing and Creating Connection Assignments
1. Press the NEW softkey to create a new connection assignment or press the UP and DOWN
navigation keys to select (highlight) a connection assignment in the list to be edited and press
the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for editing.
2. Parameters configured in the connections screen include the port and the type of input or output
assignment. Depending upon these selections the remaining fields will vary but could include the
trigger, the template to be sent, and if checksum will be sent or not.
3. Use the selection boxes for each field to select the port, associated assignment, and desired
settings for the connection. Available selections are indicated in Table 3-11, organized by Port
and Assignment. Specific details of the different assignments can be found in Appendix C,
Communications.
Table 3-11: Available Parameters, by Port and Assignment
Port Assignment Trigger Template Checksum # of Nodes
ASCII Input, CTPZ Input,
Reports, SICS, Shared Data
Server, Remote Display
COM1
Continuous Extended, Disabled,
COM2 Continuous Output Enabled
COM3
Continuous Template Template 1-10
COM4
Demand Output, Totals Report Scale, Trigger 1…3 Template 1-10
Remote Discrete I/O 0, 1, 2, 3

Continuous Output Enabled
Ethernet 1
Reports
Ethernet 2
Demand Output Scale, Trigger 1…3 Template 1-10
Ethernet 3
Continuous Extended Disabled,
EPrint
CTPZ Input, Remote Display,
Reports, SICS

Port Assignment Trigger Template Checksum # of Nodes
Print Client
Configuration
CTPZ, Reports
ASCII Input, Reports

USB
Demand Output Scale, Trigger 1…3 Template 1-10

WiFi
Remote Display, SICS
Connection options notes
WARNING
Not all choices are available for all connection assignments. Only valid choices are shown in the
selection boxes.
The Shared Data Server assignment is only available on COM1. Serial connection to the Shared
Data Server is only possible on COM1. This assignment allows a user to connect to the Shared
Data Server over COM1 without turning SW2-1 to the “on” position.
The Trigger field displays only when the assignment selection is Demand Output. The Trigger 1,
2, and 3 selections for Trigger enable connection of a separate softkey, discrete input or a PLC
command to trigger the output of the selected template. The discrete selection must be
programmed separately (refer to section 3.6.3, Discrete I/O, for additional details on
programming discrete inputs, and to the IND570 PLC Interface Manual for details on triggering
commands via supported PLC protocols).
The Template field displays only when the assignment selection is Demand Output, Continuous
Template, or Totals Report. Only one template can be assigned to each connection.
The default template for the Totals Report is Template 5.
The Checksum field is available for continuous outputs only.
The SICS selection provides Level 0 and Level 1 interface commands. Refer to Appendix C,
Communications for details on the SICS protocol.
If usage conflicts occur, an alarm message displays.
EPrint offers a method to access the demand or continuous output data directly through the
Ethernet port. Shared Data Server login and commands are not required to register for the data.
The EPrint port is accessible only through the secondary port of the Ethernet interface, which can
be configured in setup at Communication > Network > Port.

The # of Nodes refers to the number of ARM100 Remote I/O modules that will be connected in
series to the IND570.
If the WiFi option is installed and is not assigned, access to the shared data server is enabled
through the selected WiFi port number. If the WiFi option is assigned (either to Remote Display or
SICS), the shared data server will not be available.
4. Press the OK softkey to accept the connection parameters and return to the Connections setup
screen when editing or adding the connection assignment is complete.
5. Press the ESCAPE softkey to discard the connection parameters and return to the
Connections setup screen without saving the connection assignment edits or additions.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree.
3.8.5.2. Deleting a Connection:
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to highlight a stored connection. Press the DELETE softkey
to delete a connection assignment from the Connections list.
3.8.5.3. Clearing All Connections:
To clear all connection assignments in the Connections list, press the CLEAR softkey then press
OK to confirm the action.
3.8.6. Serial
Serial communication setup screens provide access to the communication parameters for the serial
ports COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4.
The COM2 and COM3 ports are only shown if the COM2/COM3 or COM2/COM3/DIO option board has
been installed.
The COM4 port is only present in the POWERCELL versions.
If “Remote Discrete I/O” is selected as the port assignment at Communication > Connections, the
port parameters are automatically preset and cannot be changed.
3.8.6.1. COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4
Use the COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 setup screens to configure the parameters for serial ports.
3.8.6.1.1. Baud
Use the Baud selection box to set the baud rate for the serial port. Options are:
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 [default], 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
3.8.6.1.2. Data Bits

Use the Data Bits selection box to set the number of data bits. Choices are:
7, 8 [default]
3.8.6.1.3. Parity
Use the Parity selection box to set the parity. Choices include:

None [default], Odd, Even
3.8.6.1.4. Flow Control

Use the Flow Control selection box to set the handshaking mode. Selection are:
Configuration
None [default], XON-XOFF (software handshaking)
After an XOFF command is received on a serial port configured for XON/XOFF handshaking, all
data remaining in the port’s buffer will still be sent. All port buffers contain 64 bytes of data.
3.8.6.1.5. Interface
Use the Interface selection box to select the serial port interface. Selections include:
COM1 RS-232 [default], RS-422, RS-485

COM2 RS-232 (cannot be changed)
COM3 RS-232 [default], RS-422, RS-485
COM4 RS-232 (cannot be changed)
3.8.7. Network
The network branch appears only if either the Ethernet TCP/IP option or the WiFi option is installed.
Programming selections in this branch will differ depending on which option is installed. Note that if
both options are installed, the TCP/IP Ethernet option is supported and the WiFi module will be
disabled.
Network setup screens include Ethernet, DNS Server, Proxy Server, Secondary Port, WiFi Module, WiFi
Port, FTP, Print Client and Email Alert.
Figure 3-20: Ethernet TCP/IP Menu Structure (left) and WiFi Menu Structure (right)
3.8.7.1. Ethernet
Ethernet is available for TCP/IP transfer of data, shared data server access, connection via the EPrint
port, email alerts, FTP, and saving and restoring configurations with InSite SL.
3.8.7.1.1. MAC Address

The Medium Access Control (MAC) Address cannot be edited; it is shown for information only.

3.8.7.1.2. DHCP Client
If DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Client is enabled, the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address fields are assigned automatically by the network. They become read-only in the
setup screens. If Disabled, the IP address must manually be assigned in the following fields. Choices
are:
3.8.7.1.3. IP Address
Enter the IP address (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each group of
digits has been entered, press ENTER to proceed to the next group. The default value for the IP is
192.68.0.1.
3.8.7.1.4. Subnet Mask

Enter the subnet mask (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each group
of digits has been entered, press ENTER to proceed to the next group. The default value for the subnet
mask is 255.255.255.0.
3.8.7.1.5. Gateway Address

Enter the gateway address (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each
group of digits has been entered, press ENTER to proceed to the next group. The default value for the
gateway is blank.
After entries are complete, press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree
3.8.7.2. DNS Server
Domain Name Servers (DNS) are the internet's equivalent of a phone book. They maintain a directory
of domain names and translate them to Internet Protocol (IP) addresses. This is necessary because,
although domain names are easy for people to remember, machines use IP addresses to access the
internet.
3.8.7.2.1. Automatic DNS Address

Allows the network within which an IND570 is connected to automatically assign a DNS server for
use by the terminal. Choices are:
Enabled [default], Disabled
If enabled is selected, the remaining fields display the address but cannot be edited. When disabled,
the DNS server addresses can be manually programmed.
3.8.7.2.2. Preferred DNS server, Alternate DNS server

Enter the DNS Server address (or view if Automatic DNS Addressing is enabled) for the IND570
terminal. After each group of digits has been entered, press ENTER to proceed to the next group.
3.8.7.3. WiFi Module
The WiFi Module setup pages are shown below.

Configuration
Figure 3-21: WiFi Module Setup, Page 1 of 3
If Russian or Chinese characters are entered in the SSID field, they will not be displayed
accurately because this field uses UTF8 code set.
Softkey 3 triggers a scan for wireless access points (WAPs).
Figure 3-22: WiFi Scan Screen
Press START to begin the scanning process. A confirmation screen will display “Scanning…” for a
few seconds.
When the scan is complete, the 10 access points with the strongest signal strengths are listed,
strongest first, together with the channel each uses and its signal strength (RSSI).
Figure 3-23: WiFI Scan Results
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move focus to any of the WAPs shown. Press ESCAPE
to exit the screen without selecting an SSID and return to the WiFi Module screen. Press OK
to enter the selected WAP into the SSID field and return to the WiFi Module screen.
Press the DOWN arrow to move to the second WiFi Module screen.

The DHCP Client can be Enabled or Disabled.
Softkey 5 causes the terminal to attempt to connect using the selected parameters (WAP, IP
Address, etc.). A Connection Status screen shows the attempt in progress. In this case, the IND570 is
attempting to connect to the WAP with an SSID of “WinTest.”
Figure 3-26: WiFi Module Connecting
If the connection attempt succeeds, a confirmation screen appears. If the attempt fails, the screen will
display “Connection failed” and provide an explanation for the failure.

Configuration
Figure 3-27: WiFi Module Connection Succeeded
3.8.7.4. WiFi Port
The WiFi Port setup screen includes only one parameter – the WiFi Port number.
Figure 3-28: WiFi Port Setup Screen
3.8.7.5. Proxy Server
A proxy server is a computer that acts as a gateway between a local network and a larger-scale
network such as the Internet. Proxies allow users to make indirect network connections to other
computer network services. For example, SMTP proxy servers are often used to control email traffic in
and out of a user’s local network.
The IND570 supports two types of proxy servers – HTTP and SOCKS. A SOCKS server is a general
purpose proxy server that establishes a TCP connection to another server on behalf of a client, then
routes all the traffic back and forth between the client and the server. A SOCKS server never interprets
the network traffic between client and server in any way, and is often used because clients are behind
a firewall and are not permitted to establish TCP connections to servers outside the firewall unless
they do it through the SOCKS server.
An HTTP proxy is similar, and may be used for the same purpose when clients are behind a firewall
and are prevented from making outgoing TCP connections to servers outside the firewall. However,
unlike the SOCKS server, an HTTP proxy does understand and interpret the network traffic that passes
between the client and downstream server.
3.8.7.5.1. Proxy Server

Consult with a facility’s IT department when enabling the Proxy server. The IT department should
know which selection is appropriate. IND570 Proxy Server settings include:
Disabled [default], HTTP, SOCKS

If disabled, no further fields are displayed. If HTTP or SOCKS is selected, two additional pieces of
information are necessary to configure the proxy server connection – the IP address of the proxy
server and the port number.
3.8.7.5.2. Server Address

The Server Address field allows the entry of the URL or IP address of the proxy server.
3.8.7.5.3. Port
The Port field allows the entry proxy server port number.
3.8.7.5.4. Username and Password

If the proxy server in use requires a security login to grant access, enter the username and password
of the IND570 device here. This username/password should be supplied by the customer’s local IT
department.
3.8.7.6. Port
The Port setup screen displays the primary Ethernet port number and also allows a secondary port
number to be configured for the same physical Ethernet interface. The primary port is reserved for the
Shared Data Server access, which is described in Appendix C, Communications. The secondary port
allows for either Shared Data Server access or EPrint connections, if configured. The primary and
secondary ports can be used concurrently.
3.8.7.6.1. Primary Port #

The Primary Port number for the Ethernet TCP/IP interface is fixed at 1701, and is displayed as a
read-only field in the Port setup screen. The Primary Port number can be modified through a Shared
Data write.
3.8.7.6.2. Secondary Port

If a valid, user-defined Secondary Port number is entered, the Shared Data Server will also be
accessible on a second TCP/IP port. However, if an EPrint connection is configured in setup at
Communication > Connections, Shared Data Server access is no longer be available on this port. This
secondary port will be used only for EPrint connections.
A change to the Secondary Port number may require a manual power cycle of the terminal before
the change becomes active.
3.8.7.7. FTP
Access to the FTP function must be enabled. Refer to section 3.8.1.1, Ethernet, for details.
The setup screen for FTP displays usernames and access levels for file transfers. Access levels for all
files are shown in Appendix C, Communications, in the FTP section. Usernames can be edited,
inserted, or deleted.
There are two default usernames of "admin" and "anonymous". The "admin" username has
administrator rights and a password of "admin". The "anonymous" username has operator rights and
no password. The "admin" username cannot be deleted and the access level cannot be changed but
the password can be modified if required.

Some FTP programs (for example FileZilla), cannot be used with the WiFi option for file transfer
because they make two simultaneous connections and the IND570 WiFi module supports only
one connection.
3.8.7.7.1. To Edit or Create a Username

Configuration
1. Press the NEW softkey to open the setup screen to create a new user or press the UP and
DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) a username in the table to be edited. Press the EDIT
softkey to open the setup screen for editing a user.
2. Press the ENTER key to select the Username field.
The Username field is accessible only when entering a new FTP user.
3. Use the alphanumeric keys to edit or enter the desired username then press ENTER.
4. Use the Access selection box to assign the appropriate access level to the user. The following
access levels are available:
5. Operator [default], Supervisor, Maintenance, Administrator
7. Press the OK softkey to accept the username and password as entered.
8. Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without saving the username and password.
3.8.7.7.2. To Delete a Username
Press the DELETE softkey to delete a username from the table on the Users screen.
3.8.7.7.3. To Clear All Usernames

To clear all usernames from the list and leave only the default username “admin”, press the CLEAR
softkey then OK to confirm the action.
3.8.7.8. Print Client
The Print Client connection allows the IND570 to send data directly to a specific IP address on the
same network as the IND570.
Port 1701 is not available for assignment, as it is reserved for use as the shared data port. An
on-screen prompt will indicate that 1701 is an invalid value for the Print Client.
3.8.7.8.1. Server IP Address

Enter the Server IP Address. The Server IP Address is the IP address of the device where the IND570 is
sending the print information. The default IP address is 0.0.0.0.
3.8.7.8.2. Server TCP Port

Enter the server TCP port number for the device the data is to be sent to. The default port is 8000.
3.8.7.9. Email Alert
When the Ethernet communication option is installed, IND570 can be configured to send email alerts
when certain system events occur in the weighing system.

The Ethernet connection used to send email alerts is separate from those configured at
Communication > Connections.
The Email Alert branch is used to configure the following email parameters. Much of the information
required to configure Email Alerts will be determined by consulting with the customer’s local IT
department.
3.8.7.9.1. Parameters
SMTP Server IP
This value is set using four groups of numbers, representing the IP address of the mail server the
IND570 will use to send alerts. Default is 0.0.0.0.
Sender Email Address
This alphanumeric entry field stores the email address of the IND570. Default is [blank].
Username
This alphanumeric entry field is used to store a unique name for the IND570 that will appear in the
“From” field of alert emails. Default is IND570. This is also the username used to login to a server (if
required). This field cannot contain spaces or blanks in the name. If spaces/blanks are used, the
email transmission will fail.
Password, Confirm Password
This alphanumeric entry field is used to define a password that will allow the IND570 to access the
SMTP server used for email communication.
3.8.7.9.2. Recipients
Up to 6 Recipients can be defined as the recipients of different categories of email alerts.
To Add or Modify Email Recipients
1. Press the NEW softkey to create a new record.

2. To edit an existing record, press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select (highlight) a record
in the list then press the EDIT softkey to open the edit screen.
inserted.
4. Press the ENTER key to select a field value to edit or insert.
5. Use the alphanumeric keypad to edit or enter the desired value.
6. Press the OK softkey to accept the modifications or additions.
7. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Email Recipients screen without saving
8. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Recipients screen.
To Delete or Clear Email Recipients
1. Press the UP and DOWN navigation keys to move the focus to the record to be deleted. Press the
DELETE softkey to delete this record from the list.

2. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Recipients screen.
An email test is available for testing the validity of an email address as well as the connection to the
SMTP server. After an Email Recipient is defined, press the TEST softkey to send an email alert
message, titled “Email Alert Test Message,” to the recipient that is highlighted in the list.
Configuration
3.8.7.9.3. Email Address

This alphanumeric entry field is used to enter the recipient’s email address. Default is [blank]. Up to 6
recipients can be configured.
3.8.7.9.4. Alerts
IND570 supports four different categories of email alerts: Information, Warning, Failure and Service.
Each category of alerts can be disabled [default] or enabled for each recipient. All IND570 automatic
email alerts are listed in the table in Chapter 2, the Automatic Email Alerts section.
In addition to receiving the Service Alerts listed in Chapter 5, Recipients with Service Alerts “enabled”
will also receive any service emails manually triggered from the Service Information Recall screens
(Figure 3-29).
Figure 3-29: Service Information Recall View
3.8.8. PLC
The PLC parameters are only available when a PLC option is installed. The setup parameters shown
will depend upon which PLC option is installed. All PLC types except Analog Output will also include
a Data Format branch. When the Ethernet/IP-Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS, PROFINET or ControlNet
interface is installed, an additional setting, Operating Mode, appears in the Data Format branch.
3.8.8.1. Analog Output
The IND570 terminal’s analog output option provides either 4-20 mA or 0-10 volt DC outputs
depending on how the connection is wired. The output can be configured to represent different source
values.
3.8.8.1.1. Source
This parameter determines what data will be used as the source of the analog output. Selections
include:
None [default] Analog output signal disabled

Application Analog output signal controlled by a TaskExpert program
Analog output signal triggered on the absolute value of the
ABS – Displayed Weight
displayed weight

ABS – Rate * Analog output signal triggered on the absolute value of the rate
Displayed Weight Analog output signal triggered on the displayed weight
Gross Weight Analog output signal triggered on the gross weight
Rate * Analog output signal triggered on the rate when Rate is enabled*

Choose the operating mode and range for the analog output signal. Selections include:
0 – 10V, 4 – 20mA [default]
3.8.8.1.3. Zero Value

The beginning zero value for the analog output can be adjusted. This value can be for weight or rate,
depending on the selected source. In the Zero Value field, enter the value at which the “zero” output of
the analog signal should occur.
3.8.8.1.4. Full Scale Value

The beginning full scale span value for the analog output can be adjusted. This value can be for
weight or rate, depending on the selected source. In the Full Scale Value field, enter the value at which
the “full scale span” output of the analog signal should occur.
Fine Adjustment of Zero and Span
If these preprogrammed values do not provide the exact outputs required, they may be trimmed by
using the ZERO and SPAN softkeys located at the bottom of the screen as follows:
1. Press the ZERO softkey to initiate the zero fine-tuning process or the SPAN softkey to
initiate the span fine-tuning process. In either case, a warning screen offers two options – OK
to continue with the operation, or EXIT to return to the Analog Output screen without making
any adjustment.
2. The analog output signal value will change during this procedure – ensure that the PLC or other
control equipment is disconnected. A warning message displays asking for verification to
continue.
3. Once the OK softkey has been pressed, the zero fine-tuning or span fine-tuning operation
begins. A message screen appears, showing the current value of the analog output signal. Use
the softkeys that display to adjust the signal if necessary as follows:
Bump Down (faster adjustment down) Nudge Down (slower adjustment down)
Bump Up (faster adjustment up) Nudge Up (slower adjustment up)
4. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the previous screen.

3.8.8.2. ControlNet
The ControlNet PLC interface enables the IND570 terminal to communicate to ControlNet
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) through direct connection to the ControlNet network.
Additional interface information and programming examples can be found in the IND570 PLC
Interface Manual, available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.

Node Address
Each terminal connected to the network represents 1 physical node. This address is determined by
the system designer, and then configured in the IND570 Terminal by selecting the Node Address text
box and using the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate node address (0–125). The default
Configuration
address is 99.
3.8.8.3. DeviceNet
The DeviceNet Interface can be configured to run up to 500Kbits per second depending on cabling
and distances. Messages are limited to 8 un-fragmented bytes. The network can include up to 64
nodes including the master, commonly called the scanner.
Additional interface information and programming examples can be found in the IND570 Terminal
PLC Interface Manual available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.
Node Address
Each IND570 Terminal connected to the network represents one physical node. This address is
determined by the system designer, and then configured in the IND570 Terminal by selecting the
Node Address text box and using the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate node address (0–63).
The default address is 63.
3.8.8.3.1. Data Rate

Use the selection box to select the desired data rate. Selections available are:
125 Kb [default], 250 Kb, 500 Kb
3.8.8.4. EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP
These parameters are used to program the operation of the EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP option
board. The same option board can support both protocols.
Additional interface information and programming examples can be found in the IND570 PLC
Interface Manual, available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.

3.8.8.4.2. DHCP Client

If DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Client is enabled, the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address fields are assigned automatically by the network. They become read-only in the
setup screens. If disabled, the IP address must manually be assigned in the following fields. Choices
are:
Enter the IP address (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each group of
192.68.0.1.

Enter the subnet mask (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each group
mask is 255.255.255.0.

Enter the gateway address (or view if DHCP Client is enabled) for the IND570 terminal. After each
gateway is blank.
3.8.8.5. PROFIBUS
The PROFIBUS DP Interface supports discrete data transfer that enables bi-directional communication
of discrete bit-encoded information or 16-bit binary word (signed integer) numerical values.
Additional interface information and programming examples can be found in the IND570 Terminal
PLC Interface Manual, available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.
3.8.8.5.1. Node Address

Each IND570 Terminal connected to the network represents one physical node. This address is
determined by the system designer, then configured in the IND570 Terminal by selecting the Node
Address text box and using the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate node address (0–125). The
default value is 1.
3.8.8.5.2. Shared Data

The Shared Data parameter enables or disables an extended message length that includes shared
data access. This data is added to the end of the standard scale slot information and extends the
message length. Choices are:
3.8.8.6. PROFINET
These parameters are used to program the operation of the PROFINET option board. Additional
interface information and programming examples can be found in the IND570 PLC Interface Manual,
available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.

3.8.8.6.2. IP Assignment
Program for DCP (Discovery and Configuration Protocol) or DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) if the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address fields are assigned automatically by
the network. They become read-only in the setup screens. If set to manual, the IP address must
manually be assigned in the following fields. This selection must match the operation of the
PROFINET PLC. Choices are:
DCP[default], DHCP, Manual

Enter the IP address (or view if DCP or DHCP is selected) for the IND570 terminal. After each group of
192.68.0.1.
Configuration

Enter the subnet mask (or view if DCP or DHCP is selected) for the IND570 terminal. After each group
mask is 255.255.255.0.

Enter the gateway address (or view if DCP or DHCP is selected) for the IND570 terminal. After each
gateway is blank.
3.8.8.6.6. Device Name

This view-only step shows the device name as assigned by the PLC.
3.8.8.7. Data Format
Use the Data Format setup screen to configure the PLC data format.
3.8.8.7.1. Operating Mode

The Operating Mode setting is only available when a ControlNet, Ethernet/IP-Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS
or PROFINET interface is installed. For the PROFINET interface, this value is set to Compatibility Mode
and cannot be changed. Choices are:
Compatibility Mode [default], IND560 Emulation
Depending on the Byte Order selection (refer to section 3.8.8.7.3, Byte Order, below), Compatibility
Mode will provide the same discrete mode byte order arrangements as the METTLER TOLEDO
IND131/331 and IND780 terminals. If IND560 Emulation is selected, the transmitted bytes in discrete
mode will match the existing IND560 byte order determined by the Byte Order selection. Byte order
arrangement in the IND560 terminals does not match that of IND131/331 and IND780. IND560
Emulation mode should be chosen only when replacing an IND560 and the programming within the
PLC will not be modified.
3.8.8.7.2. Format
Select the desired PLC format from the Format field selection box. Selections include:
Divisions PLC format that provides scale increment data transfer.

PLC format that provides 32-bit floating point data transfer in 16-bit
Floating Point [default]
integer format.
Integer PLC format that provides 16-bit integer data transfer
3.8.8.7.3. Byte Order

The step determines the order of the data as presented in the 4 or 8 bytes of data. Select the desired
byte order field selection box. Selections are:

Byte Swap Makes the data format compatible with S7 PROFIBUS
Makes the data format compatible with the Modicon Quantum
Double Word Swap
PLC for Modbus TCP networks
Standard Makes the data format compatible with PLC 5
Word Swap [default] This format is compatible with RSLogix 5000 processors
Table 3-12 provides an overview of the various data format modifications.
Table 3-12: Data Format Modifications
Word Swap Byte Swap Double Word Swap Standard / Historic

Terminal Weight
1355
Value
PLC 15 Bit # 0 15 Bit # 0 15 Bit # 0 15 Bit # 0
Weight
Integer /
value 0x054B Hex 0x4B05 Hex 0x4B05 Hex 0x054B Hex
Division word
1st
Weight
value
0x6000 Hex 0xA944 Hex 0x0060 Hex 0x44A9 Hex
Floating word
Point 2nd
Weight
value
0x44A9 Hex 0x0060 Hex 0xA944 Hex 0x6000 Hex
word
3.8.8.7.4. Message Slots

This parameter refers to the number of slots of data that will be transferred. Typically only one slot is
used in a single scale application, but sometimes an application requires multiple fields of data in a
cyclic data transfer. In order to accomplish this, two, three, or even four message slots can be
assigned for the output. As the number of message slots is increased, so is the length of the
message, because each slot requires enough memory to transmit a complete set of data. More
detailed information can be found in the IND570 Terminal PLC Interface Manual, available for
download at www.mt.com/IND570.
Choose the number of message slots from the selection box. The choices are:
1 [default], 2, 3, 4
3.8.9. Reset
The Reset setup screen restores Communication branch setup values to their factory default settings.
reads “Reset Successful” displays If the reset was not successful, an error message that reads “Reset

3.9. Maintenance
The maintenance setup branch includes the views and settings
Configuration
described in this section.
3.9.1. Configure/View
The Configure/View setup branch provides access to parameters for
Change Log, Maintenance Log, Error Log, Calibration Management, Test
Manager GWP®, Calibration Test, all GWP® Tests, and several features
unique to POWERCELL terminals.
3.9.1.1. Change Log
The change log file tracks changes to terminal configuration and shared
data. The Change Log is approximately 150k bytes in size. Each record
could vary in length, but the Change Log will store an average of 2,500
records.
Once the Change Log is full, it must be cleared or reset before

additional entries (changes to settings and shared data) can be
made.
More details regarding the structure of the Change Log can be found in
Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure.
The Change Log can be Disabled [default] or Enabled.
3.9.1.1.1. To View Change Log Records

1. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Change Log Search screen
displays.
2. Use the Search Field 1 and Search Field 2 selection boxes and
associated data fields to enter specific search information to limit the search by date, shared data
(SDName), time, username, or leave the default * (the “find all” character) to view all Change
Log information.
3. Press the START SEARCH softkey . The Log Search View screen displays with the search
results sorted in chronological order (The most recent change record displays at the end of the file
with focus. Older records may be viewed by pressing the UP navigation key.).
Information displayed in the Change Log View includes:
Date, Time, User Name, Shared Data Field Name, New Value
4. Press the PRINT softkey to print the list to all Report connections.
5. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Change Log Search Screen.
3.9.1.1.2. To Reset All Records in the Change Log File
1. Press the RESET softkey . A warning message displays asking for verification that all
configuration change records are to be reset.

2. Press the OK softkey . The configuration change records history is reset. Press the ESCAPE
softkey to return to the Change Log screen without executing a reset.
3. If the reset was successful, a verification message that reads “Reset Successful” displays. Press
ENTER to acknowledge the reset and return to the Change Log screen.
If the reset fails, an error message that reads “Reset Failure” displays. If the reset fails, try to
initiate the reset again. If the reset continues to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO service
representative for assistance.
3.9.1.2. Maintenance Log
The Maintenance Log is a record of routine maintenance or activities such as capture span and
capture zero. Use the selection box on this setup screen to select Disabled or Enabled [default] for the
maintenance log.
The Maintenance Log is approximately 150k bytes in size. Records may vary in size, but the
Maintenance Log will store an average of 2,500 records. More details regarding the Maintenance Log
can be found in Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure and Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance.
Reset all records, view records or print records in the Maintenance Log by following the same steps
described for Change Log.
Information that displays on the Maintenance Log Search View screen includes:
Date, Time, Username, Event, Status
3.9.1.2.1. New Maintenance Log Entry

The NEW softkey on the Maintenance Log screen opens an ADD MAINTENANCE RECORD screen,
intended to record the upgrade or repair of equipment. From this screen, an Event may be added,
removed or replaced, and its status recorded in an 8-character alphanumeric entry field. Press OK
to confirm the change, or ESC to exit the screen without changing the Maintenance Log.
3.9.1.3. PWRCL Performance Log (POWERCELL version only)
The POWERCELL (PWRCL) Performance Log provides a summary of the performance and
diagnostics data collected on a scale using POWERCELL load cells. The log will hold approximately
500 individual records before it begins over-writing the oldest entries. Note that the accumulation of
data in the log depends on the number of cells in the system – each cell produces one record at each
log interval.
More details regarding the PWRCL Performance Log can be found in Appendix B, Table and Log File
Structure.
3.9.1.3.1. Log Interval

Use the Log Interval entry box to enter a time interval in hours for the terminal to automatically record
a set of data in the log. Valid entries are from 0 to 999.9. A value of 0 (default) disables the
automatic logging. For day-to-day operation, 7 days or 168 hours (default value) is a typical value.
When a scale is being tested, the interval can be reduced to collect data more frequently.

The user can also trigger a record manually by pressing the PWRCL LOG softkey from this setup
screen. A manual record can also be created using the same softkey when it is assigned to the home
screen.
Configuration
Pressing the PWRCL LOG softkey does not make the log visible on screen. It simply creates a
record in the log. There is no visual indication that this has taken place.
The PWRCL Performance Log cannot be viewed in the terminal. To see the log file, retrieve the
gen:\pdx_per.csv file via FTP or serial file transfer, or the USB softkey, or use the InSite CSL software
tool.
The MT Service Security feature must be unlocked in order to retrieve the records in the log. Refer to
the MT Service Security section.
To clear the records from the PWRCEL Performance Log, press the CLEAR softkey . Once pressed, a
warning message displays asking for verification that all records are to be cleared. Press the OK
softkey to continue, or press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the PDX Performance Log
screen.
3.9.1.4. Error Log
The Error Log is a record of significant errors that occur in the weighing system. Use the selection box
on this setup screen to select Disabled or Enabled [default] for the Error Log.
Each record can vary in size, but the Error Log will store an average of 500 records. The Error Log is
described in more detail in Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure, and in Chapter 5, Service and
Maintenance.
Reset all records, view records or print records in the Error Log by following the same steps described
for Change Log.
Information that displays on the Error Log Search View screen includes:
Date, Time, Severity, Error Code, Detail (count) and Error Message
3.9.1.5. GWP® Log
The GWP Log records the final basic results of sensitivity, reproducibility and eccentricity tests that are
performed in the terminal. Use the selection box on this setup screen to select Disabled [default] or
Enabled for the GWP Log.
The GWP Log will store approximately 2,500 records. Additional details on the GWP Log can be
found in Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure.
Reset all records, view records or print records in the GWP Log by following the same steps described
for Change Log.
3.9.1.6. Scale (POWERCELL version only)
3.9.1.6.1. Predictive Maintenance
Symmetry Monitor
Set the symmetry monitor to None (the default) or Radial.

• Radial symmetry should be used on any system where all the cells see almost identical loads
(such as a cylindrical tank or hopper scale).
Start Threshold
To prevent a false trigger of a symmetry error due to light loads, the terminal allows for a symmetry
check start threshold value. This value is entered as a percentage of the calibrated scale capacity. The
default value is 0%. Symmetry checking will be triggered only if the load on the scale exceeds the
start threshold value.
Difference Threshold
Enter the maximum permissible percent deviation in span between symmetrical cells. The default
value is 0%.
Execution of radial symmetry checking is based upon a comparison between the current distribution
of values between load cells and the distribution at calibration. A symmetry error is triggered if the
change in load distribution exceeds the Difference Threshold value.
Timer Interval
The Timer Interval determines how long the system will wait after a “no-motion” condition is achieved,
before it can trigger a symmetry error. The alarm is triggered if the symmetry error occurs after the
timer has expired. The time is measured in minutes, and valid values are from 0 to 120. 0 is the
default setting, and means that the timer is disabled.
On Failure
Set the alarm level when a possible failure is detected. The options are:
• Alarm & Disable (default)

• Alarm Only
The Maintenance Log must be enabled for Alarms to be recorded. For Alarm Only conditions, the
alarm message will remain on the display until the values fall to 90% of the parameters specified in
setup. If the scale has been disabled, Symmetry Monitoring must be turned off or changed to Alarm
Only (and the values fall to 90% of the parameters specified in Set Up), and the home screen
displayed before the error will clear.
Run Flat
If the terminal determines that a load cell is operating out of tolerance or fails to detect
communication with a single load cell, it can invoke the Run Flat algorithm to compensate for the
cell’s questionable readings until the cell can be replaced.
Load cell symmetry monitoring is required for the algorithm to run properly. There are 3 options for
Run Flat:
• Disabled (default) - Run Flat will not operate

• Automatic - Run Flat algorithm uses threshold settings to determine which cell to replace
• Manual - user selects which cell to replace
If manual is selected, a field titled Manual Cell # will appear. Enter the number of the cell you would
like to replace with the Run Flat estimate.

Once Run Flat is triggered, a message will remain on the display until Run Flat is disabled or the
conditions fall to 90% of the parameters in Set Up.
To disable Run Flat and return to normal operation once the error condition has been corrected, do
one of the following:
Configuration
• Cycle power to the IND570.

• Enter setup and access Maintenance > Configure > Predictive Maintenance, and disable Run Flat.
3.9.1.6.2. Zero Drift and Overloads
For POWERCELL bases, the Zero Drift and Overloads screen is accessible. These settings permit early
diagnosis of load cells that are failing, and help prevent possible damage to weighing equipment
caused by excessive loads. A Zero Drift error will not be triggered if the scale is in motion.
Zero Drift Check
The Zero Drift check option may be Disabled (default), set to Alarm only or to Alarm and Disable. If an
error is triggered, and the Maintenance Log is enabled, the error will be recorded in the Maintenance
Log.
When a scale Zero command is issued the scale is assumed to be empty. The IND570 will first test
to see if the Total Zero Drift / Scale Capacity > 1%. If it is, it then tests the percentage of total Zero Drift
any one load cell contributes. If it is over the user defined Threshold, either an error is raised and the
alarm is logged or an error is raised, the alarm is logged and the scale is disabled.
To clear an Alarm Only error, the values of either test 1 or test 2 must fall to below 90% of the
specified parameter. To clear an Alarm and Disable Scale error, Zero Drift Monitoring must be turned
off or changed to Alarm only and the terminal must be back in the Run Screen.
Note that a Zero Drift Error will not be raised if the zero value is outside the Zero Range. Instead, a
Zero Range error will be displayed
The Zero Drift Check functions will not be supported if CalFree is used during scale calibration.
Zero Threshold
The Zero Threshold value is set as a percentage of the calibrated load cell capacity. The Threshold
can be set at 50-100%. The default value is 50%. If the Maintenance Log is enabled, an alarm
message will be displayed for 10 seconds in the System Line, and will reappear periodically after a
fixed period of time if the error is not resolved.
Note that an out-of-tolerance zero value for a load cell does not mean that the scale zero range
(configured in setup at Scale > Zero > Ranges) has been exceeded. In that aggregate measure,
individual variations between load cells may cancel one another out. An error generated by a load
cell will not necessarily prevent the scale as a whole from zeroing. If the scale is out of its zero range,
an error message will appear prompting the operator to correct the fault condition.
Overload Threshold
The threshold at which a cell overload is logged may be set as a total weight value in primary weight
units. The value entered should also account for the pre-load amount and typically not exceed the
load cell’s rated capacity. The overload trigger is not re-set until the measured weight falls below
90% of the overload threshold value.

3.9.1.6.3. POWERCELL MAP
This branch provides a graphical view of connected load cells. When completed, the network
diagram will help to clarify errors reported by showing the physical load cell layout (by address),
identifying the cell to which the home run cable connects, and which load cell is the last in the
network. It is recommended that the load cell network be sketched on a sheet of paper before
completing the functions described in this section.
Figure 3-30 shows a POWERCELL map. Before mapping is performed, each cell’s address appear as
a “?,” and the cable connection list below the diagram is blank. The platform graphic includes the
number of loads cells specified in setup at Scale > Type > # of Load Cells. Use the navigation keys to
move focus from one cell position to the next in the diagram.
Figure 3-30: POWERCELL Map View
Note that the position of each cell in a platform is designated alphabetically – to differentiate it from
the numeric address value. Figure 3-31 shows the alphabetic positions for 14 load cells. In the
example shown in Figure 3-30, only the first position is used.
A C E G I K M
B D F H J L N
Figure 3-31: Alphabetic Designation of Load Cells in a Platform
These alphabetical designations will appear, with the corresponding node number, in the Position
column of the POWERCELL Map Table View screen (Figure 3-36).
Editing
Pressing the EDIT softkey on the POWERCELL Map screen displays the Node Edit screen, which
allows entry of the information required to create a graphic representation of the load cell network.
Figure 3-32: Node Edit Screens

The Node Edit screen includes the following parameters and softkeys:
This Node # The cell address of the current cell position. Default value is null; the drop-down
box lists all available cells. Select the cell address of the physical location in
focus in in the network graphic, then press ENTER.
Configuration
HR Cable Select No if the Home Run cable is not connected to this cell.
Select Yes if the Home Run cable is connected to this cell.
Next Node # Enter the cell address of the next cell in the network connected to the current cell.
Default value is null; the drop-down box lists all available cells, plus a selection
for Termination. Enter the cell address of the next load cell that the load cell cable
is connected to in the network via the cell-to-cell cable. If this is the last load cell
in the system (which contains the termination connector), select Termination.
ESC Exits the screen without saving the values entered.
Reset Resets the values shown on this screen. When pressed, a warning screen is
displayed:
Figure 3-33: Node Reset Warning

• If ESC is selected, the screen is closed and the values are not reset.
• If OK is selected, both node values are reset to null, HR Cable to No, and
a [Complete] message is shown. Press EXIT to return to the Node Edit
screen.
OK Saves the settings and exits the screen, only if
• both Node parameters have values or
• both Node parameters are null
After all information has been entered correctly, a graphic describing each load cell address position
displays. Below the graphic, the load cell connection sequence is shown beginning with the home
run cable and finishing with the load cell that contains the termination connector. The information
shown here can be used to better understand and locate specific load cell or load cell network errors.

Figure 3-34: Completed POWERCELL Load Cell Map
Reset
The Reset softkey on the POWERCELL Map screen is used to reset the network graphic back to its
initial (blank) state. When it is pressed, a warning screen is displayed:
Figure 3-35: Map Reset Warning
• If ESC is selected, the display returns to the POWERCELL Map screen and the values are not reset.
• If OK is selected, all load cell positions are re-set, and the load cell sequence is cleared. A
message of [Complete] is shown and the EXIT softkey must be pressed to return to the
POWERCELL Map screen.
List View
Pressing the List View softkey in the POWERCELL Load Cell Map screen displays a table view of
the load cell network information. The table shows data for each cell from the home-run cable to
termination, as entered on the Node Edit screens (and displayed in the load cell map, Figure 3-34).
Figure 3-36: Table View of POWERCELL Map

Use the navigation keys to scroll though the table and display further nodes.
The Position column indicates the cell’s physical location relative to the scale. Refer to Figure 3-31 for
an explanation of the position letters.
Configuration
Example Sequence, Scale with Single 8-Cell Platform
The following procedure describes the method for mapping a single-platform, eight-cell POWERCELL
scale.
1. With the scale’s cabling in place, sketch a map of the scale. The map should show the physical
and cabling relationship between cells as seen from the point of view of the terminal or scale-
house. The connection from the terminal to the first load cell should be shown, as well as
connections between the load cells. In this example, the sketch might look like this:
Figure 3-37: Sketch of POWERCELL Network
2. In setup, access Maintenance > Configure/View > Scale > POWERCELL Map.
3. The unconfigured map view will display, with each load cell represented by a question mark (?).
Figure 3-38: Unconfigured POWERCELL Map
4. Use the arrow keys to select the cell to which the home run cable is connected – the second in
the bottom row in Figure 3-30 – and press the EDIT softkey. The Node Edit screen (Figure 3-32)
will appear.
5. The sketch shows that this load cell is assigned address number 4, so select 4 from the This
Node # dropdown list. The home-run cable is connected here, so the HR Cable value should be
set to Yes. Finally, the next cell in sequence in the sketch is 2, so set Next Node # to 2.

6. Press the OK softkey to confirm the settings.
7. In the cell map, use the arrow keys to select the next load cell in sequence – which the sketch
indicates is node address 2. With that node selected, press the EDIT softkey. In the Node Edit
screen, make the following settings:
This Node #: 2
HR Cable: No
Next Node #: 1
8. Press the OK softkey to confirm the settings. Repeat the process for cells 1, 3, 5, 7 and 8.
9. Finally, set cell 6 – the last cell in the network – as follows:
This Node #: 6
HR Cable: No
Next Node #: Termination
10. Press the OK softkey to confirm. For this simple single-platform layout, the map (and the load cell
sequence at the foot of the screen) will now resemble the one shown in Figure 3-34.
11. With the cell mapping complete, press the EXIT softkey to return to the setup menu tree.
3.9.1.7. Calibration Management
Calibration management includes a test interval to program how much time elapses or how many
weighments should be completed between calibration checks. When this time or number of
weighments is exceeded, an expiration action is initiated. The type of expiration action is also
programmable. This feature is disabled by entering zeroes into both the number of days and number
of weighments entry boxes.
Use the Calibration Management setup screen to configure parameters used for managing calibration
activities.
3.9.1.7.1. Test Interval

Specify test intervals in days or weighments in the corresponding field text boxes.
The expiration action will be triggered when the first of either of these values is reached. For example,
if 30 days and 3,000 weighments were programmed, as soon as 30 days or 3,000 weighments
were exceeded (whichever were first), the expiration action would occur.
3.9.1.7.2. On Expiration
Use the On Expiration selection box to configure the activity to occur upon expiration of the calibration
after the next test date or number of weighments occurs. Settings include:
• No Action
• Alarm Only (displays pop-up expiration message, triggers service icon, sends email)
• Alarm & Disable (displays pop-up expiration message, triggers service icon, sends email and
disables the scale)

3.9.1.7.3. Last Date Tested, Next Test Date, and # of Weighments Left
The Last Date Tested and Next Test Date (if days is specified for intervals), or the number of
weighments left until the next service (if weighments is specified for intervals), automatically calculate
and display.
Configuration
To Reset the Last Date Tested to the Current Date
1. Press the RESET softkey .

2. A warning message displays asking for verification that calibration management values are to be
reset.
3. Press the OK softkey . A status screen displays that shows the reset process status. The Last
Date Tested is reset to the current date. This reset also generates a recalculation of the Next Test
Date and/or # of Weighments Left parameters if test intervals have been entered for these fields.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Calibration Management screen without resetting
the values.
4. When a reset is successful, a verification message that reads “Values Reset OK” displays. If a
reset is not successful, an error message that reads “Reset Failed” displays. Press ENTER to
return to the Calibration Management screen.
3.9.1.8. Test Manager GWP
Test Manager GWP includes a test interval that determines how much time elapses or how many
weighments should be completed between GWP testing. When this time or number of weighments is
exceeded, an expiration action is initiated. The type of expiration action is also programmable. Test
Manager GWP is disabled by entering zeroes into both the number of days and number of
weighments entry boxes.
In order to run GWP tests from the GWP softkey on the home page, Test Manager GWP must be
activated for each test that will be carried out.
The three branches under the GWP Management branch provide access to setup screens that allow
independent configuration of test activity management for each GWP test. The branches are:
3.9.1.8.1. Sensitivity, Eccentricity and Repeatability

The following setup parameters apply uniformly to all three branches under GWP Management.
Test Interval
Specify test intervals in days or weighments in the corresponding field text boxes.
The expiration action will be triggered when the first of either of these values is reached. For example,
if 30 days and 3,000 weighments were programmed, as soon as 30 days or 3,000 weighments
were exceeded (whichever were first), the expiration action would occur.
If 0 (zero) is entered into both these fields, or they are left blank, then Test Manager GWP is disabled
for the specific test.
Note: The weighment counter within Test Manager GWP does not increment when a custom print
trigger or a print trigger specific to IND570 application pacs are used to initiate a demand output.
The Test Manager GWP weighment counter only increments when the demand output trigger is
set as Scale.

On Expiration
Use the On Expiration selection box to configure the activity to occur upon expiration of the GWP test
period. Settings include:
• No Action
• Alarm Only (displays pop-up expiration message, triggers service icon and sends an email)
• Alarm & Disable (displays pop-up expiration message, triggers service icon, sends an email and
disables the scale)
Last Date Tested, Next Test Date, and # of Weighments Left
The Last Date Tested and Next Test Date (if days is specified for intervals), or the number of
weighments left until the next service (if weighments is specified for intervals), automatically calculate
and display.
To reset the Last Date Tested to the current date
1. Press the RESET softkey .

2. A warning message displays asking for verification that management values are to be reset.
3. Press the OK softkey . A status screen displays that shows the reset process status. The Last
Date Tested is reset to the current date. This reset also generates a recalculation of the Next Test
Date and/or # of Weighments Left parameters if test intervals have been entered for these fields.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the main menu without resetting the values.
4. When a reset is successful, a verification message that reads “Values Reset OK” displays. If a
reset is not successful, an error message that reads “Reset Failed” displays. Press ENTER to
return to the Sensitivity, Eccentricity or Repeatability Management screen.
The Calibration test provides a step by step scale test sequence to prompt the person performing the
test through the stored test sequence. A test load with +/− tolerance is programmable for each step
along with two lines of prompting directions to guide the test person through each step. Up to 25
steps can be programmed for the sequence.
3.9.1.9.1. Test Load Units

Use the Test Load Units selection box to select calibration test load units. Only weight units available
for primary units are available for selection.
3.9.1.9.2. Operator Test Weight Edit

Specifies if an operator can edit stored test weight information when accessed from the Run
Calibration Test softkey on the home screen. The selections are:
The entire calibration test sequence can be cleared by pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing
OK to confirm the action. When the calibration test sequence is cleared (empty), it still shows the
–End– step. The –End– record will always display as the last step of the calibration test sequence.
This field cannot be deleted and cannot be edited.

The Test Weight Info softkey accesses pages where test weight information such as weight value
and serial number can be entered. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to see the complete list.
The edit softkeys will affect the specific record in focus. The entire test weight list can be cleared by
pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing OK to confirm the action. Press the ESCAPE softkey
Configuration
to return to the Test Weight View screen without saving the changes to the test weight record.
Test weight records can be configured by:
Editing Inserting Deleting
To Edit a Test Weight Record
1. When the Test Weight View screen opens, the first test weight record in the list will have focus.
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a test weight to edit.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for the test weight where edits can be made.
3. The test weight value and ID fields display. Edit the test weight value and ID as desired.
4. Press the OK softkey to accept the test weight information as entered.
5. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Test Weight View screen without saving the
changes.
To Insert a Test Weight Record
1. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select the location in the test weight list where the new
record is to be inserted.
2. Press the NEW softkey to open the setup screen to create a new test weight record.
3. Enter the test weight value and ID information as desired.
4. Press the OK softkey to store the current screen data. Any existing records move down one
record to make room for the new record.
5. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Test Weight View screen without saving the record.
To Delete a Test Weight Record
1. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a record to delete. Press the DELETE softkey
to delete the step.
2. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Configure Calibration Test screen.
3. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey to access the current calibration test sequence setup. The
Calibration Test View screen displays.
4. When the Calibration Test View screen opens, the step numbers and their associated test loads,
warning limit tolerances, control limit tolerances, and prompts display. Calibration test steps can
be configured by:

To Edit a Calibration Step
1. When the Calibration Test setup screen opens, the first step in the list will have focus. Use the UP
and DOWN navigation keys to select a step to edit.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to open the setup screen for the step where edits can be made.
3. The step's number and test load display first. Warning limit and control limit tolerance data are
shown on the next page. Information for Prompt Field 1 and Prompt Field 2 (up to 33 characters
per field that display as separate lines during the calibration test) display on the next screen. Edit
the test step’s test load, warning limit, control limit, and prompts as desired.
4. Press the OK softkey to accept the calibration step parameters as entered.
5. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Calibration Test View screen without saving the
changes to the calibration step parameters.
To Insert a Calibration Step
1. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select the step in the calibration test procedure where
the new step is to be inserted.
2. Press the NEW softkey to open the setup screen to create a new calibration test step.
3. Enter the step's test load and tolerance data and information for Prompt Field 1 and Prompt Field
2.
4. Press the OK softkey . The current screen data is stored at the indicated step number, and any
existing steps move down one record to make room for the new step.
5. Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the Calibration Test View screen without saving the
calibration step.
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a step to delete. Press the DELETE softkey to
delete the step.
Press the PRINT softkey to print the calibration test sequence to any connection with a Reports
assignment.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Configure Calibration Test screen.
3.9.1.10. GWP Tests
3.9.1.10.1. Sensitivity
The Sensitivity test provides a step by step scale test sequence to prompt the person performing the
test through the stored test sequence.
Test Load Units
Use the Test Load Units selection box to select sensitivity test load units. Only weight units available
Operator Test Weight Edit
Specifies if an operator can edit stored test weight information when the sensitivity test is accessed
from the GWP softkey on the home screen. The selections are:

Sensitivity test parameters and the stored sensitivity test sequence can be reset to default conditions
by pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing OK to confirm the action.
Configuration
The Test Weight Info softkey accesses pages where sensitivity test weight information such as
weight value and serial number can be entered. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to see the
complete list. The edit softkeys will affect the specific record in focus. The entire test weight list can be
cleared by pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing OK to confirm the action. Press the
ESCAPE softkey to return to the Test Weight View screen without saving the changes to the test
weight record.
Refer to the Calibration Test section of Chapter 3, Configuration for instructions on editing, inserting
and deleting a test weight record.
Press the VIEW TABLE softkey to access the current sensitivity test sequence setup. For
convenience, a 4-step default sensitivity test is stored in the terminal. This default test contains only
user prompts, based on a GWP standard operating procedure for sensitivity testing. The default test
does not include any test weight values or tolerances. These values must be entered manually.
Test load with warning limit +/- tolerance, control limit +/− tolerance is programmable for each step.
The Warning Limit and Control Limit are single value entry boxes. They are shown with the units that
are selected in the “Test Load Units” field. Units are not selectable in these setup fields. The two lines
of default prompting instructions can also be modified.
When the Sensitivity Test View screen opens, the step numbers and their associated test loads,
warning limit tolerances, control limit tolerances, and prompts display. Up to 25 steps can be
programmed for the sensitivity sequence. Sensitivity test steps can be configured by:

Refer to section 3.9.1.9 Calibration Test for instructions on editing, inserting and deleting a sensitivity
test step.
Press the PRINT softkey to print the sensitivity test sequence to any connection with a Reports
assignment.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Configure Sensitivity Test screen.
3.9.1.10.2. Eccentricity
The Eccentricity test provides for a step by step scale test sequence to prompt the person performing
the test through the stored test sequence.
Test Load Units
Use the Test Load Units selection box to select eccentricity test load units. Only weight units available

Test Load
The Test Load field determines the single test weight value that should be used when executing the
Eccentricity test. This value is for reference/recommendation only. The value of the test load has no
impact on the results of the eccentricity test, as measurements taken during the eccentricity test are
evaluated against the actual weight measurement of the first step of the eccentricity test and not
against an absolute test load value.
Warning Limit
The Warning Limit +/- is a single value entry box shown with the units that are selected in the Test
Load Units field. Units are not selectable in this setup fields.
Control Limit
The Control Limit +/- is a single value entry box shown with the units that are selected in the Test
Specifies if an operator can edit stored test weight information when the eccentricity test is accessed
Eccentricity test parameters and the stored eccentricity test sequence can be reset to default conditions
by pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing OK to confirm the action.
The Test Weight Info softkey accesses pages where eccentricity test weight information such as
weight record.
Refer to section 3.9.1.9 Calibration Test for instructions on editing, inserting and deleting a test weight
record.
Press the VIEW TABLE softkey to access the current eccentricity test sequence setup. Up to 10
steps can be programmed for the eccentricity sequence.
For convenience, a 5-step default eccentricity test is stored in the terminal. This default test contains
only user prompts, based on a GWP standard operating procedure for eccentricity testing that directs
the user to place the test weight in 5 specific positions on the scale. The default test does not include
any test weight values or tolerances. Only the two lines of default prompting instructions can be
modified.
Eccentricity test operator prompts can be edited by using the EDIT softkey.

Press the PRINT softkey to print the eccentricity test sequence to any connection with a Reports
assignment.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the eccentricity test setup screens.
Configuration
3.9.1.10.3. Repeatability
The Repeatability test provides for a step by step scale test sequence to prompt the person performing
the test through the stored test sequence. The repeatability test sequence is a specific number of
repeated steps. Up to 20 repetitions of the same 2-step test sequence can be programmed for the
repeatability sequence.
Test Load Units
Use the Test Load Units selection box to select eccentricity test load units. Only weight units available
Test Load
The Test Load field determines the single test weight value that should be used when executing the
repeatability test. This value is for reference/recommendation only. The value of the test load has no
impact on the results of the repeatability test, as measurements taken during the repeatability test are
used to calculate a standard deviation of all measurements to determine a pass or fail of the
repeatability test.
Warning Limit
The Warning Limit +/- is a single value entry box shown with the units that are selected in the Test
Control Limit
The Control Limit +/- is a single value entry box shown with the units that are selected in the Test
Number of Weighments
Defines the number of times an operator will be prompted to carry out the 2-step sequence of the
stored repeatability test. Values from 1-20 can be accepted. This value will be multiplied by 2 in order
to determine the total number of test steps. As an example, if 5 is set as the number of weighments,
the user will be prompted through a total of 10 test steps.
Specifies if an operator can edit stored test weight information when the repeatability test is accessed
Repeatability test parameters and the stored eccentricity test sequence can be reset to default
conditions by pressing the CLEAR softkey , then pressing OK to confirm the action.
The Test Weight Info softkey accesses pages where repeatability test weight information such as

weight record.
Refer to section 3.9.1.9 Calibration Test for instructions on editing, inserting and deleting a test weight
record.
Press the VIEW TABLE softkey to access the current repeatability test sequence. For convenience,
a 2-step default repeatability test is provided. This default test contains only user prompts, based on a
GWP standard operating procedure for repeatability testing. The first step of the default repeatability
test assumes measurement with no test weight on the scale. The second step assumes the test
weight is on the scale.
RepeatabilityThe test operator prompts can be edited by using the EDIT softkey.
Press the PRINT softkey to print the repeatability test sequence to any connection with a Reports
assignment.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the repeatability test setup screens.
3.9.1.11. Reset
This Reset function affects setup values found only under Maintenance > Configure/View. Executing
this reset will return all settings to factory defaults.
reads “Reset Successful” displays. Press ENTER to acknowledge and return to the setup menu. If the
reset was not successful, an error message that reads “Reset Failure” displays. If the reset fails, try to
initiate the reset again. If the reset continues to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative
for assistance.
3.9.2. Run
The Run screens enable the operator to run the calibration test and GWP tests. In addition, various
diagnostic data can be accessed and diagnostic tests carried out.
3.9.2.1.1. User ID
Entry of a User ID is required before the calibration test can be initiated. Press the ENTER key to enter
the field and use the alphanumeric keys to enter a name. Press ENTER to accept the entry, or press
the Exit softkey to exit without saving.
The entered user ID is stored together with the calibration test result in the GWP Log. Refer to
Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure for additional details on the GWP Log.

Stored calibration test weight information can be viewed by pressing the Test Weight softkey . If
Operator Test Weight Edit is enabled (refer to Operator Test Weight Edit in section 3.9.1.10.2), the test
weight information can be added or edited here.
Configuration
To View and Modify Test Weight Information
1. Press the TEST WEIGHT INFORMATION softkey to access the Test Weight View screen where
test weight information such as weight values and serial numbers can be viewed, edited,
If Operator Test Weight Edit is disabled, softkeys for editing, inserting and deleting will not be
shown after the TEST WEIGHT INFORMATION softkey is pressed.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to change a weight value or ID for a test weight, or press the NEW
softkey to insert a weight value and ID for a new test weight.
3. Press the OK softkey to save the changes or the new test weight record.
4. Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without saving.
5. Press the DELETE softkey to delete a test weight from the list.
6. To clear all test weight records from the list, press the CLEAR softkey , then OK to confirm
the action.
7. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Run Calibration Test screen.
To Run the Calibration Test
1. Press the START softkey to initiate the calibration test. The currently displayed weight unit is
compared to the programmed calibration test procedure weight unit.
If the units in the calibration test do not match the units currently in use on the terminal a “Mis-
matched Weight Units” error is displayed. Press ENTER to acknowledge the error. Exit to the home
screen and put the terminal into units that match the programmed Test Load Units.
2. Live scale weight (active weight) and mode displays on the first line (under the system line).
3. The calibration test step (for example, 1/5, which indicates step 1 of 5) displays under the active
weight display.
4. The next line displays the test load value and control limit +/– tolerance values for the step.
Pressing the TEST INFORMATION softkey will display additional details of the calibration test
step, including: target weight, warning limit and control limit tolerance values.
5. Prompt 1 displays on the line under the test load. Prompt 2 displays on the next line.
6. Follow the prompts on the display and add the required test weights.
7. When ready, press the OK softkey confirm the measured weight and proceed to the next
calibration test step.
8. If a warning limit or control limit tolerance fails at any step, a Calibration Warning Limit Failure or
a Calibration Control Limit Failure pop-up message displays. Press ENTER to acknowledge the
error. There are now three possible steps:

a. If the wrong test weights were added to the scale, adjust the weights and press the OK
softkey to repeat the step.
b. If the test weights were correct and the scale needs to be recalibrated, press the EXIT softkey
to abort the calibration test.
c. Press the SKIP softkey (a new softkey that displays when a Calibration Warning or
Control Limit failure occurs), to accept the calibration test error and continue to the next step.
If a Warning Limit Failure occurs, this is noted for this step in the test report, but is considered
a passing step. If a Control Limit Failure occurs, this step of the test will report as a failure,
but the test can be run to completion if desired.
9. Press the EXIT softkey during any step to abort the calibration test and return to the Run
Calibration Test screen.
After progressing through all of the steps in the calibration test procedure, a Test Complete message
displays along with a Status message of either Pass or Fail. Press the PRINT softkey to print the
calibration test report to connections with a Report assignment. More details on the calibration test
report are provided in the Reports section of Appendix C, Communications.
A basic test record is saved in the GWP log (if enabled) with additional details entered into the
Maintenance Log (if enabled). For more details on the GWP or Maintenance Log, refer to Appendix B,
3.9.2.2. GWP Tests
3.9.2.2.1. Sensitivity
User ID
Entry of a User ID is required before the sensitivity test can be initiated. Press the ENTER key to enter
the field and use the alphanumeric keys to enter a new name. Press ENTER.
The entered user ID is stored together with the sensitivity test result in the GWP Log. Refer to Appendix
C, Table and Log File Structure for additional details on the GWP Log.
Stored sensitivity test weight information can be viewed by pressing the Test Weight softkey . If
Operator Test Weight Edit has been enabled (refer to section 3.9.1.9.2, Calibration Test | Operator Test
Weight Edit), the test weight information can be added and edited here.
To View and Modify Test Weight Information
1. Press the TEST WEIGHT INFORMATION softkey to access the Test Weight View screen where
test weight information such as weight values and serial numbers can be viewed, edited,
If Operator Test Weight Edit is disabled, softkeys for editing, inserting and deleting will not be
shown after the TEST WEIGHT INFORMATION softkey is pressed.
2. Press the EDIT softkey to change a weight value or ID for a test weight, or press the NEW
softkey to insert a weight value and ID for a new test weight.
3. Press the OK softkey to save the changes or the new test weight record.

4. Press the ESCAPE softkey to exit without saving.
5. Press the DELETE softkey to delete a test weight from the list.
6. To clear all test weight records from the list, press the CLEAR softkey , then OK to confirm
Configuration
the action.
7. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Run Sensitivity Test screen.
To run the sensitivity test
1. Press the START softkey to initiate the sensitivity test. The currently displayed weight unit is
compared to the programmed sensitivity test procedure weight unit.
If the units in the sensitivity test do not match the units currently in use on the terminal a “Mis-
3. The sensitivity test step (for example, 1/5, which indicates step 1 of 5) displays under the active
weight display.
Pressing the TEST INFORMATION softkey will display additional details of the sensitivity test
step, including: target weight, warning limit and control limit tolerance values.
7. Press the OK softkey confirm the measured weight and proceed to the next sensitivity test
step.
8. If a warning limit or control limit tolerance fails at any step, a Sensitivity Warning Limit Failure or
a Sensitivity Control Limit Failure pop-up message displays. Press ENTER to acknowledge the
a. If the wrong test weights were added to the scale, adjust the weights and press the OK
b. If the test weights were correct and the scale needs to be recalibrated, press the EXIT softkey
to abort the sensitivity test.
c. Press the SKIP softkey (a new softkey that displays when a Sensitivity Warning or
Control Limit Failure occurs), to accept the sensitivity test error and continue to the next step.
If a Warning Limit Failure occurs, this is noted for this step in the test report, but is considered
a passing step. If a Control Limit Failure occurs, this step of the test will report as a failure,
but the test can be run to completion if desired.
9. Press the EXIT softkey during any step to abort the sensitivity test and return to the Run
Sensitivity Test screen.
After progressing through all of the steps in the sensitivity test procedure, a Test Complete message
sensitivity test report to connections with a Report assignment. More details on the sensitivity test

A basic test record is saved in the GWP log (if enabled) with additional details saved into the
3.9.2.2.2. Eccentricity
User ID
Entry of a User ID is required before the eccentricity test can be initiated. Press the ENTER key to enter
The entered user ID is stored together with the eccentricity test result in the GWP Log. Refer to
Appendix C, Table and Log File Structure for additional details on the GWP Log.
Stored eccentricity test weight information can be viewed by pressing the Test Weight softkey . If
Operator Test Weight Edit has been enabled (refer to section 3.9.1.9.2, Calibration Test | Operator Test
Weight Edit), test weight information can be added and edited here.
To run the eccentricity test:

1. Press the START softkey to initiate the eccentricity test. The currently displayed weight unit is
compared to the programmed eccentricity test procedure weight unit.
If the units in the eccentricity test do not match the units currently in use on the terminal a “Mis-
3. The eccentricity test step (for example, 1/5, which indicates step 1 of 5) displays under the active
weight display.
Pressing the TEST INFORMATION softkey i will display additional details of the eccentricity test
step, including: target weight, warning limit and control limit tolerance values and a diagram for
test weight placement.

Configuration
Indicates Additional
Eccentricity
Information Available
Figure 3-39: Eccentricity Test Information Pages
Press the information softkey at any time for a visual guide for test weight placement during
the eccentricity test.
7. Press the OK softkey confirm the measured weight and proceed to the next eccentricity test
step.
8. If a warning limit or control limit tolerance fails at any step, an Eccentricity Warning Limit Failure
or a Eccentricity Control Limit Failure pop-up message displays. Press ENTER to acknowledge the
A. If the wrong test weights were added to the scale, adjust the weights and press the OK
B. If the test weights were correct and the scale needs to be recalibrated, press the EXIT softkey
to abort the eccentricity test.
C. Press the SKIP softkey (a new softkey that displays when a Eccentricity Warning or
Control Limit Failure occurs), to accept the eccentricity test error and continue to the next
step. If a Warning Limit Failure occurs, this is noted for this step in the test report, but is
considered a passing step. If a Control Limit Failure occurs, this step of the test will report as
a failure, but the test can be run to completion if desired.
9. Press the EXIT softkey during any step to abort the eccentricity test and return to the Run
Eccentricity Test screen.
After progressing through all of the steps in the eccentricity test procedure, a Test Complete message
eccentricity test report to connections with a Report assignment. More details on the eccentricity test

A basic test record is saved in the GWP log (if enabled) with additional details logged in the
3.9.2.2.3. Repeatability
User ID
Entry of a User ID is required before the repeatability test can be initiated. Press the ENTER key to enter
The entered user ID is stored together with the repeatability test result in the GWP Log. Refer to
Appendix B, Table and Log File Structure for additional details on the GWP Log.
Stored repeatability test weight information can be viewed by pressing the Test Weight softkey . If
Operator Test Weight Edit has been Enabled (refer to Operator Test Weight Edit in section
3.9.1.10.3), test weight information can be added or edited here.
To run the repeatability test
1. Press the START softkey to initiate the repeatability test. The currently displayed weight unit is
compared to the programmed repeatability test load unit.
If the units in the repeatability test do not match the units currently in use on the terminal a “Mis-
3. The repeatability test step (for example, 1/8, which indicates step 1 of 8) displays under the
active weight display.
4. The next line displays the expected test load value and control limit +/– tolerance values for the
step.
7. Press the OK softkey confirm the measured weight and proceed to the next sensitivity test
step.
8. Press the EXIT softkey during any step to abort the repeatability test and return to the Run
Sensitivity Test screen.
Once all the steps in the repeatability test procedure are complete, if the repeatability Warning Limit or
Control Limit has been exceeded a message will display indicating this failure. Press ENTER to
acknowledge and move to the end screen.
A Test Complete message displays along with a test Status message, either Pass or Fail. Press the
PRINT softkey to print the repeatability test report to connections with a Report assignment. More
details on the repeatability test report are provided in the Reports section of Appendix C,
Communications.

A basic test record is saved in the GWP log (if enabled). Additional details are saved in the
3.9.2.3. MT Service Security

Configuration
The MT Service Security screen allows only a METTLER TOLEDO authorized service representative to
unlock or lock access to the MT Service View and POWERCELL diagnostic functions. The terminal is
in a locked state by default.
The serial number of the terminal is shown at the top of this screen and the security status is
displayed at the bottom. The status will either be Open or Secured.
To unlock a Secured terminal:
1. Ensure that the Serial Number field on the screen is not blank. If it is blank, first enter the serial
number of the terminal in the Terminal > Device setup screen before proceeding.
2. Press the UNLOCK softkey to access the Create MT Service Key screen.
3. Press the OK softkey to continue to the next step and generate a Lock String.
4. A Lock String will appear on the screen. Press the DOWN navigation key to see the second page.
5. The security status changes from Secured to Awaiting Key on the screen. At this point, it is
necessary to provide a matching Key String (generated by an authorized version of the InSite CSL
tool) to unlock the terminal.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to return to the setup menu tree if the Key String is not available.
Make a note of the Lock String if the Key String will be generated later. The Lock String will remain
stored in the terminal until the user generates a new one.
6. Use an authorized version of InSite CSL to create a Key String based on the Lock String created by
the terminal. Within InSite, select IND570 POWERCELL, click on the Options tab. Then click on
MT Service Security. Enter the Lock String generated by the IND570 into InSite. Clicking the Create
Key button will generate a Key String that can then be entered into the IND570.
Figure 3-40: Generation of Key String from InSite

7. Enter the Key String, generated by the InSite CSL tool, into the Key String entry box of the terminal,
and after pressing ENTER, press the OK softkey .
8. If the Key String is valid and accepted, the terminal will be unlocked and the security status is
shown as “Open” on the screen.
If the Key String is not valid, an error message will be displayed and the user will be allowed to re-
enter the key for a total of three attempts, after which a new Lock and Key String will need to be
created.

10. The UNLOCK softkey can always be used to generate a new Lock String.
3.9.2.3.1. To lock an Open terminal
1. Press the LOCK softkey on the MT Service Security screen.

2. The security status on the display will change from Open to Secured.

The terminal will automatically return to a locked state 36 hours after it has been unlocked.
When the IND570 is connected to InSite and the correct level of access is provided, the terminal can
be unlocked automatically (using the MT Service Security link) without having to enter the terminal’s
setup mode.
3.9.2.4. MT Service View
The MT Service View screen allows a METTLER TOLEDO authorized service representative to view a
variety of diagnostic data collected from a POWERCELL scale. More details on the diagnostics data
are described in Chapter 4, Service and Maintenance.
The MT Service View screen is not accessible if the MT Service Security is locked – a pop-up message
of "Function Disabled" will be shown. MT Service View screens include:
Load Cell (Information) Scale - Temperature

Scale - Com Voltage Terminal (Information)
Scale - Supply Voltage
3.9.2.4.1. Load Cell (Information)
The Load Cell information screen displays various diagnostics data for a selected POWERCELL load
cell. Each data field will show both a value recorded at the time of calibration and a current value.
This enables the user to make a comparison between current data and data from a known working
condition of the cell. The displayed information includes:
Cell S/N (Serial Number) CAN-High Dominant X (CANH DX)

Install Date CAN-Low Dominant X (CANL DX)
Temperature CAN-High Recessive (CANH R)
LC Supply Voltage CAN-Low Recessive (CANL R)
Gas Concentration

To access this screen from the MT Service View screen, select Load Cell in the Device selection box.
Next, select the specific Load Cell number to view. Press the VIEW softkey to proceed. Use the
UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through each data field and the RIGHT and LEFT navigation
keys to view data to the right and left. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the MT Service View
Configuration
screen.
3.9.2.4.2. Scale - COM Voltages

The Scale Load Cell COM Voltage screen displays the voltage levels on the CAN Bus communication
lines for every POWERCELL load cell of the scale.
To access this screen from the MT Service View screen, select Scale in the Device selection box and
COM Voltage in the View selection box. Press the VIEW softkey . A stop warning and confirmation
screen will be displayed. Press the OK softkey to proceed to display the Scale Load Cell COM
Voltage screen. This operation will take several minutes as each load cell is required to interrupt its
communication temporarily in order to take CAN voltage measurements. Press the EXIT softkey to
return to the MT Service View screen.
3.9.2.4.3. Scale - Supply Voltage

The Scale Load Cell Supply Voltage screen displays the input supply voltage for the POWERCELL
network.
Supply Voltage in the View selection box. Press the VIEW softkey to display the Scale Load Cell
Supply Voltage screen. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the MT Service View screen.
3.9.2.4.4. Scale - Temperature

The Scale Load Cell Temperature screen displays the current temperature of each of the POWERCELL
load cells.
Temperature in the View selection box. Press the VIEW softkey to display the Scale Load Cell
Temperature screen. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the MT Service View screen.
3.9.2.4.5. Scale – Gas Concentration

The Gas Concentration screen shows the current gas concentration of each of the POWERCELL load
cells.
Gas Concentration in the View selection box. Press the VIEW softkey to display the Scale Gas
Concentration screen. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the MT Service View screen.
3.9.2.4.6. Terminal
The Terminal screen displays the minimum and maximum voltages and current detected on the
IND570 terminal. The displayed information includes:
Minimum CAN-High Voltage Maximum CAN Voltage Difference
Maximum CAN-High Voltage Minimum Supply Voltage

Minimum CAN-Low Voltage Maximum Supply Voltage
Maximum CAN-Low Voltage Minimum Supply Current
Minimum CAN Voltage Difference Maximum Supply Current
To access this screen from the MT Service View, choose Terminal in the Device selection box. Press
the VIEW softkey to proceed. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to scroll through each data
field and the RIGHT and LEFT navigation key to view all fields. Press the EXIT softkey to return to
the MT Service View screen.
3.9.2.5. Diagnostics
Diagnostic test setup screens include Display Test, Keyboard Test, Scale, Serial Test, Discrete I/O
Test, Reset Flash 2 and Reset Service Icon.
3.9.2.5.1. Display Test

The Display Test screen displays an alternate off/on dot block pattern when first accessed. After the
alternate off/on cycle, any additional test data about the display such as memory or program
information displays.
3.9.2.5.2. Keyboard Test

The Keyboard Test screen enables testing of the terminal keys, including softkeys, scale function
keys, navigation keys and alphanumeric keys.
Press any key. The screen will display a symbol representing the key pressed.
3.9.2.5.3. Scale
Possible scale diagnostics setup screens include Load Cell Output, Statistics and Calibration Values.
Load Cell Output and Calibration Values are only available for analog and POWERCELL scale
types.
Load Cell Output
The Cell Output screen displays the current number of counts (active value) for an analog scale. This
display is not available for IDNet and SICSpro scale types. For a POWERCELL load cell network, the
output of each cell is shown. If needed, use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to view all load cells.
Calibration Values
The Calibration Values screen displays the current calibration values configured for the scale. This
display is not available for IDNet and SICSpro scale types. The number of test loads that display
calibration values is determined by the Linearity Adjustment setting configured for the scale (refer to
section 3.5.1.3.4 (analog) or 3.5.4.4.4 (POWERCELL), Linearity Adjustment).

These calibration values can be recorded and then manually entered into a new replacement board
should a failure ever occur. This makes it unnecessary to recalibrate the scale with test weights.
While this method is quick, it is not as accurate as placing test weights on the scale.
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a calibration value to be modified. Use the numeric
Configuration
keypad to enter new values.
For calibration with hysteresis, zero load always has only one count value; all other test loads
between zero and full test load always have two sets of counts. The left set of counts is captured
during loading and the right set of counts during unloading. The full test load always has only one
count field.
Leveling Guidance (POWERCELL used with PowerDeck platform only)
The Leveling Guidance branch is only available if the Scale > Type > Application setting is Floor and
the number of cells is 4.
The procedure for using this display is described in Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance.
Shift Values
The Shift Values screen displays the current shift adjustment values for a POWERCELL network. This
display is available only for POWERCELL scale type. The number of shift adjustment values displayed
is determined by the selection of shift adjust by cell/pair and the quantity of load cells (refer to section
3.5.1.3.4 (analog) or 3.5.4.4.4 (POWERCELL), Linearity Adjustment).
These values can be recorded and then manually entered into a new replacement board should a
failure ever occur. This makes it unnecessary to shift adjust the scale again. While this method is
quick, it is not as accurate as placing test weights on the scale.
Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to select a shift adjustment value to be modified. Use the
numeric keypad to enter new values.
Statistics
The Scale Statistics screen displays statistical information for the scale such as weighments
(increments each time a transaction is triggered), overloads (increments when the applied load for a
single load cell exceeds its overload capacity), peak weight (the maximum weight recorded by the
scale), and zero commands (increments each time a zero command is received from an operator or
remotely).
Use the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT navigation keys to view all information and records. Press the
EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree.
3.9.2.5.4. Serial Test

The Serial Test screen enables testing of the sending and receiving hardware on the serial ports
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4.

Com Port
Use the Com Port selection box to select the serial port for testing (1, 2, 3, or 4).
Press the START softkey to initiate transmission of the test string. After pressing START, the softkey
changes to STOP . Press STOP to end transmission of the test string.
During the serial test, the terminal will transmit from the selected serial port a string “Testing COMX
nn,” where the "X" is the selected com port number (1, 2, 3, or 4) and “nn” is a sequential two-digit
number (00–99). If a jumper wire is placed between the transmit and receive terminals on the serial
port, the same data displays in the receiving field. If another device is connected to the receiving port,
any ASCII data received will display in the receiving field.
The serial test continues until the STOP softkey is pressed, which returns the user to the main
Serial Test screen.
3.9.2.5.5. Discrete I/O Test

Discrete I/O Test setup screens include Local, Remote I/O 1, Remote I/O 2 and Remote I/O 3.
Select the internal (local) or external (Remote I/O) to be tested from the menu tree. Press ENTER.
A pop-up message “Remote ARM100 communication failure” is shown if the ARM100 doesn’t
exist or is off-line due to error.
VERY IMPORTANT! When any of the Discrete I/O Test screens are first accessed, a warning message
displays with instructions to remove output control power before proceeding with the test. The Discrete
I/O Test screens enable manual setting of any of the outputs to ON or OFF for testing, so to avoid
activating externally connected devices, output control power must be removed before proceeding.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to abort and not perform the test.
To continue the test:

1. Press the OK softkey . A real-time display shows the status of each of the inputs and enables
each of the outputs to be turned on and off. An input or output that displays is turned off. An
input or an output that displays is turned on.
2. Use the LEFT and RIGHT navigation keys to select an output to turn on or off.
3. Press the DISCRETE OFF softkey to turn the output off, and press the DISCRETE ON softkey
to turn the output on.
4. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree. The outputs return to their previous ON/OFF
status before the tests were initiated.
If three remote I/O modules are configured in the terminal, the IND570 disables the ability to run
diagnostics on a local I/O board that may be installed.
3.9.2.5.6. Network Test

If an Ethernet option is installed in the IND570, the Network Test screen enables Ethernet network
testing and assists in determining the availability of network options. The status of each line

associated with the network setup displays during and after testing, showing a status of either
Testing, Pass, Fail, or Timeout.

Configuration
3.9.2.5.7. WiFi Scan

If the WiFi option is installed, this screen provides a means to scan for available WiFi network access
points and see which has the strongest signal. Press START to begin the scan. The scan will take
several seconds.
After the scan is complete, a maximum of 10 access points with the strongest signal strengths are
displayed, including the channel used and signal strength. The access point with the strongest signal
will be listed first.
3.9.2.5.8. Reset Flash 2

The Reset Flash 2 function clears the Flash 2 memory of all program files, custom tables and bitmap
files specific to TaskExpert custom programs that have been downloaded to the terminal. Only the
A1.csv (Tare Table), A2.csv (Target Table), A3.csv (Container Tare Table present in the Fill-570 only)
and A4.csv (Formula Table present in the Fill-570 only) will remain in place with intact structures
during reset of the Flash 2 drive.
Press the START softkey to initiate a reset of the Flash 2 memory. The terminal will NOT prompt
the user for confirmation and the reset will begin immediately. A “Reset successful” pop-up will
appear when the reset is complete. Press ENTER to acknowledge. At this time, the terminal will
complete a power cycle.
Press the EXIT softkey to cancel the reset and return to the Maintenance > Run screen.
3.9.2.5.9. Reset Service Icon

Select OK to confirm the reset of the Service Icon. The Service icon will no longer display on the
terminal’s main screen. Press the ESCAPE softkey to cancel the reset.
3.9.2.5.10. Restore Scale Data (POWERCELL used with PowerDeck only)

This function is only available if the Scale > Type > Application setting is Floor and the number of load
cells is 4.
Selecting OK starts a restore of all scale data stored in the PowerDeck's load cells during original
factory calibration. After pressing OK, a "Working" message will appear until the restore is complete.
Press the ESCAPE softkey to cancel the reset and return to the main menu.
Additional information on the Restore Scale Data function is provided in Chapter 5, Service and
Maintenance.
3.9.2.6. Replace Battery
Replacing the battery on the main PCB, without a data backup, will cause the volatile data stored in
BRAM (battery backed memory) to be lost. The Replace Battery function provides a way to securely
change out a weak battery in the IND570 without losing BRAM memory.

Press the START softkey to initiate a BRAM backup prior to battery change. The terminal will NOT
prompt the user for confirmation and the backup to Flash memory will begin immediately. A
“Working” message will appear while the backup is in process.
After a successful backup, the display message changes to “Backup Complete. Power off terminal
and replace battery.” Press EXIT . When power is restored after battery replacement, the terminal
will automatically restore the BRAM data from the backup file.
3.9.2.7. Install Upgrade
Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance, for the procedure to follow when upgrading software
from a USB stick.
WARNING
3.9.2.8. Install Base Upgrade
When a SICSpro type of platform is connected, this step will allow upgrading of the firmware in the
load cell. Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance, for the procedure to follow when upgrading
base software from a USB flash drive.
3.9.2.9. Backup to USB
The system Backup to USB function facilitates the storage of terminal setup and calibration data onto
a USB memory module connected to the terminal.
Select the data to be backed up in the Backup selection box. Choices include:
Calibration [default], Configuration, TaskExpert (program and bitmap files), Templates
Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance , and Chapter 4, Applications, for additional information
on backing up the system configuration. Backup to USB can be carried out even when the terminal is
metrologically sealed.
3.9.2.10. Restore from USB
The system Restore from USB function allows a dataset saved on a USB memory device to be
restored to the original terminal or copied to a new terminal. Select the data to be restored (from a
previous save function) from the Restore selection box. Choices include:
Calibration [default], Configuration, TaskExpert (program and bitmap files), Templates
If the tables A0.csv – A9.csv are present in the backup file, they will be restored to the terminal. Log
files (Alibi, Maintenance, Change, and GWP) are not restored in this process. Configurations cannot
be restored or copied to indicators that are metrologically sealed.
Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Maintenance, and Chapter 4, Applications, for additional details and
requirement regarding the restore of data from a USB memory device.

3.9.3. Reset All Factory Defaults
Use the Reset All under the Maintenance branch to restore all setup parameters to factory defaults.
The Reset All function resets all parameters in the terminal, except metrologically significant
Configuration
settings such as Scale type, capacity, etc.
When the Reset All screen is first accessed, a message displays that asks for verification to reset all
setup parameters to factory default settings. To continue with the Reset All, press the OK softkey .
If the reset is successful, a verification message that reads “Reset Successful” displays. If the reset is
unsuccessful, an error message that reads “Reset Failure” displays. If the reset fails, try to initiate the
reset again. If the reset continues to fail, contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for
assistance.
3.9.3.1. Reset Branches to Factory Defaults
Factory default settings can be restored for individual branches in the setup menu such as Scale,
Application, and Terminal. The Reset screen is the last branch in each major branch of the menu tree
(except for Maintenance). To restore factory default settings for an individual branch, for example
Terminal:
1. Press the SETUP softkey . The setup menu tree (Figure 3-41) displays.
Figure 3-41: Setup Menu Tree – Reset
2. Use the DOWN navigation key to move the focus to Terminal.

3. Press the RIGHT navigation key to expand the Terminal branch.
4. Use the DOWN navigation key to move the focus to Reset.
5. Press the ENTER key to open the Terminal Reset screen.
6. Press the OK softkey to reset the Terminal setup values to factory default settings.
7. A status message appears that verifies a successful reset.
8. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the setup menu tree display.

9. Repeat steps 2–8 to reset factory default settings for any major branch in setup.
Note that the Reset function under the Scale branch does not include the reset of metrological
parameters such as scale type, capacity, increment, or calibration data. Reset of metrological
data can only be carried out with a Master Reset. Refer to Chapter 5, Service and Maintance, for
information on executing a Master Reset of the terminal.

4 Applications
This chapter summarizes setup steps necessary to configure certain common terminal applications,
and includes examples of how each application might be used.
4.1. Hands-off Operation: Automatic Tare and

Automatic Print
4.1.1. Overview
With the IND570 terminal, it is possible to take a container tare automatically, display the net weight
of a product added to the container and then print the results without touching the keypad of the
terminal. This application can save the operator from repetitive actions and streamline an operation.
Depending on the needs of the application, the automatic tare or automatic print can each be used
separately. No keypad or keyboard entry is required for this operation – the process operates
completely hands-off.
4.1.2. Operational Features

In addition to the fundamental weighing functions, the following features can also be used to enhance
the hands-off operation.
4.1.2.1. ID1 – ID4
The identification feature of the IND570 can be used to input information specific to this transaction
such as operator name, product code, etc. Up to four different sequences can be defined to help guide
operation actions. A bar code scanner could be used to enter this data to also make it a hands-off
function at the terminal. The identification features are described earlier in this chapter.
The transaction counter is a 7 digit value that increments each time a print is triggered. Adding this
field to the print template provides a mechanism to identify each transaction with a unique number.
Operation of the transaction counter is described in Chapter 2, Operation.
4.1.2.3. Time and Date
Time and date fields can be included in the printed data by adding them to the print template. This
information provides a time reference for the transaction. Various formats are selectable during
configuration of this feature. The time and date feature is described in Chapter 2, Operation.

4.1.2.4. Totalization
The IND570 terminal provides grand total and subtotal registers to totalize weight values as they are
printed. The registers can accumulate either gross or net weight as defined in setup and a separate
report of the total values is possible. Operation of the totals registers is described in Chapter 2,
Applications
Operation.
4.1.3. Configuration
In order for the automatic tare and automatic print functions to operate properly for an application,
some parameters must be configured. These parameters are described in this section. Note that in
order for a print to occur, a demand output connection with a Scale trigger must be configured.
Details on configuring a demand output can be found in Chapter 3.
4.1.3.1. Automatic Tare
In the setup mode of the terminal, automatic tare is programmed at Scale > Tare > Auto Tare.

The Automatic Tare feature must first be Enabled in order to access the parameters associated with it.
Options are Disabled or Enabled. The default value is Disabled.
4.1.3.1.2. Tare Threshold Weight

This parameter determines how much gross weight must be detected on the platform before the
automatic tare function is triggered. This value should be slightly less than the minimum tare value
required for the application. When any weight above this value is detected on the platform and a no
motion condition exists, a tare will automatically be taken.
4.1.3.1.3. Reset Threshold Weight

After an automatic tare has occurred, the terminal must re-arm the trigger before the next automatic
tare can occur. The Reset Threshold Weight parameter sets the gross weight value below which the
weight on the platform must return to re-arm the automatic tare function. If the weight does not drop
below this value, a new automatic tare will not be initiated. This value should be a few increments
above zero to make sure that the previous product weighed has been removed and the terminal is
ready for the next cycle.
4.1.3.2. Motion Check
The motion check setting can be used to restrict the re-arming of the auto tare trigger. When enabled,
the terminal must detect a no-motion condition with gross weight below the Reset Threshold Weight
value to re-arm the trigger. Options are Disabled or Enabled. The default value is Disabled.
4.1.3.3. Automatic Print
In the setup mode of the terminal, the automatic print feature is programmed at Scale > Log or Print.
4.1.3.4. Minimum Weight
The Minimum Weight setting is the gross weight threshold below which an automatic print function
will not initiate. The value entered must be greater than the maximum empty container weight (so
auto print does not get initiated when the empty container is placed on the scale) and less than the
minimum final gross weight to be printed (so the lightest full weight will still initiate the automatic

print). If this value is less than the maximum tare weight used, when that empty container is placed
on the scale, an automatic print would be initiated and since the auto print cycle had already been
activated, printing of the final filled weight would not be initiated.
4.1.3.5. Interlock
The Interlock parameter prevents repeat printing without a significant change in weight. Options are
Disabled or Enabled. The default value is Disabled. For automatic printing, this parameter should be
Disabled since the interlock function is controlled by the automatic print function.
4.1.3.6. Automatic
The Automatic setting must be set to Enabled to initiate a print automatically when weight is placed on
the platform. Every time the weight on the scale settles to a positive value that is larger than the
entered Threshold Weight value, a print will be initiated.
If Automatic is Disabled, the Threshold Weight field does not appear.
4.1.3.7. Reset on
Re-arming of the Auto print function can be programmed to operate on either a return to below a
preset weight value or after a preset deviation in weight. Select Return if the re-arming of the auto print
feature should require the gross weight to return to below a preset weight value. Deviation mode
requires a change in the gross weight value beyond a preset weight value to re-arm the auto print
feature. For this application, select Return from the selection box, then enter a weight value equal to a
few display increments in the adjacent weight entry field.
If Reset On is set to Deviation, the Threshold Weight and Motion Check fields do not display.
4.1.3.8. Threshold Weight
The Threshold Weight parameter programs the gross weight value above which the weight must settle
to initiate the automatic print function. This value should be greater than the maximum tare value so a
false print does not initiate when an empty tare container is placed on the platform.
Threshold Weight does not appear if Reset on is set to Deviation.
4.1.3.9. Motion check
The motion check setting can be used to restrict the re-arming of the auto print function when Reset
on is selected as Return. When Enabled, the terminal must detect a no-motion condition with gross
weight below the Reset on weight value to re-arm the trigger. Options are Disabled and Enabled. The
default value is Disabled.
Motion Check does not appear if Reset on is set to Deviation.
4.1.4. Operating Sequence

The following steps describe a simple weighing application that includes both an automatic tare
function and an automatic print function.
1. Place an empty container on the platform.

2. When motion settles and the gross weight is above the programmed auto tare Threshold, a semi-
automatic tare is taken. The net weight of zero is shown.

3. Place a load into the container.
4. When motion settles and the gross weight is above the Minimum Weight value and above the
automatic print Threshold Weight, an automatic print is initiated.
Applications
5. Remove the filled container from the platform.

6. The gross weight falls below the auto tare Reset Threshold Weight and below the auto print Reset
on Return weight. Both the automatic tare and automatic print functions are re-armed.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 as required.
4.2. Print to USB

A Demand Print connection can be configured to print to a connected USB drive. This is useful for
tasks such as daily data collection. The status of the USB device will be shown in the Terminal Status
Report view. This is accessed from the home screen by pressing Information > Service >
Service Information Recall .
Figure 1-1: Terminal Status Report – USB Memory
NOTICE
THE USB INTERFACE IS NOT CERTIFIED FOR USE WITHIN DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 HAZARDOUS AREAS.
4.2.1. Connection and Template Configuration

To set up printing to USB, first create a demand print connection (in setup at Communication >
Connections). Assign it a trigger (Scale, or custom trigger 1, 2 or 3) and a template (1 to 10).
Figure 1-2: Creating a Connection

The selected template can be edited (in setup at Communication > Templates > Output). Note that the
template is limited to 1,000 bytes, but can include XML tagging, as well as the other elements
detailed in section 3.8.3.2., Output, in Chapter 3, Configuration.
4.2.2. Memory Limits

With the output and template configured, each time the trigger condition is met the terminal will write
the template to the USB memory. The file will be named Demand-Tempn.txt, where n is the template
number. Each trigger event adds a record to the file – that is, it appends the print below the previous
prints in the file.
The IND570 tracks the remaining space on the USB memory device, and displays warnings when the
device is 75% and 90% full. Each template file is limited to 5MB. When any template file is at 75%
or 90% of its capacity, a warning will display.
The IND570 tracks the remaining space on the USB memory device, and displays warnings when the
device is 75% and 90% full.
Figure 1-3: USB Capacity Warning Message
Once the template file is completely full, no further records will be added and an error message
indicating no further prints can be collected will be displayed.
4.3. Comparators: Configuration and Operation

4.3.1. Overview
Comparators are simple targets that operate by comparing the live rate or live weight to either a
specified threshold value or a specified range. To use a Comparator, it must be assigned to a discrete
output. The assigned discrete output will turn on or off based on the relationship of the rate or weight
to the limit or range. More details of the comparators can be found in Chapter 2, Operation.
4.3.2. Operational Features

In addition to the fundamental weighing functions, the following features can also be used to enhance
the operation of the comparators.
4.3.2.1. Discrete outputs
The discrete outputs extend the comparator operation from a logical comparison to actually control
equipment. External equipment can be turned on or off based on the status of the comparator.

Devices such as lights, alarms or feeders can be controlled to provide operator input or to provide
total system control.
4.3.2.2. Discrete inputs

Applications
When a discrete output for a comparator is connected to a discrete input, certain functions such as
blanking the display or disabling the keypad can be triggered based on the weight on the scale.
4.3.2.3. TaskExpert
TaskExpert programs can monitor the status of a comparator to obtain information required for an
application. The terminal also allows a TaskExpert program to control a comparator directly based on
parameters it provides. This allows a comparator to operate based on limits that may relate to other
application values and not just directly related to rate or weight.
4.3.2.4. Application Example
Refer to section 1.4 for information on ID prompting.
This example application includes a tank scale calibrated as 500 x 0.1kg. When the gross weight
drops below 50kg, a yellow warning light should be turned on. If the weight drops below 30kg, a red
alarm light should also be turned on.
The operator is instructed that when the yellow light turns on, they should manually refill the tank at
the first opportunity. If the red alarm light turns on, the operator is instructed to immediately stop what
they are doing and refill the tank.
During the manual refill process, there should be a green light that turns on when the gross weight is
at least 450kg or more to indicate the refill process is complete.
In order for comparators to operate properly for an application, some parameters must be configured.
These parameters are described in this section.
4.3.3.1. Comparators
In the setup mode of the terminal, the comparators are programmed at Application > Operation >
Comparators.
When first entering the comparator branch of setup, a list of the programmed comparators will be
shown. Softkeys on this page provide access to editing of the parameters, deleting a comparator or
clearing all comparators. Focus on the desired Comparator then press the EDIT softkey to enter
parameters for that comparator. Below the description of each of these parameters, a table shows
how each comparator should be programmed.
4.3.3.2. Source
This selects the source of the value that will be used for comparison to the limit or range in order to
turn the comparator on or off. Choices include None (disables comparator), ABS-Displayed Weight
(absolute value of displayed weight), ABS-Rate (absolute value of the rate), Application (used for
TaskExpert applications), Displayed Weight, Gross Weight and Rate.

4.3.3.3. Active
The comparator behavior is selected in this step. Choices include < (less than), <= (less than or
equal to, = (equal to), >= (greater than or equal to), > (greater than), < > (not equal to), _< >_
(outside a range and <_ _> (within a range). When the active rate or weight value meets the active
criteria compared to the limit value
4.3.3.4. Description
The description is an alphanumeric string that is used to identify the type and purpose of the
comparator. The maximum length is 20 characters.
4.3.3.5. Limit
The Limit sets the comparison value to which the actual source value (gross weight in this example)
is compared.
4.3.4. Comparator Programming Example

To program the comparators for the application example, the following values should be programmed
for comparators 1 through 3.
Table 1-1: Example Application Programming of Comparators
Comparator Source Active Description Limit

1 Gross <= Yellow light 50
2 Gross <= Red light 30
3 Gross >= Green light 450
4.3.4.1. Discrete Outputs
In the setup mode of the terminal, the discrete outputs are programmed at Application > Discrete I/O >
Outputs.
When first entering the discrete output branch of setup, a list of the programmed outputs will be
shown. Softkeys on this page provide access to editing of the parameters, deleting an assignment or
clearing all assignments. Press the NEW softkey to enter parameters for a new discrete output. The
setup steps for programming a discrete output are shown next. After the description of the setup
parameters, a table shows how the three required discrete outputs should be programmed.
4.3.4.2. Address
The address defines which set of inputs and outputs of the terminal will be assigned to a function.
There are internal discrete inputs/outputs and remote discrete inputs/outputs. The remote I/O is
provided via up to three ARM100 devices. The internal I/O is available in different combinations of
serial ports, discrete inputs and discrete outputs. It is important to decide which set of I/O will be used
and then the address is simply entered to identify the specific I/O.
Each address consists of three digits that indicate internal or external I/O, which remote module if a
remote I/O module is selected and then finally which physical input or output point on that module
will be used.

4.3.4.3. Assignment
Using this parameter permits assignment of a logical feature (such as a comparator) to a physical
output. For each discrete output address entered, there is a long list of possible assignments to scroll
through. The complete selection list can be found in Chapter 3, Configuration.
Applications
4.3.4.4. Discrete I/O Programming Example
To meet the requirements of the application example above, three discrete output assignments must
be made for the internal I/O option. After the green, yellow and red lights are wired to the associated
discrete outputs, these assignments will allow the discrete outputs to turn the required colored lights
on and off at the appropriate time as described in the next section.
Table 1-2: Example Application Programming of Discrete Outputs
Output Address Assignment Connection

0.1.1 Comparator 1 Yellow light
0.1.2 Comparator 2 Red light
0.1.3 Comparator 3 Green light
4.3.5. Operating Sequence

To start the operating sequence, let's assume the weight in the tank is approximately 100kg and all
the lights are off. As material is removed from the tank, eventually the weight reaches 50kg.
At this point, because the actual weight is less than or equal to the comparator 1 limit of 50kg,
comparator 1 turns on which in turn causes the discrete output 1 to turn on. The yellow light is wired
to output 1 so the yellow light is illuminated.
The operator does not immediately refill the tank so the weight continues to drop. Eventually the
weight falls to 30kg.
At this point, because the actual weight is less than or equal to the comparator 2 limit of 30kg,
comparator 2 turns on which in turn causes the discrete output 2 to turn on. The red light is wired to
output 2 so the red light is illuminated.
The operator now notices that both the red and yellow lights are on so he immediately begins to
manually refill the tank. As soon as the weight exceeds 30kg, comparator 2 turns off and the red light
turns off. The yellow light remains on until the weight exceeds 50kg and then it turns off.
The operator continues to refill the tank and when the actual weight exceeds 450kg, comparator 3
turns on which in turn causes the discrete output 3 to turn on. The green light is wired to output 3 so
the green light is illuminated. As soon as the operator notices the green light is on, he stops the
manual refill.
The tank is now full and as material is removed, the weight will fall below the 450gk refill limit and
the green light will turn off. All lights will remain off until the weight reaches 50kg at which time the
yellow light turns on warning the operator to refill the tank again. This cycle will continue for as long
as required.

4.4. ID Prompting
4.4.1. Overview
The ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4 function are simple but powerful means of facilitating specific data input
from the operator or causing a specific action to take place. The ID prompt list may include up to 30
steps, each step containing a command that determines the action the IND570 terminal will take
when the step is executed.
All four sequences can be programmed to run through once or to loop continuously until terminated.
All IDs can be initiated by the pressing the appropriate ID softkey. ID1can also be initiated and
restarted automatically, triggered by weight input from the scale. In either case, the IDs prompt the
operator to work through a series of actions or data entries. For example, the operator could place a
package on the scale, be prompted to enter his or her name, enter a pre-set tare value, scan a bar
code on the package, and generate an automatic print before finally removing the package from the
scale. The printed data could include the net weight value, together with the scanned package
information and the operator’s name. The content and format of the printed information is determined
by the template assigned to the demand output.
For an ID prompt to work, its ID Mode must be enabled in setup, at Application > Operation > ID1,
ID2, ID3 or ID4.
4.4.2.1. Selecting a Mode
For ID1, choose between Automatic and Softkey modes.
When ID1 is set to Automatic mode, the ID sequence is triggered when the weight on the scale
exceeds the threshold configured in the Threshold field. The sequence trigger is rearmed when the
weight falls below the Reset value. The Threshold value should represent a weight which, when place
on the scale, appropriately indicates that the sequence is starting. The Reset value should be a
considerably smaller value, but not zero, so that scale weight can be expected to fall below it when
the sequence of operations is complete.
All IDs can use Softkey mode. In this mode, the prompting sequence begins to run when the
appropriate softkey (ID1, ID2, ID3 or ID4) is pressed, and either runs once (if Looping is Disabled) or
runs continuously (if Looping is Enabled).
4.4.2.2. Setting up Prompts
Once the mode has been selected for an ID, press the ID Search softkey , at the center of the
softkey row in the ID configuration screen. A search field will open; if many different sequences are
programmed for the ID, it can be helpful to narrow the search by selecting #, Type, Length or Prompt
as the search object (each of these is an attribute of all ID elements), then using one of the
comparative operators – <, <=, =, =>, > or ≠ – in combination with a value entered in the data entry
field, to filter the selection.
Alternatively, leave the asterisk in the data entry field to display all ID records associated with this ID
number.
Press the Search softkey to display the results.

The ID View screen will show each configured record, with its serial number at left. Use the arrow
keys to scroll down or up through the list.
Each record can be Edited or Deleted , and New records can be created . The same options
are available for both editing and creating records, and they are:
Applications
Type Select from the input options: Alphanumeric, Clear Tare, Numeric, Print, Selection List, Tare – Auto
and Tare – Preset. The remaining configuration options available change depending on the
selection made here.
If the input is set to Alphanumeric, Numeric or Tare – Preset, the further options are Prompt, Length
and Clear Data:
Prompt This is the text that will appear on screen, which can be an instruction to the operator, or a
reminder of the current stage of the operation.
Length The number entered here defines the maximum length of the data – alphanumeric or numeric –
that the operator can enter. This can help to ensure that the appropriate information, such as a lot
number, is entered.
If the input is Alphanumeric or Numeric, then the operator is free to enter either any characters or
numbers only, up to the limit permitted by the Length value.
If the input is Tare – Preset, then the a typical Prompt might be “Enter a pre-set tare value now,”
and the Length would define the appropriate number of digits in that value.
If Length is set to zero, then the only an operator instruction displays, and no data can be entered.
The Clear Data field has no effect in this case. The operator must press ENTER to move to the next
step in the sequence.
Clear If Clear Data is Enabled, the data the operator selected or entered is cleared at the end of the ID
Data sequence. If it is Disabled, the entered data is saved for the next sequence; the operator can over-
write the field of data (where data entry is permitted), or can choose to keep it – which is useful if
some items (such as the Operator’s name, or a batch number) are likely to be the same from one
sequence to the next.
If the input is set to Clear Tare, Print or Tare – Auto, then no further configuration is allowed; at this
point in the sequence, the terminal will simply perform the function defined – namely, clear the
tare, print the data, or take an automatic tare, and the next step in the sequence will appear.
Note: The Print function behaves in exactly the same way as pressing the Print key on the front of
the terminal: A Demand Output must be configured, with Scale as the trigger and an
appropriately structured template assigned to capture the data gathered by the ID
sequence. For the names of the Shared Data variables used to store Selection List outputs,
please refer to the IND570 Shared Data Reference.
If the input is set to Selection List, then instead of an open entry field, the operator will be
presented with a drop-down list of up to six items, such as the names of types of containers or of
products. In this case, the Prompt field will consist of an instruction to the operator to make a
selection from the list. The # of Selections option simply defines how many options will appear in
the list. If Clear Data is set to Disabled, then the selection made here will reappear the next time
the sequence is run, so that if the operator is satisfied with the selection, it is only necessary to
press ENTER to move the to the next step.
At the bottom of the third page of settings for Selection List, press the Edit softkey to open the
ID Selection List Edit screen. This screen will contain the number of fields specified by the # of
Selections value. Enter the options that will be presented to the operator, up to a maximum of 30
characters, then click the BACK softkey to return to the ID editing screen.
Note: Only one selection list can be defined for each ID.

4.4.2.3. Setting up the Softkey/s
The operator must be able to access the ID sequence or sequences, so the softkey for each
configured ID must be added to the IND570s home screen:
In setup, access Terminal > Softkeys. Decide where the ID softkeys should appear – bearing in mind
that the Information Recall and Setup softkeys must always be present. If they currently
occupy places that will be used for the ID softkeys, either use the NEW softkey to add the ID and
push the other softkeys one space to the right, or select a new location, add the softkey/s, and then
delete the originals.
To add an ID softkey, select the location and either select EDIT (if a softkey already occupies that spot
and it is to be replaced by the ID softkey) or NEW (to shift all existing softkeys one space to the
right).
From the drop-down list in the SOFTKEY EDIT screen, select the appropriate softkey – ID1, ID2, ID3 or
ID4 – then click BACK and either add further softkeys, or click BACK to return to the setup menu tree.
4.4.3. Operational Sequence Example

Now that an ID sequence is configured and the corresponding softkey has been assigned to the home
screen, an operator can run it. The following simple configuration includes eight steps of a possible
25, and is intended to show how this feature might be used to guide an operator through a series of
actions. Here, the mode is Softkey, and Looping is enabled.
Note: The ID sequence can be abandoned at any point by pressing the EXIT/BACK softkey .
Step Configuration of ID Step Operator Action Notes

Presses IDn softkey
1 Entry: Alphanumeric Enters name or other identifier, Because Clear Data is
Prompt: Enter your name or up to 30 characters long, Disabled, the name will appear
user ID pressed ENTER to move to next in the input field the next time
step. the sequence is run.
Length: 30
Clear Data: Disabled
2 Entry: Selection List Uses the arrow keys to select The terminal saves the
Prompt: Select the material the desired value, then presses selection as part of the data it
ENTER again to confirm the will associate with this
List items:
selection and move to the next transaction when it sends the
Material A step. information to the printer in
Material B step 7.
Material C
3 Entry: Numeric Enters the identification number Because Clear Data is Enabled,
Prompt: Enter the container of the container in use, up to 8 this field will be reset the next
serial # characters long, then presses time the sequence is run, since
ENTER to move to the next in this case the same container
Length: 8
step. will not be re-used.
Clear Data: Enabled

Step Configuration of ID Step Operator Action Notes
4 Entry: Alphanumeric Places the container on the The terminal displays the
Prompt: Place container on the scale and presses ENTER to prompt, and waits for the
scale move to the next step. operator to press ENTER.
Applications
Because Length is set to 0, no

Length: 0
input is solicited from the
operator.
5 Entry: Tare – Auto This step requires no operator The terminal takes an
intervention – having taken the automatic tare, and sets its Net
tare, the terminal moves value to zero.
automatically to the next step.
6 Entry: Alphanumeric The operator fills the container Because Length is set to 0, no
Prompt: Fill container to on the scale to the level input is solicited from the
marked level indicated. Once this process is operator.
complete, the operator presses
Length: 0
ENTER to indicate to the
terminal that it should move to
the next step.
7 Entry: Print No intervention from the The terminal sends the data
operator is necessary. collected so far – the operator’s
name, the serial number of
container, the material
identifier, the tare value and the
net weight from the previous
step, as an output, to a printer
or to a database.
8 Entry: Alphanumeric Removes the container from
Prompt: Move filled to the the scale and places it on the
conveyor outgoing conveyor belt, then
pressed ENTER to confirm the
Length 0
action.
9 Entry: Alphanumeric Because Looping is Enabled,
Prompt: Enter your name or the sequence restarts
user ID automatically.
Length: 30 Since the operator entered a
name or identifier in the first
Clear Data: Disabled
sequence, and Clear Data is
Disabled, it is only necessary
to press ENTER to continue
with the sequence under the
same name. Or, if the operator
has changed, a new name or
ID can be entered.
Alternatively, to exit the ID
sequence, press the EXIT/BACK
softkey .
10 [sequence continues from step 2]

4.5. Information Recall
4.5.1. Overview
The IND570 offers users a great deal of information about the terminal’s status and configuration, all
of which can be accessed from the main screen by pressing the Information Recall softkey , one
of two softkeys that are always present in one of the softkey rows. When this softkey is pressed, the
RECALL screen appears.
Figure 1-4: RECALL Screen
This screen provides access to four types of information:
Weight Recall
System Information Recall
Metrology Recall
Service Information Recall
Each of these provides terminal information, as detailed in the following sections.
4.5.2. Information Recall Screens

4.5.2.1. Weight Recall
The Weight Recall screen displays the current Gross, Tare and Net weight readings for the scale.
Figure 1-5: Weight Recall Screen

4.5.2.2. System Information Recall
The System Information Recall screen provides basic information about the configuration of the
terminal, including:
Applications
• Terminal serial number • Revision levels of installed firmware and software

• Terminal ID, as configured in setup at • List of installed options
Terminal > Device
• Serial number of attached scale base
This information appears on more than one screen, and each new screen can be viewed by pressing
the DOWN arrow.
Figure 1-6: System Information Recall Screens
In addition to the BACK key, two softkeys appear on the System Information Recall Screens – Print
and Connected Devices .
4.5.2.2.1. Print – System Information Recall

Press the print key on this screen to send a report to a printer, via a connection with a Reports
assignment. The report essentially reproduces the on-screen view, and will contain:
• Model • Serial Number

• Terminal ID fields 1 to 3 • List of installed software and revision levels
• List of hardware
4.5.2.2.2. Connected Devices

Press the Connected Devices softkey to view a list of peripheral devices connected to the terminal,
including each device’s description, model number and an associated note. The note may include
information about the device such as its location or its function.

Figure 1-7: Connected Devices
4.5.2.2.3. Print – Connected Devices

Press the print key to send a Connected Devices report to a printer, via a connection with a Reports
assignment.
4.5.2.3. Metrology Recall
The Metrology Recall screen displays the terminals’ metrology status. If the terminal is locked (in
legal-for-trade mode), then the Metrology Control Number (MCN) is displayed. The terminal’s current
software version and the date of its most recent calibration are also displayed. In the High-Precision
IDNet version of the IND570, this information also includes the calibration tracking Ident Code of the
attached scale base.
Figure 1-8: Metrology Recall
4.5.2.4. Service Information Recall
When the Service Information Recall softkey is pressed, the terminal displays local service contact
information.
Figure 1-9: Service Information Screen
This screen also includes three additional softkeys – Terminal Status Report , User
Observations and Print .

4.5.2.4.1. Terminal Status Report
The data displayed here is updated when the softkey is pressed, so it is always current. Multiple
screens of information can be viewed by pressing the DOWN arrow.
Applications
The types of information visible here are indicated in Figure 1-10, and include battery status, details
about weighing activity, and space remaining on the internal flash memory.
Figure 1-10: Terminal Status Report
Press the Print softkey to send this information to a printer, via a connection with a Reports
assignment.
In the POWERCELL version, the Terminal Status Report includes two additional icons – LOAD CELL
DETAIL (at center, in position three) and RESET (in softkey position four).
Figure 1-11: Terminal Status Screen with Load Cell and Reset Icons
Press the LOAD CELL DETAIL softkey to display a selection screen where a specific load cell can be
selected.

Figure 1-12: POWERCELL Load Cell Detail Selection Screen
Press the START softkey to read detailed information from the selected load cell.
Figure 1-13: Load Cell Detail Display
Press the RESET softkey to update the displayed information. When RESET is pressed, OK appears
beside nominal values, as seen in Figure 1-14. The Use Time and various weight values are reset to
zero by the RESET softkey.

Applications
Figure 1-14: Terminal Status Report (POWERCELL), Refreshed
4.5.2.4.2. User Observations

The User Observations screen includes a text entry field into which a terminal user can enter
comments about the terminal’s performance or status. When the Send softkey is pressed, the
remarks are sent as part of a Service Information Report, to any email recipient configured in setup at
Communication > Network > Email > Recipients.
4.6. Remote Terminal

4.6.1. Overview
A useful characteristic of the IND570 is that it can be configured to function as a remote display for
another IND570, or for any METTLER TOLEDO terminal capable of transmitting METTLER TOLEDO
Continuous Output. In this case, the other terminal is referred to as the Primary.
If the Primary terminal is able to accept CPTZ command inputs, the function keys on the HMI of the
remote IND570 can be used to issue simple commands to the Primary terminal.
4.6.2. Configuration Utilizing Serial Communication

Remote terminal configuration using serial communication involves three distinct setup processes:

• Physical connection between terminals
• Configuration of the Remote terminal
• Configuration of the Primary terminal
4.6.2.1. Physical Connection Between Terminals
Primary/Remote communication via serial uses a single serial connection. Since the IND570s serial
ports can handle one output and one input simultaneously, only one port is required to connect to a
Primary terminal. Any of the IND570’s serial ports can be used, as they all support the three
assignments used here:
• Remote Display
• Continuous Output
• CPTZ
RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 serial protocols can be used, but the protocol selection must be the
same in the Remote and Primary terminals.
4.6.2.2. Configuration of the Remote Terminal
A typical Primary/Remote setup via serial is shown in Figure 1-15.
Figure 1-15: Example of Terminal Configuration for Remote Display Function via Serial
In setup, the following items must be correctly configured in order to support the use of a remote
terminal:
In Setup Required Settings

Scale > Scale Type Set the Scale Type to Remote.
Communication > Connections Create a connection on the desired port with an Assignment of Remote
Display.
Communication > Serial > COMn Set the Interface parameters so that they correspond with the settings of
the connection port in the Primary terminal.
4.6.2.3. Configuration of the Primary Terminal
In setting up the Primary terminal, similar settings must be made in order to communicate with the
Remote terminal:

Communication > Connections Create a connection on the desired port with an Assignment of
Continuous Output.
Applications
To be able to receive simple C, T, P, Z commands from the Remote

terminal, the port selected for communication must have a secondary
assignment of CTPZ Input.
Communication > Serial > COMn Set the Interface parameters so that they correspond with the settings of
the connected port in the Remote terminal.
4.6.3. Configuration Utilizing Ethernet Communication

Remote terminal configuration using Ethernet involves three distinct setup processes:
• Physical connection between terminals

4.6.3.1. Physical Connection Between Terminals
Primary/Remote communication via Ethernet uses the Print Client and EPrint connections. A typical
Primary/Remote setup is shown in Figure 1-16.
Figure 1-16: Example of Terminal Configuration for Remote Display Function via Ethernet
4.6.3.2. Configuration of the Remote Terminal
In the Remote terminal’s setup menu, the following items must be configured correctly to allow
communication with the Primary terminal:

Communication > Connections A connection must be created on the Eprint port with its Assignment set
to Remote Display.
Communication > Network > Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address manually, or
Ethernet enable DHCP for automatic addressing.
Communication > Network > Set the Secondary Port # parameter so that it differs from the Primary
Secondary Port Port # parameter, for example 1702.

In the Primary terminal’s setup menu, the following items must be correctly configured to allow
communication with the Remote terminal:

Communication > Connections A connection must be created on the Print Client port with its Assignment
set to Continuous Output.
terminal, create a second connection on the Print Client port with its
Assignment set to CTPZ Input.
Communication > Network > Print Set the Server IP Address parameter so it corresponds to the IP Address
Client of the remote device.
Communication > Network > Print Set the Server TCP parameter so that it corresponds to the listening port
4.6.4. Configuration Using WiFi Communication

Remote terminal configuration using WiFi involves four distinct setup processes:
• Physical connection of the Primary terminal to a network

• Connection of Remote terminal to a network access point
When using the WiFi port for remote display operation, the remote terminal must be configured
first, and then the primary terminal can be configured. If the remote terminal is not configured
first, erratic behavior (such as taring and zeroing) may occur on the primary terminal.
4.6.4.1. Connection Between Terminals
Primary/Remote communication via WiFi uses the Print Client and WiFi connections. A typical
Primary/Remote setup is shown below.
Figure 1-17: Example of Terminal Configuration for Remote Display Function via WiFi
4.6.4.2. Remote Terminal Configuration
Note that only the Remote terminal is supported with a WiFi connection. The Primary terminal must be
wired into the network. In the Remote terminal’s setup menu, the following items must be configured
correctly to allow communication with the Primary terminal:

Communication > Connections A connection must be created on the WiFi port with its Assignment set to
Remote Display.
Applications
Communication > Network > WiFi Set the SSID, Password, IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address
Module manually, or enable DHCP for automatic addressing.
Communication > Network > WiFi Set the WiFi Port # parameter, for example 1702.
Port
Note that the Primary terminal must be wired into a network – WiFi connection is not supported for the
Primary terminal. In the Primary terminal’s setup menu, the following items must be configured
correctly to allow communication with the Remote terminal:

Communication > Connections A connection must be created on the Print Client port with its Assignment
set to Continuous Output.
terminal, create a second connection on the Print Client port with its
Assignment set to CTPZ Input.
Communication > Network > Print Set the Server IP Address parameter so it corresponds to the IP Address
Communication > Network > Print Set the Server TCP parameter so that it corresponds to the listening port
4.6.5. Operational Examples

With a Primary and Remote terminal setup configured as described, an operator can now observe the
Primary terminal’s weight information on the Remote terminal’s screen.
Also, when the IND570 is paired with a primary terminal that supports CPTZ on the same Ethernet
connection, the operator can use the Remote terminal’s front panel buttons to issue a Clear command
to remove a tare value; a Tare command to take a tare; issue a print command; and zero the scale
(provided the current weight value is close enough to calibrated zero to make this possible). Two
common use-cases are outlined in the following sections.
4.6.5.1. Truck Scales
In vehicle weighing, it is possible that a primary terminal in a kiosk may be used by truck drivers to
initiate weighing transactions, with a remote terminal available in the scale house, mirroring the kiosk
terminal so that an attendant can also observe scale weights and interact with the primary.
4.6.5.2. Hazardous Area
When weight data and control are needed both within and outside a hazardous area, the IND570
provides an economical solution, so that a more costly hazardous-area primary terminal is required
only for the hazardous area, with the remote terminal installed in the non-hazardous area and
available for operator viewing and interaction, PLC interface, etc.

4.7. Simple Filling
4.7.1. Overview
The IND570 can be used to perform simple filling tasks; more sophisticating filling and dosing
capabilities are available when the optional Fill-570 software is installed, but the terminal’s native
capabilities are sufficient for basic filling applications.
The system setup menus include a number of settings that can be modified in order to optimize the
terminal for filling.
4.7.2.1. Scale > Vibration
For IDNet scale bases only, the settings at Scale > Vibration can be modified to account for the
conditions in which filling will take place. The settings made here, in Vibration and Weighing Process,
affect how the terminal reacts to changes in ambient conditions. Typically, selecting settings in these
setup areas involves a trade-off between scale sensitivity and speed of response.
4.7.2.2. Application > Memory > Target Table
Simple filling requires a target for the terminal to fill to. The Target Table allows the definition of a set
of target parameters, which can be recalled from the home screen. Each target record includes the
following settings.
4.7.2.2.1. Mode
For simple filling, the Mode must be set to Material Transfer.
4.7.2.2.2. Tolerance Type

When Material Transfer mode is selected, the terminal offers two types of tolerance – Target Deviation
and % of Target.
Target Deviation is measured as an absolute weight value, in the same units as the target value itself.
For example, if a target of 100 kg is selected, positive and negative deviations of 5 and 2 kg,
respectively, might be defined in the target record, and (unless they are changed) these values will
remain fixed regardless of any change to the target value.
% of Target is measured as a relative value, expressed as a percentage of the target value. In this
case, if the target is 100 kg, and the positive and negative tolerances are 5% and 2%, the tolerance
band will remain proportionate to the target value, if that is changed. Thus, if the record is modified
with a new target of 200 kg, the positive and negative tolerances will remain 5% and 2%, and
represent 10 kg and 4 kg respectively.

This parameter is only available in Material Transfer mode. In a two-speed system (for instance, fast
feed/fine feed), it determines the relationship between outputs (as in, signals controlling external
equipment such as valves and agitators).
A Concurrent output type means that both outputs operate at the same time – so during fast feed, the
fine feed output is/can be also activated.

An Independent output type separates the two outputs – when fast feed ends, the fast feed output turns
off and the fine feed output turns on.
Applications
For record-keeping purposes, the terminal can sum the displayed weights of feeds associated with
each target record. Thus, if ten filling transactions are performed using a record with a 100 kg target,
the target record would reflect approximately 1,000 kg of material.
4.7.2.2.5. Target Edit
Once the general parameters of the target have been defined, pressing the Target Search softkey ,
and then the Search softkey will display the Target Search View, a list of all targets. (As with all
table searches, the results can be filtered using the operators on the Target Search screen.)
In the Target Search View, either press the New softkey to create a new record based on the
configured parameters, or use the arrow keys to select a record to be Edited or Deleted .
The Target Edit screen allows the following parameters to be set.
ID
The ID is the record’s serial number identifier. It must be unique – to replace an existing record with a
particular ID number, it must first be deleted, then a new record created with that number entered in
the ID field.
Target
The target value and its units are defined here. The target record units and the comparison units can be a
combination of primary, second or third units.
Tolerance
Depending on the type of tolerance selected in the Target Table setup screen, the two tolerance fields,
- and +, will accept an entry of an absolute weight value, or of a percentage to be applied to the
target value.
Spill
Spill is a measure of the amount of material that will be delivered after the feed is cut off. It is
empirically determined, and entered here as an absolute weight value. This material must be
accounted for in configuring a target, or the result of a filling operation will be consistently above
target.
Fine Feed
In two-speed filling operations, the Fine Feed value determines when the Fast Feed output is turned off
in order to bring the operation to a ‘soft stop’ and avoid over-running the target. Again, this value is
based on empirical observation of the behavior of the filling system, but it should be small enough to
enable the rapid completion of the fill, but not so small that the fast feed stops too late and over-runs
the target.

Description
This field allows each target record to have a descriptive identifier. This can be a useful aid when
selecting from a list that includes multiple targets, and may note the material involved or the type of
vessel into which the feed will be made.
4.7.2.3. Application > Operation > Target
Once the target record configured, the terminal must be instructed how to use it. Two parameters must
be set here – the Source of the weight that the terminal will read during the feed operation, and the
Latching mode, or the way in which the outputs controlling the material transfer mechanism behave
once the target is reached. When Latching is Enabled, the output feeds will remain off (or latched)
once they are turned off when the target is reached, and will remain off until a start command is
issued, either by the Target Start or Target Control softkeys, or by a discrete input.
4.7.2.4. Terminal > Display
SmartTrac is a graphical feature of the IND570 display that allows the operator to observe the
progress of a feed. SmartTrac provides an intuitive representation of the relationship between the
weight on the scale and both the designated target and the permissible tolerance band (above and
below the target).
In the Display screen, the Auxiliary Display parameter sets the type of SmartTrac display that will
appear when a fill is being performed. SmartTrac can be viewed as Small, Medium or Large. The
information available from each of these sizes varies, so it is possible to select the one which most
closely matches the requirement of the filling operation in question.
Small Medium
Large
Figure 1-18: SmartTrac Display Sizes in Material Transfer Mode
For example, as Figure 1-18 shows, only the Large size displays the high and low tolerance values,
while the Small size only displays the current scale weight and the bar graph.

4.7.2.5. Terminal > Softkeys
The terminal offers a selection of softkeys which are useful for simple filling activities.
The operator must be able to select a target and to start the filling process so, at a minimum, the
Applications
Target or the Target Table softkey must be assigned, as well as either the Target Start or
Target Control softkey. Refer to section 1.7.3, the Operational Sequence Example, to see how
these softkeys function.
4.7.2.6. Communication > Discrete I/O > Inputs
In some circumstances, it is necessary to perform filling tasks without pressing buttons on the
terminal’s front panel. This is achieved by configuring discrete inputs which correspond to the
SmartTrac, Target Start/Resume and Target Pause/Abort softkeys, so that remote interface devices,
such as large buttons, control filling. Of course, the terminal must have one of its DI/O option boards
installed for this to be possible. Then it is simply a matter of mapping the remote input device to the
address for the corresponding input. For instance, Target Start/Resume might be mapped to input
address 0.1.1, and Target Pause/Abort to input address 0.1.2.
4.7.3. Operational Sequence Examples

4.7.3.1. Automatic Filling
When the terminal is performing filling operations automatically, the operator’s main interaction with
the process is to issue the start command for each fill. Essentially, this merely confirms that the
correct vessel is on the scale and starts the terminal on its fill sequence. Once the fill is complete, the
terminal waits to be instructed to start again, after the filled vessel has been removed and a new one
placed on the scale.
4.7.3.1.1. Typical Automatic Filling Sequence

In automatic filling, the terminal controls the addition of material to the vessel on the scale, so for the
most part the operator merely observes the process, ready to intervene if an error should occur.
The typical filling sequence that follows assumes that a target has been selected, and that a vessel is
on the scale, the scale is tared, and the terminal is in net mode.
1. Press the Target Control softkey . The Target Control screen will appear, with Back and
Target Start softkeys displayed, and a status message reading Ready.
2. After checking that the right vessel is on the scale, press .
3. The terminal starts the filling process. The Target Control screen now shows a status message,
Running, and a Pause softkey in place of Target Start. It also adds a Stop/Abort softkey in
the fifth position. Press one of these to pause or abandon the filling process. When Pause is
pressed, the Start softkey reappears, functioning as a Resume button. Stop/Abort exits the Target
Control screen and returns to the view to the terminals home screen. Press the Back softkey to
display SmartTrac.
4. Once filling is complete – the scale weight is within the tolerance zone – the terminal waits for the
scale weight to fall below the latching threshold, indicating that the filled vessel has been
removed from the scale. The terminal is now ready to begin the next filling operation, as soon as
the Start command is issued.

4.7.3.2. Manual Filling
In manual filling, when an operator is adding material to a vessel on a scale, the SmartTrac display
and the control softkeys are much more important. The display has a number of tools to assist the
operator in filling to target, and within the tolerance band.
4.7.3.2.1. SmartTrac Assistance for Operators
Figure 1-19: Elements of the SmartTrac Graph
The main feature of the SmartTrac display is its bar graph, and this includes several features,
indicated in Figure 1-19 and explained in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3: Elements of SmartTrac Explained
10% of target The bar graph begins to register the scale weight when it reaches 10% of the configured
target value. Until this weight is reached, the bar graph is empty.
A A represents weight values between 10% of the target and the negative tolerance (-Tol)
value. As weight is added to the scale, the bar moves from left to right in this zone at a rate
corresponding to the speed at which weight is being added. When the bar graph enters the
tolerance zone (B), it becomes more sensitive to changes. In other words, for each
additional unit of weight the graph moves further when in the tolerance zone than it did in
zone A.
Vernier The Vernier indicator, meanwhile, moves at rate with a constant relationship to the rate of
Indicator change of weight on the scale. It adds detail to the bar graph’s movement during the filling
operation so that the operator can respond more appropriately as the scale weight
approaches its target.
While the bar graph becomes more sensitive to change when it is in the tolerance zone,
the Vernier keeps its proportional relationship to the scale weight, which makes it easier for
the operator adding material to avoid over-running the target.
-Tol, B, Target, Zones B and C, between -Tol and +Tol, indicates the range of weights within an acceptable
C, + Tol distance from the target. Symbols for each of the cut-off points appear above the graph,
and when the scale weight exactly corresponds to the target weight, a triangle is displayed
straddling the target line.
D D is the over-fill zone. If the bar graph has reached this zone, the operator will need to
remove material from the scale until the weight is reduced sufficiently to fall within the
acceptable tolerance zone.
4.7.3.2.2. Typical Manual Filling Sequence
This sequence assumes that the operator has access to the appropriate target table and target control
softkeys.
1. If SmartTrac is not displayed, press the SmartTrac softkey to show it.

2. Select a target value – either by direct entry, pressing the Target softkey and entering the
desired values for Target, Spill, Fine Feed, Tolerance and Description; or by pressing the Target
Table softkey , displaying the Target Search View, and selecting a target record to use.

3. With the vessel to be filled on the scale, press the Tare key to zero the scale and enter Net
mode.
4. Start the filling process by pressing Target Start , or Target Control . The difference
between these two options is as follows:
Applications
a. Target Start shows the SmartTrac display.

b. Target Control shows a status screen, from which SmartTrac is accessed by pressing the
Back softkey .
The Target Control softkey is more typically used for automatic filling procedures. In manual filling
it is critical to be able to observe the SmartTrac display.
5. Begin filling, by whatever method is defined for the procedure. This can involve using a scoop to
add material, or by operating a lever to open a valve, or by using the controls of a separate piece
of filling equipment.
6. Observe the SmartTrac display and its Vernier indicator. Manage the filling process so that the bar
graph approaches the target at a controlled rate, and filling can be stopped within the acceptable
tolerance.
7. When an acceptable fill has been achieved, remove the vessel from the scale and add a new
one, so that the sequence can start again.

5 Service and Maintenance
The IND570 terminal is designed to provide years of dependable operation. However, METTLER
TOLEDO recommends that – as with any industrial equipment – the IND570 terminal and the
connected scale system be serviced periodically. Timely, factory-specified maintenance and
calibration by a METTLER TOLEDO service technician will ensure and document accurate and
dependable performance to specifications.
5.1. Cleaning and General Maintenance

Clean the IND570 terminal’s keypad and cover with a clean, soft cloth that has been dampened with
a mild glass cleaner. Do not use any type of industrial solvent such as toluene or isopropanol (IPA)
that could damage the terminal’s finish. Do not spray cleaner directly on the terminal.
The IND570 is a rugged stainless steel enclosed instrument; however, the front panel is a relatively
thin covering over sensitive electronic switches and a lighted display. Care should be taken to avoid
any punctures to this surface or vibrations or shocks to the instrument. If the front panel is punctured,
immediately take appropriate steps to prevent dust and moisture from entering the unit until the
terminal can be repaired.
WARNING
ONLY PERMIT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL TO SERVICE THE TERMINAL. EXERCISE CARE WHEN
MAKING CHECKS, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS THAT MUST BE MADE WITH POWER ON.
FAILING TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
WARNING
IF THE KEYBOARD, DISPLAY LENS OR ENCLOSURE IS DAMAGED ON A DIVISION 2-OR ZONE
2/22 APPROVED IND570XX TERMINAL THAT IS USED IN A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 AREA,
THE DEFECTIVE COMPONENT MUST BE REPAIRED IMMEDIATELY. REMOVE POWER
IMMEDIATELY AND DO NOT REAPPLY POWER UNTIL THE DISPLAY LENS, KEYBOARD OR
ENCLOSURE HAS BEEN REPLACED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. FAILURE TO DO SO
COULD RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
WARNING
FOR IND570XX, KEEP THE TERMINAL AWAY FROM PROCESSES THAT GENERATE HIGH
CHARGING POTENTIAL SUCH AS ELECTROSTATIC COATING, RAPID TRANSFER OF NON-
CONDUCTIVE MATERIALS, RAPID AIR JETS, AND HIGH PRESSURE AEROSOLS.
WARNING
FOR IND570XX, AVOID ELECTROSTATIC CHARGING DURING OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.

WARNING
FOR IND570XX, DO NOT USE DRY CLOTH TO CLEAN THE WEIGHING TERMINAL. ALWAYS USE
A DAMP CLOTH TO CLEAN THE TERMINAL GENTLY.
Service and Maintenance
5.2. Service
Only qualified personnel should perform installation, programming, and service to the IND570.
Please contact a local METTLER TOLEDO representative for assistance.
Contact information for your local service provider may be available in the terminal. Press the
INFORMATION RECALL softkey and then the SERVICE ICON softkey to view any
available service contact information.
METTLER TOLEDO recommends periodic preventative maintenance to the terminal and scale system
to ensure reliability and to maximize service life. All measurement systems should be periodically
calibrated and certified as required to meet production, industry and regulatory requirements. We can
help you maintain uptime, compliance and quality system documentation with periodic maintenance
and calibration services. Contact your local METTLER TOLEDO authorized service organization to
discuss your requirements.
WARNING
DO NOT INSTALL, DISCONNECT OR PERFORM ANY SERVICE ON THIS EQUIPMENT BEFORE
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF AND THE AREA HAS BEEN SECURED AS NON-HAZARDOUS
BY PERSONNEL AUTHORIZED TO DO SO BY THE RESPONSIBLE PERSON ON-SITE.
5.2.1. Enclosure Gasket

For the harsh environment model, in order to preserve the enclosure’s IP rating, inspect the sealing
gasket to ensure that it makes a good seal, and does not have permanent indentations.
Gasket lifetime is shortened by exposure to high temperatures. The enclosure gasket should be
inspected during any maintenance activity, and replaced if it becomes damaged or brittle.
5.3. Screen Saver

METTLER TOLEDO recommends the use of the automatic screen saver in order to maintain the clarity
of the display. The IND570 screen saver can be enabled in setup at Terminal > Display >
Screensaver.
In terminals with an LCD display, the display backlight is adjustable, and can be configured to turn
off after a period of terminal inactivity. The Backlight Timeout is defined in minutes, in setup at
Terminal > Display > Backlight Timeout.

5.4. System Backup and Restore
The standard USB port supports backup of certain terminal data to a USB flash drive. Data available
for backup includes:
• Configuration (includes tables and log files)

• Calibration
• TaskExpert (program files and bitmaps)
• Templates
WARNING
The data can later be restored to the terminal via the USB port, or copied to additional terminals in a
replication or cloning process. This facilitates the quick restoration of setup should a main PCB
require replacement, for example. It also allows for the easy creation of functionally identical
terminals.
5.4.1. Backup and Restore File Structure

When a backup to USB is performed, the IND570 automatically creates a file structure on the root
directory of the USB device. The top level filename is “IND570”. Within the IND570 folder are
individual folders for each terminal’s data set. The serial number of the terminal is used as the
filename of the backed up data. Figure 1-1 shows the file structure created by the IND570 during a
backup.
Terminal Serial
Numbers
Figure 1-1: USB Backup File Structure

5.4.1.1. File Locations on USB Drive
The software upgrade, backup and restore functions use the following folders on the USB drive.
Table 1-1: USB Folders and File Names

Location on USB Memory Device Stored Files

IND570\Terminal Serial #\Config bkram.dmt EccTw1.txt SensTw1.txt
CalTest1.txt flash.dmt tare.bin
CalTw1.txt RepTest1.txt target.bin
e2prom1.dmt RepTw1.txt
EccTest1.txt SensTest.txt
IND570\Terminal Serial #\Logs Alibi.csv ErrLog.csv Maint.csv
Change.csv GWPLog.csv pwrcl_per.csv
IND570\Terminal Serial #\Print If USB port is configured to receive a Demand Output
(print), a .txt file with the name of the template being
printed is created here to collect the data from those
Demand Outputs. The maximum size of the template text
file created and stored on a USB flash drive is limited to
5 MB, or the available free space on the USB flash drive,
whichever is smaller.
IND570\Terminal Serial #\Reports If USB port is configured to receive a Reports print, the
report text file (.txt) is saved in this folder
IND570\Terminal Serial #\Tables If tables A0-A10 contain data, the .csv files for those
tables is saved here
IND570\Terminal Serial #\TaskExpert If TaskExpert program files (.cpt) and images (.bmp) are
loaded into the terminal, those files are saved in this file
IND570\Terminal Serial #\Templates Template1.txt Template5.txt Template8.txt
Template2.txt Template6.txt Template9.txt
Template3.txt Template7.txt Template10.txt
Template4.txt
When executing a restore from USB, each file must:
• Be placed in a top level folder that matches the serial number of the terminal to which the
information is being uploaded.
• Be placed in the appropriate USB file folder and have the correct file name, so that the Restore
from USB function can complete successfully. One of the easiest ways to ensure that correct file
structure and file names are being used is to perform a Backup to USB immediately after
installation, and again after making any changes to the terminal’s configuration or tables. The
correct file structure and filenames are created automatically, making it easier to recognize the
appropriate filenames and locations on the USB memory device.
5.4.2. Backup to USB
Backup to USB can be performed by users with any access level, and may be carried out even when
the terminal is metrologically sealed. When the Backup to USB function is executed, the IND570

creates a file structure on the USB memory device, using the terminal’s serial number as the name of
the top-level file folder. An example of this structure is shown in Figure 1-1.
5.4.2.1. To backup files to a USB memory device
1. Connect a USB (flash) memory device to the IND570 USB port.

USB memory devices are automatically recognized as such.
2. Press the SETUP softkey . Navigate to Maintenance > Run > Backup to USB. Press ENTER. The
screen shown in Figure 1-2 will appear.
Figure 1-2: Backup to USB
3. Select the information to be backed up to the USB drive. Selections include:

Calibration [default], Configuration, TaskExpert, Templates
4. Press the START softkey. The terminal will show “Working...Please Wait” as the backup
attempt is made.
If no external USB drive is connected or recognized, the terminal will display a message “USB
memory not present.”
A successful backup will show “Backup Successful”, and the operator will be prompted to
press the ENTER key. A failed backup will show “Backup Failure”. Press ENTER to
acknowledge.
If the USB memory device does not have enough memory to store the desired files, the
message “Insufficient Memory Available” is shown. Press ENTER to acknowledge.
5. When the terminal indicates that the backup is complete, the USB device can be unplugged.
Press the EXIT softkey to return to the main menu.
5.4.3. Restore from USB
System Restore cannot be performed if the terminal is metrologically sealed.
Access to the USB port must be set as Read/Write in order to complete a Restore from USB.
If user security is enabled, an Administrator level login must be in effect to carry out this
procedure.

A system restore operation does not copy log files (Alibi Memory, Maintenance Log, Change Log,
POWERCELL Performance Log) from the saved dataset. The terminal’s existing log files are not
over-written during a restore.
The system restore screen allows a dataset saved on a USB device to be restored or copied to a new
terminal. Scale calibration parameters can be restored or not restored, depending on the selection
from the drop-down list.
5.4.3.1. To restore files from a USB memory device
1. Connect a USB (flash) memory device to the IND570 USB port.

2. Press the SETUP softkey . Navigate to Communication > Access/Security > USB > Memory
Stick. Set this field as Read/Write. Exit back to the to the main setup menu structure.
3. Navigate to Maintenance > Run > Restore from USB. Press ENTER. The screen shown in Figure
1-3 will appear.
Figure 1-3: Restore from USB
4. Select the information to be restored from the USB drive. Selections include:
Calibration [default], Configuration, TaskExpert, Templates
5. Press the START softkey to initiate the transfer of files. The terminal will show “Working…
Please wait” as the backup attempt is made.
If no external USB drive is connected or recognized, the message “No USB Memory Installed”
is shown. Press ENTER. Wait one more minute and try again. The IND570 may still be busy
reading the connected USB memory device.
If a message “Access Denied. User Not Authorized” or “Authentication Failure” is shown,

reading files from the USB port may not be enabled. Navigate to Communication >
Access/Security > USB > Memory Stick. Confirm this field is set as Read/Write.
6. A successful restore backup will show “Restore Successful”. A failed restore will show “Restore
Failure”. Press ENTER to acknowledge.
A failed restore could be the result of a missing or corrupted data file, an incorrectly named
file, or an incorrect file structure under the terminal serial number.
7. Once the terminal indicates that the backup is complete, the USB device can be unplugged and
the EXIT softkey pressed to return to the main menu.
8. Upon exiting the main menu after a restore from USB, the IND570 will automatically restart to
complete the restore process.

5.5. Backup and Restore Using InSite™ SL
InSite SL is an application for the PC that can be used to save the terminal configuration and restore it
at a later date, or copy configurations into other terminals.
Procedures for importing and exporting files using InSite SL are provided in the InSite SL User’s Guide.
Both the InSite™ SL PC tool and the User’s Guide are available for download from http://mt.com.
5.6. Upgrading Firmware

WARNING
ONLY PERMIT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL TO PERFORM FIRMWARE UPDATES ON THE TERMINAL.
PLEASE CONTACT A LOCAL METTLER TOLEDO REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE.
5.6.1. Recommended Backup Prior to Firmware Upgrade

Before loading a firmware upgrade to an IND570 terminal via any available method, it is highly
recommended to run a complete backup of all terminal configuration, including calibration, templates
and any custom TaskExpert files prior to executing the firmware upgrade.
5.6.2. IND570 Firmware Upgrade via USB

To perform a firmware upgrade via the USB port:
1. Create the following folder structure on the root directory of a USB memory device:
IND570 / upgrade
2. Place the firmware file into the “upgrade” folder.

3. Rename the firmware file “upgrade.dat” for the analog, IDNet and SICSpro versions of the IND570
and "upgrade_pwrcl.dat" for the POWERCELL version.
4. Connect the USB drive to its USB port.
5. Press the SETUP softkey. Navigate to Maintenance > Run > Install Upgrade and press ENTER.
6. At the Install S/W Upgrade screen, when displayed status is “Ready”, press the START softkey to
initiate the upgrade. The IND570 will indicate that it is working.
7. When the upgrade is complete, the IND570 will display an “Upgrade Successful” pop up
message. Press the ENTER key to acknowledge the message. This initiates a power cycle.
NOTE: A Master Reset is recommended after every change in firmware version. Ensure that
terminal configuration and calibration is backed up to a USB memory device before performing a
Master Reset. This data can be reloaded into the terminal after the Master Reset is complete.
NOTE: The Boot Loader or Boot Code file for an IND570 cannot be loaded to the terminal using
the USB upgrade process.

WARNING
5.6.2.1. Power Failure during Firmware Update via USB
In the event that power is lost during a firmware upgrade via USB, it might be necessary to load the
IND570 firmware using InSite CSL.
As the IND570 executes the firmware upgrade via USB, the following stages are carried out:
1. The terminal copies the firmware from USB stick to RAM. This process takes about 20 seconds.
2. The terminal then writes the new firmware from RAM to Flash. This stage take approximately 10
seconds.
3. The IND570 will power cycle and the upgrade is a success.
If power is interrupted within 20 seconds of starting the upgrade (during the copy to RAM), the
IND570 will simply revert to the original version of firmware present before the upgrade was
attempted. If power is interrupted after approximately 20 seconds (during the write to Flash), the
upgrade will fail. At this time, the only way to recover the terminal is to carry out a firmware upgrade
using InSite™ CSL.
5.6.3. SICSpro Platform Firmware Upgrade via IND570 USB

To perform a firmware upgrade for a SICSpro base using the IND570's USB port:
1. Create the following folder structure on the root directory of a USB memory device:
IND570/upgrade
2. Place the firmware for the SICSpro base into the "upgrade" folder.
3. Rename the SICSpro firmware file "upgrade.mot"
4. Connect the USB drive to the IND570 USB port
5. Press the SETUP softkey. Navigate to Maintenance > Run > Install Base Upgrade and press
ENTER.
6. At the Install Base S/W Upgrade screen, when displayed status is “Ready”, press the START
softkey to initiate the upgrade. The IND570 will indicate that it is working. DO NOT power down
the IND570 terminal during this process.
7. The base upgrade will take approximately 2 minutes. When the upgrade is complete, the IND570
will display an "Upgrade Successful" message.

5.7. Restore Scale Data
This feature is only available in POWERCELL terminals, and should only be used when connected
to a PowerDeck floor scale.
During the original factory configuration of a PowerDeck floor scale, a complete set of System
Configuration Data for the platform is stored in each of the four (4) POWERCELL load cells in the
platform. The System Configuration Data set includes:
• Version • Factory calibration GEO value • Initial zero counts
• Number of load cells • Field calibration GEO value • Test load 1 weight
• Platform serial number • Primary weight unit • Test load 1 counts
• Platform model number • Scale capacity • Load cell shift values for all cells
• Calibration weight unit • Scale increment size • Load cell calibration zero counts
The IND570 has the ability to read this stored System Configuration Data and use it to create a
usable, basic weighing system without applying test weights during initial installation. This IND570
feature, known as Restore Scale Data, is intended for use when a new PowerDeck floor scale and
new IND570 POWERCELL terminal are combined and will be commissioned on-site, in the following
scenarios:
• A new PowerDeck floor scale and new IND570 POWERCELL terminal are combined and must be
commissioned on-site
• Repair situations where the IND570 terminal or the IND570 POWERCELL main board must be
replaced and there is no back-up available for the terminal.
• Situations where the user feels it is necessary to restore the platform factory default settings to the
load cell system.
For the use cases noted above, the following conditions must be true:
• The IND570 POWERCELL terminal must be connected to a PowerDeck platform

• The terminal is configured for use with a PowerDeck floor scale. The setting at Scale > Type >
Application must be Floor, and the # of Load Cells must be 4
• The platform Model and Serial Number fields in the terminal are blank
Platform Model and Serial number fields can be viewed by pressing the RECALL INFORMATION
softkey on the terminal Home page and then the SYSTEM INFORMATION RECALL softkey
on the Recall screen.
• 2-4 of the POWERCELL load cells in the platform have matching System Configuration Data
If only 2 of the POWERCELL load cells have matching data, the remaining 2 cells must have
independently unique System Configuration Data. They cannot be another matched pair. In a
situation where there are of 2 matching pairs of System Configuration Data, the terminal will not
know which data set is original to the platform and should be used. In this situation, neither set
of data will be used and the Restore Scale Data function cannot proceed.
• The terminal is not metrologically sealed

5.7.1. Initial Commissioning Procedure
The steps below represent a typical PowerDeck installation procedure where the Restore Scale Data
feature will be utilized.
1. Physically level the PowerDeck platform with a bubble level.

2. Shim, if necessary, to eliminate platform "rocking".
3. Power-up the terminal and configure for use with a PowerDeck floor scale. Navigate in setup to
Scale > Type > Application and select Floor. Program the # of Load Cells to 4 (four).
4. Remove power from the terminal and connect the PowerDeck platform via the provided M12
connector.
5. Power-up the terminal.
6. Respond the "Use factory calibration?" prompt with a Yes or No. If No is selected, the restore
process is cancelled and normal power-up continues.
Figure 1-4: Factory Calibration Prompt
7. If Yes is selected, the terminal will read the stored System Configuration Data from the load cells
and load them into the terminal.
8. If data restore is successful, the terminal will prompt for a GEO code entry. If there was a GEO
value in the System Configuration Data, then the terminal pre-populates the display with this
value. Enter the correct GEO value for the installation location and press OK to accept. GEO
values can be found in Appendix E, GEO Codes.
9. Once the GEO code is confirmed, the terminal completes the configuration process and restarts.
10. Once the scale data restore is complete, the platform should be levelled using the utility provided
in setup at Maintenance > Run > Diagnostics > Scale > Leveling Guidance. Refer to section 1.8
for details.
5.7.2. Manual Restore of PowerDeck System Configuration Data
Situations may arise where a PowerDeck system needs to be restored to the original factory
configuration. A manual trigger of the Restore Scale Data functions is available in setup at
Maintainence > Run > Diagnostics > Restore Scale Data.

Figure 1-5: Manually Restore Scale Data
1. Press OK to manually trigger the restore of original System Configuration Data from the
PowerDeck load cells. Select ESCAPE to cancel and return to the setup menu.
2. Once Restore Scale Data is triggered, the terminal will display a Working… message as it
attempts to read and validate the System Configuration Data in the load cells. If the data in the
load cells cannot be read or validated, a restore failure message is displayed. Press ENTER to
clear the message and return to the setup menu.
3. If the System Configuration Data is successfully validated, the terminal prompts for a GEO code
entry. If there was a GEO value in the System Configuration Data, then the terminal pre-populates
the display with this value. Enter the correct GEO value for the installation location and press OK
to accept. GEO values can be found in Appendix E, GEO Codes.
4. Once the GEO code is confirmed, the terminal completes the configuration process.
5. Once the scale data restore is complete, the platform should be levelled using the utility provided
in setup at Maintenance > Run > Diagnostics > Scale > Leveling Guidance. Refer to section 1.8
for details.
5.8. Leveling Guidance

This feature is available only in POWERCELL terminals used with PowerDeck floor scales.
To assure maximum weighing accuracy and reliable calibration, it is important that floor scales are
installed such that an approximately equal dead load is placed on each load cell.
During factory calibration of a PowerDeck floor scale, the zero counts of each load cell (at a no-load
condition) are stored in the load cell along with other initial factory data. When a PowerDeck floor
scale is first installed, its accuracy is enhanced by ensuring that it is levelled so that the current cell
counts match the stored, factory calibration values as closely as possible.
The Leveling Guidance feature in IND570 POWERCELL terminals provides a graphical comparison of
the current counts vs. the factory calibration counts stored in each load cell of a PowerDeck platform.
This feature is provided as a tool for the service technician during installation, and can be accessed
in setup at Maintenance > Run > Diagnostics > Scale > Leveling Guidance.
In order for Leveling Guidance to be available, the setting at Scale > Type > Application must be
Floor and the # of Load Cells must be 4.

The installation guidance is valid only for platforms with all the original load cells in place. It
should not be used for platforms in which one or more load cells have been replaced.
A bubble level should be used to initially level the PowerDeck platform before accessing the
Leveling Guidance feature.
Figure 1-6: Leveling Guidance Graphic Display
The Leveling Guidance graphic display represents a PowerDeck floor scale and assumes that the load
cells are addressed as node 1 through 4 starting with the corner where the home-run cable exits and
moving in a clockwise direction.
The counts displayed in the center of the graphic indicate how many counts the current reading is
above or below the stored factory value. The load cell with the largest negative count variance from
the stored factory value is highlighted – cell 1 in the example above. This indicates that this load cell
should be shimmed first.
The display updates automatically as the count variances of each load cell change, so shims can be
added or subtracted in an attempt to achieve an acceptable count variance. An acceptable count
variance is determined by the platform size, capacity and the number of increments as defined in the
platform installation manual.
5.9. Problem Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

When properly used and maintained, the IND570 will provide years of reliable service to a customer.
In the unlikely event that the IND570 experiences performance issues, consult Table 1-2 for a list of
symptoms and suggestions for resolving problems that might arise. Additional information found in
section 0, Troubleshooting, will help determine if a problem exists with the IND570 or has an external
cause.
If a problem arises that is not listed in Table 1-2, or if the recommended corrective measures do not
resolve the issue, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Always use qualified electricians to test for problems with the AC or DC power source.

Table 1-2: Performance Symptoms and Potential Corrective Measures
Symptom Suggested Corrective Measures

Display appears to be 1. Press any key on the terminal keypad.
blank and no digits or 2. If there is still no visible display, power cycle the terminal.
text can be seen
3. After power cycle, if nothing can be seen on the display, proceed to the Power
Test to confirm the source of AC or DC power is OK
4. If external power is confirmed, check the status of the 12 VDC LED on the
power supply (refer to section 1.9.1.1.1, Power Supply LED).
5. If the 12 VDC is confirmed, confirm that all harnesses from the power supply
to the main board and to the display PCB are connected and free of breaks or
open wire connections.
6. Check LED 4 on the main board PCB (see Figure 1-8). If LED is OFF, there is
no power to the main board processor and the main board must be replaced.
7. If LED 4 on the main board is ON, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO
service representative for assistance.
Missing information 1. Use the internal display diagnostic test (refer to section 1.9.2.1, Display Test)
from the display or to identify if there are isolated problem areas on the display determine if the
data not readable problem is internal or external to the terminal.
2. If a problem exists, replace the display board and gasket or contact an
authorized METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Weight is fluctuating 1. View Terminal Status. Determine if Signal Quality is “OK”.
uncontrollably 2. Contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Weight display does 1. View Terminal Status. Determine if Excitation voltage measurement is “OK”. If
not change or is not “OK”, refer to section 1.9.1.3, Load Cell and IDNet Power, for further
blanked information and instruction. If “OK”, proceed to step 2.
2. Check wiring between the terminal and the scale/load cell. Look for sharp
angles, broken wires, etc.
3. Check wiring connection at the scale/load cell. Look for broken wires, open
connections or mis-wiring.
4. Check wiring connection at the terminal. Look for broken wires, open
connections or mis-wiring.
5. Contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Weight is shown on the 1. When no platform, load cell or simulator is connected to the terminal, the
display, but the weight display might show a random number, positive, negative, out of range,
terminal is not or continuously fluctuating. These random numbers are the result of electrical
connected to a noise at the amplifier input. These random numbers do not indicate that
platform. IND570 requires service.
“Plug in IDNet” 2. Confirm the IDNet connector is securely attached to the terminal.
message is shown 3. Check wiring between the terminal and the IDNet base. Look for sharp angles,
(IDNet terminals only) broken wires, cuts, etc.
4. Refer to section 1.9.1.3, Load Cell and IDNet Power, for further information
and instruction or contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service

Low excitation voltage 1. View Terminal Status to determine if current Excitation voltage measurement is
error has occurred “OK”.
2. Refer to section 1.9.1.3, Load Cell and IDNet Power, for additional information
and instructions or contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service

Setup parameters 1. View Terminal Status screen. Determine if current battery voltage measurement
change unexpectedly is “OK”.
or programming is lost 2. Replace the internal battery assembly or contact an authorized METTLER
TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Keypad not responding 1. If none of the keypad is responding, confirm there is no active discrete input
programmed as “Disable Keypad”. Refer to the Discrete I/O section in Chapter
3, Configuration, for details on Discrete I/O programming.
2. If keypad response is intermittent, or problems are only occurring with some of
the keys, use the internal keyboard diagnostic test (refer to section 1.9.2.2,
Keyboard Test) to determine which keys are failing.
3. Contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance
in replacing the keyboard overlay.
No communication 1. Check communication wiring to external device. Confirm the transmit and
from a programmed receive lines of the terminal are reversed at the external device connection
serial port (terminal TXD to device RXD and device RXD to terminal TXD).
2. Use the internal serial diagnostic test (refer to section 1.9.2.4, Serial Test) to
determine if the problem is internal or external to the terminal.
3. If problem is internal, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service
No network 1. Check the terminal’s physical connection to the network both at the terminal’s
communications RJ45 port and the network’s RJ45 port.
2. If unable to make a socket connection on the IND570, view Terminal Health
Status to determine number of active SDS Logins. Only 3 are allowed. If this #
is 3 and there are no intentional active socket connections, power cycle the
terminal to clear all existing socket connections.
3. Use the internal network diagnostic test (refer to section 1.9.2.6, Network Test)
to determine if the problem is internal or external to the terminal.
4. If problem is internal, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service
Discrete inputs or 1. Confirm the IND570 is recognizing the installed Discrete I/O option board.
outputs don’t operate 2. Use the discrete input and output internal diagnostic test (refer to section
1.9.2.5, DIO Test) to determine if the problem is internal or external to the
terminal.
3. If the problem is internal, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service
External keyboard 1. Confirm the USB port is enabled for keyboard connection. Refer to the USB
won’t connect Access/Security section in Chapter 3, Configuration.
2. Unplug and reconnect USB keyboard. If no identification prompt is shown,
contact a METTLER TOLEDO service representative.

Node x No Response 1. Check POWERCELL Node x load cell connecting cables.
or Node x Not found 2. Using POWERCELL mapping diagram, determine which network position
error messages might be causing the issue.
displayed
3. Check cable and load cell connections. Replace if necessary.
Weight display shows 1. If a SICSpro Cable-Free Floor Scale (CFS) is connected, observe the home
dashes screen; if the alternating messages “Platform is asleep” and “Add weight to
wake up,” give the scale a sudden jolt to return to normal functionality.
Bluetooth error – scale 1. Check the connection of the indicated Bluetooth module (in the CFS, or
Or attached to the IND570).
Bluetooth error – 2. If the connection is correct, replace the affected module and re-pair the CFS.
IND570
Screen displays 1. In a CFS, the Bluetooth connection is active, but the scale platform is not
“Bluetooth OK – No sending weight data. Refer to the platform’s documentation for diagnostic
scale data” checks.
5.9.1. Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting activities described here are intended to assist a user in identifying whether a
problem is in the IND570 terminal or has an external cause.
5.9.1.1. Diagnostic LEDs
5.9.1.1.1. Power Supply LED

The power supply for the analog, IDNet and SICSpro versions develops 12 VDC to send to the main
PCB and display PCB. An LED near the 12 VDC output connection of the power supply will confirm
the presence of its 12 VDC output.
When 12 VDC is present, the LED is ON. If voltage is absent or outside the required performance
range, the LED will be OFF. If the LED is OFF, replace the power supply PCB or contact an authorized
METTLER TOLEDO service representative for assistance.
Note that there is no LED on the power supply of the POWERCELL version. Refer to the
POWERCELL Main Board LED 4 and LED 12 descriptions below for the POWERCELL power
supply LEDs.
Figure 1-7: 12-VDC LED on Power Supply

5.9.1.1.2. Analog and Digital Main Board LEDs
The behavior of LEDs 1 through 4 varies depending on which main board is installed and what
version of boot code and firmware is loaded. Refer to the tables below for analog and digital main
boards, respectively.
1234
Harsh Environment Model Panel Mount Model

Figure 1-8: Position of LED 4 on Main Board PCB
Table 1-3: Analog Main Board, LEDs 1, 2 and 3
Analog
Boot Code Firmware LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
1.00.0004 ≤ 2.00.0031 ON ON ON
1.00.0006 ≥ 2.00.0033 ON OFF OFF
Table 1-4: Analog Main Board, LED 4
Analog
LED 4 Definition
OFF No power to main board
ON Power supply on main board OK
Table 1-5: Digital (IDNet and SICSpro) Main Boards, LEDs 1, 2 and 3
Digital - IDNet and SICSpro

Boot Code Firmware LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
1.00.0004 ≤ 2.00.0031 ON ON ON
1.00.0006 2.00.0033 –
ON OFF OFF
2.00.0045
1.00.0006 ≥ 2.00.0086 ON Flashes for TxD Flashes for RxD
Table 1-6: Digital (IDNet and SICSpro) Main Boards, LED 4
Digital - IDNet and SICSpro

Firmware LED 4 Definition
OFF No power to main board
≤ 2.00.0045
ON Power supply on main board OK
≥ 2.00.0086 Turns ON for a few seconds at power up then turns OFF and remains OFF

Behavior of LEDs 2 and 3 on Digital Main PCB
In terminals with a digital scale interface, the behavior of main PCB LEDs 2 and 3 differs depending
on whether a platform is connected or not.
With no platform connected:
• LED 3 will turn ON about 3-4 seconds after power-up, remain ON for about 1 second then turn
OFF and remain OFF.
• LED 2 will begin to flash about 5 seconds after power-up then continue to flash.
With a working platform connected:
• LED 3 will turn ON about 3-4 seconds after power-up, remain ON for about 1 second then turn
OFF. There will be random OFF and ON events while communication with the terminal is
established. After communication is established, it will flash at about 6-7 times per second.
• LED 2 will begin to flash about 5 seconds after power-up. There will be random OFF and ON
events while communication with the platform is established. After communication is established,
it will flash at about 6-7 times per second.
5.9.1.1.3. POWERCELL Main Board LEDs
The POWERCELL main board has three groups of diagnostic LEDs numbered from LED 1 through LED
12. The LEDs are shown in Figure 1-9.
Figure 1-9: POWERCELL Main Board LEDs
The functions of the LEDs are described in the tables below. Note that LED 1 through LED 3 will
sequence through different conditions during a power cycle as shown. When working correctly, LED 2
and LED 4 will remain ON during operation.

Table 1-7: Historic Description of LEDs 1 to 3
POWERCELL V1.0031 – V1.00.0060

Function LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
Step 1 ON ON ON
Step 2 OFF OFF OFF
Step 3 ON OFF OFF
Step 4 ON OFF ON
Normal operation OFF ON OFF
Table 1-8: Current Description of LEDs 1 to 3
POWERCELL V2.0001 – V2.01.0001

Function LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
Step 1 ON ON ON
Step 2 OFF OFF OFF
Step 3 ON OFF OFF
Step 4 ON OFF ON
Normal operation ON OFF OFF
Table 1-9: Description, LED 4
LED Status Definition

4 ON Power Supply on main board OK
Table 1-10: Description, LED 4 to LED 9
LED Status Description

5 Flashing POWERCELL network processor OK
6 OFF Software Stack OK
7 ON Software Stack OK
8 -- Not Used
9 Flashing very quickly Interrupt status
Table 1-11: Description, LED 10 to LED 12
LED Status Description

10 Flashing Transmit data to load cells
11 Flashing Receive data from load cells
12 ON POWERCELL network voltage OK
5.9.1.1.4. Ethernet TCP-IP LEDs

The three LEDs on the optional Ethernet PCB have the following diagnostic functions:
• ACT LED: Activity

Flickering = Communication present
• SPD LED: Speed
ON = 100Mb/s
OFF = 10 MB/s
• LINK LED: Link
ON = Ethernet link is established
Figure 1-10: Ethernet TCP/IP LEDs
5.9.1.1.5. PLC Option LEDs

Information on the function of LEDs present of the various PLC option PCBs can be found in the
IND570 PLC Interface Manual , available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.
5.9.1.2. Power Test
If the display is blank, a low excitation voltage error has occurred, or there are intermittent problems
occurring with the IND570, check the condition of the power supply.
First, use a multi-meter to check the input power at the terminal strip on the IND570 power supply.
Panel Model Harsh Environment Model
AC Power
DC Power
Figure 1-11: AC and DC Power Test Points – Panel (left) and Harsh (right)
Incoming power must be within the following ranges, depending on the type of power supply, AC or
DC:

Power Supply Input Voltage Range
AC Power Supply −15% to +10% of the standard 100–240 voltage range
DC Power Supply 24 VDC , −15% to +10%
If insufficient power is present, have a qualified electrician at the site restore power at the source. After
power is restored, test the IND570 for correct operation.
If sufficient voltage is present at the source, the power supply should be checked next.
5.9.1.3. Load Cell and IDNet Power
The power to operate an IDNet or SICSpro base and the excitation voltage for analog load cells are
developed from the 12 VDC supplied from the power supply to the main PCB. The IND570 has short-
circuit protection built into the main board. If the IDNet or SICSpro base or analog load cell circuit
draws too much current (for example, when shorted to ground), the 12 VDC supply will shut itself off.
After the protection circuit is triggered, the terminal will automatically recover (after a brief delay)
when the short is removed, and the 12VDC will become active.
5.9.1.3.1. Analog Load Cells

The IND570 provides an excitation voltage monitoring feature. The terminal performs a measurement
check of the excitation voltage in the following circumstances: at power-up, 1x time per minute during
normal operation, and every time the Terminal Status pages are viewed by a user.
During these excitation voltage checks, the IND570 captures and averages 3 real time measurements
and reports this average as the current excitation voltage on the Terminal Status View.
• If the measured voltage is less than 9.0V, a warning message will be shown in system line "Low
Excitation Voltage" and the Service Icon will activate.
• If the measured voltage is less than 5.0V, a pop-up error message will display "Excitation Voltage
Below Limit" and the Service Icon will activate
If either excitation voltage error occurs, first check the current excitation voltage measurement on the
Terminal Status View. If the current measure is below 9.0V, take the following steps:
1. Check the 12VDC LED on the power supply.

a. If the 12VDC LED is ON, go to step 2.
b. If the 12VCD LED is OFF, replace the power supply.
2. If the 12VDC LED on the power supply is ON, power the terminal down.
3. Disconnect the load cell homerun cable. Wait 90 seconds. Reapply power to the terminal with the
load cell cable disconnected.
4. View the excitation voltage measurement shown on the Terminal Status View.
a. If the excitation voltage measurement is now "OK" (>9.0V), check the analog load cell(s)
and load cell wiring for defects.
b. If the excitation voltage measurement is still below 9.0V, it is recommended that the IND570
be powered down again with the load cell homerun cable disconnected. Wait an additional 5
minutes, reconnect the homerun cable, and power up the IND570.

The IND570 provides a temperature sensitive component to protect the excitation circuit
in rare cases where the load cell circuit demands excessive current (in cases of shorted
cables or moisture in the load cell cable for instance). If this component is activated due
to high current draw of the load cell network, after disconnecting the load cell homerun
cable, it will take several minutes for the component to "cool down" before it will support
normal operation again. If the terminal is powered back on too soon, (without sufficient
cool down time), the excitation circuit will not recover and it will appear the main board
is defective (low excitation) when in fact, the main board is working as designed but has
not been powered down long enough to recover. In this situation, the issue is caused by
excessive current draw by the load cells and the load cell circuit should be further tested.
If after 5 minutes the excitation voltage measurement is still below 9.0V, it is likely that
the analog main board has sustained damage and should be replaced.
If either excitation voltage error occurs, check the current excitation voltage measurement on the
Terminal Status View. If the current measure is below 9.0V, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO
service provider for further assistance.
5.9.1.3.2. IDNet and SICSpro Bases

If the 12 VDC LED on the power supply is ON and a “Connect IDNet Base” or "Connect SICSpro Base"
error has occurred and it is confirmed that the base is correctly connected to the terminal, power the
terminal down, disconnect the base, wait 30 seconds, then reapply power. Plug the base back into
the terminal. If the “Connect IDNet Base” or "Connect SICSpro Base" error message continues, contact
an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service provider for further assistance.
5.9.1.3.3. POWERCELL Load Cells

If LED 12 on the Main Board is ON but the terminal is reporting a "Not Found" error for all nodes,
check the homerun cable wiring and load cell network connections. If the “Not Found” error message
for all nodes continues, contact an authorized METTLER TOLEDO service provider for further
assistance. If LED12 on the Main Board is OFF, it indicates the POWERCELL network voltage is off.
The IND570 POWERCELL terminal provides short circuit protection for the load cell network voltage. If
the network pulls too much current (such as when the supply line is shorted to ground), the terminal
will switch off the voltage. After switching off the voltage, the terminal will check if the short circuit is
still present or not every few minutes. When the short is removed, the terminal will switch the power
back on again automatically. After disconnecting the network from the terminal, allow 1 minute for the
terminal to switch the power back on before testing.
5.9.1.4. Cable-Free Floor Scale Power
Two battery warning messages are provided for the self-powered Cable-Free Floor Scale. The first
message appears when approximately 12 eight-hour days of battery life remain. The second, more
critical, warning appears when there are approximately 5 eight-hour days of battery life remaining.
These estimates of remaining battery life are based on continuous use for eight hours a day at a
25° C nominal temperature, and may vary based on the specific application. METTLER TOLEDO
recommends replacement of the battery immediately when the second warning is shown.
Approx. Battery Est. Battery Life

Displayed Message Voltage Remaining* Required Action
Platform battery low 6.7 volts 12 days Contact authorized METTLER TOLEDO service to

Approx. Battery Est. Battery Life
Displayed Message Voltage Remaining* Required Action
schedule battery replacement in the next 30 days
Warning! Platform 6.4 volts 5 days Have battery replaced by authorized METTLER
battery voltage very TOLEDO service immediately

low
* This is an estimated value and may vary by as much as 50% based on the actual application.
5.9.1.5. WiFi Diagnostics
Only WiFi modules with firmware version 6.00 or newer are fully compatible with the IND570. If a
feature is not working correctly, confirm the module firmware version on the second page of the WiFi
Info Recall screen. Refer to Figure 1-12 for an example. If the module has earlier firmware, replace
the module with one that is running 6.0.0 or newer.
Figure 1-12: WiFi Information Recall Screens
5.9.1.5.1. WiFi Module Status LED

If the IND570 WiFi option is not working properly, note the color of the LED on the module. This LED
indicates the status of the module and the WiFi connection. Refer to Table 1-12. When the LED is
blue and occasionally blinks, this indicates network connectivity and normal operation.
Table 1-12: WiFi Module Status LED
LED Color Status

Green/Yellow Idle state
Purple Connection in progress
Blue Connection active
Blue - blinking Connection active with data traffic
Red – blinking Error
5.9.1.5.2. Startup LED Sequence

If all programming has been configured properly and the programmed Wireless Access Point (WAP)
is available, the LEDs will follow the sequence shown in Table 1-13 after the IND570 is power
cycled. Note the times listed are approximate.
Table 1-13: "Connection OK" LED Sequence
LED Color Timing

Green 2 seconds
Yellow 5 seconds

LED Color Timing
Purple 1 second
Blue 4 seconds
Green 6 seconds
Purple 1 second
Blue Constant with occasional blink
If there is a problem with the configuration or the WAP is not available, the LEDs will follow the
sequence listed in Table 1-14 when the IND570 is powered on. Note the times listed are
approximate.
Table 1-14: "No Connection" LED Sequence
LED Color Timing

Green 2 seconds
Yellow 5 seconds
Purple 5 second
Green/Yellow 1 second
Purple 4 seconds
Green Constant with occasional blink
5.9.1.5.3. WiFi Signal Strength

One of the keys to good WiFi communication is having a strong WiFi signal. When connected to a
network, the IND570 will indicate the WiFi signal strength in the upper right corner of the display. If
the signal strength changes, this symbol will also change. Refer to Table 1-15.
Table 1-15: Signal Strength Graphic
Symbol Description Signal Strength Range

Very weak signal -71 dBm and below
Weak signal -56 to – 70 dBm
Acceptable signal -40 to –55 dBm
Strong signal -39 dBm and above
More details about the WiFi connection are available in the WiFi Info Recall display shown in Figure
1-12. Monitor the RSSI value (signal strength) as you reposition the WiFi module to make sure the
WiFi module is positioned to receive the strongest WiFi signal. The position of the module when using
the remote mounting option and the module’s orientation inside the plastic cover will both affect
signal strength.
When using the remotely-mounted WiFi option, isolating the metal enclosure using nylon
mounting hardware and a rubber isolation pad may improve the signal performance.
In addition to the signal strength indication, when the WiFi option is installed but not connected to a
network the graphic shown in Table 1-16 will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

Table 1-16: WiFi Signal Disconnected Graphic
Symbol Description
WiFI disconnected
5.9.1.5.4. Diagnostic WAP Scan

In setup at the Maintenance > Run > Diagnostics > WiFi Scan branch, a scan can be triggered that
provides details of the 10 access points with the strongest signal. The channel used and the signal
strength are shown with the results, to indicate more detail about available WAPs. Refer toFigure
1-13.
Figure 1-13: Diagnostic Scan Results Screen
5.9.1.5.5. WiFi Connecting and Disconnecting

If the WAP is up and running, the IND570 will connect automatically when it is powered up.
If the IND570 is powered up first and then the wireless access point is powered up, the IND570 will
automatically connect after a short delay. Normally, no action is required to reestablish a network
connection after the terminal is turned off and on.
The IND570 will display a system line message indicating the status of the WiFi connection. Whether
the connection fails or succeeds, additional information may be provided by the terminal. These
potential messages are:
• WiFi connected to access point

• WiFi module removed
• WiFi AP unavailable
• Invalid WiFi passphrase/PSK
• WiFi module error
Troubleshooting
If there is difficulty connecting to a network via WiFi, or sustaining a connection, please review the
following items for topics to investigate.
• Some WAPs will "hide" their SSIDs and not respond to a WiFi scan. In this case, the SSID must
be obtained from the customer.

• Be aware of the line-of-sight between the IND570 WiFi module and the WAP. Objects placed in
the line-of-sight path can influence the WiFi signal causing a dropped connection. After the object
is moved, the connection could reestablish itself causing an intermittent communication.
• Routers and switches often "manage" networks, and they may drop connections to devices that
send data infrequently. This can cause intermittent communication.
5.9.1.6. Battery Test
The IND570 can perform an internal measurement of the BRAM battery voltage. Press the
INFORMATION RECALL softkey, then press the SERVICE ICON softkey . TERMINAL STATUS
softkey takes the user to the Terminal Status Report screens, where additional system
performance details are available, including the current battery voltage. The voltage listed on the left is
the voltage as it was measured at last calibration. The battery voltage listed on the right is the current
measurement taken as the user entered the Terminal Status screens.
Figure 1-14: Terminal Status Screen
5.9.2. Built-in Diagnostics Tests

The IND570 provides several internal diagnostic tests that are accessible in setup mode. Press the
SETUP softkey to view the setup menu tree. Use the DOWN navigation key to scroll down the
menu tree to Maintenance. Press the RIGHT navigation key to expand the menu tree selections for
Maintenance. Scroll down and expand Run. Scroll down and expand Diagnostics. Available
diagnostic setup screens include:
5.9.2.1. Display Test
Displays an alternate off/on dot block pattern. After the alternate off/on cycle, the display will return to
the menu tree.
5.9.2.2. Keyboard Test
Enables testing of the keyboard. Each key that is pressed will be shown on the display. When testing
is complete, press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree.
5.9.2.3. Scale
5.9.2.3.1. Load Cell Output

Displays the current load cell output (active weight) in internal counts. When weight is placed on the
scale, the number of counts should increase. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the menu tree.
This test is not available with IDNet models.

5.9.2.3.2. Calibration Values
Displays the current calibration values for the scale. If these values are recorded after a scale
calibration, and the Main PCB is replaced in the future, the calibration values can be entered here to
transfer the previous calibration to the new Main PCB manually. Press the EXIT softkey to return to
the menu tree.
This feature is not available with IDNet models.
5.9.2.3.3. Shift Values

Displays the shift adjustment values for POWERCELL load cell scales. The shift adjust values can be
viewed and also edited.
5.9.2.3.4. Statistics
Displays statistical information for the scale such as the total number of weighments, the number of
scale overloads, the peak weight weighed on the scale, total number of zero commands and failed
zero commands. These are very helpful when diagnosing scale problems. This information is also
available for view on the Terminal Status screens.
5.9.2.4. Serial Test
Enables testing of the transmit and receive functions on the serial (COM) ports. Select the COM port to
be tested using the COM Port selection box . Only installed and recognized serial ports are available
for testing.
• Press the START softkey and a data string is output repeatedly approximately once every three
seconds. The data is: [Testing COMx: nn] where “x” is the COM port and “nn” is an incrementing
value beginning at 00 and continuing to 99. Each transmission increments this number by one.
• Place a jumper wire between the transmit and the receive terminals (Figure 1-15) on the port
being tested. If the transmit and receive functions of the serial port are functioning correctly, the
same data string that is transmitted will display in the receiving field.
Figure 1-15: Jumper Wire Between Transmit and Receive Terminals
• If another device is connected to the receiving port, any ASCII data received by the IND570 will
display in the receiving field.
• To stop the serial port test, press the STOP softkey .

5.9.2.5. Discrete I/O Test
WARNING
THE INTERNAL DISCRETE I/O RELAY OPTIONS #30113540, OR #30113542 MUST NOT BE
USED IN AN IND570XX TERMINAL. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD
Provides a view of the status of the discrete inputs and allows enabling or disabling of the discrete
outputs for diagnostic purposes. Expand the Discrete I/O branch by pressing the RIGHT navigation
key. Choose if the test will be performed on the local (internal) discrete I/O option or one of the remote
ARM100 modules. Press ENTER when that branch is highlighted.
A warning will appear to remind the tester that the outputs can be turned on manually during this test
so if manual activation of connected devices is not desired, control power to the discrete outputs
should be removed before beginning the test.
WARNING
THE DISCRETE OUTPUTS OF THE IND570 TERMINAL WILL BE MANUALLY ENABLED DURING
THIS TEST. REMOVE OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SO EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT WILL NOT BE
ENERGIZED BY MISTAKE. EXERCISE CARE WHEN MAKING CHECKS, TESTS AND
ADJUSTMENTS THAT MUST BE MADE WITH POWER ON. FAILING TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN BODILY HARM AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
When viewing the test screen, the input status will be shown at the top of the display and the output
status will be shown at the bottom of the display. Focus is shown on Output #1 first. In Figure 1-16,
Input 1 is on, Output 1 is on, and Output 4 is on and in focus.
Figure 1-16: Discrete I/O Test Screen
Focus can be moved to any of the other outputs by using the RIGHT and LEFT navigation keys. The
two softkeys at the bottom of the page will either enable or disable the highlighted output.
Note that when the Discrete I/O Test screen is exited, all outputs will be turned OFF.
5.9.2.6. Network Test
The network test checks the terminal’s Ethernet programming, hardware and firmware. The following
tests are run during this diagnostic process:
• TCP/IP Stack
• This IP Address`

• Gateway address
• Email server
Each step will indicate “Testing” during the test then indicate a Pass or Timeout status.
Figure 1-17: Network Test Screen
If the status is shown as Timeout, it indicates that the IP address or gateway address has not been
programmed in the terminal (see the Communication | Network section of Chapter 3, Configuration for
information on entering the IP and gateway addresses).
5.10. Web Server – Analog, IDNet and SICSpro

The IND570 includes a built-in web server utility that provides valuable tools for examining the
operation of the terminal along with installed options and software. Information available through the
Web Server includes:
• System hardware and software configuration

• Resource utilization data
• Scale statistics
Web Help, a function within the Web Server, supports the following functions:
• Reading shared data variables, viewed either statically or dynamically

• Writing shared data values
• Remote terminal reset
The Web Server is accessed with a web browser program via an Ethernet connection. Access to the
Terminal is provided by using its IP address. An IP address can be manually assigned, or assigned
automatically by the network, depending on how DHCP is configured in setup at Communication >
Network > Ethernet. If DHCP client is enabled, once the terminal is connected to the Ethernet its IP
address will appear in the system information screen. After an IP address for the IND570 has been
entered or automatically assigned using DHCP, record the address and enter it as the URL in the
browser program.
If the connection is successful, the Web Server home page (Figure 1-18) is displayed.

5.10.1. Home Page
When the Web Server is first accessed, the Home page shown in Figure 1-18 appears in the browser
window.
Figure 1-18: Web Server Home Screen
Click the links on this page to visit the respective views, each of which is detailed in the following
sections.
At the bottom of each page accessed, a HOME button is shown which returns the view to the Home
page seen in Figure 1-18 when pressed.

5.10.2. Help File
A help file, accessible from each page via the help button explains the full range of the utility’s
features. Refer to this file for a full explanation of each of the data and utilities available on each
page. Figure 1-19 shows a portion of the help file.
Figure 1-19: Help File
At the bottom of the Help page, a button allows the user to close this second browser
window without exiting the Web Server utility.

5.10.3. View Pages
The system information page (Figure 1-20) provides asset information, installed component part
numbers, software versions and serial numbers, and installed application software. The Channel
Software column is not filled unless the terminal is using an IDNet scale base.
Figure 1-20: System Information Page

5.10.3.2. Resource Utilization
The resource utilization page (Figure 1-21) gives a snapshot of the current status of the terminal,
including power on time and information about the various types of memory used by the IND570.
Figure 1-21: Resource Utilization Page
5.10.3.3. Scale Statistics
The scale statistics page (Figure 1-22) shows a variety of data for the scale.
Figure 1-22: Scale Statistics Page

5.10.3.4. Scale Data
The scale data page (Figure 1-23) shows information, including current configuration and calibration
values, for the scale. The signal quality display permits troubleshooting of the connection between the
IND570 and load cells. When quality is poor, a red bar is displayed. A yellow bar indicates adequate
quality, and green bar means the quality is good, as in the example below.
Figure 1-23: Scale Data Page
5.10.4. Diagnostics & Maintenance Pages

5.10.4.1. Service Alerts
The Service Alert page shows the service icon status at the top of the page. This will be either OK (if
the service icon is not currently active) or show (if the service icon is active).
Below that, the most recent 5 events that triggered the Service Icon will be displayed. Each record
includes time and date information, the error code (if an error code was assigned) and a text

description of the event. These records are the same as the records shown on the Service Info Recall
view on the terminal.
The RESET button at the bottom of the Service Alert page manually resets or clears the Service Icon
from the terminal display.
If security is enabled, a maintenance level security login (or higher) is required to perform the
reset.

5.10.4.2. Log File
The Log File page offers views of each of the four log files available in the IND570. Approximately 8
records can be displayed at one time. Scroll through all of the records in each log using a mouse
and/or keyboard navigation keys.
Figure 1-24: Log File Page

5.10.4.3. Shared Data
The shared data page (Figure 1-25) allows the user to request a display of current values for up to
ten shared data variables at a time. Values are accessed by entering the shared data name in one of
the fields at left. When the Save Changes button at bottom is clicked, the Name fields are saved and
the Values refreshed. The button is in focus when a new entry has been made in a Name field.
Figure 1-25: Read Shared Data Page
To refresh the displayed values without changing any variable names, click on the Manual Refresh
button.
Values may also be refreshed automatically, at one second intervals, by clicking on the Start button.
Once Start is selected, the Stop button is in focus and can be clicked. The current status of this
dynamic display (Stopped or Running) is shown in a field between the two buttons. Note that, as
indicated on the page, Auto Refresh must be stopped before new shared data names can be entered.
If a viewed string is longer than the data display width of 40 characters, the left/right scroll buttons at
the top of the view box can be used to move through the string to view all of it.
For a complete list of available shared data names, refer to the IND570 Shared Data Reference
(30205337). In the example shown in Figure 1-25, the shared data information displayed is as
follows.
Table 1-17: Shared Data Information
Name Data Displayed Interpretation

wt0101 29.2 Current gross weight value
xp0117 5585 Cumulative power on time, in minutes
ce0104 1 Number of ranges defined for the scale
ce0123 400000 Encoder counts at the middle calibration value for the scale
ce0125 16 GEO code set in the Scale calibration page
nt0102 172.18.49.120 Ethernet IP Address

Name Data Displayed Interpretation
wt0103 kg Primary units set in the scale calibration page
5.10.4.4. Write Shared Data
To access the Write Shared Data page, login at the administrator level is required. When prompted,
enter the administrator’s user name and password.
Figure 1-26: Write Shared Data Page
Enter the Shared Data variable name in the Name column at left, and the value to be written to it in
the Value column. Click the Write button. Four Shared Data variables can be modified at a time.
5.10.4.5. Reset Terminal
From this screen, the terminal can be restarted (equivalent to cycling power) or reset to factory
defaults (except for scale settings, scale calibration settings, tables and log files).
When a Reset is performed, the Terminal’s IP address will default to factory settings.
If user security is enabled, access to the Reset Terminal page requires a login at the administrator
level. When prompted, enter the administrator’s user name and password.

Figure 1-27: Reset Terminal Page
5.11. Web Server – POWERCELL

The POWERCELL version of the IND570 includes some changes in the Web Server Interface from the
analog/IDNet/SICSpro version.
5.11.1. Home Page

When the POWERCELL Web Server is first accessed, the Home page shown in Figure 1-28 appears
in the browser window.

Figure 1-28: Web Server Home Screen
Click the links on this page to visit the respective views, each of which is detailed in the following
sections.
At the bottom of each page accessed, a HOME button is shown which returns the view to the Home
page seen in Figure 1-28 when pressed.
5.11.2. Help File

A help file, accessible from each page via the help button explains the full range of the utility’s
features. Refer to this file for a full explanation of each of the data and utilities available on each
page. Figure 1-19 shows a portion of the help file.
At the bottom of the Help page, a button allows the user to close this second browser
window without exiting the Web Server utility.

5.11.3. View Pages
The POWERCELL system information page is the same as the analog/IDNet/SICSpro version. Refer to
Figure 1-20 for details.
5.11.3.2. Terminal Status
The Terminal Status page (Figure 1-29) gives a snapshot of the current status of the terminal,
including power on time, statistics, peak weights and information about the various types of memory
used by the IND570.

Figure 1-29: Terminal Status Page

5.11.3.3. Calibration Data
The Calibration Data page (Figure 1-30) is very similar to the Scale Data page of the
analog/IDNet/SICSpro version. This page shows information, including current configuration and
calibration values, for the scale. The signal quality display permits troubleshooting of the connection
between the IND570 and load cells. A summary of the Calibration and GWP expiration information is
added at the bottom of the page.
Figure 1-30: Calibration Data Page

5.11.3.4. POWERCELL Scale Map & Data
The View POWERCELL Scale Map & Data page (Figure 1-31) shows load cell information for an
installed POWERCELL scale. The graphic representing the scale platform will be either round (number
of POWERCELLs is 1, 3, 5 or 7) or rectangular as shown for number of POWERCELLS 2, 4, 6, and 8
or more. This page provides access to several views, accessible from the drop-down list at upper left:
• Adjusted Counts • Temperature (MT Service only)

• Gross Weight • Input Voltage (MT Service only)
• Communication Errors • Gas Concentration (MT Service Only)
As indicated in the list above, some views are accessible only if the terminal’s MT Service Security
has been unlocked.
On the web pages each cell node is represented by a circle, with different colors to indicate if certain
fault conditions exists. A circle with a red border (as node 7 in the example below) indicates that a
fault condition has been detected, but in a different view. A completely solid red circle indicates that a
fault is present in the current view.
Indicated fault conditions include cell communication errors and enclosure breaches. Click on a cell
to go to its detailed (POWERCELL Load Cell) page.
Figure 1-31: POWERCELL Scale Map and Data Page

If POWERCELL Scale mapping information has been populated correctly in the terminal, the sequence
of the nodes shown will match the exact load cell layout of the platform. In addition, the string of
characters under the graphic shows the connection sequence of load cells in the network. The
sequence starts with HR (Homerun cable) then shows each node number in sequence of network
cable connection and ending with T (termination). This diagram will aid in diagnosing connectivity
problems in the network.

5.11.4. Diagnostics & Maintenance Pages
5.11.4.1. Service Alerts
The Service Alert page for the POWERCELL version is the same as for the analog, IDNet and SICSpro
version.
5.11.4.2. Log File
The Log File page for the POWERCELL version is the same as for the analog, IDNet and SICSpro
version. Refer to Figure 1-24.
5.11.4.3. Shared Data
The shared data page (Figure 1-25) for the POWERCELL version is the same as for the analog, IDNet
and SICSpro version.
5.11.4.4. Write Shared Data
The Write Shared Data page for the POWERCELL version is the same as for the analog, IDNet and
SICSpro version. Refer to Figure 1-26.
5.11.4.5. Reset Terminal
The Reset Terminal page for the POWERCELL version is the same as for the analog, IDNet and
SICSpro version. Refer to Figure 1-27.
5.11.4.6. POWERCELL Statistics
The POWERCELL Statistics page shows, for each cell in the network, the number of cell overloads, the
number of temperature errors, the number of zero drift errors, the number of symmetry span errors,
the number of communication errors and the maximum cell overload value. In addition, it shows the
date of the most recent occurrence for each of these items. Dashes indicate no data for that cell.
Figure 1-32: POWERCELL Statistics
5.11.4.7. POWERCELL Shift and Count Data
The POWERCELL Shift and Count Data page shows the shift adjust value, calibrated zero counts, last
zero counts, high calibration counts, live counts and adjusted live counts for all cells in the network.
Cell and scale errors are also shown on this page. Refer to Figure 1-33 for an example.

Figure 1-33: POWERCELL Shift and Count Data
5.11.4.8. Load Cell Symmetry
The Load Cell Symmetry page for the POWERCELL version shows the variance between the stored
symmetry values and the actual values. The variance is shown as a percentage of the weight applied.
Refer to Figure 1-34 for an example of this page. In this example, symmetry checking is disabled so
no difference values are listed.
Figure 1-34: Load Cell Symmetry
5.11.4.9. POWERCELL Load Cell
The POWERCELL Load Cell page can be chosen to show specific data from either the terminal or from
any of the load cells. The view can be switched by making a different selection in the drop down box
in the upper right of the display. Much of the data here can only be seen only if the terminal’s MT
Service Security has been unlocked. An example "unlocked" terminal view is shown in Figure 1-35
and an example "unlocked" load cell view is shown in Figure 1-36.

Figure 1-35: POWERCELL Terminal Data
Figure 1-36: POWERCELL Load Cell Data
5.12. Master Reset

A master reset function is provided to allow reset of all IND570 terminal settings to the factory default
settings (refer to Appendix A, Default Settings).
The master reset typically is performed under these circumstances:
• When a software configuration problem arises that cannot be resolved without starting from the
factory default settings.

• When user security is enabled to protect unauthorized access or use, and the “admin” account
password is lost.
• After an application hardware key (I-button) is installed or removed.
After a firmware upgrade is performed (recommended).NOTE: Ensure that terminal configuration

and calibration is backed up to a USB memory device before performing a Master Reset. This
data can be reloaded into the terminal after the Master Reset is complete.
5.12.1. To initiate a master reset

1. Remove AC or DC power from the terminal.
2. Place both switches SW1-1 and SW1-2 in the ON position, as shown in Figure 1-37.
Figure 1-37: Metrology Switch Location
If a reset of calibration data is also required, set SW2-1 to ON. The position of SW2-1 (indicated
in Figure 1-38) determines whether metrologically significant EEPROM (scale, calibration) data is
reset when a master reset is performed. If SW2-1 is set to OFF, EEPROM data will not be affected
by the master reset.
Figure 1-38: Location of Switch SW2-1
3. Apply AC or DC power. During the power up sequence, the display will indicate a warning
message “WARNING! Master Reset ALL setup blocks. Continue?”
4. Press ENTER to perform a master reset and return all settings to factory defaults. This initiates a
power cycle and returns the terminal to the home screen.
To cancel and exit without carrying out a master reset, do not press ENTER. Remove power.
Return SW1-1 and SW1-2 (and SW2-1 if needed) to their original positions. Reapply AC or DC
power.
5. Return SW1-1 and SW1-2 (and SW2-1 if needed) to the OFF positions.

5.13. Proactive Alarming and Alerting
IND570 provides many methods for proactively alerting both a local operator of the equipment as
well as a remote maintenance group or service provider that the IND570 is in an error condition or
requires attention. These proactive alerting measures include:
• Email messages
• Activation of the Service Icon
• System Alarm discrete output
Information regarding setup of each of these functions can be found throughout the IND570 Technical
Manual. Section 1.13.4 provides a summary of which proactive alarming and alerting actions are
initiated when certain conditions occur in the IND570.
5.13.1. Email Alerts

Details on the automatic and manual email functions are listed in Section 2.10.5. Email configuration
guidelines are documented in Section 3.8.7.9.
5.13.2. Service Icon

Please refer to Sections 2.10.4 and 3.9.2.5.9 for details regarding function and reset of the Service
Icon.
5.13.3. System Alarm and System OK Discrete Outputs

The System OK discrete output remains in the "ON" condition unless the IND570 is forced into an
"Invalid Weight" state. Invalid Weight conditions also set the System Error Alarm to "ON".
If the System Error Alarm output is "ON", the System OK output will always be in an "OFF" state. There
are no situations where both outputs will be found in the same ON or OFF condition.
5.13.4. System Conditions that Trigger a Proactive Alarm/Alert

Table 1-18 summarizes the system conditions that will trigger a proactive alarm or alert function in
the IND570, and identifies the type(s) of alarm or alert that is activated.

Table 1-18: System Conditions that Trigger a Proactive Alarm/Alert
Codes for E-mail:
A Alarm I Information F Fatal
E Event W Warning S Service
IND570 Error Log Service System Alarm

Error/Event Record Icon Discrete Output Email (Y/N - Displayed or Recorded
Code (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) Category) Error/Event Message Comment(s)
POWERCELL node * temperature difference
A00*2D Y N N Y-I
warning
POWERCELL node * severe temperature
A00*2E Y Y N Y–W
difference
A00006 N N Y Y–W Scale blanked over capacity
A00007 N N N N Scale under zero (weight value)
A00013 N N N Y–W Zero failed - Range
A00023 N N N Y–I Maximum peak weight updated
A00024 Y N Y Y-W Power-up zero not captured
A00025 Y Y Y Y–F Low excitation voltage Occurs when excitation voltage measures less than 9.0V
Potential analog section saturation. Recalibrate
A00026 Y N N N
with new capacity.
Data from the platform is corrupt, while in ASM (Advanced
A00030 N N N N Data checksum error. Please try again.
Setup Mode).
B00001 Y N Y N Zero required Zero function for R51 MID approval has timed out
D00101: Remote 1.0.x Error
D00001 Y Y Y Y–W D00201: Remote 2.0.x Error Indicates a communication issue with ARM100 modules
D00301: Remote 3.0.x Error
E00001 Y Y N Y–F Battery voltage extremely low
E00002 Y N N Y–W Battery voltage low
E00003 N N N Y–W System error alarm triggered
E00004 N N N Y–I Battery replaced
E00005 Y N N N Internal Flash error
I00001 Y N Y Y–W File open error Occurs when TaskExpert file fails to execute
I00006 Y N N N No line number TaskExpert error
I00007 Y N N N Record not found TaskExpert error

I00008 Y N N N RETURN without GOSUB TaskExpert error
I00009 Y N N N Incomplete Statement TaskExpert error

I0000A Y N N N ON without GOTO or GOSUB TaskExpert error
I0000B Y N N N Value Out of Range TaskExpert error
I0000C Y N N N Syntax Error TaskExpert error
I0000D Y N N N Invalid Device Number TaskExpert error
I0000E Y N N N Device Error TaskExpert error
I0000F Y N N N Error in operating system command. TaskExpert error
I00010 Y N N N Argument must be a string TaskExpert error
I00011 Y N N N Bad event definition TaskExpert error
I00012 Y N N N Type mismatch TaskExpert error
I00013 Y N N N Argument is not an array name TaskExpert error
I00014 Y N N N Out of data TaskExpert error
I00015 Y N N N Overflow TaskExpert error
I00016 Y N N N Improper FOR-NEXT TaskExpert error
I00017 Y N N N Undefined function TaskExpert error
I00018 Y N N N Divide by zero TaskExpert error
I00019 Y N N N Cannot redimension variable TaskExpert error
I0001A Y N N N Error DIM command TaskExpert error
I0001B Y N N N Illegal command TaskExpert error
I0001C Y N N N Variable has too many dimensions TaskExpert error
I0001D Y N N N Invalid Shared Data name TaskExpert error
I0001E Y N N N Program too big TaskExpert error
I0001F Y N N N Line too big TaskExpert error
I00020 Y N N N Shared data string too long TaskExpert error
I00021 Y N N N No access to remote TaskExpert error
I00022 Y N N N UNICODE conversion error TaskExpert error
I00024 Y N N N Database already in use TaskExpert error
I00025 Y N N N Database access error TaskExpert error

I00026 Y N N N Bad table index TaskExpert error
I00027 Y N N N Table command error TaskExpert error
I00028 Y N N N Task Expert not authorized TaskExpert error
I00029 Y N N N Custom application not authorized TaskExpert error
I0002A Y N N N Pac application not authorized TaskExpert error
I0002B Y N N N Main board switch 2 set TaskExpert error
I0002C Y N N N Application not authorized TaskExpert error
L00*5B Y N N N Node * no response.
L00*5C Y N N N Node * negative out of range
L00*5F Y Y N Y-S POWERCELL node * enclosure break
L00*78 Y N N N POWERCELL node * initializing
L00*79 Y Y Y Y-F Node * not found
L00*7A Y Y N Y-S POWERCELL node * gas monitor failure
L00*81 Y Y N Y-S LC Com Error - Run Flat
L00*82 Y Y Y Y–F Fatal symmetry error
L00*83 Y Y Y Y–F Fatal LC com error
L00*85 Y Y Y Y-F Fatal zero drift error
Displayed at system start-up, and every four hours, when
L00024 Y Y N Y-F Warning – Platform battery voltage very low two to seven days of Cable-Free Floor Scale platform
battery life remain.
L00056 Y N Y Y-S POWERCELL channel not found
L00057 Y Y Y Y-F POWERCELL board access error
L00058 Y N N N POWERCELL board response timeout
L00059 Y Y N Y–F POWERCELL board invalid protocol response
L0005D Y Y N Y-S POWERCELL command failed
L0005E Y N N N POWERCELL CalFree cells don't match
POWERCELL board major overvoltage or
L00064 Y N N Y–I
overcurrent
L00065 Y N N Y–I POWERCELL board major undervoltage

POWERCELL board minor overvoltage or
L00076 Y N N Y–I
overcurrent
L00077 Y N N Y–I POWERCELL board minor undervoltage
L00080 Y Y N Y-S Symmetry Error - Run Flat
L00084 Y Y N Y-S Zero drift – Run Flat
L00087 Y Y Y Y–W Connect IDNet base Terminal does not detect an IDNet platform
L00088 Y Y Y Y–W MELSI error
L00089 Y N Y Y–F Excitation voltage below acceptable limit Excitation voltage is measuring less than 5.0V
Terminal does not detect that a digital scale interface is
L00090 Y Y Y Y–W No digital scale interface
connected to the terminal main board
L00091 Y Y Y Y–W Connect SICSpro scale Terminal does not detect a SICSpro platform
L00092 N Y N Y–W FACT failed - 3 consecutive failed attempts
L00093 Y Y Y Y-S Load cell mismatch – scale disabled
L00094 Y Y Y Y-W Low supply voltage
L00096 N Y N Y-W Loading Alert
Displayed at system start-up, and every day at 10 a.m.,
L00097 Y N N Y-W Platform battery low when approximately one month of Cable-Free Floor Scale
platform battery life remains.
L00098 Y N N Y-I PWRCL Network initializing POWERCELL version only
The Bluetooth module attached to the IND570 is not
L0009A Y Y Y Y–F Bluetooth error – IND570
communicating.
The Bluetooth module in the scale base is not
L0009B Y Y Y Y–F Bluetooth error- scale
communicating.
The scale is not communicating data to its Bluetooth
L0009C Y Y Y Y-F Bluetooth OK - No scale data
module
L0009D N N N N Platform MAC is null The scale platform has no MAC address.
Shown if weight data from platform fails a checksum test 5
L0009E Y Y Y N Invalid Weight Data
times.
M00002 N N N Y-I Zero Calibration complete
M00003 N N N Y-I Span Calibration complete
M00004 N N N Y-I CalFree Calibration successful

M00012 N N N Y-I Calibration values manually edited
M00019 N N N Y-I Step Calibration complete
M0001A N N N Y-I Calibration test passed
M0001B N N N Y-I Sensitivity test passed
M0001C N N N Y-I Eccentricity test passed
M0001D N N N Y-I Repeatability test passed
M0001E N N N Y-I Service Icon manually reset
M0001F N N N Y-S Configuration backup complete
M00020 N N N Y-S Calibration backup complete
M00021 N N N Y-I *** Log cleared '***' indicates the name of the Log file that was cleared
M0002D N N N N Monitor Cell Overload
M0002E N N N N Monitor Cell Zero Drift Success
M0002F N N N N Monitor Cell Zero Drift Failure
M00030 N N N N Monitor Symmetry Drift Failure
M00031 N N N N Monitor Symmetry Comm Success
M00032 N N N N Monitor Symmetry Comm Failure
M00033 N N N N Monitor Symmetry Check Success
M0003B N N N N Service Icon status change - ON to OFF
M0003C N N N N Service Icon status change - OFF to ON
M0003D N N N N Configuration Restored from USB
M0003E N N N N Calibration restored from USB
M0003F N N N N Calibration expired - No action Occurs when Calibration Management is set to "No Action"
N00001 Y Y N N Invalid MAC Address Cannot be resolved. Main board requires replacement.
N00002 N N N Y-I ***' exported via USB '***' indicates the name of exported file
Calibration expired. Scale disabled. Run Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm &
O00033 N Y N Y–W
Calibration test. Disable"
Factory pre-calibration checksum error. Main Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm &
O00049 Y Y N N
board cannot be used. Replace main board. Disable"
Sensitivity expired. Scale disabled. Retest Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm &
O0004E N Y N Y-W
required. Disable"

Eccentricity expired. Scale disabled. Retest Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm &
O0004F N Y N Y-W
required. Disable"
Repeatability expired. Scale disabled. Retest Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm &
O00050 N Y N Y-W
required. Disable"
Calibration, Configuration, TaskExpert, Template backup to
O00052 Y N N N Backup failure
USB failed to complete
Calibration test passed but a Warning Limit failure was
O00056 N N N Y-W Calibration - Warning Limit failure
recorded.
Sensitivity test passed but a Warning Limit failure was
O00057 N N N Y-W Sensitivity - Warning Limit failure
recorded.
Eccentricity test passed but a Warning Limit failure was
O00058 N N N Y-W Eccentricity - Warning Limit failure
recorded.
Repeatability test passed but a Warning Limit failure was
O00059 N N N Y-W Repeatability - Warning Limit failure
recorded.
Calibration test failed because a Control Limit failure was
O0005A N Y N Y-F Calibration - Control Limit failure
recorded.
Sensitivity test failed because a Control Limit failure was
O0005B N Y N Y-F Sensitivity - Control Limit failure
recorded.
Eccentricity test failed because a Control Limit failure was
O0005C N Y N Y-F Eccentricity - Control Limit failure
recorded.
Repeatability test failed because a Control Limit failure was
O0005D N Y N Y-F Repeatability - Control Limit failure
recorded.
O00063 N Y N N Calibration Failure
Terminal failed to successfully transfer a file to a USB
O0006F Y N N N USB export error
memory device.
O00070 N N N Y-W SW1-1 OFF after being ON
O00080 N Y N Y-I Calibration expired. Run Calibration Test. Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm Only"
O00081 N Y N Y-I Sensitivity expired. Please run Sensitivity Test. Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm Only"
Eccentricity expired. Please run Eccentricity
O00082 N Y N Y-I Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm Only"
Test.
Repeatability expired. Please run Repeatability
O00083 N Y N Y-I Occurs when Calibration Expiration is set to "Alarm Only"
Test.
P00002 Y N N Y-W PLC is offline PLC is ‘Offline’ after being confirmed ‘Online’

When Change Log reaches 100%, no more writes to
S00002 N N N Y-W Change Log at 75%
shared data will occur. This can affect terminal function
S00003 N N N Y-W Change Log at 90%
shared data will occur. This can affect terminal function.
S00004 N Y N Y-F Change Log at 100%
shared data will occur. This can affect terminal function.
Error occurs when scale type is "Remote" and incoming
T00001 Y N Y N Remote scale – No data transfer
data transfer is not detected.

6 Parts and Accessories
WARNING
IF THE KEYBOARD, DISPLAY LENS OR ENCLOSURE IS DAMAGED ON A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 APPROVED
IND570xx TERMINAL THAT IS USED IN A DIVISION 2 OR ZONE 2/22 AREA, THE DEFECTIVE COMPONENT MUST BE
REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. REMOVE POWER IMMEDIATELY AND DO NOT REAPPLY POWER UNTIL THE DISPLAY LENS,
KEYBOARD OR ENCLOSURE HAS BEEN REPLACED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD
6.1. Harsh Enclosure
6.1.1. Harsh Enclosure Parts
Item No. Part Description Part No.

Front cover with attached keyboard – IND570 (analog, IDNet, SICSpro) 30130815
Front cover with attached keyboard - IND570xx (analog, IDNet, SICSPro,
1 30130838
POWERCELL)
Front cover with attached keyboard – IND570 (POWERCELL) 30344967
Keyboard assembly (membrane and harness) – IND570 (all) 30237702
Not shown
Keyboard assembly (membrane and harness) - IND570xx (all) 30237703

2 Front cover ground straps (harsh enclosure) 72184340
AC power supply PCB with harness 30130817
Parts and Accessories
3 AC power supply PCB with harness (POWERCELL only) 30344968

DC power supply PCB with harness 30130818
Power supply harness only (analog, IDNet, SICSpro) 30247471
4
Power supply harness only (POWERCELL) 30344969
OLED display assembly, thick lens for IND570xx, display gasket
30552913
5 (discontinued)
LCD display assembly, thick lens for IND570xx, display gasket 30537950
Power supply plastic cover (either AC or DC) 30130819
6
Power supply plastic cover (POWERCELL only) 30344970
7 Display harness (OLED and LCD) 30237704
IDNet harness and connector 30139557
SICSpro harness and connector 30282884
8
M12 PowerDeck harness and connector (not certified for use with
30411436
IND570xx POWERCELL)
Main PCB, analog – IND570 30130823
Main PCB, analog – IND570xx 30130825
Main PCB, IDNet and SICSpro – IND570 30130824
9 Main PCB, SICSpro – IND570xx 30130826
Main PCB, IDNet – IND570xx 30411460
Main PCB, POWERCELL – IND570 30344965
Main PCB, POWERCELL – IND570xx 30344971
Plastic main PCB cover, analog 30237705
10 Plastic main PCB cover, IDNet and SICSpro 30237706
Plastic main PCB cover, POWERCELL 30344966
IDNet scale interface PCB 30130816
11
SICSpro scale interface PCB 30282883
12 Battery assembly, with connecting harness 30237707
IND570 rear housing assembly, US Includes blank plugs in all

line cord (analog, IDNet, SICSpro) -not openings, appropriate labels, 30237690
available for IND570xx and power cord
13 Note: Requires special
IND570 rear housing assembly, handling – data label
Schuko (EU) line cord (analog, IDNet, must be re-created with 30237691
SICSpro) - not available for IND570xx original serial number.

IND570 rear housing assembly, US

line cord (POWERCELL) - not available 30345016
for IND570xx
2 fixed angle mounting brackets (harsh enclosure) 71209353

Gland and plug kit (harsh enclosure), includes 2 16mm glands, 2
30130830
16mm blanks, 1 25mm gland, 1 25mm blank
Gland and plug kit (ATEX, IECEx) - IND570xx 30130837
POWERCELL gland kit 72243220
Conduit hub kit (cFMus) - IND570xx 30130839
Schuko (EU) line cord 71207880
Not shown
Switzerland line cord 71207881
UK line cord 71207882
Australia line cord 71207883
India / South Africa line cord 72205937
U.S. line cord 71207879
Denmark line cord 30254839
Line cord with ferrules, no plug (ATEX, IECEx) – IND570xx 72227501

6.2. Panel-Mount Enclosure
6.2.1. Panel Enclosure Parts

1 2 side mounting clamps and 4 set screws 30130835
Keyboard assembly (membrane and harness) – IND570 30237702
Not shown
Keyboard assembly (membrane and harness) – IND570xx 30237703
OLED display assembly, thick lens for IND570xx, display gasket
30552913
2 (discontinued)
LCD display assembly, thick lens for IND570xx, display gasket 30537950
AC power supply PCB with harness 30130817
3 AC power supply PCB with harness (POWERCELL only) 30344968
DC power supply PCB with harness 30130818
Power supply harness only (analog, IDNet, SICSpro) 30247471
4
Power supply harness only (POWERCELL) 30344969
Power supply plastic cover (either AC or DC) 30130819
5
Power supply plastic cover (POWERCELL only) 30344970
6 Display harness (OLED and LCD) 30237704

Main PCB, analog 30130823
Main PCB, analog – IND570xx 30130825
Main PCB, IDNet and SICSpro 30130824
7 Main PCB, SICSpro – IND570xx 30130826
Main PCB, IDNet – IND570xx 30411460
Main PCB, POWERCELL – IND570 30344965
Main PCB, POWERCELL – IND570xx 30344971
Plastic main PCB cover, analog 30237705
8 Plastic main PCB cover, IDNet and SICSpro 30237706
Plastic main PCB cover, POWERCELL 30344966
9 Battery assembly, with connecting harness 30237707
IDNet scale interface PCB 30130816
10
SICSpro scale interface PCB 30282883
IDNet harness and connector 30139583
SICSpro harness and connector 30282885
11
M12 PowerDeck harness and connector (not certified for use with
30411436
IND570xx POWERCELL)
12 Options plastic cover with inserts 30130821
13 Metal rear cover assembly, includes 3 screws, Ethernet and IDNet covers 30130822
14 Sealing gasket (panel mount enclosure) 71209390
15 Panel stiffener bracket (IND570xx) 30282898
6.3. Miscellaneous Parts

Part Description Part No.
Hardware kit, includes 4 copper standoffs, 6 M4 screws (two lengths), 4 M3 screws,
30130831
Ethernet and IDNet protective covers for panel-mount, 4 plastic plugs
Connector kit, includes 1 6-pin, 1 8-pin, 1 2-pin and 1 3-pin green connector 30130832
Connector kit (POWERCELL only), includes 1 2-pin, 1 3-pin, 1 5-pin and 1 7-pin green
30345015
connector
Option connectors kit, includes 4 8-pin (two sizes), 1 7-pin, 1 3-pin, 2 4-pin (two sizes),
30139585
2 10 pin (two sizes), 1 5-pin
Capacity label kit (includes 5 labels) 64057354

6.4. Options and Accessories
6.4.1. Positionable Mounting Bracket

Single hole mounted swivel/ tilt bracket (fits IND570 terminals
22015188
manufactured before May 2016)
Single hole mounted swivel/tilt bracket (fits IND570 terminals
22020286
manufactured May 2016 and later with VESA hole spacing)
6.4.2. Mounting Bracket Adapter Plate

Adapter plate and hardware to adapt older bracket hole spacing
from 22015188 bracket to new VESA hole spacing in IND570 30353299
terminals manufactured May 2016 and later.
6.4.3. External USB Adapter (harsh)

External USB port for harsh terminal. Includes internal extension harness and IP68
cover. 30139559
Not certified for use in IND570xx

6.4.4. External Ethernet Adapter

External Ethernet port for harsh terminal. Includes internal extension harness only.
Part number 301395652 can be used with cable part number 22017610 (Cable,
M12 to Ethernet-RJ45) 30139561
Not certified for use in IND570xx
6.4.5. External Metrology Sealing Kit

Weights and Measures Sealing Kit (harsh and panel)
Includes 3 special screws, wire and plastic clasp/seal for W&M application. Additional 30130836
plastic cover, metal bracket and 4th unique screw are provided for W&M applications
in China.
Spare wire seal 72996394
METTLER TOLEDO self-destructing security sealing label for W&M applications 68001451

6.4.6. MID Labelset – IND570

MID Labelset – IND570 30300815
6.4.7. IND Terminals – Harsh Enclosure Clip Release Tool

Harsh enclosure clip release tool for IND terminals 64092698

6.4.8. Ethernet TCP/IP Interface

Ethernet TCP/IP option 30113538
6.4.9. Analog Output

Analog Output option 30113588
6.4.10. ControlNet PLC Interface

ControlNet option 30113544

6.4.11. DeviceNet PLC Interface

DeviceNet option 30116110
6.4.12. EtherNet/IP – Modbus TCP PLC Interface

EtherNet/IP – Modbus TCP option 30116112
6.4.13. PROFIBUS, Harsh Enclosure

PROFIBUS, harsh enclosure option 30113590

6.4.14. PROFIBUS, Panel Enclosure

PROFIBUS, panel-mount enclosure option 30113589
6.4.15. PROFINET PLC Interface

PROFINET option 30260484
6.4.16. COM2/COM3 Interface

COM2/COM3 interface option 30113539

6.4.17. DIO, Relay, 5 Inputs, 8 Outputs

DIO - 5 inputs, 8 outputs, relay option 30113540
6.4.18. DIO, Solid State, 5 Inputs, 8 Outputs

DIO - 5 inputs, 8 outputs, solid state option 30113541
6.4.19. COM2/COM3/DIO, Relay, 2 Inputs, 5 Outputs

COM2/COM3/DIO (2 inputs, 5 outputs, relay) option 30113542

6.4.20. COM2/COM3/DIO, Solid State, 2 Inputs, 5 Outputs

COM2/COM3/DIO (2 inputs, 5 outputs, solid state) option 30113543
6.4.21. WiFi Option Kit, Terminal-Mounted

WiFi Option Kit, Terminal-Mounted 30499148

6.4.22. WiFi Option Kit, Remotely-Mounted

WiFi Option Kit, Remotely-Mounted 30499149
6.5. Software Applications

Application kits include application hardware key (ibutton), documentation and software files for
download into the terminal (if required)
6.5.1. TaskExpert

TaskExpert 30139632
6.5.2. COM-570

COM-570 30139633

6.5.3. COM-570/TaskExpert

COM-570 and TaskExpert 30139634
6.5.4. Fill-570

Fill-570 30139635
6.5.5. Fill-570/TaskExpert

Fill-570 and TaskExpert (Requires V2.00.0033 or newer
30139636
firmware to operate correctly)
6.5.6. Fill-570/COM-570
Fill-570 and COM-570 30139637
6.5.7. Drive-570
Drive-570 30139638
6.5.8. Drive-570/TaskExpert

Drive-570 and TaskExpert 30139639
6.5.9. Drive-570/COM-570

Drive-570 and COM-570 30139640

A. Default Settings
A.1. Setup Defaults and Security Access
The following tables list the factory default settings of the IND570 along with the security level
required to access each IND570 setup parameters or setup function (if user security is Enabled).
Not all settings are available for all scale types. The Scale section (Table A-1) includes separate
columns for each scale type. If a setting is available for the scale type, the default setting is listed
in the corresponding column. Parameters listed with dashes (--) are not available for that scale
type.
Table A-1: Setup Defaults and Security Access – Scale Branch
Setup Feature Default Value Security Access

Analog Scale IDNet Scale SICSpro Scale POWERCELL Scale
Scale – Type
Name Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1 Scale 1 Maintenance
Scale Type (automatically
Analog IDNet SICSpro POWERCELL Administrator
determined)
Platform Serial Number -- -- Display only -- --
Application -- -- -- Vehicle Administrator
Approval None -- Display only None Administrator
Number of Load Cells -- -- -- 8 Administrator
Class III III Display only III Administrator
Verified Interval – Refer to
e=d e=d Display only e=d Administrator
3.5.1.1.5.
Power Up Delay – Refer to
Disabled -- -- -- Administrator
3.5.1.1.6.
Scale – Advanced Setup Mode
Advanced Setup Mode (ASM) is found only in the SICSpro type scales. Settings such as Capacity, Increment,
Administrator
Zero, Tare, Filtering and Calibration are found within ASM.
Scale – Capacity & Increment
Determined by
Primary Units kg -- kg Administrator
platform
# of Ranges 1 -- -- 1 Administrator
>|1|< 50 x 0.01 -- -- 50 x 0.01 Administrator
Blank Over Capacity 5d -- -- 5d Administrator
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide A-1

x10 Always -- Disabled -- -- Administrator
Default Settings
Scale – Calibration
Access to IDNet
Service Mode -- -- -- Administrator
Service Mode
Geo Code 16 -- -- 16 Administrator
Base Serial Number [blank] [blank] -- [blank] Administrator
Calibration Units kg -- -- Kg Administrator
Linearity Adjust Disabled -- -- Disabled Administrator
Analog Gain Jumper 3 mV/V -- -- -- Administrator
CalFree Cell Capacity 50 -- -- -- Administrator
CalFree Cell capacity Unit kg -- -- -- Administrator
CalFree Rated Cell Output 3 mV/v -- -- -- Administrator
CalFree Estimated Preload 0 -- -- 0.00 Administrator
CalFree Estimated Preload
kg -- -- kg Administrator
Unit
Capture Zero -- -- -- -- Administrator
Capture Span -- -- -- -- Administrator
Step Calibration Test Administrator
[blank] -- -- [blank]
Weight
Scale – Zero – AZM & Display
Auto Zero Gross -- -- Gross Administrator
Auto Zero Enabled Enabled -- -- Administrator
Auto Zero Range 0.5 d ** -- 3d Administrator
Under Zero Blanking 5d ** -- 5d Administrator
Power up Restart Restart -- Restart Administrator
Timed Zero Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Administrator
Scale – Zero – Ranges
Power Up Zero Disabled -- -- Disabled Administrator
Power Up Range +0%−0% -- -- +0%−0% Administrator
Pushbutton Zero Enabled Enabled -- Enabled Administrator
Pushbutton Range +2%−2% -- -- +2%−2% Administrator
Scale – Tare – Types
Pushbutton Tare Enabled Enabled -- Enabled Administrator
Keyboard Tare Enabled Enabled -- Enabled Administrator
Net Sign Correction Disabled Disabled -- Disabled Administrator
A-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

Terminal Tare -- Disabled -- -- Administrator
Scale – Tare – Auto Tare
Auto Tare Disabled Disabled -- Disabled Administrator
Tare Threshold Weight 0 kg 0 kg -- 0 kg Administrator
Reset Threshold Weight 0 kg 0 kg -- 0 kg Administrator
Motion Check Enabled Enabled -- Enabled Administrator
Scale – Tare – Auto Clear
Auto Clear Tare Disabled Disabled -- Disabled Administrator
Clear Threshold Weight 0 kg 0 kg -- 0 kg Administrator
Motion Check Enabled Enabled -- Enabled Administrator
Clear After Print Disabled Disabled -- Disabled Administrator
Clear With Zero Disabled Disabled -- Disabled Administrator
Power Up Restart Restart -- Restart Administrator
Scale – Units
Second Unit None Administrator
Third Unit None Administrator
Power Up Restart Administrator
Custom Factor 1 Administrator
Custom Name Cust Administrator
Custom Increment 0.1 Administrator
Scale – Rate
Weight Units None Maintenance
Time Units Seconds Maintenance
Measurement Period 1 Supervisor
Output Average 1 5 Supervisor
Scale – Filter
Low Pass Frequency 2.0 Hz -- -- 2.0 Hz Maintenance
Low Pass # of Poles 8 -- -- 8 Maintenance
Notch Filter Frequency 30 Hz -- -- 30 Hz Maintenance
Stability Filter Disabled -- -- Disabled Maintenance
Vibration -- Average Conditions -- -- Maintenance
Weighing Process -- Universal Weighing -- -- Maintenance
Scale – Stability
Motion Range 1d -- -- 1d Administrator

No-motion Interval 0.3 seconds -- -- 0.3 seconds Administrator
Default Settings
Stability -- 2 -- -- Administrator
Timeout 3 seconds 3 seconds 3 seconds 3 seconds Maintenance
Scale – Log or Print
Minimum Wt. 0 kg Maintenance
Interlock Disabled Maintenance
Automatic Disabled Maintenance
Reset on Return, 0 kg Maintenance
Threshold Wt. 0 kg Maintenance
Motion Check Disabled Maintenance
Scale – MinWeigh
MinWeigh Disabled Supervisor
Uncertainty Uo 0 kg Supervisor
Uncertainty c 0 Supervisor
Tolerance 0.1 Supervisor
Safety Factor 1 Supervisor
MinWeigh Value 0 kg Supervisor
Scale – Reset
Reset branch to factory
-- Administrator
defaults
Table A-2: Setup Defaults and Security Access – Application, Terminal, Communication and Maintenance
Branches

Application – Memory – Alibi
Alibi Memory Disabled Administrator
Print from Setup -- Supervisor
Application – Memory – Tare Table
Description Disabled Maintenance
Totalization Disabled Maintenance
Clear Table -- Maintenance
Records 01–99 [blank] Supervisor
Application – Memory – Message Table
Clear Table -- Supervisor

Application – Memory – Target Table
Mode None Maintenance
Tolerance Type Target Deviation Maintenance
Output Type Concurrent Maintenance
Totalization Disabled Maintenance
Application – Operation – Target
Source Displayed Weight Maintenance
Latching Enabled Maintenance
Motion Check Disabled Maintenance
Application – Operation – Comparators
Source None Supervisor
Active < Supervisor
Description [blank] Supervisor
Limit 0 Supervisor
High Limit 0 Supervisor
Clear Comparators -- Maintenance
Application – Operation – Totalization
Mode None Maintenance
Clear GT on Print Disabled Maintenance
Subtotal Disabled Maintenance
Clear ST on Print Disabled Maintenance
Convert Weight Enabled Maintenance
Application – Operation – ID1…ID4
Mode Disabled Maintenance
Threshold (ID1 only) 0 Maintenance
Reset (ID1 only) 0 Maintenance
Looping Disabled Maintenance
Application – Discrete I/O – Inputs
Discrete Inputs [blank] Maintenance
Application – Discrete I/O – Outputs
Discrete Outputs [blank] Maintenance
Application – Task Expert - Start (Shown only if module is installed)
Task File Name [blank] N/A

Application – Reset
Reset branch to factory defaults -- Administrator
Default Settings
Terminal – Device
Terminal ID#1 IND570 Maintenance
Terminal ID#2 METTLER TOLEDO Maintenance
Terminal ID#3 [blank] Maintenance
Serial Number Populated at factory Maintenance
Configured Devices Table [blank] N/A
Terminal – Display
Screensaver Weight, 30 Minutes Maintenance
Tare Display Active Administrator
Auxiliary Display Disabled Maintenance
Metrology Line Cap/d Administrator
Terminal – Region – Format Time & Date
Time Format 24:MM:SS Supervisor
Date Format DD MMM YYYY Supervisor
Date Field Separator / (slash) Supervisor
Terminal – Region – Set Time & Date
Hour
Minute
Day No default values Supervisor
Month
Year
Terminal – Region – Language
Display Messages English Maintenance
Keypad Selection English Maintenance
Comma/Decimal Decimal point Maintenance
Gross Legend G Maintenance
Terminal – Transaction Counter
Transaction Counter Enabled Maintenance
Counter Reset Disabled Maintenance
Next Transaction 0000001 Maintenance
Terminal – Users
Username #1 admin Maintenance

Access #1 Administrator Maintenance
Password #1 [blank] Maintenance
Username #2 anonymous Maintenance
Access #2 Operator Maintenance
Terminal – Softkeys
Softkey 3 Set Time and Date Maintenance
Softkey 9 Recall Information Maintenance
Softkey 10 Setup Maintenance
All Others [blank] Maintenance
Terminal – Reset
Reset branch to factory defaults -- Maintenance
Communication – Access/Security – Ethernet
Shared Data Server Read/Write Administrator
Web Server Disabled Administrator
FTP Read/Write Administrator
Communication – Access/Security – USB
Keyboard and Scanner Disabled Maintenance
Memory Stick Write Only Maintenance
Communication – Templates – Input
Preamble Length 0 Maintenance
Data Length 1 Maintenance
Postamble Length 0 Maintenance
Termination Character CR Maintenance
Assignment Tare Maintenance
Communication – Templates – Output
Template 1 See Default Templates for format Maintenance
Template 2 See Default Templates for format Maintenance
Template 3 [blank] Maintenance
Template 4 [blank] Maintenance
Template 5 Refer to Default Templates for format Maintenance
Repeat Print Field Disabled Maintenance
Communication – Templates – Strings
Strings 01–20 [blank] Maintenance

Communication – Reports Format
Format Narrow (40) Maintenance
Default Settings
Header 2 Maintenance
Title Enabled Maintenance
Record Separator None Maintenance
Footer 5 Maintenance
Communication – Reports – Tare Table
Tare Enabled Maintenance
N Disabled Maintenance
Total Disabled Maintenance
Communication – Reports – Target Table
Target Enabled Maintenance
+/- Tolerances Disabled Maintenance
Spill Disabled Maintenance
Fine Feed Disabled Maintenance
Communication – Connections (one default connection preconfigured)
Port COM1 Maintenance
Assignment Demand Maintenance
Trigger Scale Maintenance
Template Template 1 Maintenance
Communication – Serial – COM1
Baud 9600 Maintenance
Data Bits 8 Maintenance
Parity None Maintenance
Flow Control None Maintenance
Interface RS-232 Maintenance
Communication – Serial – COM2 (Shown only if option with COM2 is installed)

Communication – Serial – COM3 (Shown only if option with COM3 is installed)
Communication – Serial – COM4 (POWERCELL version only)
Communication – Network – Ethernet (Shown only if Ethernet option detected)
MAC Address Unique value Maintenance
DHCP Client Disabled Maintenance
IP Address 192.168.0.1 Maintenance
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Maintenance
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 Maintenance
Communication – Network – DNS Server (Shown only if Ethernet option detected)
Automatic DNS Enabled Maintenance
Blank or auto populated based on Auto
Preferred DNS Server Maintenance
DNS setting
Alternate DNS Server [blank] Maintenance
Communication – Network – Proxy Server (Shown only if Ethernet option detected)
Proxy Server Disabled Maintenance
Server Address [blank] Maintenance
Port 8080 Maintenance
Username [blank] Maintenance
Password [blank] Maintenance
Confirm Password [blank] Maintenance
Communication – Network - Port (Shown only if Ethernet option detected)
Primary Port # 1701 View Only
Secondary Port # 1701 Maintenance
Communication – Network – WiFi Module (Shown only if WiFi option detected.)
SSID [blank] Maintenance

Default Settings
IP Address [192.168.0.1] Maintenance

Subnet Mask [255.255.255.0] Maintenance
Gateway Address [0.0.0.0] Maintenance
Communication – Network – WiFi Port (Shown only if WiFi option detected.)
WiFi Port # [1701] Maintenance
Communication – Network – FTP (Shown only if Ethernet option detected.)
Username #1 admin Maintenance
Access #1 Administrator Maintenance
Password #1 admin Maintenance
Username #2 anonymous Maintenance
Access #2 Operator Maintenance
Communication – Network – Print Client (Shown only if Ethernet option detected)
Server IP Address [blank] Maintenance
Server TCP Port 9001 Maintenance
Communication – Network – Email Alert – Parameters
SMTP Server IP 0.0.0.0 Maintenance
Sender Email Address [blank] Maintenance
Sender Name [blank] Maintenance
Username IND570 Maintenance
Confirm Password [blank] Maintenance
Communication – Network – Email Alert – Recipients
Email Address [blank] Maintenance
Information Alerts Disabled Maintenance
Warning Alerts Disabled Maintenance
Failure Alerts Disabled Maintenance
Service Alert Disabled Maintenance
Send Test Email -- Maintenance
Communication – PLC – Analog Output (Shown only if Analog Output option detected)
Source Displayed Weight Maintenance
Output Mode 4-20 mA Maintenance

Zero Value 0 Maintenance
Full Scale Value Maintenance
Communication – PLC – ControlNet (Shown only if ControlNet option detected)
Node Address 99 Maintenance
Communication – PLC – DeviceNet (Shown only if DeviceNet option detected)
Data Rate 125 kB Maintenance
Communication – PLC – PROFIBUS (Shown only if PROFIBUS option detected)
Shared Data Disabled Maintenance
Communication – PLC – EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP (Shown only if EtherNet / IP or Modbus TCP option detected)
Mac Address Assigned automatically Maintenance
IP Address 192.168.0.1 Maintenance
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Maintenance
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 Maintenance
Communication – PLC – Data Format (Shown only if a PLC option detected)
Operating Mode Compatibility Mode Maintenance
Format Integer Maintenance
Byte Order Word Swap Maintenance
Message Slots 1 Maintenance
Communication – Reset
Reset branch to factory defaults -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Configure / View – Change Log
Change Log Disabled Administrator
Maintenance – Configure / View – Maintenance Log
Maintenance Log Disabled Maintenance
Manual Maintenance Log Entry -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Configure / View – PWRCL Performance Log
Log Interval 168.0 Hours Maintenance
Maintenance – Configure / View – Error Log
Error Log Disabled Administrator
Clear Error Log -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – GWP Log
GWP Disabled Administrator

Clear GWP Log -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – Calibration Management
Default Settings
Test Interval (Days) 0 Maintenance

Test Interval (Weighments) 0 Maintenance
On Expiration No Action Maintenance
Last Date Tested Current Date View Only
Next Test Date Calculated from test interval (Days) View Only
Calculated from test interval View Only
# of Weighments Left
(Weighments)
Maintenance – Configure / View – Test Manager GWP – Sensitivity, Eccentricity & Repeatability (Identical
settings for all 3 GWP tests)
Test Interval (Days) 0 Maintenance

Test Interval (Weighments) 0 Maintenance
On Expiration No Action Maintenance
Last Date Tested Current Date View Only
Next Test Date Calculated from test interval (Days) View Only
Calculated from test interval View Only
# of Weighments Left
(Weighments)
Maintenance – Configure / View – Calibration Test
Test Load Units kg Maintenance
Operator Test Weight Edit Disabled Maintenance
Test Weight Table [blank] Supervisor
Calibration Test Sequence [blank] Supervisor
Clear Calibration Test -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – GWP Tests - Sensitivity
Sensitivity Test Sequence Default Test Prompts Supervisor
Clear Sensitivity Test -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – GWP Tests – Eccentricity
Test Load 0 Supervisor
Warning Limit 0 Maintenance
Control Limit 0 Maintenance

Eccentricity Test Sequence Default Test Prompts Supervisor
Clear Eccentricity Test -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – GWP Tests – Repeatability
Test Load 0 Supervisor
Warning Limit 0 Maintenance
Control Limit 0 Maintenance
Number of Weighments 0 Supervisor
Repeatability Test Sequence Default Test Prompts Supervisor
Maintenance – Configure / View – Reset
Reset Configure/View branch to
-- Administrator
factory defaults
Maintenance – Run – Calibration Test
User ID [blank] N/A
Run Test -- N/A
Maintenance – Run – GWP Test – Sensitivity, Eccentricity, Repeatability
User ID [blank] N/A
Run Test -- N/A
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Display Test
Start Test -- N/A
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Keyboard Test
Run Test -- N/A
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Scale – Calibration Values
Zero (Counts) 0 Administrator
Test Load #1 (Weight) 50 Administrator
Test Load #1 (Counts) 800,000 Administrator
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Scale – Statistics
Weighments 0 View Only
Overloads 0 View Only
Peak Weight 0 kg View Only
Zero Commands 0 View Only
Zero Fail 0 View Only

Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Scale – Installation Guidance
Leveling Guidance n/a View Only
Default Settings
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Serial Test

Com Port COM1 Maintenance
Start Test -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Discrete I/O Test – Local, Remote
OK (Run Test) -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Network Test
Start Test -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – WiFi Scan
Start -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Reset Flash2
Maintenance – Run – Diagnostics – Reset Service Icon
Maintenance – Run – Replace Battery
Maintenance – Run – Install Upgrade
Maintenance – Run – Backup to USB
Backup Calibration Supervisor
Start -- Supervisor
Maintenance – Run – Restore from USB
Restore Calibration Supervisor
Start (Calibration) -- Administrator
Start (Configuration) -- Maintenance
Start (TaskExpert) -- Supervisor
Start (Templates) -- Maintenance
Maintenance – Reset All
Reset ALL setup parameters to
-- Maintenance
factory defaults

A.2. Softkeys Security Access
The following table lists the default security levels required to access and initiate IND570 functions
and applications available through softkeys.
The access information assumes that User Security has been enabled in the IND570.
Table A-3: Softkey Security Access
Icon Function Security Access

Information Recall Functions
Recall information N/A
Metrology Recall N/A
TaskExpert™ Checksum N/A
System Information Recall N/A
WiFi Information Recall N/A
Connected Devices Recall N/A
Service Information Recall N/A
Print N/A
Transmit Email N/A
Terminal Status Maintenance
Load Cell Detail (POWERCELL) Maintenance
Reset Terminal Status Maintenance
Information Recall Functions
Weight Recall N/A
Calibration Test Functions
Run Calibration Test N/A
Test Weight Information – Edit Determined by setup
Clear Test Weights Supervisor
Start Calibration Test Entry of User ID required

Test Information N/A

Default Settings
Skip (skips failed Calibration Test step and continues

N/A
with the test)
Print Calibration Test Report N/A
GWP® Test Functions
GWP Test Access N/A
Test Weight Information Determined by setup
Clear Test Weights Supervisor
Test Information N/A
Start Entry of User ID required
Skip (skips failed GWP Test step and continues with

N/A
the test)
Print GWP Test Report N/A
Tables, Counters, Printing Functions

Alibi Memory - View N/A
Tables, Counters, Printing, Transfer Functions
Print Alibi Memory N/A
N/A
Tare Memory (access the tare table)
N/A
Target Memory (access the target table)
View Table (access a table to view or retrieve a

N/A
record)
Search Table N/A
Select Record from Table N/A
Active Target - Edit Supervisor
Comparators – Edit Supervisor

Reports (recall and print reports for Alibi Memory,

N/A
Tare Table, or Target Table)
Clear Tare Table n & Totals Supervisor
Totals Recall N/A
Clear Subtotal Supervisor
Clear All Totals Supervisor
Supervisor login required only if “Clear

Print
Totals on Print” is enabled.
Transaction Counter N/A
Reset Transaction Counter Supervisor
Tables, Counters, Printing Functions
Time & Date – Edit Supervisor
Repeat Print N/A
Customized Print Triggers 1, 2 and 3 N/A
Refer to Table A-1 for file read/write

USB File Transfer
access
ID (initiates a programmed transactional

N/A
sequence). ID1, ID2, ID3 and ID4 available.
Display Functions
Times 10 Display (expands the displayed weight by
N/A
10)
SmartTrac (turns SmartTrac display off and on) N/A
MinWeigh – Edit Supervisor
Unit Switching N/A
Target Control Functions
Target Control N/A
Start N/A

Pause N/A
Default Settings
Stop/Abort Supervisor
Task Selection Functions (only used with TaskExpert™ is installed)

Task List – Displays list of assigned TaskExpert
N/A
applications
Task Selection Functions (only used with TaskExpert™ is installed)
Task 1, 2, 3 – Starts TaskExpert application

N/A
designated as Task 1, 2 or 3
Table A-4: Security Access to Files Available For Transfer via USB Softkey
Export Import
File Type Export* Security Import* Security
Level Level
Action Log (only available with Fill-570 application Yes No N/A
software)
Alibi Memory Yes No N/A

Calibration Test and Weight Information Yes Yes Maintenance
Change Log Yes No N/A
Error Log Yes No N/A
GWP Log Yes No N/A
GWP Tests with Weight Information Yes Yes Maintenance
Supervisor
Terminal Status Yes No N/A
Maintenance Log Yes No N/A
Pac Statistics (only available when supporting application Yes No N/A
software is enabled in terminal)
Service Information Report Yes No N/A

Table A1 (Tare) Yes Yes Supervisor
Table A2 (Target) Yes Yes Supervisor
Tables A0, A3 – A9 Yes Yes Supervisor

A.3. Default Templates
Template 1
Element Data Format Data Description (not shown in template)
1 wt0101 [ 010] Displayed Gross Weight
2 <sp> [ 001] -
3 wt0103 [003 ] Primary Weight Units
4 CR/LF 1 -
5 ws0110 [ 010] Displayed Tare Weight
6 <sp> [ 001] -
8 ws0109 [002 ] Tare Source
9 CR/LF 1 -
10 wt0102 [ 010] Displayed Net Weight
11 <sp> [ 001] -
13 N [001 ] String representing Net
14 CR/LF 2 -
15 -End- -
Template 2
1 cs0103 [021 ] Scale ID
2 CR/LF 1 -
3 xd0104 [015 ] Time of Day
4 CR/LF 1 -
5 xd0103 [015 ] Current Date
6 CR/LF 1 -
7 wt0101 [ 010] Displayed Gross Weight
8 <sp> [ 001] -
10 CR/LF 1 -
11 ws0110 [ 010] Displayed Tare Weight
12 <sp> [ 001] -
14 ws0109 [002 ] Tare Source

Template 2
15 CR/LF 1 -
Default Settings
16 wt0102 [ 010] Displayed Net Weight

17 <sp> [ 001] -
19 N [001 ] String representing Net
20 CR/LF 2 -
21 - End - -
Templates 3 and 4
Element Data Format
1 - End - -
Template 5
Element Data Format
1 Totals Report [ 040 ] String
2 CR/LF 1 -
3 xd0104 [020 ] Time of Day
4 xd0103 [ 020] Current Date
5 CR/LF 1 -
6 Subtotal: -- String
7 CR/LF 1 -
8 n= -- String
9 tz0104 -- Subtotal Transaction Counter
10 tz0103 [ 030] Subtotal Weight
11 ce0103 [ 004 ] Primary Units
12 CR/LF 1 -
13 Grand Total: -- String
14 CR/LF 1 -
15 n= -- String
16 tz0102 -- Grand Total Transaction Counter
17 tz0101 [ 030] Grand Total Weight
18 ce0103 [ 004 ] Primary Units
19 CR/LF 1 -
20 - End - -

B. Table and Log File Structure
The IND570 terminal includes an alibi memory file, a tare table, a target table, a change log file, a
maintenance log file, an error log file and a GWP log file. Descriptions of each of these are included
in this chapter.
B.1. Alibi Memory

Alibi memory stores transaction information in a preset format that is not changeable. Alibi memory
can be enabled or disabled in setup at Application > Memory > Alibi.
• The alibi memory operates by storing up to 600 alibi records in a battery-backed file as they
occur. After this file is full, all of these records are written to the “alibi.bin” file in flash and the
600-record file is cleared and begins to store the next 600 records. The flash file (alibi.bin) can
store up to 100,000 transactions before it rolls over and begins to overwrite the oldest file. Each
record in the Alibi Memory file includes:
• Date and time stamp fields
• A transaction counter value, which is a unique numeric field that identifies the transaction (the
transaction counter must be enabled in terminal setup to activate the transaction counter value)
• Gross or net weight, tare weight, and weight unit
B.1.1. Viewing Alibi Memory Records
Alibi memory records can be viewed in setup at Application > Memory > Alibi or through the Alibi
softkey from the home screen. A report of all data in the Alibi Memory can be printed using the
REPORTS softkey .
The content of the Alibi Memory can also be transferred as a .csv (comma separated value) file to a
USB memory stick by accessing the file transfer function available through the softkey on the
home screen. Refer to Chapter 2, Operation, for full details on transferring the Alibi Memory file to a
USB memory stick.
B.1.1.1. To View Alibi Memory Records
1. Press the REPORTS softkey or the Alibi softkey .

2. If the REPORTS softkey was pressed, select Alibi Memory from the selection box. Press the
VIEW TABLE softkey shown at the bottom of the screen. The Search Screen displays (Figure
A-1). If the home screen ALIBI softkey was pressed instead of the REPORTS softkey ,
the Search Screen will appear directly. Figure A-1 shows the first of two screens. The second
contains Search Field 2 and its associated data fields. Note the scroll bar at right, indicating the
availability of a second screen.
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide B-1

Table and Log File Structure
Figure A-1: Alibi Search Screen
3. Use the Search Field 1 and Search Field 2 selection boxes and associated data fields to enter
specific search information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” character, the asterisk
(*) to view all records.
4. Press the SEARCH softkey . The Alibi Memory Search View screen displays with the search
results sorted in chronological order. The most recent record will appear at the end of the list, and
that record will be in focus. Only the first two fields (date and time) will be shown on the display.
The remainder of the fields in each record can be viewed by pressing the RIGHT navigation key to
move the view to the right. Pressing the LEFT navigation key will return the view toward the left.
Figure A-2 includes a series of screens to show the contents of further columns available in the
view.
Figure A-2: Alibi Search Results Views
The Alibi Memory cannot be cleared manually. It is automatically cleared after it has been disabled
and enabled again.
B.2. Memory Tables

B.2.1. Tare Table
The IND570 terminal contains a tare table with 99 records for storing tare weights that can be
recalled by the operator for use instead of manually entering them for each transaction. This recall
B-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

function is especially useful when certain tare values are used repeatedly. When totalization is
enabled for the tare table, each time a transaction is completed using an activated tare ID, the
selected weight value (gross or net weight) is added to the total and the counter increments by one.
For gross weight accumulation, the tare table can be used with tare values of 0 in order to
accumulate weight by tare ID.
The counter for the tare totals is seven digits long and has a maximum value of 1,500,000. When
this value is exceeded, an overflow error displays and that value is not accumulated. The counter
must be reset in order to continue totalizing. The total register is 11 digits in length including all
positions to the right of the decimal point. The decimal position is determined by the display
resolution for the unit entered as the tare unit. The maximum value for a scale with a display
resolution of 0.01 kg would be 999999999.99 kg. When this value is exceeded, an overflow error
displays and that value is not accumulated. The total must be reset in order to continue totalizing.
These tare weights can be recalled by either selecting from a list of all the values using the TARE
TABLE softkey followed by the SEARCH softkey or can be “quick accessed” directly by
pressing the Tare ID value followed by the TARE TABLE softkey . Alternatively, the Shared Data
server can be used to activate tare records stored in the Tare Table. Refer to the Shared Data Access
section of Appendix C, Communications for specific instructions.
A printed report of the records in the Tare Table is available through the REPORTS softkey . This
procedure is explained later in this chapter. The content of the Tare Table is available as a .csv
(comma separated value) and can be transferred to a USB memory stick by accessing the file transfer
function available through the softkey on the home screen. Refer to Chapter 2, Operation, for full
details the USB file transfer function.
The structure of a tare record is shown in Table A-1.
Table A-1: Tare Records Stored in the Tare Table
Field Length Type Description

ID 2 Numeric Numeric string used for tare record lookup
Tare Weight 8 Numeric Tare value. Stored in display resolution.
Tare Units 3 Alpha Tare weighing units (dwt, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt, t, ton)
Description 20 Alphanumeric Description of this tare value
Total Total weight of transactions completed using this stored tare
8 Numeric
Weight record
Total Count 8 Numeric Total number of transactions using this stored tare record.
B.2.2. Target Table

The IND570 contains a 200-record Target Table that stores frequently used target-comparison values.
The fields in the record will depend upon the operating mode of the Target Table, Tolerance Type and
Totalization settings as selected in setup at Application > Memory > Target Table. There are two
choices for the mode – Material Transfer or Over/Under. There are either two or three choices for the
tolerance type, depending upon the target mode selection. Totalization can be enabled or disabled.

When totalization is enabled for the target table, each time a transaction is completed using an
activated target ID, the selected weight value (gross or net weight) is added to the total and the
counter increments by one.
A target table record can be recalled by picking from a list of all the values using the TARGET TABLE
softkey followed by the SEARCH softkey . It may be also be “quick accessed” directly by
entering the Target ID value followed by the TARGET TABLE softkey . Alternatively, the Shared Data
server can be used to activate tare records stored in the Tare Table. Refer to the Shared Data Access
section of Appendix C, Communications for specific instructions.
A printed report of the records in the Target Table is available through the REPORTS softkey . This
procedure is explained later in this chapter. The content of the Target Table is available as a .csv
(comma separated value) and can be transferred to a USB memory stick by accessing the file transfer
function available through the softkey on the home screen. Refer to Chapter 2, Operation, for full
details the USB file transfer function.
The possible fields for a target record are shown in Table A-2. Not all fields will be used for all
combinations of Operating Mode and Tolerance Type.
Table A-2: Target Records Stored in the Target Table
Field Length Type Description

ID 2 Numeric Numeric string used for target record lookup
Target weight 8 Numeric Target value to be used for the comparison
Target units 3 Alpha Target weighing units (dwt, g, kg, lb, oz, ozt, t, ton)
+ Tolerance Acceptable tolerance over the target weight or maximum
8 Numeric
or Over Limit acceptable weight
− Tolerance Acceptable tolerance under the target weight or minimum
8 Numeric
or Under Limit acceptable weight
Amount of material that will be fed in the slower rate of feed in a
Fine Feed 8 Numeric
2-speed feed system
Amount of material in suspension that will add to the weight after
Spill 8 Numeric
all feeds are shut off
Description 20 Alphanumeric Description of the target record
Total weight of transactions completed using this stored target
Total Weight 8 Numeric
record
Total Count 8 Numeric Total number of transactions using this stored target record.
The target record is recalled in the same way regardless of the mode or tolerance type selected in
setup.

B.2.3. Selecting a Tare or Target Record
In order to search and select a tare record from the tare or target table, the TARE TABLE softkey
and/or TARGET TABLE softkey must be added to a softkey row on the home screens.
B.2.3.1. To Access the Tare or Target Table
1. Press the TARE TABLE softkey or TARGET TABLE softkey to display the search screen as
shown in Figure A-3.
Figure A-3: Tare Table and Target Table Search Screen
2. Use the Search Field selection boxes and associated data fields to enter specific search
information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” character, the asterisk (*) to view all
records.
3. Press the SEARCH softkey . The table Search View screen displays with the search results
sorted by ID. The file will have the lowest record ID at the top of the file and focus will be on that
record. Press the RIGHT navigation key to move the view to the right to view the full record. Figure
A-4 andFigure A-5 include screens to show the contents of further columns available in the view.
Figure A-4: Tare Table Search View Results

Figure A-5: Target Table Search View Results
4. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to focus on a record.

5. Press the OK softkey to use that record. The stored tare value or target values is recalled from
the table and is used as the active value.
Note: A value stored in the tare table is automatically converted when recalled if the units of the
record do not match the current displayed units.
Note: If second and/or third units are established in the IND570, target records that utilize either
second or third units can be retrieved from the Target Table into Active Target status. The IND570
will convert the retrieved record into active units when the record is recalled. Pressing the TARGET
softkey will show the original units as recalled from the Target Table.
If an attempt is made to retrieve a record from the Target Table that does not use primary, second or
third units, a Units Mismatch error will display, indicating that record recall was unsuccessful.
B.2.4. Quick Access

If the ID number for a specific record in the Tare or Target Table is known, the record can be quickly
recalled for use without going through the view and selection process.
B.2.4.1. To Quickly Access a Specific Tare or Target Table Record
1. Use the numeric keypad to enter the numeric ID for the table record that is to be used. The data
entry screen displays as shown in Figure A-6.

Figure A-6: Data Entry Screen
2. Press the TARE TABLE softkey or TARGET TABLE softkey to quickly recall the ID record
entered. The stored tare value or target values is recalled from the table and is used as the active
value.
3. If an invalid ID number is entered, an ID not found message displays.
Note: When a value stored in the tare table is recalled, it is converted automatically if its units do
not match the current displayed units.
Note: If second and/or third units are established in the IND570, target records that utilize either
second or third units can be retrieved from the Target Table into Active Target status. The IND570
will convert the retrieved record into active units when the record is recalled. Pressing the TARGET
softkey will show the original units as recalled from the Target Table.
4. If an attempt is made to retrieve a record from the Target Table that does not use primary, second
or third units, a Units Mismatch error will display indicating that record recall was unsuccessful.
B.2.5. Clearing Totals
All the records in the Tare Table can be cleared by pressing the CLEAR softkey when viewing the
first setup page for the table at Application > Memory > Tare Table.
The totals for all of the records in the Tare Table can also be cleared by pressing the REPORTS softkey
, selecting Tare Table from the selection box, and pressing the CLEAR TOTALS softkey .
All the records in the Target Table can be cleared by pressing the CLEAR softkey when viewing the
first setup page for the table at Application > Memory > Target Table. To just clear the totals in the
Target Table, press CLEAR TOTALS softkey .
B.2.5.1. To Clear the Total Value of an Individual Record
1. Access the setup menu tree and select either Application > Memory > Tare Table or Target Table.
2. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Search screen (Figure A-3) displays.
information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” character, the asterisk (*), to view all
records.
4. Press the SEARCH softkey . The table Search View screen (Figure A-4 and Figure A-5)
displays with the search results sorted by ID.

5. Use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to highlight the tare record for which the total is to be
cleared and press the EDIT softkey . The record Edit screen displays.
6. Press the DOWN navigation key to highlight the n and Total label and press ENTER.
7. Clear the n and/or Total values by pressing the CLEAR key on the numeric keypad when focus is
in that data entry box. When the value in the data entry box is clear, press ENTER.
8. Press the OK softkey to accept the changes.
9. Use the EXIT softkey to return to the home screen.
B.3. Log Files

B.3.1. Change Log File
The Change Log in the IND570 terminal file tracks all changes to shared data. The Change Log can
be enabled or disabled in setup at Maintenance > Configure/View > Change Log.
The Change Log file is a linear-type file that eventually becomes full if not reset. It will hold an
estimated 2,500 records. When the file becomes 75% full, a warning message displays indicating
the status. Another message displays when the file is 90% full. If the file is not reset, it will continue
to store records until it is 100% full and a final 100% full message displays. Additional changes to
shared data will not be recorded until the file is reset.
The Change Log file is available as a comma separated value file (change.csv) that can be exported
to a USB memory stick using the softkey on the home screen or via FTP to a client PC. The
variable length Change Log record structure and an example are as follows:
Timestamp , Username , SDName , Value
2015/02/11 09:45 , System , ce0102 , “91”<CR><LF>

2015/02/11 09:46 , System , sp0105 , “25.85” <CR><LF>
B.3.1.1. Viewing Change Log File Records
The Change Log records can be viewed in setup at Maintenance > Configure/View > Change Log.
1. Access the setup menu tree and select Maintenance > Configure/View > Change Log.
2. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Log Search screen displays (Figure A-7). Note the scroll
bar, indicating that a second screen is available. Scroll down to see Search Field 2 and its
associated data fields.

Figure A-7: Change Log Search Screen
specific search information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” asterisk character (*) to
view all records.
4. When the search criteria are set, press the SEARCH softkey . The Log Search View screen
(Figure A-8) displays with the search results sorted in chronological order (the oldest record
displays first). Additional columns of data (User name, Shared Data name, New Value) may be
viewed by scrolling to the right.
Figure A-8: Log Search View Screen
5. If a Report connection has been configured, the PRINT softkey can be used to print the
current view.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Log Search Screen.
B.3.2. Maintenance Log File
A Maintenance Log can be enabled or disabled in setup at Maintenance > Configure/View >
Maintenance Log.
The Maintenance Log file is a ring-type file that overwrites the oldest record when it becomes full. It
will hold an estimated 2,500 records. The Maintenance Log tracks and logs service operations that
are performed on the IND570. The items logged include functions such as calibration and file
exports.
The Maintenance Log file is available as a comma separated value file (maint.csv) that can be
exported that can be exported to a USB memory stick using the softkey on the home screen or
via FTP to a client PC. The Maintenance Log record structure and an example are as follows:
Timestamp , Username , Channel , Cell , Event Code , Status
2015/02/11 , 09:45 , System , 01 , [blank] ,02 , SUCCESS<CR><LF>

A complete list of the possible maintenance event codes for the IND570 terminal is listed in Table
A-3.
Table A-3: Maintenance Log Event Codes and Status

Event Description Status Code(s)

1 Calibration test failed 1-n = failed at step n.
2 Zero calibration performed FAILURE, SUCCESS, Motion
3 Span calibration performed FAILURE, SUCCESS, Motion
4 CalFree calibration performed FAILURE, SUCCESS
5 POWERCELL cell Shift Adjust FAILURE, SUCCESS
6 POWERCELL cell Address FAILURE, SUCCESS
8 Log file exported via FTP Maintenance, Change, TACT (Action), Alibi
9 Setup file exported - .dmt files exported via FTP SUCCESS
10 Metrology switch / electronic seal broken SUCCESS
11 Calibration Expired 1=days
2 =weighments
15 Added option component Manual text entry
16 Removed option component Manual text entry
17 Replaced component Manual text entry
18 Maintenance Log initialized SUCCESS
19 Calibration values manually edited SUCCESS
20 Shift values manually edited SUCCESS
21 Set date or time SUCCESS
22 Table exported tare, target, cont, caltw1, caltest1, sentw1,
sentest1, ecctw1, ecctest1, reptw1,reptest1
23 Calibration test passed SUCCESS
28 Successful zero command
42
43 Sensitivity test failed 1-n = failed at step n
1 = Days
44 Sensitivity expired
2 = Weighments
45 Sensitivity test passed SUCCESS
46 Eccentricity test failed 1-n = failed at step n
1 = Days
47 Eccentricity expired
2 = Weighments
48 Eccentricity test passed SUCCESS
49 Repeatability test failed 1-n = failed at step n

Event Description Status Code(s)
1 = Days
50 Repeatability expired
2 = Weighments
51 Repeatability test passed SUCCESS
ALIBI, MAINT, CHANGE, GWPLOG, SVRINFO,
TERMST, A0, tare, target, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7,
A8, A9, CALTW1, CALTST1, SENTW1,
52 File exported via USB
SENTST1, ECCTW1, ECCTST1, REPTW1,
REPTST1, RunCal, SYSINFO, RunSens, RunEcc,
RunRep, GWPLOG, ERRLOG, SVCINFO
A0, tare, target, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9,
53 File imported via USB CALTW1, CALTST1, SENTW1, SENTST1,
ECCTW1, ECCTST1, REPTW1, REPTST1,CONT,
54 Firmware updated via USB SUCCESS, FAILURE
55 Step calibration performed SUCCESS, FAILURE
B.3.2.1. Viewing Maintenance Log File Records
The Maintenance Log records can be viewed in setup at Maintenance > Configure/View > Maintenance
Log.
1. Access the setup menu tree and select Maintenance > Configure/View > Maintenance Log.
2. Press the VIEW TABLE softkey . The Maintenance Log Search screen displays (Figure A-9).
specific search information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” asterisk character (*) to
view all records.
4. When the search criteria are set, press the SEARCH softkey . A Log Search View screen like
the one shown in displays with the search results sorted in chronological order (oldest record
displays first).Press the RIGHT navigation key to move the view to the right to view the full log
content.
Figure A-9: Maintenance Log Search Screen
5. If a Report connection has been configured, the PRINT softkey can be used to print the
current view.
6. Press the EXIT softkey to return to the Maintenance Log Search Screen.

B.3.3. GWP Log File
The GWP Log records the final, basic results of Calibration, Sensitivity, Reproducibility and
Eccentricity tests performed in the terminal. The GWP Log is a ring-type file that overwrites the oldest
record when it becomes full. It will hold an estimated 2,500 records.
The GWP Log file is available as a comma separated value file (gwp.csv) that can be exported that
can be exported to a USB memory stick using the softkey on the home screen or via FTP to a
client PC. The GWP Log record structure and an example are shown below:
Timestamp , User ID , GWP Test , Warning Limit Status , Test Status
2015/02/11 , 09:45 , Jocefowicz , Repeatability , Passed , Passed<CR><LF>
B.3.4. Error Log File

The Error Log records the details of system errors. The Error Log file is available as a comma
separated value file (error.csv) that can be exported that can be exported to a USB memory stick
using the softkey on the home screen or via FTP to a client PC. The Error Log can hold up to
500 records. The Error Log record structure and an example are shown below:
Timestamp , Severity , Error Code , Detail , Message
2014/04/10 ,13:34:23 , E , 00002 , [ ] , RAM Battery Voltage Low<CR><LF>
Note: The Detail field is a counter that tracks the number of times an error or event occurs
consecutively over a period of time. This is not a count of the total number of times an error
occurs.
B.3.5. POWERCELL Performance Log

The POWERCELL Performance Log provides a summary of the performance and diagnostics data
collected for each cell on a POWERCELL scale. The items logged include data such as load cell raw
counts, cell error counters, cell voltages and temperature.
The POWERCELL Performance Log can be set to record data automatically in Setup at Maintenance >
Configure/View > PWRCL Performance Log. The Log is a FIFO file that overwrites the oldest record
when it becomes full. It will hold approximately 500 individual records. If the file is not reset, it will
continue to store records until it is 100% full and then begin overwriting the oldest records.
B.3.5.1. Viewing PWRCL Performance Log File Records
Only a METTLER TOLEDO authorized service representative can retrieve the POWERCELL Performance
Log records. The log file can be accessed as a comma-separated value (.csv) file, downloaded using
any FTP client PC, the USB softkey or with the Backup to USB feature.
B.3.5.2. To View the POWERCELL Performance Log File
1. The POWERCELL Performance Log does not automatically log records by default. To set up the
automatic logging, go to the Maintenance > Configure/View > PWRCL Performance Log setup
screen (Figure A-10) and enter an appropriate log interval, between 0.1 and 999.9 hours. A
typical value for day-to-day operation is 12, but for diagnostic purposes this interval can be

much smaller. A manual record can also be triggered using the PWRCL PERFORMANCE LOG
softkey .
Figure A-10: PWRCL Performance Log Setup Screen
2. To retrieve the log records, the MT Service Security feature must be unlocked. Refer to the MT
Service Security section in Chapter 3 for the unlocking procedure.
3. Once the MT Service Security is unlocked, use either the USB softkey, InSite, an FTP client PC,
serial file transfer or the Backup to USB feature to access the log file. If using the FTP client or the
serial file transfer, refer to Appendix C, Communications for information on accessing the
terminal’s files. The file and path name for the log is gen:/PWRCL_PER.CSV.
4. The .csv file can be opened using a PC program such as MS Excel, as shown in Figure A-11.
Figure A-11: PWRCL Performance Log
5. By default the records are sorted by time and date, with the most recent showing first. Each
record row represents the data collected for a specific cell node.
B.3.6. Resetting the PWRCL Performance Log File
The Log is cleared each time a Master Reset is performed. It can also be manually reset in setup.
B.3.6.1. To Reset the File Manually
1. Access the Maintenance > Configure/View > PWRCL Performance Log setup screen (Figure A-10).
2. Press the CLEAR softkey to clear the log records and reset the log file. A warning screen is
shown, requesting verification. Press the ESCAPE softkey to cancel the operation or the OK
softkey to confirm it.
3. A status message displays, verifying that the reset was completed.

B.3.7. PWRCL Performance Log File Structure
The PWRCL Performance Log file is available as a comma separated value (.csv) file. The file
includes a header row with the fields as described in Table A-4. Each row of the file is one record and
each record is one set of the data captured for each load cell connected to the terminal.
Table A-4: PWRCL Performance Log Data Fields
Data Field Description

Date Date when the record was generated.
Time Time when the record was generated.
Node POWERCELL cell node address.
Serial Number The unique factory serial number embedded in the cell.
Cell Counts Load cell counts at the time the record was generated.
Com Errors Total number of cell communication errors.
Min Supply Voltage Minimum cell input supply voltage measured in millivolts.
Last Supply Voltage Last measured cell input supply voltage in millivolts.
CanH Dominant Voltage Cell CAN-High voltage recorded for Dominant mode in millivolts.1
CanL Dominant Voltage Cell CAN-Low voltage recorded for Dominant mode in millivolts.1
CanH Recessive Voltage Cell CAN-High voltage recorded for Recessive mode in millivolts.1
CanL Recessive Voltage Cell CAN-Low voltage recorded for Recessive mode in millivolts.1
Total number of severe or long term over-voltage events detected by the
Major Overvoltage Count IND570 for all connected cells. Possible causes include a near lightning
strike or a short circuit.
Total number of severe or long term under-voltage events detected by the
Major Undervoltage Count IND570 for all connected cells. Possible causes include a near lightning
strike or an overloaded supply.
Total number of intermittent over-voltage events detected by the IND570 for
Minor Overvoltage Count all connected cells. Possible causes include a distant lightning strike or a
short circuit.
Total number of intermittent under-voltage events detected by the IND570 for
Minor Undervoltage Count all connected cells. Possible causes include a distant lightning strike or an
overloaded supply.
The deviation in cell temperature since last scale calibration, calculated by
Temperature Deviation subtracting the current temperature from the temperature at time of
calibration.
Current Temperature The current temperature sensor reading in the cell.
Maximum Temperature Maximum cell temperature recorded.
Minimum Temperature Minimum cell temperature recorded.
Gas Concentration Current level (%) of inert gas concentration enclosed in the cell.
Zero Drift Errors Total number of cell zero drift errors.
Zero Drift Value Current cell zero drift value in primary weight units.

Data Field Description
Cell Overloads Total number of cell overload errors.
The weight value detected by the cell and recorded as an average each time
Average Overload Weight
it is overloaded. In primary weight units.
Symmetry Errors Total number of cell symmetry drift errors.
Symmetry Difference Current cell symmetry difference (%) value.
Total Transactions Total number of print transactions for a specific scale.
Note
1. These values are stored from the last time the Load Cell COM Voltage Screen was accessed.
B.4. Resetting Log Files

All Log files are reset when a Master Reset is carried out. Log files can also be manually reset in
setup.
1. Enter the menu tree and go to the Maintenance > Configure/View. Enter into the sub-branch of the
Log file to be reset.
2. Press the RESET softkey (or, in the POWERCELL version, the CLEAR softkey ) to reset the
log file. A screen displays that asks for verification. Press the OK softkey to continue. A status
message displays verifying that the reset was successful.

C. Communications
This appendix provides descriptions of the physical connections available in the IND570 terminal as
well as the logical connections that can be defined to use them. Additional details are provided on all
available communication modes (Demand and Continuous) and supported communication protocols
and input command functions.
C.1. Available Communication Interfaces

The IND570 supports data transfer via serial ports, Ethernet ports and a USB Host port. Broad data
communication via various PLC interfaces is also supported, but not covered in this appendix. Please
refer to the IND570 PLC Interface Manual for additional information on PLC communication available
with the IND570.
C.1.1. Serial Interfaces

One or two standard and two optional serial ports are supported with the IND570 terminal. They are
designated COM1 (standard port on the main PCB), COM2 (optional), COM3 (optional) and COM4
(standard on POWERCELL version).
COM1, a standard serial port on the main board, provides RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 interfaces
at communication rates from 300 to 115.2k baud. The RS-232 interface is a three-wire (TDX, RXD,
and GND) with XON/XOFF flow-control capabilities (handshaking). The RS-422 interface is a four-
wire interface designed for single point-to-point communication. The RS-485 connection is a two-wire
interface but does not provide multi-drop communication with addressing. All interfaces can be output
simultaneously; however, only one input can be used. The COM1 port is unique in that is can be
used to load firmware into the IND570 and provides access to the shared data server. In the
POWERCELL version, COM1 and COM4 are electrically isolated.
COM2, only available on the COM2/COM3 serial option or COM2/COM3/DIO option, provides only an
RS-232 interface at communication rates from 300 to 115.2k baud. This interface is a three-wire
connection with XON/XOFF handshaking capabilities.
COM3, only available on the COM2/COM3 serial option or COM2/COM3/DIO option, provides RS-
232, RS-422, and RS-485 interfaces at communication rates from 300 to 115.2k baud. ON/XOFF
handshaking is supported.
COM4, only available in the POWERCELL version, provides an isolated RS-232 interface at
communication rates from 300 to 115.2k baud. This interface is a three-wire connection with
XON/XOFF handshaking capabilities.
For all serial connections, character framing is programmable in the setup mode. Framing can be:
• 1 start bit
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide C-1

• 7 or 8 ASCII data bits (selectable)
• 0 or 1 parity bit (none, even, or odd)
• 1 stop bit
The baud rate can be configured from 300 to 115.2K baud. A checksum character can also be
Communications
configured when using one of the continuous output strings.
The IND570 terminal uses software handshaking to control data flow commonly referred to as
XON/XOFF handshaking. When a receiving device (typically a printer) is getting information from an
IND570 terminal and cannot receive any more in its buffer, it sends an ASCII XOFF (13h) telling the
IND570 terminal to temporarily stop sending data until its buffer clears.
When the device can receive more data, it sends an ASCII XON (11h) telling the IND570 terminal to
begin sending data again. This process can occur as often as required by a receiving device.
The XON/XOFF method is the only type of handshaking that is supported by the IND570 terminal.
C.1.2. Ethernet
The optional Ethernet port on the IND570 provides an RJ45 connector. The port supports Auto-MDIX
allowing automatic detection of the Ethernet cable type being used (patch/straight-through or
crossover) and will adjust to make a link over that cable.
Speeds of 10 Mb/s and 100 Mb/s are possible utilizing 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 100 Base-FX, and
100 Base-T4 connections to an Ethernet network. The port is fully compliant with IEEE standard
802.3 and 802.3x. Full duplex flow control and half duplex back pressure communication are
supported.
Up to 3 clients can be connected to the IND570 at a time. The Ethernet port can be used for the
following functions:
• Shared data access

• Demand output
• Continuous output
• FTP
• Sending email notifications
C.1.2.1. Ethernet Connection to a PC
The optional Ethernet port for the IND570 provides a way to interface a PC to the IND570 to transfer a
variety of information. In order to carry out data transfer functions, the IND570 (with optional
Ethernet) must be connected directly to a PC or to a network switch with an Ethernet cable. The IP
addresses of both devices must be in agreement as shown in Figure A-1.
C-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

IND570 Setup PC Setup
IP Address: 192.168.0.1 IP Address: 192.168.0.2
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Figure A-1: IP Address Configuration Example
If both the IND570 and the PC are connected to the same facility network and both are using DHCP to
obtain an IP address, it is likely that appropriate IP addresses will be assigned to both devices so that
the IND570 can communication with the PC through the network.
However, there may be situations where direct connection between a PC and the IND570, outside of
a network is desired. In these situations, each device will need a static IP assigned that meets the
addressing criteria shown in Figure A-1. Refer to Chapter 3, Configuration, for information on
programming a static IP address in the terminal.
An example of how to configure a static IP address and subnet mask in a PC running Microsoft
Windows 7 is shown in Figure A-2 and Figure A-3:
1. Open Network Connections by clicking the Start button , and then clicking Control Panel.
2. In the search box, type adapter. Under Network and Sharing Center, click View network
connections.
3. Right-click Local Area Connection, and then click Properties. If you're prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
4. Click the Networking tab. Under This connection uses the following items, click Internet Protocol
Version 4 (TCP/IPv4). Click Properties.

Communications
Figure A-2: Local Area Connection Properties Screen
5. Typically, “Obtain an IP address automatically” is checked. However, to connect to the IND570,

set a specific PC IP address and subnet mask by clicking Use the following IP address. In the IP
address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway boxes, type the IP address settings.
Figure A-3: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Screen
6. Click on the OK button.

After disconnecting from the IND570 and before connecting back to the PC’s normal network
connection, remember to change the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Screen setting back to
“Obtain an IP address automatically” or to whatever setting was active when the screen was
accessed.

C.1.3. USB Host
IND570 provides a standard USB port classified as 2.0 Full Speed (12 Mbps/1.5 Mbps) host HID
class and mass storage class. The USB port has an A type receptacle and provides +5V at a
minimum of 100mA for connected devices.
Only FAT and FAT32 USB flash drive formats are supported
The maximum supported USB flash drive memory size is 32 GB
Multiple devices can be connected simultaneously through an external USB hub
Direct connection from IND570 to a printer or PC for data transfer is not supported.
Full details on enabling the USB port for use and all associated functions can be found in Chapter 2,
Operation, USB Host.
WARNING
C.1.3.1. USB Barcode Scanners
Table A-1 lists several USB barcode manufacturers and models that have been tested and confirmed
to work with the IND570.
Table A-1: USB Barcode Brands/Models with Confirmed Performance
Brand Model
DataLogic GRYPHON GM4100-BK-433MHz
OM-GRYPHON USB 433MHz(Base) & GRYPHON M130 (reader)
GRYPHON GD4130-BK
Quick Scan M2, Type: 130 (wireless)
Powerscan D8330
GRYPHON GM4401-BK-910mHz (PegaDISCRETE - wireless)
Heron-G D130
Symbol STB3578
LS2208-SR20001
LS2208-SR20007
DS6878-SR20007WR
LS4200
HoneyWell MS5145
1900GHD-2
1900GSR-2USB
HandHeld 3800LTP-12E
4600GSF 051CE

C.1.3.2. External Keyboard Mapping
The selection of the proper language type for the keyboard enables correct access to the layout of
specific language keyboards. Refer to the Terminal | Region | Language section of Chapter 3,
Configuration for details on setting the external keyboard language.
Communications
The IND570 supports use of the keyboard NUM LOCK, allowing use of the numeric keypad. External
keyboard mapping to IND570 functions is listed in Table A-2.
Table A-2: Keyboard Mapping
IND570 Keypad External Keyboard IND570 Keypad External Keyboard

SK (softkey) 1 F1 1 Numeric keypad 1
SK2 F2 2 Numeric keypad 2
C (Clear) F6 & Backspace 6 Numeric keypad 6
0 (Zero) F7 7 Numeric keypad 7
T (Tare) F8 8 Numeric keypad 8
Print F9 9 Numeric keypad 9
Enter Enter 0 Numeric keypad 0
Left Arrow Left arrow . Decimal
Right Arrow Right arrow
Up Arrow Up arrow
Down Arrow Down arrow
C.2. Logical (User Definable) Connections

Table A-3 outlines all possible IND570 connection assignments by port.
Table A-3: IND570 Connection Assignments, by Port
Port
COM Print
Enet1 Enet2 Enet3 Eprint USB
Assignment 1 2 3 4 Client
8142 Host* X X X X
8530 Host* X X X X
Action Log** X X X X X X X X
ASCII Input X X X X X
Command
X X X X X
Template*
Continuous
X X X X X X X
Extended

Port
COM Print
Enet1 Enet2 Enet3 Eprint USB
Assignment 1 2 3 4 Client
Continuous
X X X X X X X
Output
Continuous
X X X X X X X
Short*
Continuous
X X X X X X X
Template
CTPZ Input X X X X X X
Demand Output X X X X X X X X X X
PT6S3* X X X X X
Remote Discrete
X X
I/O
Remote Display X X X X X
Reports X X X X X X X X
Shared Data
X
Server
SICS X X X X X
SMA* X X X X
Totals Report X X X X X X X X
* Assignments only available when the COM-560 module is installed.

** Assignments only available when the Fill-570 application software is installed.
C.3. Inputs
C.3.1. ASCII Input
With the IND570 terminal, a bar code scanner or other ASCII device can be connected to a port and
used as an input device to enter ASCII data. This is done with the ASCII Input connection type. When
this input type is selected, the assignment for the data received must also be specified at
Communication > Templates > Input. Available assignments include:
• Application (TaskExpert program)

• ID1
• Keypad
• Tare
• Tare ID
• Target ID
• Target Weigh-in (Fill-570 feature only)
• Target Weigh-out (Fill-570 feature only)

As part of the programming for using the ASCII input, an input template must be configured. The
template feature permits removal of a preamble (preceding characters) and a postamble (trailing
characters) that are not part of the desired data. These parameters set the number of characters to be
ignored before and after the incoming data. These will be the same for each data input string that the
Communications
IND570 receives from a barcode scan.
An input will be terminated after the receipt of the programmable “Termination Character” or after a 1
second timeout where no new characters are received. At this time, any input data that has been
collected will be applied to the assignment that has been selected. This could be an actual value
such as a preset tare value (Tare) or a response for IDs (Keypad), or it could initiate a look-up into
the tare or target table if Tare ID or Target ID is selected as the input template assignment.
The following notes apply to how the ASCII input is handled through the input template:
The Preamble Length selects how many characters should be skipped at the beginning of an
input string before the desired data.
Data Length defines the maximum length of a string. All characters beginning after the Preamble
through the Length selection will be used as the input.
The Postamble length is the number of characters (before the Termination Character) that will be
stripped off the data string. All other data from the Preamble Length to the Termination Character
minus the Postamble Length will be used as the input string. When using an input that is always
the same fixed length, this field would remain blank.
The Termination Character is used to signal the end of the string input. It can be any ASCII control
character. If “None” is selected, the 1 second timeout feature will terminate the entry.
C.3.1.1. Input Template Example
Preamble of 2, Data length of 5, Postamble of 0, Termination Character of <CR>, Input assignment of

Tare.
Data received is: <STX>P001.5 kg<CR>
The preamble of 2 removes the <STX> and P characters. The next 5 characters of 001.5 are the
actual data. The postamble is set to 0 because the data field has already been filled so no characters
have to be removed. The <CR> terminates the input.
This string would input 1.5 as a preset tare to the IND570.
This same data could be obtained by programming a Preamble of 2, Data length of 8, Postamble of
3, Termination Character of <CR>. The Postamble length of 3 would remove the <space>kg from the
data field since they are the last 3 characters received in front of the <CR>.
C.3.2. CTPZ
The CTPZ input mode provides a method for a remote serial device to trigger several basic functions
when a control character is sent to the IND570. Remote ASCII control characters and the IND570
terminal responses include:
• C – Clears the scale to gross

• T – Tares the scale (causes a pushbutton tare)

• P – Initiates a print command
• Z – Zeros the scale
All other characters are ignored.
ASCII control characters can be sent in upper- or lower-case.

C.3.2.1. CTPZ Application Example
To initiate a pushbutton tare from a remote device, program an IND570 connection port for CTPZ
Input. Program the port parameters to match the remote device. Send the ASCII character “T” from the
remote device and the IND570 will attempt to execute a tare.
C.3.2.2. Command Template
The Command Template feature is available with the COM-560 module is installed in the IND570.
The Command Template allows the user to define alternative characters to replace the standard C, T,
P, Z input commands. The IND570 will execute the clear, tare, print or zero command when it
receives the alternative ASCII character.
C.4. Output Templates

The IND570 provides 10 templates that allow a user to define a custom string of data to be
transmitted. A template can be used with a demand mode connection, a custom trigger connection or
with a continuous template connection. In the setup of the terminal, a template is tied to an output
connection so that when the trigger for that connection is activated, the selected template will be
transmitted.
Of the 10 available output templates, 3 contain default setting, Template 1, Template 2 and Template
5 (Figure A-4). When no application software is installed in the IND570, the remaining templates are
blank. Additional details on the content of the default templates can be found in Appendix A, Default
Settings.
Template 1 C.4 Template 2

XX.XX kg Scale ID
XX.XX kg T Current Time
XX.XX kg N Current Date
XX.XX kg
XX.XX kg T
XX.XX kg N
Template 5
Totals Report
Current Time Current Date
Subtotal:
n = XXX XXX.XX kg
Grand Total:
n = XXX XXXX.XX kg
Figure A-4: Default Content of Template 1, 2 and 5
Each of the 10 available templates can store up to 1,000 bytes of data.

Table A-4 defines how the 1,000 bytes are calculated. There is no warning if a template overflows
this limit until the template is saved. At this time, any information over the 1,000-byte limit will be
lost.
Please contact your local Mettler-Toledo service provider if assistance is needed in creating custom
Communications
output templates.
Table A-4: Calculation of Template Data Bytes
Print Field Space Used

IND570 Data Field 8 characters
Special Character 4 characters + code (2 or 3 characters depending on the character)
String Field String length + quantity (1 or 2)
Justify a Field 2 characters + justify letter (L, R, C) + space limit (1, 2, or 3 characters)
Zero Fill a Field 2 characters + Z + space limit (1, 2 or 3 characters)
Repeat Character 5 characters + number (1, 2 or 3 digits for number of times repeated)
Line end <CR><LF> 7 characters
C.4.2. Template Example

The following example shows a customer ticket that has three template strings centered in a 40-
character wide field, with an asterisk underline.
GROSSBERG TRUCKING CO.
CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS
DAILY WEIGHT TOTALS
****************************************
Use the information in Table A-5 to calculate how much of the template remains for field data.
Table A-5: Space Required for the Example Ticket Heading Information
Character Description Character Total

IND570 Field (String 1) 8 (IND570 shared data field)
Centered (Justify in 40-character field) 2 + 1 (letter C) + 2 (two digits for quantity 40)
CR (ASCII Carriage Return character) 2 + 1 (one digit for quantity 1)
LF (ASCII Line Feed character) 2 + 1 (one digit for quantity 1)
Total formatting characters required 19
Total space required (characters on each line) 25 + 19 + 19 = 63
ASCII (*) character 1 (ASCII character)
Repeat (*) 40 times 5 (repeat) + 2 (number of repeats)
CR 2 + 1 (one digit for quantity 1)
LF (ASCII Line Feed character) 2 + 1 (one digit for quantity 1)
Total space for line of asterisks 14
Grand total of characters (19 + 63 + 14) 96
Total characters remaining in this template (1,000 − 96) 904
For template space calculation:

Regardless of the number of characters in an IND570 terminal data field, a template uses
only eight characters (the field code).
Justification uses four to six characters that are not used if the field remains unjustified.
Repeat Print Notification
Output templates used for demand printing transactions have the option of being designated with a
“DUPLICATE” header or footer if they are generated through the Repeat Print softkey.
DUPLICATE
CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS
DAILY WEIGHT TOTALS
****************************************
or
CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS
DAILY WEIGHT TOTALS
****************************************
DUPLICATE
C.5. Communication Outputs

C.5.1. Demand Output Mode
The Demand Output mode transmits data only when the IND570 terminal receives a demand output
(Print) request. Print requests are sent to the IND570 terminal when:
• The operator presses the terminal PRINT key

• The operator presses any of the Custom Print Trigger softkeys
• A discrete input selected as print or customer print trigger is activated
• An ASCII “P” is sent through a command input port
• Auto print is enabled and all conditions for auto print are met
• A PLC command to print is received
• The shared data command for “Print” is triggered
When a print is triggered, data is transmitted in a string which is configured in the template editing
portion of setup (refer to section A.4, Output Templates). Demand Output mode is typically used when
sending data to a printer, a PC or a USB memory stick a transactional basis.

C.5.2. Custom Triggers
There are three programmable custom triggers in the Connections section of setup that can be used to
“trigger” a specific demand output. A custom trigger can be used to provide a specialized “print” key
that sends a specific output template to a specific port. Use of the custom triggers along with the
Communications
terminals main PRINT function provides good flexibility in configuring on-demand data transmissions.
Activation of a custom print trigger will not trigger alibi logging, totalization or transaction counter
updates.
While it is not prohibited, it is recommended that custom print triggers only be used to transmit
output templates that do not contain metrologically sensitive data (weight data).
C.5.3. Ethernet Demand Output
If a demand output connection (or Reports connection) to Ethernet is made in the connections section
of setup, a remote device may “register” to receive the data through the Ethernet port. In order to do
this, the remote device must login to the shared data server and send the command to register for the
data. The login can be any valid username and password for the terminal.
When a user logs into the shared data server, he or she acquires the level of access for the
username and password used. All levels of users can receive a demand string.
If a demand output connection to EPrint is made in the Connections section of setup, a remote device
is not required to “register” with the Shared Data Server to receive the data through the Ethernet port.
The data string simply contains the assigned template’s information. The EPrint connection is made
via the secondary TCP/IP port at the user-defined port number. Refer to Chapter 3, Configuration for
more details.
C.5.3.1. Registering for the Demand Output
The “printout” command allows the client to define a Demand Print Stream as a callback field. The
Demand Print Streams include demand print (triggered by the scale) and custom triggers (triggers 1,
2, and 3). The console print server sends a message to the client at each print output. Since print
messages can span multiple message blocks (depending upon size), the start of the print message
has a <dprint> tag and the end of the message has a </dprint > tag. After registering for the demand
output, the client will receive the appropriate data stream. The “ctimer” command specifies the
minimum time between repeated callback messages. The “xprintout” command removes the
registration from the terminal and the communication will stop.
The “xgroup all” command will also terminate any demand output registrations.
C.5.3.2. Sequence Example 1
1. Enter the menu tree of setup.

2. In the Connections sub-block of the Communications block of setup, create a connection for
Demand Output assignment to the Ethernet port triggered by Scale using Template 2.
3. Ensure that the IP and Gateway addresses are programmed properly.
4. Login to the shared data server from the client, (refer to the “user” command in section
A.10.3.1).
5. Register to receive the demand data by entering the “printout 1” command.

6. The IND570 will acknowledge the registration with a message [00Gxxx~number PRINTOUT
streams=1]. Now, whenever a demand print is generated, the Template 2 data will be sent to the
client.
00P004 <dprint>Scale 1
01:33:10
06/Sep/2005
17.08 lb
17.08 lb T
0.00 lb N
</dprint>
The “xprintout” command allows the client to remove the print output callback registration thus
stopping the demand output.
C.5.3.3. Sequence Example 2

Demand Output assignment to the Ethernet port triggered by Trigger 1 using Template 1.
A.10.3.1).
5. Register to receive the demand data by entering the “printout 1” command.
6. The IND570 will acknowledge the registration with a message [00Gxxx~number PRINTOUT
streams=1]. Now, whenever the custom trigger is initiated (by a programmed discrete input or
PLC command), the Template 1 data will be sent to the client.
00P004 <dprint> 17.08 lb
17.08 lb T
0.00 lb N
</dprint>
The “xprintout” command allows the client to remove the print output callback registration thus
stopping the demand output.
C.6. Continuous Output Mode

The Continuous Output mode of the IND570 can be used to continuously send weight data and scale
status information to a remote device such as a PC or a remote display.
C.6.1. Standard Continuous Output

Continuous Output is also commonly known as MT Continuous or Mettler-Toledo Continuous. The
fixed format data output consists of 17 or 18 bytes depending on whether or not the checksum
character is enabled or disabled. The checksum is available on all ports. Non-significant weight data
and tare data digits are transmitted as spaces. The continuous output mode provides compatibility
with METTLER TOLEDO products that require real-time weight data. Table A-6 shows continuous
format output.

Table A-6: Continuous Output Format
Status2 Indicated Weight3 Tare Weight4

Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Communications
Data STX 1
SWA SWB SWC MSD - - - - LSD MSD - - - - LSD CR 5
CHK6
1. ASCII Start of Text character (02 hex), always transmitted.

2. Status words. Refer to Table A-7, Table A-8, and Table A-9 for details.
3. Displayed weight. Either gross or net weight. Six digits, no decimal point or sign. Insignificant
leading zeroes are replaced with spaces.
4. Tare weight. Six digits of tare weight data. No decimal point in field.
5. ASCII Carriage Return <CR> character (0D hex).
6. Checksum, transmitted only if enabled in setup. Checksum is used to detect errors in the
transmission of data. Checksum is defined as the 2’s complement of the seven low order bits of
the binary sum of all characters preceding the checksum character, including the <STX> and
<CR> characters.
Table A-7, Table A-8, and Table A-9 detail the standard status bytes for standard continuous output.
Table A-7: Status Word A Bit Definitions
Bits 2, 1, and 0
2 1 0 Decimal Point Location
0 0 0 XXXXX00
0 0 1 XXXXX0
0 1 0 XXXXXX
0 1 1 XXXXX.X
1 0 0 XXXX.XX
1 0 1 XXX.XXX
1 1 0 XX.XXXX
1 1 1 X.XXXXX
Bits 4 and 3
4 3 Build Code
0 1 X1
1 0 X2
1 1 X5

Bits 2, 1, and 0
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 Always = 0
Table A-8: Status Word B Bit Definitions
Status Bits Function

Bit 0 Gross = 0, Net = 1
Bit 1 Sign, Positive = 0, Negative = 1
Bit 2 Out of Range = 1 (Over capacity or Under Zero)
Bit 3 Motion = 1, Stable = 0
Bit 4 lb = 0, kg = 1 (see also Status Byte 3, bits 0-2)
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 Zero Not Captured = 1
Table A-9: Status Word C Bit Definitions
Bits 2, 1, and 0
Weight Description
2 1 0
0 0 0 lb or kg, selected by Status Byte B, bit 4
0 0 1 grams (g)
0 1 0 metric tons (t)
0 1 1 ounces (oz)
1 0 0 troy ounces (ozt)
1 0 1 penny weight (dwt)
1 1 0 tons (ton)
1 1 1 custom units
Bit 3 Print Request = 1
Bit 4 Expand Data x 10 = 1, Normal = 0
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 Always = 0
C.6.2. Continuous Extended Output

Continuous Extended Output is a 24 byte message string that is an extension of the standard 17
bytes continuous output format. An optional checksum is can be enabled or disabled on all ports. The
additional bytes serve to provide a node address and, optionally, custom application bits.
The IND570 terminal supports only the point-to-point application of the extended
continuous format. The multi-drop application is not supported.

Table A-10 describes the continuous extended output format. The output takes the form shown here:
<SOH><ADR><SB-1><SB-2><SB-3><SB-4><WWWWWWWWW><TTTTTTTT><CR><CKS>
Table A-10: Format of Continuous – Extended Output

Communications
Status Indicated Weight Tare Weight

Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Data SOH ADR SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4 W W W W W W W W W T T T T T T T T CR CKS
Note A B C D E F G
1. ASCII Start of Header character (01H)

2. Address character – always 1(31H)
3. Status Bytes 1 to 4. Refer to Table A-11, Table A-12, Table A-13 and Table A-14.
4. Displayed weight (gross or net). Nine (9) ASCII digits including negative sign, decimal point.
Leading zeros are set to spaces (20H). A minus sign (2DH) is sent immediately before the MSD for
negative weights. Digits sent when data is invalid can be weight, zeros, or spaces (they should be
ignored by receiving device). This field may also contain asynchronous error codes, when the data
invalid bit is set.
5. Tare weight. Eight (8) ASCII digits including decimal point. Leading zeros set to spaces (20H).
6. ASCII carriage return (0DH).
7. Optional checksum. This character is the 2's complement of the sum of the 7 least significant bits
of all preceding characters including the <SOH> and <CR>. The checksum character is
transmitted with the same parity as all other characters.
Table A-11, Table A-12, Table A-13 and Table A-14 indicate the functions of status bytes 1, 2, 3 and
4.
Table A-11: Status Byte 1 Definitions
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Units

0 0 0 0 None
0 0 0 1 pounds
0 0 1 0 kilograms
0 0 1 1 grams
0 1 0 0 metric tons
0 1 0 1 tons
0 1 1 0 troy ounces
0 1 1 1 pennyweight
1 0 0 0 ounces
1 0 0 1 custom
1 0 1 0 reserved
1 0 1 1 reserved
1 1 0 0 reserved
1 1 0 1 reserved
1 1 1 0 reserved
1 1 1 1 reserved

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Units
Bit 4 Center of zero = 1
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 Weight in motion = 1
Bit Description
Bit 0 Gross or net mode, Net = 1
Bit 2 Bit 1 Tare type
0 0 No tare
0 1 Auto or semi-auto tare
1 0 Preset tare
1 1 Tare memory
Bit 4 Bit 3 Weight range
0 0 Single range
0 1 Weight range 1
1 0 Weight range 2
1 1 Weight range 3
Bit 5 Always = 1
Bit 6 Expanded by x10 = 1
Bit Description
0 Data invalid = 1
1 Out of range under zero = 1
2 Out of range over capacity = 1
3 In power up (zero not captured) = 1
4 Print initiated = 1
5 Always = 1
6 Below MinWeigh threshold = 1
Bit Description
0 Application Bit 1 (as0135)
5 Always = 1

Additional Notes on Continuous Extended Output
• If a tare weight has been identified as a Tare Memory type in Status Byte 2, it indicates that the
value in the tare field might be a gross weight or a tare weight depending upon the application.
This would be used when the terminal is programmed for net sign correction and the gross and
Communications
tare weights have not been determined yet.

• The Data Invalid bit in Status Byte 3 indicates an overcapacity value, an under zero condition, or
other conditions that indicate the weight value may not be valid. Any device reading the
continuous output must monitor the Data Invalid bit and handle the data accordingly.
• The application bits in Status Byte 4 are used for specific functions by other terminals and are not
use in the IND570 terminal.
C.6.3. Continuous Template Output
If Continuous Template is selected as the assignment for a connection, a custom string of data can
be configured using one of the five available templates. When Continuous Template is assigned to an
output port, the output rate will depend on the size of the template and the baud rate selected. The
rate will vary from approximately once per second up to approximately 20 times per second. Refer to
Table A-15 for estimated output rates of a 160 byte template.
Table A-15: Continuous Template Output Rate
Baud Rate Outputs/Second Baud Rate Outputs/Second

300 1 9600 10
600 2 19200 12
1200 4 38400 14
2400 6 57600 16
4800 8 115200 18
The template is configured as explained in Chapter 3, Configuration, and this template has the same
1,000 byte size restrictions as described in section A.4, Output Templates. For optimum performance,
the template used in continuous output should not exceed 200 characters.
C.6.4. Ethernet Continuous Output

If a continuous output type of connection to Eprint is made in the connections section of setup, a
remote device is not required “register” with the Shared Data server, to receive data through the
Ethernet port. The data string simply contains the assigned continuous output or template information.
The Eprint connection is made via the secondary TCP/IP port at the user-defined secondary port
number (configured in setup at Communication>Network>Port).
If a continuous output or continuous template output connection to Ethernet 1 is made in the

connections section of setup, a remote device must “register” to receive the data through the Ethernet
port. In order to do this, the remote device must login to the shared data server and send the
command to “register” for the data. The login can be any valid username and password for the
terminal.
When a user logs onto the shared data server, they acquire the level of access for the username
and password used. All levels of users can receive a continuous string.

C.6.4.1. Registering for the Continuous Output
The “contout” command allows the client to define the continuous output string as a callback field.
The Console Print Server sends a message to the client at each continuous output. The continuous
output message is either in the Standard METTLER TOLEDO Continuous Output format or in a
continuous template format. The “ctimer” command specifies the minimum time between repeated
callback messages. The “xcontout” command removes the registration from the terminal and the
communication will stop.
The “xgroup all” command will also terminate any continuous output registrations.
C.6.4.2. Sequence Example

Continuous Output assignment to the Ethernet port triggered by Scale.
A.10.3.1).
5. Register to receive the continuous data by entering the “contout” command.
6. The IND570 will acknowledge the registration with a message [00Gxxx~number CONTOUT
streams=1]. Now, whenever a continuous output string is generated by the IND570, the data will
be sent to the client.
00C148 14! 354 236
>
00C149 14! 354 236
>
00C150 14! 354 236
>
00C151 14! 354 236
The “xcontout” command allows the client to remove the continuous output callback registration thus
stopping the continuous output.
The output rate of a Continuous type output over Ethernet is 20Hz by default. This rate cannot be
modified through the terminal setup menu. However, the output rate can me modified by a Shared
Data write to a field in the “cs” block of Shared Data. Please refer to the IND570 Shared Data
Reference, available for download at www.mt.com/IND570, for specifics.
C.7. Standard Interface Command Set (SICS)

Protocol
The IND570 terminal supports the METTLER TOLEDO Standard Interface Command Set (MT-SICS),
which is divided into four levels (0, 1, 2, 3), depending on the functionality of the device. The
IND570 terminal supports parts of levels 0 and 1.
• MT-SICS level 0 – Command set for even the simplest device.

• MT-SICS level 1 – Extension of the command set for standard devices.
A feature of this concept is that the commands combined in MT-SICS level 0 and 1 are identical for all
devices. Both the simplest weighing device to the fully expanded weighing workstation recognize the
commands of MT-SICS levels 0 and 1.
Communications
C.7.1. Version Number of the MT-SICS

Each level of the MT-SICS has its own version number, which can be requested with the command I1
from level 0. The IND570 supports:
• MT-SICS level 0, version 2.2x (except the I5 and ZI commands)

• MT-SICS level 1, version 2.2x
C.7.2. Command Formats
Each command received by the scale via the data interface is acknowledged by a response of the
device to the transmitter. Commands and responses are data strings with a fixed format. Commands
sent to the IND570 terminal comprise one or more characters of the ASCII character set. Enter
commands only in uppercase.
The parameters of the command must be separated from one another and from the command name
by a space (ASCII 32 dec., in the examples shown in this section, a space is represented as _ ).
Each command must be terminated by CR LF (ASCII 13 dec., 10 dec.)
The characters CR and LF, which can be inputted using the ENTER or RETURN key of most entry
keypads, are not listed in this description. However, it is essential they be included for
communication with the IND570 terminal.
C.7.2.1. SICS Command Example
Command to tare the IND570 terminal:
“TA_20.00_lb” (The command terminator CR LF is not shown.)
C.7.3. Response Formats

All responses sent by the IND570 terminal to the transmitter to acknowledge the received commands
have one of the following formats:
• Response with weight value

• Response without weight value
• Error message
C.7.3.1. Format of the Response with Weight Value
A general description of the response with weight value as follows:

ID Response identification.
__ Space (ASCII 32 dec.)
Status Status of the IND570 terminal. Refer to the description of the commands and responses in
the sections below.
Weight Value Weighing result, shown as a number with 10 digits, including sign directly in front of the first
digit. The weight value appears right justified. Preceding zeroes are suppressed with the
exception of the zero to the left of the decimal point.
Unit Weight unit displayed.
CR Carriage Return (ASCII 13 dec.)
LF Line Feed (ASCII 10 dec.)
C.7.3.1.1. Example
Response with a stable weight value of 0.256 kg:
S _ S_ _ _ _ _ _ 0.256 _ kg
CR LF is not shown
C.7.3.2. Format of the Response Without Weight Value
A general description of the response without weight value is as follows:
ID Response identification.
_ Space (ASCII 32 dec.)
Status Status of the IND570 terminal. Refer to the description of the commands and responses in the
sections below.
Parameters Command-dependent response code.
CR Carriage Return (ASCII 13 dec.)
LF Line Feed (ASCII 10 dec.)
CR LF is not shown in response
C.7.4. Error Messages

ID CR LF
ID – Error Identification
There are four different error messages. The identification always comprises two characters:
• ES – Syntax error: The IND570 terminal has not recognized the received command.
• ET – Transmission error: The scale has received a “faulty” command, such as a parity error.
• EL – Logical error: The command is understood, the parameter is incorrect.
• EI – Internal Error:

• The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time.
• CR – Carriage return (ASCII 13 dec.)
• LF – Line Feed (ASCII 10 dec.)
CR LF is not shown in actual response

Communications
C.7.5. Tips for the Programmer

Tips for programming the IND570 terminal SICS protocol include:
C.7.5.1. Command and Response
Improve the dependability of application software by having the program evaluate the response of the
IND570 terminal to a command. The response is the acknowledgment that the IND570 terminal has
received the command.
C.7.5.2. Reset
When establishing communication between the IND570 terminal and system, send a reset command
to the IND570 terminal to enable a start from a determined state. When the IND570 terminal or
system is switched on or off, faulty characters can be received or sent.
C.7.5.3. Quotation Marks (“ ”)
Quotation marks included in the command responses are used to designate fields and will always be
sent.
C.7.6. Commands and Responses MT-SICS Level 0

The IND570 terminal receives a command from the system computer and acknowledges the
command with an appropriate response. The following sections contain a detailed description of the
command set in alphabetical order with the associated responses.
Commands and responses are closed with CR and LF. These termination characters are not
shown in the following description, but they must always be entered with commands or sent with
responses.
The commands of MT-SICS level 0 are available with even the simplest devices that support the
METTLER TOLEDO Standard Interface Command Set. Level 0 commands include:
I0 Inquiry of all implemented MT-SICS commands

I1 Inquiry of MT-SICS level and MT-SICS versions
I2 Inquiry of balance data
I3 Inquiry of balance SW version and type definition number
I4 Inquiry of serial number
S Send stable weight value
SI Send weight value immediately
SIR Send weight value immediately and repeat
Z Zero

@ Reset (clear out serial buffer)
The following are detailed descriptions of these Level 0 commands:
C.7.6.1. I0 – INQUIRY OF ALL IMPLEMENTED MT-SICS COMMANDS
Command: I0 – Inquiry of all implemented MT-SICS commands
Response: I0 B 0 “I0” Level 0 “IO” command implemented
I0 B 0 “I1” Level 0 “I1” command implemented
I0 B 0 “S” Level 0 “S” command implemented
I0 B 0 “SI” Level 0 “SI” command implemented
I0 B 0 “SIR” Level 0 “SIR” command implemented
I0 B 0 “Z” Level 0 “Z” command implemented
I0 B 0 “@” Level 0 “@” command implemented
I0 B 1 “D” Level 1 “D” command implemented
I0 B 1 “DW” Level 1 “DW” command implemented
I0 B 1 “K” Level 1 “K1-K3” commands implemented
I0 B 1 “SR” Level 1 “SR” command implemented
I0 B 1 “T” Level 1 “T” command implemented
I0 B 1 “TA” Level 1 “TA” command implemented
I0 B 1 “TAC” Level 1 “TAC” command implemented
I0 B 1 “TI” Level 1 “TI” command implemented
Error Response: I0 I - Cannot execute command at this time.
C.7.6.2. I1 – INQUIRY OF MT-SICS LEVEL AND MT-SICS VERSIONS
Command: I1 – Inquiry of MT-SICS level and MT-SICS versions
Response: I 1 _ A _ “1” _ “2.2x” _ “2.2x” _ “ ” _ “ ”
“1” Level 1 fully implemented

2.2x Level 0, version V2.2x
2.2x Level 1, version V2.2x

“” No MT-SICS 2 commands
“” No MT-SICS 3 commands
Error Response: I1 _ I – Command understood, not executable at present.
Communications
In the case of the MT-SICS level, only fully implemented levels are listed. In this case, only level
1is fully implemented so level 0 is not specified.
In the case of the MT-SICS version, all levels are specified even those only partially implemented.
C.7.6.3. I2 – INQUIRY OF DATA
Command: I2 – Inquiry of data.
Response: I2 _ A _ “IND570 _ Standard _50.00 kg”
Response: I2 _ A _ “IND570 _ 570Fill _50.00 kg”
• IND570 - Model number of terminal
• Standard - Basic model with no special application software
• 570Fill - Sent when an IND570 with Fill-570 installed is queried
• 50.00 kg - Capacity and primary unit of the base connected to the IND570
The number of characters of “text” depends on the application software and scale capacity.
C.7.6.4. I3 – INQUIRY OF SW VERSION AND TYPE DEFINITION NUMBER
Command I3: Inquiry of SW version number(s) and type definition number.
Response: I3 _ A _ “1.00”
1.00 – Firmware version of the IND570

The number of characters of “text” depends on the revision and device type.
C.7.6.5. I4 – INQUIRY OF SERIAL NUMBER
Command: I4 – Inquiry of serial number.
Response: I4 _ A _ “text”
Serial number as “text” (content of shared data xs0105 in IND570 terminal)

Example
Command: I 4 – Inquiry of serial number
Response: I 4 _ A _ “B234589528”

The serial number response is the content of the terminal serial number as entered in the setup.
C.7.6.6. S – SEND STABLE WEIGHT VALUE
Command: S – Send the current stable net weight.
Response:
S _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Current stable weight value in current displayed units

S _ I –The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time. (IND570 terminal is currently
executing another command such as taring, or stability was not reached before timeout expired.)
S _ + – IND570 in overload range.
S _ - – IND570 in underload range.
Example
Command: S – Send a stable weight value.
Response: S _ S _ _ _ _ _ 100.00 _ kg. – The current, stable weight value is 100.00 kg.
The terminal will wait for up to 3 seconds after receiving an “S” command for no-motion. If
motion does not settle within this time, the command is aborted.
C.7.6.7. SI – SEND WEIGHT VALUE IMMEDIATELY
Command: SI – Send the current net weight value regardless of scale stability.
Response:
S _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Stable weight value.

S _ D _ WeightValue _ Unit – Non-stable weight value.
S _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time. (scale currently executing
another command).
Example
Command: SI – Send current weight value.
Response: S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 129.07 _ kg – The current weight value is unstable and is 129.07kg.
The response to the command SI is the last internal weight value (stable or not stable) before
receipt of the command SI.
Weight value is in the current displayed units.
C.7.6.8. SIR – SEND WEIGHT VALUE IMMEDIATELY AND REPEAT
Command: SIR – Send the net weight values repeatedly, regardless of scale stability.
Response:

S _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Stable weight value.
S _ D _ WeightValue _ Unit – Non-stable weight value.
S _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time. (IND570 terminal is
Communications
executing another command, such as tare).

Example
Command: SIR – Send current weight values at intervals.
Response:
S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 129.07 _ kg
S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 129.08 _ kg
S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 129.09 _ kg
S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 129.09 _ kg
S _ D _ _ _ _ _ 114.87 _ kg
The scale sends stable or non-stable weight values at intervals.
SIR is overwritten and cancelled by the commands S, SI, SR, and @.
The number of weight values per second depends on the scale type and will vary from
approximately 6 (older IDNet bases) to approximately 18 (analog bases).
Weight value is in the current displayed units.
C.7.6.9. Z – ZERO
Command: Z – Zero the scale.
Response:
Z _ A – The following then holds:

• Scale is in gross mode
• Zero setting performed, (stability criterion and zero setting range complied with).
Z _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time. (IND570 terminal is
currently executing another command, such as tare, or timeout as stability was not reached.)
Z _ + – Upper limit of zero setting range exceeded.
Z _ - – Lower limit of zero setting range exceeded.
Example
Command: Z – Zero.
Response: Z _ A – Zero setting performed.

If enabled in setup a tare value will be cleared during zero setting.
The zero point determined during switching on is not influenced by this command (the
measurement ranges remain unchanged).
The duration of the timeout is approximately one second.
C.7.6.10. @ – RESET
Command: @ – Reset the scale to the condition found after switching on, but without a zero setting
being performed.
Response:
I 4 _ A _ “text” – Serial number of the scale, the scale is ready for operation.
Example
Command: @
Response: I4 _ A _ “123456-6GG” – The IND570 terminal is reset and sends the serial number.
All commands awaiting responses are canceled.
The “reset” command is always executed.
A reset command received by the IND570 terminal during the calibration and test procedure
cannot be processed.
C.7.7. Commands and Responses MT-SICS Level 1

The following commands of MT-SICS level 1 are available:
D – Display (display text string on IND570 display)

DW – Weight Display (return to standard weight display - clear text transmitted with “D” command)
K – Key control
SR – Send weight value on weight change (Send and Repeat)
T – Tare
TA – Set tare value
TAC – Clear tare value
TI – Tare Immediately
C.7.7.1. D – WRITE TO TERMINAL DISPLAY
Command: D
D_”text” (“ “ are required for proper command execution)
D “ “ (clears previously transmitted text from the Data line)
Response:

D_A – Text appears unabridged, left-aligned in Data line just above the softkeys
D_R – The end of the text appears in Data line. The start of the text is cut off and marked by the
symbol “*”.
Communications
D_I – Command is understood but cannot be executed at this time.(the IND570 terminal is currently
executing another command, such as tare, or timeout as stability was not reached.)
D_L – Command understood, parameter wrong.
Example
Command: D_”HELLO”
Response: D_ A – “HELLO” appears in the Data line.
The maximum number of characters of "text" visible in the Data line is 30. Above 30 characters,
beginning characters in the string will be dropped represented with a “*”.
C.7.7.2. DW – DISPLAY STANDARD WEIGHT DISPLAY
Command: DW – Returns display to previous settings/status.
Response:
DW_A – Display showing previous settings/status.
DW_I – Command understood, parameter wrong.
C.7.7.3. K – KEY CONTROL
Command: K_1 – When a key is pressed, execute the corresponding function, but do not send a
reply.
K_2 – When a key is pressed, do not execute the corresponding function and send
nothing.
K_3 – When a key is pressed, do not execute the key function but send the
corresponding key code.
Key codes supported by K_3 command:
Key Key code Key Key code

Softkey 1 1 Enter 13
Softkey 2 2 1 49
Softkey 3 3 2 50
Softkey 4 4 3 51
Softkey 5 5 4 52
Clear 8 5 53
Zero 30 6 54
Tare 24 7 55

Key Key code Key Key code
Print 23 8 56
Left 16 9 57
Right 18 0 48
Up 17 Shift 25
Down 19 Decimal 46
K_4 –When a key is pressed, execute the corresponding function and send the key code.
Key codes supported by K_4 command:
Key Key code

Tare 1
Zero 2
Print 3
Response:
K_A – Key control command understood and successfully executed.
K_I – Key control command understood but not executable at present (e.g. terminal in setup mode)
K_L – Command understood, parameter wrong.
Example
Command: K_1 (followed by press of TARE key on terminal keypad)
Response: Tare executed. No further response from terminal.
Command: K_3 (followed by press of TARE key on terminal keypad)
Response: K_C_24. Tare is not executed on the terminal. “Keypad disabled” appears in terminal
system line.
K_1 is the factory setting (default value).
K_1 is active after the reset (@) command.
Only one K command is active at any one time.
C.7.7.4. SR – SEND WEIGHT VALUE ON WEIGHT CHANGE (SEND AND REPEAT)
Command: SR
S R _ PresetValue _ Unit – Send the current stable weight value and then continuously after every
weight change greater or equal to the preset value a non-stable value followed by the next stable
value, range = 1d to maximum load.
SR – If no preset value is entered, the weight change must be at least 12.5% of the last stable weight
value, minimum = 30d.
Response:

S _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Current, stable weight value. Weight change.
S _ D _ WeightValue _ Unit –Non-stable weight value.
S _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Next stable weight value.
Communications
S _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time.(the IND570 terminal is
currently executing another command, such as tare, or timeout as stability was not reached.)
S _ L – Command understood, parameter wrong.
Example
Command: S R _ 0.50 _ kg – Send the current stable weight value followed by every load change >
0.50 kg.
Response:
S _ S _ _ _ _ _100.00 _ kg – Scale stable.

S _ D _ _ _ _ _115.23 _ kg – More than 0.50 kg loaded.
S _ S _ _ _ _ _200.00 _ kg – Scale again stable.
SR is overwritten and cancelled by the commands S, SI, SIR, @ and hardware break.
If, following a non-stable weight value, stability has not been reached within the timeout interval,
the response “S _ I “ is sent and then a non-stable weight value. Timeout then starts again form
the beginning.
The preset value must be entered in the first unit that is the weight unit displayed after the IND570
terminal has been switched on.
C.7.7.5. T – Tare
Command: T – Tare a stable weight value
Response:
T_S_WeightValue_Unit – Tare performed. Stability criterion and tare range comply with settings.
Current Tare weight value in current units is returned.
T_ I – Tare not performed (scale is executing another command, zero setting, or stability timeout
reached.)
T_+ – Upper limit of tare range exceeded.
T_- – Lower limit of tare range exceeded.
Example
Command: T
Response: T _S _ _ _ _ _100.00_kg – The IND570 has accepted a tare value of 100.00 kg.
The new tare weight value overwrites tare memory.

The duration of the timeout depends on the scale type and its settings. If motion does not settle
within this time, the command is aborted.
Clearing tare value: Refer to section A.7.7.7, the TAC command.
C.7.7.6. TA – INQUIRE/ENTER TARE VALUE
Command: TA – Inquiry of tare weight value
TA _ Tare Preset Value _ Unit – Entry of a tare value.
Response:
T A _ A _ TareWeightValue _ Unit – Current Tare weight value.

T A _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time.(the IND570 terminal is
currently executing another command, such as zero setting).
T A _ L – Command understood, parameter wrong.
Example
Command: T A _ 10.00 _ kg – Load a preset tare of 10 kg.
Response: T A _ A _ _ _ _ _10.00_k g – The IND570 has accepted the 10.00 kg tare value.
The existing tare will be overwritten by the preset tare weight value.
The IND570 terminal will automatically round the inputted tare value to the current readability.
The preset value must be entered in the current units.
C.7.7.7. TAC – CLEAR TARE VALUE
Command: TAC – Clear tare value.
Response:
TAC _ A – Tare value cleared.

TAC _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time.(the IND570 terminal is
currently executing another command, such as zero setting, or timeout as stability was not reached).
C.7.7.8. TI – TARE IMMEDIATELY
Command: TI – Tare immediately, (store the current weight value, which can be stable or non-stable
as tare weight value).
Response:
T I _ S _ WeightValue _ Unit – Tare performed, stable tare value.

T I _ D _ WeightValue _ Unit – Tare performed, non-stable tare value.
T I _ I – The command is understood but cannot be executed at this time. (The IND570 terminal is
currently executing another command, such as zero setting.)
T I _ L – The command is understood, the parameter is wrong.

T I _ + – Upper limit of tare range exceeded.
T I _ - – Lower limit of tare range exceeded.
Example
Communications
Command: TI – Tare.
Response: T I _ D _ _ _ _ _117.57 _ kg – The tare memory holds a non-stable (dynamic) weight

value.
Any previous tare value will be overwritten by the new tare weight value.
Even during a non-stable (dynamic) condition, a tare weight value can be determined. However,
the tare value determined in this manner may not be accurate.
The stored tare weight value is sent in the current units.
C.8. Remote Discrete I/O (ARM100)

The IND570 provides the ability to expand the discrete input and output control to remote ARM100
devices. This ability is required when more than five inputs or eight outputs are used (these are limits
of the internal discrete I/O options) or it may be beneficial to have all of the I/O external to the IND570
based on the application. A total of three sets of I/O are supported in the IND570. This could be
configured as an internal discrete I/O option and two remote modules or all three sets of I/O could be
ARM100 remote I/O modules.
The communication link from the IND570 terminal to the ARM100 remote discrete I/O module is an
RTU-based RS-485 communication protocol. During power-up, if remote discrete I/O has been
enabled, communication will be established between the IND570 terminal and the remote modules.
Any communication errors will be shown on the system line of the IND570.
If the RS-485 link between the ARM100(s) and the IND570 is interrupted or disabled, the IND570
disables all active I/O as a precaution.
Since the communication link is RS-485, only COM1 and the optional COM3 may be programmed for
use with the ARM100 (COM2 is RS-232 only). This communication uses both the input and output
portions of the port so it cannot be shared with any other connections. When “Remote Discrete I/O” is
selected as the assignment for COM1 or COM3, the communication parameters are automatically
preset by the terminal and cannot be changed from the front panel - they can only be viewed. The
parameters are:
• Baud Rate: 57600

• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Flow Control: None
• Interface: RS-485

After wiring the ARM100 modules per the details in the IND570 Installation Manual, and selecting the
Remote I/O assignment in the connections portion of setup, the remote modules should be
operational and ready for assignment of the individual inputs and outputs.
When assigning functions to remote discrete I/O locations, the remote modules are addressed by
1.0.x for module #1, 2.0.x for module #2, and 3.0.x for module #3. Each module provides four
inputs and six dry-contact relay outputs.
Example
Tare assigned to discrete I/O input address 1.0.1.
This indicates that when input #1 is turned on in remote module #1, a tare will be taken.
C.9. Report Printing

In order to print reports of IND570 memory tables, data logs and test results, a connection must be
made with an assignment of Reports. When the Reports assignment is associated with a serial,
Ethernet port, or USB port whenever a report is printed, it will be routed to the assigned port.
The format of the printed report is selectable in setup so that all reports have the same general format
(width, header, etc.) Additional printable fields can be configured for the individual tare table and
target table reports. The settings unique to these reports are found in setup at Communication >
Reports.
The following reports can be printed from their respective view screens:
• Tare Table
• Target Table
• Message Table
• Totals Report
• Service Information Recall
• Terminal Status
• GWP and Calibration Test Results
• GWP Log
• Change Log
• Error Log
• Maintenance Log
The following reports can be viewed and printed using the REPORTS softkey :
• Alibi Memory
• Tare Table
• Target Table

C.9.1. Table Reports
The Alibi Memory, Tare Table, and Target Table can be viewed and printed by an operator using
pressing the REPORTS softkey . Results of the table view for the Tare Table and Target Table can
be printed directly from the Reports page; the Alibi memory file can be printed once its view is
Communications
accessed. The table report structures are based on the fields defined in the table and report
configuration. Configuring the format of all printed reports is described in Chapter 3, Configuration.
In order to access the report function, the REPORTS softkey must be added to the selection of
softkeys on the home page.
C.9.1.1. Viewing and Printing Tables
1. Press the REPORTS softkey . The Reports Selection Screen displays (Figure A-5). Only tables
that have been enabled in setup are shown. The Tare Table will always be shown.
Figure A-5: View Reports Screen
2. Select the table to view from the Type selection box, or press the PRINT softkey to print either
the Tare or Target Table. Because the Alibi table is likely to be large, it cannot be printed directly
from this screen; the table must be filtered and the results shown in the Alibi Search View screen
before a print can be initiated. A “Reports” connection must be configured to enable the report
print. Note that the available softkeys will change based on the selection of the type of report.
3. After selecting the report, press the VIEW TABLE softkey .
information to limit the search, or use the default “find all” character, the asterisk (*) to view all
records.
5. Press the Search softkey to view the results of the search. Each of the tables can be printed
from its Search View screen.
A sample of a 40-column wide report for each is shown in the following sections.
All reports (except for the Totals Report, Calibration Test and GWP Test reports) can be printing in
40-column or 80-column wide format. The settings at Communication > Reports > Format
determine if all reports are printed in a 40-column width or an 80-column width format.
C.9.2. Report Examples

C.9.2.1. Alibi Table
The alibi table can be viewed, printed or saved to USB memory. Alibi memory is viewed in the same
way as a search and view of any other table in the terminal. It is accessible from the dedicated ALIBI

softkey , the REPORTS softkey , the softkey or through the menu tree at Application >
Memory > Alibi.
C.9.2.1.1. 40 Column Example

Alibi Memory Report
17:25:26 23/May/2014
23-May-2014 17:25:01 0000022

31.6 kg 0 kg T 31.6 kg N
****************************************
23-May-2014 17:26:38 0000023
26.09 kg 0 kg T 26.09 kg N
****************************************
23-May-2014 17:29:15 0000024
45.22 kg 0 kg T 45.22 kg N
****************************************
C.9.2.2. Tare Table Report
The tare table can be viewed, printed or transferred with the USB file transfer function. It is accessible
from the dedicated TARE TABLE softkey , the REPORTS softkey , the softkey or through the
menu tree at Application > Memory > Tare Table.
In the following report examples, all available fields were programmed to print. A (*) record separator
was selected for these reports.

If the first field on a line were disabled, it would not be printed and the field to the right would be
shifted left. If a field on the right of a line were disabled, it would not print and that space would be
blank. If all fields on a specific line were disabled, the complete line would be removed from the
report.
Tare Memory Report
ID: 1 T: 26.4 kg
Desc: Blue Box #4
n: 54 Total: 52954.3 kg
****************************************
ID: 5 T: 3.7 kg
Desc: Green Bag #29
n: 7 Total: 25593.4 kg
****************************************
ID: 6 T: 23.3 kg
Desc: B16 Pallet
n: 0 Total: 0 kg
****************************************
C.9.2.3. Target Table Report
The target table can be viewed or printed. It is accessible from the dedicated TARGET TABLE softkey
, the REPORTS softkey , the softkey or through the menu tree at Application > Memory >
Target Table.

In the following report examples, all available fields were programmed to print. A (*) record separator
was selected for these reports. If Target Table Totalization in enabled at Application > Memory >
Target Table, the n and Total fields are automatically printed in the report.
C.9.2.3.1. 40 Column Report Example

Communications
If the first field on a line were disabled, it would not be printed and the field to the right would be
shifted left. If a field on the right of a line were disabled, it would not print and that space would be
blank. If all fields on a specific line were disabled, the complete line would be removed from the
report.
Target Memory Report
ID: 1 Target: 11.00 kg

Spill: 0.55 Fine: 0.4
+Tol: 0.1 -Tol: 0.1
Desc: White RT4 Gran
n: 9 Total: 99.19 kg
****************************************
+Tol: 0.2 -Tol: 0.2
Desc: Mixture #7728
n: 17 Total: 209.95 kg
****************************************
+Tol: 0.3 -Tol: 0.1
Desc: Yellow #40 Pel
n: 14 Total: 332.54 kg
****************************************
C.9.2.4. Message Table Report
The message table contains text that can be used in print templates. There are 99 records and each
record can be up to100 characters long. In the view of the message table, only the first 20 characters
of the message string are shown. The message table report can only be printed from the Message
Table sub-block at Application > Memory using the PRINT softkey . An example of the 40
column wide printed report is shown next. The 80 column report will also wrap if the line exceeds the
80 character limit.

Message Report
1 James Carey
****************************************
2 Communications
****************************************
3 101 East Main Street
****************************************
4 This is an example of what the view
of a string of more than forty characte
rs would look like in a report
****************************************

C.9.2.5. Totals Report
The totals report will print only the fields that have been enabled for the totalizing function. If the
subtotal feature has been disabled, then that field will not display or print. The example below
includes both the subtotal and grand total fields. The report format is always in a 40 column width for
the totals report.
Totals report
14:25:39 20/Jul/2007
Subtotal:
n = 6 86.19 kg
Grand Total:
n = 27 372.76 kg
C.9.2.6. Service Information Recall Report
The Service Info Recall report can be printed from the Service Info Recall view screen.

Service Information Report
For service, please contact:

METTLER TOLEDO
www.mt.com
----------------------------------------
Cal. & GWP Expiration
! Calibration
Date 01-26-2015
No. Transactions 000000
----------------------------------------
Service Alerts: (!)
2015/01/26 12:01:21 O00080

Calibration expired. Run Calibration T
est.
----------------------------------------
S/N: B23456893
IND570
METTLER TOLEDO
MEZZANINE HOPPER SCALE
----------------------------------------
C.9.2.7. Terminal Status Report
The Terminal Status report can be printed from the Terminal Status view screen.

TERMINAL STATUS REPORT
Battery: 3.0V 3.0V

Excitation: 9.9V 9.9V
Signal Quality: 124.75
Current SDS Logins: 0
Total Weighments: 21
Peak Weight: 50.23kg
Average Peak Load: 26.615kg
Platform Overloads: 4
Platform Underloads: 59
Zero Commands: 7

Zero Command Failures: 3
Time On: 0.14 Days
Use Time: 0.11 Days
Internal Flash: 7.38MB/7.39MB Free/Total
USB Memory: 3976MB/3982MB Free/Total
----------------------------------------
Communications
For service, please contact:

METTLER TOLEDO
www.mt.com
----------------------------------------
Cal. & GWP Expiration
! Calibration
Date 01-26-2015
No. Transactions 000000
----------------------------------------
Service Alerts: (!)
2015/01/26 12:01:21 O00080
Calibration expired. Run Calibration T
est.
----------------------------------------
Connected Devices
Floor Scale
2156
S/N 2437737
----------------------------------------
SYSTEM INFO RECALL
Model: IND570
S/N: B23456893
Term. ID #1: IND570
Term. ID #2: METTLER TOLEDO
Term. ID #3: MEZZANINE HOPPER SCALE
Base S/N: 02547784BR
Software
Boot: 30101168 1.00.0004
Standard: 30094864 2.00.0023
Fill-570: 1.00.0092
Hardware
Analog L/C
Opt: E-Net
Opt: Ethernet/IP(V2.16)
C.9.2.8. Calibration Test Report
A Calibration Test Report can be printed at the completion of all of the steps in a successful or failed
calibration test procedure. Details on how to setup and run a stored calibration test can be found in
After progressing through all of the steps in the calibration test procedure, press the PRINT softkey
to print the calibration test report.
C.9.2.8.1. Calibration Report Example

Calibration Test Report
15:23:44 12/Sept/2012
IND570
METTLER TOLEDO
IND570
Scale: B206688276

User: COBURN
Test Weight(s):
ID Weight
-------------------- --------
523352 50
523369 50
523377 50
523362 50
523368 50
Weight Unit: kg
Warning Limit Status: PASSED

Test Status: PASSED
Warning Control Target Actual OK

+/- +/-
-------- -------- -------- -------- --
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -
0.2 0.5 50.0 50.0 -
0.4 0.8 100.0 100.0 -
0.6 1.2 150.0 150.0 -
C.9.2.9. GWP Test Reports
Test Reports for the GWP Tests of Sensitivity, Repeatability and Eccentricity can be printed at the
completion of all of the steps in a successful or failed GWP test procedure. Details on how to setup
and run a stored GWP test can be found in Chapter 2, Operation and Chapter 3, Configuration.
After progressing through all of the steps in the GWP test procedures the PRINT softkey to print
the GWP test report. An example of the GWP Repeatability Test report is show in the next section.
Similar reports exist for the GWP Sensitivity and Eccentricity test results.
C.9.2.9.1. GWP Report Example

Repeatability Test Report
09:26:30 13/Sept/2012
IND570
METTLER TOLEDO
IND570
Scale: B206688276
User: JOZEFOWICZ
Test Weight(s):
ID Weight
---------------------- --------
523352 50
523369 50
523377 50
523362 50
523368 50
Weight Unit: kg
Warning Limit Status: PASSED

Test Status: PASSED
Warning Limit +/-: 0.10 kg

Control Limit +/-: 0.20 kg
Calculated Repeatability: 0.00 kg
Communications
Test Data
Target Actual Difference
-------- -------- -----------
0.0 0.0 -
50.0 50.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 -
50.0 50.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 -
50.0 50.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 -
50.0 50.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 -
50.0 50.0 0.0
C.9.2.10. GWP Log Report
The GWP Log can be viewed or printed through the menu tree at Maintenance > Configure/View >
GWP Log.

GWP Log Report
18:03:47 23/May/2014
Date: 23-May-2014
Time: 17:53:59
User ID: COBURN
GWP Test: SENSITIVITY
Warning: FAILED
Status: FAILED
Date: 23-May-2014
Time: 17:54:47
User ID: Jozsefowicz
GWP Test: ECCENTRICITY
Warning: PASSED
Status: PASSED
C.10. Shared Data Access

The majority of setup parameters, triggers and statuses in the IND570 are stored and routed through
“Shared Data”. This is a system of memory mapping that permits remote clients to send commands
and receive data from the terminal. In order to access the shared data variables in the IND570, a
remote client must login to the Shared Data Server. Access is provided through either the COM1 serial
port or through the optional Ethernet port. Regardless of the method used, the same access is
provided and the login procedure is very similar.

C.10.1. Shared Data Server Login
Shared data access is available from the COM1 serial port, the optional WiFi port, and the optional
Ethernet port.
C.10.1.1. To Login to the Shared Data Server via COM1
1. To enable communication with the Shared Data Server:

Delete all connections to the COM1 port of the IND570. In setup at Communication > Serial,
ensure that port settings for COM1 are:
• 115.2 K baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
or
Move switch SW2-1 to its ON position. This permits communication with the Shared Data
Server without deleting any connections that have been configured in setup. Setting SW2-1 to
ON will cause the message “Test Mode” to appear in the system line until SW2-1 is turned
OFF.
To restore access to configured COM1 connections, remember to return SW2-1 to its original,
OFF, position once Shared Data Server communication is ended.
or
At Communication > Connections, set the assignment of COM1 as “Shared Data Server”. This
setting allows communication with the Shared Data Server over COM1 without setting SW 2-
1 to the ON position. At Communication > Serial, ensure that port settings for COM1 are:
• 115.2 K baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
or
From an external device already connected to COM1, send LOGON<CR><LF> to the IND570.
This command will interrupt the normal operation of COM1 and temporarily switch it to a
Shared Data Server connection. The message "COM1 – Shared Data Server" will be displayed
in the system line while the terminal is in this mode. The shared data server will be available
at the port settings already being used – there is no need to reset them. Skip steps 2 and 3
below.
2. Program the serial port of the remote device for:
• 115.2 K baud
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
3. Connect an RS-232 cable (or RS-422 or RS-485) between the remote client PC and the IND570
COM1 port.

4. Open a program to communicate with the IND570 (such as HyperTerminal).
5. Type: user xxxxx where xxxxx is a valid username programmed in the Terminal > User branch of
the setup menu tree. The access level assigned to this username will determine which shared
data variables will be accessible.
Communications
a. The default user login is “admin”.

6. If a password is required for the username entered in step 5, the terminal will display: 51 Enter
password. If no password is required, skip to step 8.
7. Type: pass xxxxx where xxxxx is the valid password for the username entered in step 5.
8. Response from IND570: 12 Access OK.
9. The remote client is now logged onto the Shared Data Server.
C.10.1.2. To Login to the Shared Data Server via Ethernet
The shared data server is available via port 1701. For applications that have no access to port 1701,
a second port can be enabled. To enable the second port, enter the desired port number at the
Communication > Network > Secondary Port branch of the menu tree.
To access the secondary port as the Shared Data Server, make sure there are no
assignments for the EPRINT port. The EPRINT port also uses the secondary port and if there is
an EPRINT assignment, the shared data server cannot be accessed on the secondary port.
1. Program appropriate IP and Gateway addresses into the IND570 in the Communication >
Network branch of the menu tree.
2. Connect a crossover cable between the remote client PC and the IND570.
3. Open a program (such as HyperTerminal) in the client PC to communicate with the IND570.
4. Create a TCP/IP connection to the IP address programmed in the IND570 at port 1701, or the
port assigned using shared data variable xs0138.
5. If the IP and Gateway addresses and the cable connection are correct, the IND570 will display
Ready for user.
6. Type: user xxxxx where xxxxx is a valid username programmed in the Terminal > Users branch of
the setup menu tree. The access level of the username used will determine which shared data
variables can be accessed.
The default user login is “admin”.
7. If a password is required for the username in the previous step, the terminal will display: 51 Enter
9. Response from IND570: 12 Access OK.
10. The remote client PC is now logged onto the Shared Data Server.
C.10.1.3. To Log in to the Shared Data Server via WiFi
The shared data server is available via the port programmed (default1701). For applications that
cannot access port 1701, the port number can be changed in setup at Communication > Network >
WiFi Port.

If no WiFi port assignment is made on the connections page, then the shared data server will be
available at the programmed WiFi port.
If an assignment is made for the WiFi port on the connections page, then the shared data server
will no longer be available at the programmed WiFi port.
1. Program appropriate IP and Gateway addresses into the IND570 in setup at Communication >
WiFi Module.
2. Connect the remote client PC to the same network that includes the IND570 WiFi access point.
3. In the client PC, open a program (such as HyperTerminal) to communicate with the IND570.
4. Create a TCP/IP connection to the WiFi IP address programmed in the IND570 at port 1701, or to
the port assigned using the WiFi Port setup step.
5. If the IP and Gateway addresses and the network connection are correct, the PC will display
Ready for user.
6. Type: user xxxxx where xxxxx is a valid username programmed in setup at Terminal > Users. The
access level of the username used will determine which shared data variables can be accessed.
The default user login is “admin”.
7. If a password is required for the username in the previous step, the terminal will display: 51 Enter
9. The IND570 will respond: 12 Access OK.
10. The remote client PC is now logged onto the Shared Data Server.
C.10.2. Shared Data Server Logout
A specific sequence must be followed when exiting from Shared data access on the COM1 serial port
and the optional Ethernet port. If the port is not closed properly, it will remain "busy" and will no
longer be available for login. There are a maximum of five shared data server connections available
in the IND570. If all of these ports are "busy" it will not be possible to login to the Shared Data Server.
Cycling power on the IND570 will reset all ports.
C.10.2.1. To Exit the Shared Data Server Using COM1
When data exchange with the Shared Data Server is complete, send the command "Quit". This will
clear the Shared Data Server connection and allow reuse of this connection later.
If connection to the Shared Data Server was made by moving switch SW2-1 to its ON position, move
SW2-1 back OFF at this time. This allows the COM1 port to be used for the assignment originally
programmed again.
If connection to the Shared Data Server was made by using the LOGON command, after sending the
"Quit" command, a LOGOF<CR><LF> command must be sent to reset the serial port back to its
original use. The serial port can't be used as its original assignment until the "LOGOF" command is
sent or until the terminal is powered off then back on again.
If the connection to the Shared Data Server was made by clearing all COM1 assignments or assigning
COM1 as Shared Data Server, the COM1 port can now be reprogrammed as required.

C.10.2.2. To Exit the Shared Data Server Using Ethernet
When data exchange with the shared data server is complete, send the command "Quit". This will
clear the shared data server connection and allow reuse of this connection later.
Communications
C.10.2.3. To Exit the Shared Data Server Using WiFi
When data exchange with the shared data server is complete, type: Quit. This will end the shared
data server connection and allow it to be reused later.
The shared data server can only accept five concurrent connections. Closing the PC program
without sending the quit command will leave the connection open, and may prevent later access.
C.10.3. Shared Data Server Commands

After connecting to the Shared Data Server in the IND570, several commands are available for use by
the client. All commands can be given in either upper- or lower-case letters. The quotation marks
shown are for clarity only and should not be transmitted. The valid commands are described in the
following sections.
Response Format: “read”, “write”, and “callback” message responses have a formatted header.
The first two characters indicate the status. “00” is the success status. “99” is a failure status.
The next character is the type of message, “R”, “W”, or “C”. The next three characters are a
sequence number, which cycles from 001 to 999, and then starts over again.
C.10.3.1. “user” Command
A client must login to the SDSV using the “user” command before accessing Shared Data. The server
validates the username and sends a response message back to the user. The SDSV responds with
[Access OK] if no password is required or [Enter password] if a password is required.
A client can use only the “user”, “pass”, “help” and “quit” commands before successfully logging on.
Format: user username
Response 1: 12 Access OK
Response 2: 51 Enter Password
C.10.3.2. “pass” Command
The user enters a password using the “pass” command. If the password is valid, the server displays
the [Access OK] message. If not valid, the server displays the [No access] message.
Format: pass password
Response: 12 Access OK
C.10.3.3. “help” Command
The “help” command returns the list of the valid commands for the IND570.
Format: help

Response: 02 USER PASS QUIT READ R WRITE W SYSTEM CALLBACK XCALLBACK
GROUP RGROUP XGROUP CTIMER LOAD SAVE HELP NOOP
CONTOUT XCOUNTOUT PRINTOUT XPRINTOUT
C.10.3.4. “quit” Command
The “quit” command terminates the TCP/IP connection.
Format: quit
Response: 52 Closing connection
C.10.3.5. “read” Command
The “read” command allows the client to read a list of one or more Shared Data fields. An individual
field or an entire block can be read. If more than one field is requested, the fields should be separated
by a space. If successful, the server responds with a separated list of values in ASCII format. The
server separates individually requested fields with a “~”; and Shared Data separates items within a
block with a ”^”. If an error is detected, the server responds with an error message. The maximum
length of the reply message is 1,024 characters.
Format: read SDV#1 SDV#2
Example 1: read wt0101 wt0103
Response 1: 00R003~ 17.08~lb~
The 003 that follows the R in this response example is an incremental counter that indicates the
count of the interaction between the client and the Shared Data server. This number continues to
increment regardless of the type of event (read, write, group, etc.)
Example 2: read sp0100 (reads entire block)
Response 2:
00R012~XP/0163M^1^^78^20.500000^0^0^0^1.200000^3.500000^0.150000^0.050000^0^
0.000000^0.000000^0^0^0^0^0^0^1^0.000000^0.000000^0.000000^0.000000^0.000000
^~
The ‘read’ command can be abbreviated to the letter “r” if desired.

C.10.3.6. “write” Command
The “write” command allows the client to write a list of one or more Shared Data fields. A single field
or an entire block can be written. The maximum length of the write message is 1,024 characters.
Items within a list of writes must be separated with a “~”. You must separate items within a block
with a “^”.
Format: write SDVblock#1=value1^value2^ value3

write SDV#1=value1~SDV#2=value2~SDV#3=value3
Example1: write ak0100=abc^def^hij^lmn (writes fields into a block)
Response 2: 00W006~OK

Example 2: write aj0101=12.56~aj0150=987.653 (writes fields within a list)
Response 2: 00W007~OK
The “write” command can be abbreviated to the letter “w” if desired.

Communications
C.10.3.7. “system” Command
The “system” command returns a description of the IND570 terminal. This is the same information
that is shown on the Recall System Information screen of the IND570.
Format: system
Response:
00S001~ SYSTEM INFO RECALL
Model: IND570
S/N: B234589528
ID1: IND570
ID2: METTLER TOLEDO
ID3:
Software
Boot: 30101168 1.00.0002
Standard: 1.00.0027
Fill-570: 1.50
Hardware
Analog L/C
E-Net/USB
Opt: E-Net
Opt: Ethernet/IP(V2. 4)
C.10.3.8. “noop” Command
The “noop” command performs no task; it checks communication and returns an [OK] response
message.
Format: noop
Response: 00OK
C.10.3.9. “callback” Command
The “callback” command allows the client to define one or more fields for which the Shared Data
Server sends a message to the client when the value of the callback field changes. Only certain SDV
may be included in a callback command. These SDV are noted by an “rc” or “rt” status in the column
after the structure column in the Shared Data Reference Manual. These are mainly SDV that monitor
triggers used in the terminal. SDV with a status of “na” are not real-time SDV and cannot be used in
callbacks.
The IND570 Shared Data Reference is available for download at www.mt.com/IND570.
The callback message contains one or more changed field names and the new value for each field. A
maximum of twelve callback fields can be specified. The “ctimer” command specifies the minimum
time between repeated callback messages.

Format: callback SDV#1 SDV#2
Example: callback st0102 st0103 st0104
Response 1: 00B001~OK
Response 2: 00C005~st0102=0^st0103=1^st0104=1 (sent when all of the SDV change)
Response 3: 00C006~st0104=0 (sent when only st0104 changes)
C.10.3.10. “xcallback” Command
The “xcallback” command allows the client to remove one or more callback fields from the list of
current SDV.
Format: xcallback SDV#1 SDV#2 or xcallback all (removes all callbacks)
Example: xcallback st0102 (removes st0102 SDV from callback)
Response: 00X008~OK
C.10.3.11. “group” Command
The “group” command allows the client to define a group of callback fields. The Shared Data Server
sends a message to the client when the value of any field in the group changes. The group callback
message contains the group number and the values of all fields in the group in the defined order. The
“ctimer” command specifies the minimum time between repeated callback messages. The maximum
number of groups is six, and the maximum number of fields in a group is twelve.
Format: group n SDV#1 SDV#2 SDV#3 (where n = the number of the group 1–6)
Example: group 5 st0103 st0104 st0107 (groups target feeding and tolerance SDV into one group)
Response 1: 00B019~OK
Response 2: 00C026~group5=0^1^0 (indicates status of all 3 SDV in group 5 whenever any one
of them changes)
C.10.3.12. “rgroup” Command
The “rgroup” command allows the client to define a group of fields. The client can use the group
number to read the entire group at once using the READ command. The maximum number of groups
is six, and the maximum number of fields in a group is twelve.
Format: rgroup n SDV#1 SDV#2 (where n = the number of the group 1–6)
Example: rgroup 3 di0101 di0102 di0103 di0104 (groups all discrete inputs into one group that
can be read with a single read command)
Response: 0G008~group=3, number fields=4
Read Example: r 3
Response: 00R009~1~0~1~0~

C.10.3.13. “xgroup” Command
The “xgroup” command allows the client to remove one or all groups.
Format: xgroup n (where n = the group number 1 - 6) or XGROUP all

Communications
(removes all groups, including “contout” and “printout”)
Example: xgroup 5 (cancels group 5)
Response: 00X011~group=5
C.10.3.14. “contout” Command
The “contout” command allows the client to define an available continuous output string as a
callback field. The continuous output message can be any of the following formats:
• Standard METTLER TOLEDO Continuous Output

• Extended METTLER TOLEDO Continuous Output
• Continuous custom template
The “ctimer” command specifies the minimum time between repeated callback messages. The
“xcontout” command removes the registration from the terminal and the communication will stop.
Format: contout
Response: 00G600~number CONTOUT streams=1
When a continuous output occurs to the Ethernet port, the data will be sent to the client formatted as
selected in setup.
Data: 00C004 14! 354 236
C.10.3.15. “xcontout” Command
The “xcontout” command allows the client to remove the continuous output callback, thus ending the
registration so no further continuous outputs will be available.
Format: xcontout
Response: 00X070~CONTOUT
C.10.3.16. “printout ” Command
The “printout” command allows the client to define a Demand Output data stream as a callback field.
The Demand Output data streams include demand outputs triggered by the scale PRINT and custom
triggers 1, 2 and 3. Since print messages can span multiple message blocks (depending upon size),
the start of the print message has a <dprint> tag and the end of the message has a </dprint > tag.
After registering for the demand output, the client will receive the appropriate data stream.
The “ctimer” command specifies the minimum time between repeated callback messages.
The “xprintout” command removes the registration from the terminal and the communication will stop.
Format: printout

Response: 00G008~number PRINTOUT streams=1
When a demand output occurs to the Ethernet port, the data will be sent to the client formatted by the
selected template. There will be <dprint> and </dprint> delimiters for the string.
Data: 00P004 <dprint> 22.08 lb

17.06 lb T
5.02 lb N
</dprint>
C.10.3.17. “xprintout” Command
The “xprintout” command allows the client to remove the print output callback, thus ending the
registration so no further demand outputs will be available.
Format: xprintout
Response: 00X070~PRINTOUT
C.10.3.18. “ctimer” Command
The “ctimer” command allows the client to set the minimum time between repeated callback
messages in milliseconds. The minimum allowable setting is 50 milliseconds and the maximum is
60 seconds. The default value is 500 milliseconds.
Format: ctimer n (where n is the number of milliseconds)
Example: ctimer 1000 (set the callback timing to 1 second)
Response: 00T862~new timeout=1000
C.10.3.19. “csave” Command
The “csave” command saves the current callback and group settings into Shared Data for use later
with the “cload” command.
Format: csave
Response: 00L004~OK
C.10.3.20. “cload” Command
The “cload” command loads the callback and group settings from Shared Data into the shared data
server. The terminal will begin to service the loaded callback and group commands.
Format: cload
Response: 00L001~OK
C.10.4. Using Shared Data to Select Target Table and Tare Table Records
Target and Tare records can be recalled from their respective memory tables using the Shared Data
Server commands.

The following section outlines the sequence of steps that must followed to recall memory table
records using SDV.
C.10.4.1. Recalling a Target Table Record or Tare Table Record to Active Status:
Communications
To recall a Target Table or Tare Table record from a memory table, the first step is to specify the Tare
or Target record ID. Then a command is issued to recall this specified record ID from either the Tare
Table or the Target Table.
1. Log into Shared Data server as directed in previous sections.

2. Using Shared Data field qc0190, write the numeric ID of the record that you wish to recall from
either the Target Table or the Tare Table. Numeric ID is a maximum two or three digit value (1-
199) depending on which table is accessed.
3. Format: w qc0190 X (where X is the desired record ID)
4. Next, write a 1, 6, 11 or a 16 to Shared Data field qc0189. Writing a “1” will recall the record ID
written to qc0190 from the Tare Table and set it as the active tare value. Writing a “6” will recall
the record ID written to qc0190 from the Target Table and set it as the active target values.
Note: Writing “11” into qc0189 will set the record ID as the active Weigh-in Target ID for the Fill-
570. Writing “16” into qc0189 will set the record ID as the active Weigh-out Target ID for the Fill-
570.
5. The terminal will then load the identified record ID from the specified table for use.
C.10.5. Ethernet Continuous Output
If a continuous output type of connection to Eprint is made in the connections section of setup, a
remote device is not required “register” with the Shared Data server, to receive data through the
Ethernet port. The data string simply contains the assigned continuous output or template information.
The Eprint connection is made via the secondary TCP/IP port at the user-defined secondary port
number (configured in setup at Communication>Network>Port).
If a continuous output or continuous template output connection to Ethernet 1 is made in the

connections section of setup, a remote device must “register” to receive the data through the Ethernet
port. In order to do this, the remote device must login to the shared data server and send the
command to “register” for the data. The login can be any valid username and password for the
terminal.
When a user logs onto the shared data server, they acquire the level of access for the username
and password used. All levels of users can receive a continuous string.
C.10.5.1. Registering for the Continuous Output
The “contout” command allows the client to define the continuous output string as a callback field.
The Console Print Server sends a message to the client at each continuous output. The continuous
output message is either in the Standard METTLER TOLEDO Continuous Output format or in a
continuous template format. The “ctimer” command specifies the minimum time between repeated
callback messages. The “xcontout” command removes the registration from the terminal and the
communication will stop.
The “xgroup all” command will also terminate any continuous output registrations.

C.10.5.2. Sequence Example
1. Enter the setup menu tree.

Continuous Output assignment to the Ethernet port triggered by Scale.
A.10.3.1).
5. Register to receive the continuous data by entering the “contout” command.
6. The IND570 will acknowledge the registration with a message [00Gxxx~number CONTOUT
streams=1]. Now, whenever a continuous output string is generated by the IND570, the data will
be sent to the client.
00C148 14! 354 236
>
00C149 14! 354 236
>
00C150 14! 354 236
>
00C151 14! 354 236
The “xcontout” command allows the client to remove the continuous output callback registration thus
stopping the continuous output.
The output rate of a Continuous type output over Ethernet is 20Hz by default. This rate cannot be
modified through the terminal setup menu. However, the output rate can me modified by a Shared
Data write to a field in the “cs” block of Shared Data. Please refer to the IND570 Shared Data
Reference, available for download at www.mt.com/IND570, for specifics.
C.11. File Transfer

The IND570 provides the ability to transfer files via Ethernet and WiFi using FTP (file transfer protocol)
and via serial (COM1) using the 1K Xmodem protocol and the shared data server. Files can be
transferred using the following commands.
• fget (serial) or get (Ethernet/WiFi) – all files can be read using this command
• fput (serial) or put (Ethernet/WiFi) – only certain files can be downloaded back to the IND570
terminal
In order to access any files from the IND570 via Ethernet or WiFi, the client must login to the FTP
server. Valid usernames and passwords are entered in the setup under Communications, Network,
FTP and each username is assigned an access level. All access levels can read files but only
maintenance and administrator levels can write new files to the terminal (refer to Chapter 3,
Configuration for further information about configuring FTP usernames, passwords, and access
levels).
The default login for the FTP server is username: admin, password: admin

Table A-16 indicates the path for the available files that can be accessed using Ethernet, WiFi or
Serial file transfer.
Table A-16: Access to Files via FTP

Communications
Location File Name Description Read from IND570 Write to IND570

bkram.dmt Setup parameters in battery backed RAM  
e2prom1.dmt Scale calibration data  
flash.dmt Setup parameters in flash  
change.csv Change log 
gen:\\
errlog.csv Error log 
gwplog.csv GWP log 
maint.csv Maintenance log 
systeminfo.txt System Information 
caltest1.txt Calibration test sequence  
caltw1.txt Calibration test weight list  
ecctest1.txt Eccentricity test sequence  
ecctw1.txt Eccentricity test weight list  
ram:\\ reptest1.txt Repeatability test sequence  
reptw1.txt Repeatability test weight list  
saver.bmp Custom screen saver graphic  
senstest1.txt Sensitivity test sequence  
senstw1.txt Sensitivity test weight list  
a1.csv Tare table  
a2.csv Target table  
TaskExpert table 3  
a3.csv
Permanent ID table (only in Drive-570)  
a4.csv
Temporary ID table (only in Drive-570)  
cont.csv Container tare table (only in Fill-570)  
a5.csv TaskExpert table 5  
flash2:\\ formula.csv Formula table (Fill pac - A5)  
a8.csv
Transaction table (Vehicle pac) 
TaskExpert custom program files and
.cpt bitmaps (Includes application pacs
 
.bmp created with TaskExpert such as Drive-
570)

Location File Name Description Read from IND570 Write to IND570
Custom language files for display
cust.txt  
messages
C.11.1. FTP over Ethernet or WiFi Example

The following procedure describes how one might upload the calibration test to a PC running
Microsoft Windows, modify the file, and then download it again to the terminal.
A valid username and password from the FTP server of the IND570 terminal is required. Refer to
Chapter 3, Configuration, Communication, Network, FTP.
The client must also know the IP address of the IND570 and a valid network connection established
between the client and the terminal is required before beginning.
• For a wired Ethernet connection, refer to section A.1.2.1, Ethernet Connection to a PC earlier in
this appendix.
• For a WiFi connection, the IND570 must be connected to a wireless access point on the same
network as the one to which the PC.
1. Open the command prompt window in the client PC and type: ftp
2. Press ENTER. The command line should now display: ftp>.
3. To open the FTP connection, type open xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where the xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the
IP address of the IND570 terminal.
4. Press ENTER. The display should indicate that service is ready and prompt for the username.
5. Enter the username from the IND570 FTP user list.
6. Press ENTER. If the username is valid, the display will prompt for a password.
7. Enter the password for the username used.
8. Press ENTER. If the login procedure was successful, the prompt line will now display: ftp>
9. Enter the command: get ram:\caltest1.cfg
10. Press ENTER. This command will upload the calibration test procedure to the directory that was
showing in the command prompt line before the FTP program was started. The client screen
should indicate that the transfer was successful.
11. Modify the file as required. Refer to Appendix C for the file structure.
12. Download the modified file to the IND570 by typing:
put caltest1.cfg ram:\caltest.cfg
The client screen should indicate that the transfer was successful.
13. After the transfer is complete, type: quit
14. Press ENTER to exit the FTP process. An acknowledgment message: Bye displays.
15. Type: exit
16. Press ENTER to close the command line screen and return to Windows.

C.11.2. File Transfer via COM1 Example
The following procedure describes how one might download a new Switch Units softkey graphic
(select.bmp) to an IND570 using a PC running HyperTerminal.
Communications
A valid username and password from the Shared Data Server of the IND570 terminal is required.
Refer to the Terminal, Users section of Chapter 3, Configuration.
1. Connect a serial cable between the PC serial port and the IND570 terminal COM1 port.
2. Match the serial port parameters between the IND570 terminal and the PC then create a serial
port connection to the IND570 terminal in HyperTerminal.
3. Login to the Shared Data Server per instructions given previously in the Shared Data Server Login
section of this chapter using a valid username and password (if requested).
4. After logging into the Shared Data Server, the HyperTerminal display should show Access OK.
5. In HyperTerminal, type fput flash2:\select.bmp.
6. HyperTerminal should show OK on the screen then begin showing a series of capital letter "C"s
indicating the IND570 terminal is ready to receive the file from the PC (Figure A-6).
7. In HyperTerminal, click on Transfer in the header ribbon then select "Send File" from the drop
down box.
Figure A-6: HyperTerminal Starting Display
8. A pop-up box for sending files will be shown (Figure A-7).
Figure A-7: Serial File Transfer Screen

9. In the pop-up box, to the right of the Filename box, use the Browse button to locate the file to be
sent (select.bmp) then click on the "Open" button at the bottom of the browse window.
10. Select "1K Xmodem" in the Protocol drop-down box then click the "Send" button.
11. The Send File window will close and a transfer window will open. This window shows the
progress of the file transfer (Figure A-8).
Figure A-8: Windows Transfer Window
12. When the file transfer is complete, the transfer window will close and HyperTerminal will show
<OK> on the display (Figure A-9).
Figure A-9: HyperTerminal Final Display
13. After the transfer is complete, type Quit which will end the Shared Data Server session and follow
the instructions for exiting the Shared Data Server connection provided earlier in this chapter.
C.12. Remote Display

Refer to Chapter 4, Applications, for full details on configuring the IND570 to function as a remote
terminal or remote display.

D. GEO Codes
The GEO code feature provided in the IND570 terminal permits calibration readjustment due to
changes in elevation or latitude without reapplying test weights. This adjustment assumes a
previously accurate calibration was done with the GEO code set properly for that original location and
that the GEO code for the new location can be accurately determined. The procedure for using this
feature is as follows.
D.1. Original Site Calibration

Use the GEO code chart (Table A-1) on the following pages to determine the GEO code for the current
altitude and location at which the scale will be calibrated.
1. Enter that GEO value into the GEO code parameter in setup at Scale > Calibration.
2. Immediately after entering the GEO code, perform a zero and span adjustment using accurate test
weights.
3. Exit the setup menu tree.
4. The scale can now be used in its new location.
D.2. New Site GEO Code Adjustment

When a terminal is to be reinstalled at a different geographic location, gravitational and altitude
changes can be accounted for by following these steps. Note that this procedure is not necessary if
an on-site recalibration is performed.
1. Use the GEO code chart (Table A-1) on the following pages to determine the GEO code for the
new altitude and location at which the scale will be used.
2. Enter that GEO value into the GEO code parameter in Setup at Scale > Calibration.
3. Immediately after entering the GEO code, exit the setup menu tree. DO NOT perform a normal
calibration.
The calibration has now been adjusted for the differences in gravity from the original site of calibration
to the new site of use.
Using the GEO code value for calibration adjustment is not as accurate as re-applying certified
test weights and re-calibrating the scale in a new location.
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide D-1

Table A-1: GEO Adjustment Values
Height Above Sea Level, in Meters
0 325 650 975 1300 1625 1950 2275 2600 2925 3250
GEO Codes
Latitude North
or South, 325 650 975 1300 1625 1950 2275 2600 2925 3250 3575
in Degrees and Height Above Sea Level, in Feet
Minutes
0 1060 2130 3200 4260 5330 6400 7460 8530 9600 10660
1060 2130 3200 4260 5330 6400 7460 8530 9600 10660 11730
0° 0'–5° 46' 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0
5° 46'–9° 52' 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0
9° 52'–12° 44' 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1
12° 44'–15° 6' 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1
15° 6'–17° 0' 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2
17° 10'–19° 2' 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2
19° 2'–20° 45' 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3
20° 45'–22° 22' 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3
22° 22'–23° 54' 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4
23° 54'–25° 21' 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4
25° 21'–26° 45' 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5
26° 45'–28° 6' 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5
28° 6'–29° 25' 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6
29° 25'–30° 41' 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6
30° 41'–31° 56' 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7
31° 56'–33° 9' 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 7
33° 9'–34° 21' 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8 8
34° 21'–35° 31' 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9 8
35° 31'–36° 41' 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9 9
36° 41’–37° 50’ 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 9
37° 50’–38° 58’ 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10
38° 58’–40° 5’ 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10
40° 5’–41° 12’ 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11
41° 12’–42° 19’ 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11
42° 19’–43° 26’ 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12
43° 26’–44° 32’ 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12
44° 32’–45° 38’ 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13
D-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

Height Above Sea Level, in Meters
0 325 650 975 1300 1625 1950 2275 2600 2925 3250
Latitude North
or South, 325 650 975 1300 1625 1950 2275 2600 2925 3250 3575
in Degrees and Height Above Sea Level, in Feet
Minutes
0 1060 2130 3200 4260 5330 6400 7460 8530 9600 10660
1060 2130 3200 4260 5330 6400 7460 8530 9600 10660 11730
45° 38’–46° 45’ 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13
46° 45’–47° 51’ 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14
47° 51’–48° 58’ 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14
48° 58’–50° 6’ 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15
50° 6’–51° 13’ 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15
51° 13’–52° 22’ 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16
52° 22’–53° 31’ 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16
53° 31’–54° 41’ 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17
54° 41’–55° 52’ 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18 17
55° 52’–57° 4’ 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 19 18 18
57° 4’–58° 17’ 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19 l9 18
58° 17'–59° 32' 24 23 23 22 2\2 21 21 20 20 19 19
59° 32'–60° 49' 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20 19
60° 49'–62° 9' 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20 20
62° 9'–63° 30' 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21 20
63° 30'–64° 55' 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21 21
64° 55'–66° 24' 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22 21
66° 24'–67° 57' 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22 22
67° 57'–69° 35' 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23 22
69° 5'–71° 21' 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23 23
71° 21'–73° 16' 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24 23
73° 16'–75° 24' 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24 24
75° 24'–77° 52' 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25 24
77° 52'–80° 56' 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25 25
80° 56'–85° 45' 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26 25
85° 45'–90° 00' 31 30 30 29 29 28 28 27 27 26 26
30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide D-3

To protect your METTLER TOLEDO product’s future:
Congratulations on choosing the quality and precision
of METTLER TOLEDO. Proper use according to these
instructions and regular calibration and maintenance
by our factory-trained service team ensure dependable
and accurate operation, protecting your investment.
Contact us about a METTLER TOLEDO service
agreement tailored to your needs and budget.
We invite you to register your product at

www.mt.com/productregistration so we can contact
you about enhancements, updates and important
notifications concerning your product.
www.mt.com/IND570
For more information
Mettler-Toledo, LLC
1900 Polaris Parkway
Columbus, OH 43240
© 2021 Mettler-Toledo, LLC

30205308 Rev. 16, 03/2021

16 Man Ug Ind570 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

16 Man Ug Ind570 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

16 Man Ug Ind570 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IND570

Essential Services for Dependable Performance of Your IND570 Weighing Terminal

names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

METTLER TOLEDO RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE REFINEMENTS OR CHANGES

Statement regarding harmful substances

Additional Warnings and Cautions for Version IND570xx

Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 1

4.6. Remote Terminal ......................................................................... 4-18

2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 30205308 | 16 | 03/2021

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 Weighing Terminal User's Guide 3

• Vehicle Weighing • Silo and Hopper Weighing • Transaction Weighing

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-1

The IND570 is available in the following versions:

1.1.1.1. AC Powered Models (100-240 VAC)

1-2 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-3

Fill-570 Drive-570 COM-570 DYN-570

• Support for TaskExpert™ custom application development software

Table 1-1: IND570 Specifications

1-4 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-5

1-6 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

FM - US Class I,II Division 2 Groups C, D, F, G; Class III Division 1

FM - Canada Cert. No.: FM17CA0009X

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-7

IECEx Cert. No.: IECEx FMG 14.0022X

1.3. Environmental Protection

1.4. Inspection and Contents Checklist

The package should include:

• IND570 terminal • Bag of parts for installation. Depending on terminal,

1-8 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

Figure 1-1: IND570 SCK Identification

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-9

Figure 1-2: IND570xx SCK Identification

1-10 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

Figure 1-3: IND570 Panel Mount Enclosure Dimensions

Figure 1-4: IND570 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-11

and Figure 1-7 in millimeters and [inches].

Figure 1-5: IND570 Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions

1-12 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

Figure 1-8: Harsh Environment Enclosure Dimensions, IND570xx

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-13

1.7. Main PCB

1-14 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

1.8.1.1. Analog Load Cell Scale

1.8.1.2. IDNet Scale Platform

1.8.1.3. SICSpro Scale Platform

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-15

1.8.1.3.1. Cable-Free Floor Scale

1.8.1.4. POWERCELL Scale Platform

1-16 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 30205308 | 16| 03/2021

1.8.1.4.2. Isolated Serial Ports

1.8.1.5. PowerDeck Scale Platform

The POWERCELL-based PowerDeck platform provides an enhanced set of configuration and

Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP PROFINET

• COM-570 application software

30205308 | 16 | 03/2021 METTLER TOLEDO IND570 User's Guide 1-17